Cadillac CTS/CTS-V Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate … CTS/CTS-V Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (1,1) ... Traction Control M: Windshield Washer Fluid. Cadillac CTS/CTS-V Owner Manual

Black plate (1,1)Cadillac CTS/CTS-V Owner Manual - 2011

2011 Cadillac CTS/CTS-V Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Performance andMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

Keys, Doors and Windows . . . 2-1Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33

Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1Additional Storage Features . . . 4-2Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-27Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-46Universal Remote System . . . . 5-54

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-16Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-26Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . 9-31Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-38Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41Object Detection Systems . . . . 9-43Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-59


2011 Cadillac CTS/CTS-V Owner Manual M

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-3Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-37Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-106Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-111Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . 10-113

Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-2Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . . 11-7

Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-11

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-15Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1


Introduction iii

The names, logos, emblems,slogans, vehicle model names, andvehicle body designs appearing inthis manual including, but not limitedto, GM, the GM logo, CADILLAC,the CADILLAC Crest and Wreath,CTS, and CTS-V are trademarksand/or service marks of GeneralMotors LLC, its subsidiaries,affiliates, or licensors.

This manual describes featuresthat may or may not be on yourspecific vehicle either becausethey are options that you did notpurchase or due to changessubsequent to the printing of this

owner manual. Please refer to thepurchase documentation relatingto your specific vehicle to confirmeach of the features found on yourvehicle. For vehicles first sold inCanada, substitute the name“General Motors of Canada Limited”for Cadillac Motor Car Divisionwherever it appears in this manual.

Music recognition technologyand related data are providedby Gracenote®. Gracenote isthe industry standard in musicrecognition technology andrelated content delivery.For more information, visitwww.gracenote.com.

Manufactured under licenseunder U.S. Patent #'s: 5,451,942;5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762;6,487,535 & other U.S. andworldwide patents issued &pending. DTS and the Symbolare registered trademarks andDTS Digital Surround and the DTSlogos are trademarks of DTS, Inc.Product includes software.All Rights Reserved.

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 25974555 B Second Printing ©2010 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.


iv Introduction

Manufactured under license fromDolby® Laboratories. Dolby and thedouble-D symbol are registeredtrademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

“Made for iPod,” means thatan electronic accessory has beendesigned to connect specificallyto iPod and has been certifiedby the developer to meet Appleperformance standards. Apple isnot responsible for the operation ofthis device or its compliance withsafety and regulatory standards.

iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, andiPod touch are trademarks of AppleInc., registered in the U.S. and othercountries.

Canadian Vehicle Owners

Propriétaires Canadiens

A French language copy of thismanual can be obtained from yourdealer or from:

On peut obtenir un exemplaire dece guide en français auprès duconcessionnaire ou à l'adressesuivante:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

1-800-551-4123Numéro de poste 6438 delangue françaisewww.helminc.com

Using this ManualTo quickly locate informationabout the vehicle, use the Indexin the back of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in themanual and the page number whereit can be found.

Danger, Warnings, andCautionsWarning messages found on vehiclelabels and in this manual describehazards and what to do to avoid orreduce them.

Danger indicates a hazard with ahigh level of risk which will result inserious injury or death.

Warning or Caution indicates ahazard that could result in injury ordeath.


Introduction v

{ WARNING

These mean there is somethingthat could hurt you or otherpeople.

Notice: This means there issomething that could result inproperty or vehicle damage. Thiswould not be covered by thevehicle's warranty.

A circle with a slash through it is asafety symbol which means “DoNot,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not letthis happen.”

SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols instead oftext. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specificcomponent, control, message,gauge, or indicator.

M : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see your owner manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

* : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see a service manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbolsthat may be found on the vehicleand what they mean. For moreinformation on the symbol, refer tothe Index.

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

# : Air Conditioning

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

g : Audio Steering Wheel Controlsor OnStar®

$ : Brake System Warning Light

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O : Exterior Lamps

# : Fog Lamps

. : Fuel Gauge

+ : Fuses


vi Introduction

3 : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger

( : Heated Steering Wheel

j : LATCH System ChildRestraints

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

} : Power

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Safety Belt Reminders

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

F : Traction Control

M : Windshield Washer Fluid


In Brief 1-1

In Brief

Instrument PanelInstrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Initial Drive InformationInitial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-6Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Heated and VentilatedSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Head RestraintAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

Sensing System forPassenger Airbag . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Steering WheelAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-14Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16

Vehicle FeaturesRadio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-17Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Steering Wheel Controls(Audio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

Rear VisionCamera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 1-20Storage Compartments . . . . . . 1-21Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21Universal Remote System . . . 1-21Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

Performance and MaintenanceTraction ControlSystem (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 1-23Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-23Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23

Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-24Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24

Roadside Service . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25


1-2 In Brief

Instrument Panel

CTS Shown, CTS‐V Similar


In Brief 1-3

A. Air Vents on page 8‑6.

B. Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 5‑27.

C. Instrument Panel IlluminationControl on page 6‑5.

D. Turn and Lane-Change Signalson page 6‑4.

E. Instrument Cluster onpage 5‑11.

F. Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑4.

Rear Window Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑6 (If Equipped).

G. Navigation Button (If Equipped).See Navigation System Manual.

H. Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9‑38.

Magnetic Ride Control onpage 9‑40 (CTS‐V Model Only).

I. Clock on page 5‑8.

J. Passenger Sensing System onpage 3‑37.

K. Hazard Warning Flashers onpage 6‑4.

L. Navigation Display BrightnessControl (If Equipped). SeeNavigation System Manual.

M. Infotainment on page 7‑1.

Navigation/Radio System(If Equipped). See NavigationSystem Manual.

N. Parking Brake Release Lever.See Parking Brake (Manual) onpage 9‑34 or Parking Brake(Electric) on page 9‑35.

O. Hood Release. See Hood onpage 10‑5.

P. Cruise Control on page 9‑41.

Heated Steering Wheel onpage 5‑4 (If Equipped).

Traction Control System (TCS)Disable Button (CTS-V ModelOnly). See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 9‑38.

Q. Tap Shift Controls (If Equipped).Located on the rear of thesteering wheel. See ManualMode on page 9‑29.

R. Data Link Connector (DLC)(Out of View). See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 5‑19.

S. Steering Wheel Adjustment onpage 5‑2.

T. Horn on page 5‑4.

U. Steering Wheel Controls (Audio)on page 5‑3.


1-4 In Brief

V. Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats on page 3‑12.

W. Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8‑1.

X. Parking Brake Button. SeeParking Brake (Manual) onpage 9‑34 or Parking Brake(Electric) on page 9‑35.

Y. Shift Lever. See AutomaticTransmission on page 9‑26 orManual Transmission onpage 9‑31.

Z. Instrument Panel Storage onpage 4‑1.

Power Outlets on page 5‑9.

AA. Glove Box on page 4‑1.

Initial DriveInformationThis section provides a briefoverview about some of theimportant features that may or maynot be on your specific vehicle.

For more detailed information, referto each of the features which can befound later in this owner manual.

Starting the EngineWhen first starting the vehicle, theengine idle speed will be elevatedto allow the catalytic converter, anemissions control device, to quicklyreach operating temperature. Afterapproximately 20 seconds, theengine will begin to transition toit's normal, quieter idle speed,which can vary depending onthe temperature. This is normaloperation.


In Brief 1-5

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemThe keyless access transmitter isused to lock and unlock the doorsfrom up to 60 m (195 feet) awayfrom the vehicle.

Key Access

Keyless Access

Press K to unlock the driver door.Press again within five seconds tounlock all remaining doors.

Press Q to lock all doors.

Lock and unlock feedback canbe personalized. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑46.

Press and holdV to open thetrunk/liftgate.

PressL and release to locate thevehicle.

Press and holdL for more thantwo seconds to sound the panicalarm.

PressL again to cancel the panicalarm.

For keyless access vehicles, pressthe button (A) to remove the key.The key can be used for all locks.

See Keys on page 2‑2 and RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation (Key Access) onpage 2‑5 or Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation (KeylessAccess) on page 2‑7.


1-6 In Brief

Remote Vehicle StartFor vehicles with this feature, theengine can be started from outsideof the vehicle.

Starting the Vehicle

1. Aim the Remote Keyless Entrytransmitter at the vehicle.

2. Press Q.3. Immediately after completing

Step 2, press and hold/ untilthe turn signal lamps flash, or forabout 4 seconds if the vehicle isnot in view.

When the vehicle starts, the parkinglamps will turn on and remain on aslong as the engine is running. Thedoors will be locked and the climatecontrol system may come on.

The engine will continue to run for10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a10-minute time extension. Remotestart can be extended only once.

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start:. Aim the RKE transmitter

at the vehicle and press andhold/ until the parking lampsturn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the vehicle on and then off.

See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2‑12.

Door LocksTo lock or unlock a door manually:. From the inside, use the door

lock knob on the window sillfor the rear doors (Sedan andWagon).

. From the outside turn the keytoward the front or rear of thevehicle (Sedan and Wagon),or press the Q or K button onthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation(Key Access) on page 2‑5 orRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation (KeylessAccess) on page 2‑7.

Power Door Locks

Power door lock controls arelocated on the front doors.

K : Press to unlock the doors.

Q : Press to lock the doors.

See Power Door Locks onpage 2‑17.


In Brief 1-7

Liftgate

Power Liftgate

The vehicle must be in P (Park) tooperate the power liftgate.

To open the liftgate using thebutton on the driver door, select themode then press the center of thebutton. See Liftgate (Wagon) onpage 2‑21 for more information onprogramming the height openingsettings.

To open the liftgate with the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter,press and hold& on the RKEtransmitter.

To open the liftgate from outside thevehicle, press the touchpad on theoutside liftgate handle.

Manual Operation of the PowerLiftgate

With the vehicle in P (Park), turnthe liftgate mode switch to OFFand unlock the doors. Press thetouchpad under the liftgate handleand pull up on the handle. To closethe liftgate, pull down on the pullcup. See Liftgate (Wagon) onpage 2‑21.

Trunk ReleaseThe trunk may be opened bypressing the remote trunk releasebutton located on the lower portionof the driver door,V on theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter, or the trunk releasebutton located on the rear of thetrunk above the license plate. SeeTrunk (Sedan, Coupe) on page 2‑19for more information.

Windows

Sedan Driver Side Shown, Wagonand Coupe Similar

The power window switches are onthe driver door. Each passengerdoor has a switch that controls onlythat window.

Press the switch to lower thewindow. Pull the switch up toraise it.

For more information, see PowerWindows on page 2‑30.


1-8 In Brief

Seat Adjustment

Power Seats

Seat Position

To adjust the seat:. Move the seat forward or

rearward by moving thehorizontal control forward orrearward.

. Raise or lower the front or rearpart of the seat cushion bymoving the front or rear of thehorizontal control up or down.

. Raise or lower the entire seatby moving the entire horizontalcontrol up or down.

See Power Seat Adjustment onpage 3‑5 for more information.

Use the vertical control to adjust theseatback. See Reclining Seatbackson page 3‑8 for more information.

Power Lumbar

A. Side Bolster Control

B. Lumbar Support Control

C. Seatback Bolster Control

To adjust the lumbar support,if equipped:. Press and hold the top of

control (B) to increase supportto the top of the seatback anddecrease support to the bottomof the seatback.

. Press and hold the bottom of thecontrol (B) to decrease supportto the top of the seatback andincrease support to the bottomof the seatback.

. Press and hold the front or rearof the control (B) to increase ordecrease support to the entireseatback.

See Lumbar Adjustment onpage 3‑7 for more information.

Side Bolster

To adjust the side bolster support,if equipped:. Press the top or bottom of

control (A) to increase ordecrease support in seatcushion bolsters.


In Brief 1-9

. Press the top or bottom ofcontrol (C) to increase ordecrease support in theseatback bolsters.

See Lumbar Adjustment onpage 3‑7 for more information.

Memory Features

On vehicles with the memorypackage, memory buttons 1 and 2on the driver door are used to saveand recall memory settings for thedriver seat cushion and seatback,outside mirrors, and the steering

column position, if the vehicle isequipped with the power tilt andtelescopic steering column.

1: Saves and recalls for driver 1.


B : Moves the driver seat and/orpower steering column to the exitposition. See “Exit Recall” later inthis section for more information.

Storing Memory Positions

To save into memory:

1. Adjust the driver seat, outsidemirrors, and the power steeringcolumn, if equipped, to thedesired driving positions.

2. Press and hold “1” untiltwo beeps sound.

3. Repeat for a second driverusing “2”.

To recall memory positions, pressand release “1” or “2”. The vehiclemust be in P (Park) for an automatictransmission, or the parking brakemust be applied for a manualtransmission. A single beep will

sound when the button is pressed.The seat, outside mirrors, and/orpower steering column will move tothe position previously stored for theidentified driver.

If entry/exit recall is programmed onin the vehicle personalization menu,automatic entry recall occurs whenthe ignition is turned on.

See “Memory Seat, Mirrors andSteering Column” under Power SeatAdjustment on page 3‑5 and VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑46 formore information.

Exit Recall

B : Press to move the driverseat and/or power steering column,if equipped, to the exit position.A single beep sounds when the exitfeature activates. The vehicle mustbe in P (Park) for an automatictransmission, or the parking brakemust be applied for a manualtransmission.


1-10 In Brief

If entry/exit recall is programmed onin the vehicle personalization menu,automatic seat and/or steeringcolumn movement occurs under thefollowing conditions:. The ignition key is removed on

vehicles with Remote KeylessEntry (RKE).

. The ignition is turned to OFFand the driver door is opened onvehicles with Remote KeylessAccess.

If entry/exit recall is programmedoff and the exit button is pressed,the driver seat will move back apreset distance and the steeringcolumn, if equipped, will moveup and forward. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑46 formore information.

Heated and VentilatedSeats

If available, the controls are on theclimate control panel.

Press z to heat the seat and

seatback or { to ventilate the seat.A light bar in the climate controldisplay shows the setting.

Press the button once for thehighest setting. With each press ofthe button, the seat will change tothe next lower setting, and then tothe off setting. The lights indicatethree for the highest setting andone for the lowest.

For more information, see Heatedand Ventilated Front Seats onpage 3‑12.

Head RestraintAdjustmentDo not drive until the head restraintsfor all occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

To achieve a comfortable seatingposition, change the seatbackrecline angle as little as necessarywhile keeping the seat and thehead restraint height in the properposition.

For more information see HeadRestraints on page 3‑2 and SeatAdjustment on page 3‑3.


In Brief 1-11

Safety Belts

Refer to the following sections forimportant information on how to usesafety belts properly.. Safety Belts on page 3‑14.. How to Wear Safety Belts

Properly on page 3‑18.. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑24.. Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) onpage 3‑53.

Sensing System forPassenger Airbag

United States

Canada and Mexico

The passenger sensing systemwill turn off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag undercertain conditions. The driver airbag,

seat‐mounted side impact airbagsand the roof‐rail airbags are notaffected by the passenger sensingsystem. See Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator on page 5‑18 formore information.

The passenger airbag statusindicator will be visible on theinstrument panel when the vehicleis started.


1-12 In Brief

Mirror Adjustment

Exterior

Controls for the outside powermirrors are on the driver door.

To adjust each mirrors:

1. Press} or| to select thedriver or passenger side mirror.

2. Press one of the four arrows tomove the mirror.

3. Adjust each outside mirror sothat a little of the vehicle and thearea behind it can be seen.

4. Press either} or| again todeselect the mirror.

See Power Mirrors on page 2‑28.

Interior

The vehicle has an automaticdimming inside rearview mirror.Automatic dimming reduces theglare of headlamps from behindyou. The dimming feature comes onand the indicator light illuminateseach time the vehicle is started.

See Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror on page 2‑29.

Steering WheelAdjustment

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel upor down.

3. Pull or push the steering wheelcloser or away from you.

4. Pull the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in place.


In Brief 1-13

Power Tilt Wheel

For vehicles with the power tiltwheel, the control is on the left sideof the steering column.. Push the control up or down

to tilt the steering wheel upor down.

. Push the control forward orrearward to move the steeringwheel toward the front or rear ofthe vehicle.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.

Interior LightingReading Lamps

The reading lamps are located onthe overhead console. These lampscome on automatically when anydoor is opened.

For manual operation, press thebutton next to each lamp to turn iton or off.

If the reading lamps are left on, theyautomatically shut off 10 minutesafter the ignition has beenturned off.

For more information, see:. Reading Lamps on page 6‑5.. Instrument Panel Illumination

Control on page 6‑5.

Exterior Lighting

The exterior lamp control is locatedtoward the end of the turn signal/lane change lever.

O : Turn the band with thissymbol on it to operate the exteriorlamps.

The exterior lamp control hasfour positions:

O : Turns off all lamps, except theDaytime Running Lamps (DRL).

AUTO: Turns the headlamps onand off automatically, dependingupon how much light is availableoutside of the vehicle.


1-14 In Brief

; : Turns on the parking lamps,together with the sidemarker lamps,taillamps, license plate lamps, andinstrument panel lights.

5 : Turns on the headlamps,together with parking lamps,sidemarker lamps, taillamps,license plate lamps, and instrumentpanel lights.

For more information, see:. Exterior Lamp Controls on

page 6‑1.. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)

on page 6‑3.. Fog Lamps on page 6‑5.

Windshield Wiper/WasherThe windshield wiper lever is on theright side of the steering column.

Sedan and Coupe Model shown

Wagon Model shown

Move the windshield wiper lever toselect the wiper speed.

7 : Single wipe, briefly movethe lever down and release.Several wipes, hold the lever down.

T : Turns the wipers off.

& : For a delayed wiping cycle.Turn the adjustable interval wiperband to set the frequency of wipes.

6 : Turn the band up for morefrequent wipes or down for lessfrequent wipes.

1 : Slow wipes.

2 : Fast wipes.

Windshield Washer

{ WARNING

In freezing weather, do not usethe washer until the windshieldis warmed. Otherwise thewasher fluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.

Sedan and Coupe Model

K : Press the button withthis symbol, on the end of thewindshield washer lever, to washthe windshield. The washer fluidsprays onto the windshield and the


In Brief 1-15

wipers run for a few cycles toclear the windshield. Press andholdK for more wash cycles.

Wagon Model

Pull the lever toward you to spraywasher fluid on the windshield. Thespray continues until the lever isreleased. The wipers will run afew times.

See Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑4 and Rear Window Wiper/Washer on page 5‑6 (if equipped).

Climate ControlsThe heating, cooling, and ventilationfor the vehicle can be controlledwith this system.

A. Display

B. Fan

C. Power

D. AUTO

E. PASS (Passenger ClimateControl)

F. Defrost

G. Air Delivery Mode

H. Temperature and Heated/Ventilated Seat

I. Air Conditioning

J. Recirculation

K. Outside Air

L. Rear Window Defogger

See Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8‑1.


1-16 In Brief

Transmission

Automatic Transmission

Driver Shift Control (DSC) or TapShift

Driver Shift Control (DSC) allowsshifting an automatic transmissionsimilar to a manual transmission.DSC can be enabled through theshift lever or the Tap Shift controls,located on the back of the steeringwheel (if equipped). See ManualMode on page 9‑29.

Manual Transmission

Skip Shift (CTS‐V)

Under light acceleration, thetransmission will only allow shiftingfrom 1 (First) to 4 (Fourth). Thishelps improve fuel mileage.Under harder acceleration, SkipShift is disabled, and all gears areavailable. See Manual Transmissionon page 9‑31.

Vehicle Features

Radio(s)

VOL/ O : Press to turn the systemon and off. Turn to increase ordecrease the volume.

FM/AM: Press to select betweenFM or AM.

m : Press to select XM™,if equipped.

TUNE/TONE: Turn to select radiostations.

¨ SEEK/ © SEEK: Press to seekthe next or previous station.

INFO: Press to display additionalinformation that may be available forthe current song. When informationis not available, No Informationdisplays.

For more information about theseand other radio features, seeOperation on page 7‑2.

Storing a Favorite Station

A maximum of 36 stations can beprogrammed as favorites using thesix softkeys below the radio stationfrequency tabs on the display andby using the radio favorites pagebutton (FAV button). Press the FAVbutton to go through up to six pagesof favorites, each having six favoritestations available per page. Eachpage of favorites can contain anycombination of AM, FM, or XMstations.

For more information, see AM-FMRadio on page 7‑9.


In Brief 1-17

Setting the Clock

The analog clock is located on theinstrument panel above the radio.The clock is not connected with anyother vehicle system and runs byitself. To adjust the clock:

1. Locate the adjustment buttonsdirectly below the clock face.

2. Push and hold the rightadjustment button to move theclock hands forward, or the leftadjustment button to make theclock hands go backward.Holding either button down willcause the clock to advancefaster. Release the button beforethe desired time is reached.

3. Push and release either buttonto adjust the time by one minuteincrements until the desired timeis reached.

For more information on setting theclock, see Clock on page 5‑8.

Satellite RadioVehicles with an XM™ SatelliteRadio tuner and a valid XM SatelliteRadio subscription can receive XMprogramming.

XM Satellite Radio Service

XM is a satellite radio service basedin the 48 contiguous United Statesand 10 Canadian provinces. XMSatellite Radio has a wide variety ofprogramming and commercial-freemusic, coast to coast, and indigital-quality sound. A fee isrequired to receive the XM service.

For more information refer to:. www.xmradio.com or call

1-800-929-2100 (U.S.).. www.xmradio.ca or call

1-877-438-9677 (Canada).

For more information, see SatelliteRadio on page 7‑12.

Portable Audio DevicesThis vehicle has a 3.5 mm (1/8 in)auxiliary input and a USB portlocated in the center console.External devices such as iPods®,laptop computers, MP3 players, CDchangers, and USB storage devicesmay be connected, depending onthe audio system.

For more information, see AuxiliaryDevices on page 7‑35.

Bluetooth®

The Bluetooth® system allows userswith a Bluetooth-enabled cell phoneto make and receive hands-freecalls using the vehicle audiosystem, microphone, and controls.

The Bluetooth-enabled cell phonemust be paired with the in-vehicleBluetooth system before it can beused in the vehicle. Not all phoneswill support all functions.

See Bluetooth on page 7‑37.


1-18 In Brief

Steering Wheel Controls(Audio)

Some audio steering wheel controlscould differ depending on thevehicle's options. Controls that canbe adjusted at the steering wheelmay include:

SRCE: Press to switch betweenthe radio AM, FM, XM (if equipped),CD, HDD (if equipped), auxiliaryinput jack, DVD (if equipped), andUSB (if equipped).

y /cz : Press to go to theprevious or next radio station storedas a favorite, or the previous or nexttrack of a CD.

Press to interact with the Bluetooth®

system. See Bluetooth onpage 7‑37 for more information.

+ e − : Press to increase or todecrease the volume.

b g : Press and release to silencethe vehicle speakers only. Theaudio of the wireless and wiredheadphones, if the vehicle hasthese features, does not mute.Press and release b g again, toturn the sound on.. For vehicles with a navigation

system, press and hold g fortwo seconds to initiate speechrecognition.

. For vehicles without a navigationsystem, press and hold g fortwo seconds to interact withOnStar® or Bluetooth.

. For vehicles with a navigationsystem, OnStar, or Bluetooth,press and hold g fortwo seconds and say “handsfree” to interact with OnStar orBluetooth.

For more information, see SteeringWheel Controls (Audio) onpage 5‑3.


In Brief 1-19

Cruise Control


The cruise control buttons arelocated on the left side of thesteering wheel.

I : Press to turn the system on oroff. The indicator light on the buttonturns on when cruise control is on.

+RES : Press to make the vehicleaccelerate or resume to a previouslyset speed.

−SET : Press to set the speed ormake the vehicle decelerate.

[ : Press to cancel cruise controlwithout erasing the set speed frommemory.

See Cruise Control on page 9‑41.

Navigation SystemIf the vehicle has a navigationsystem, there is a separateNavigation System Manual thatincludes information on the radio,audio players, and navigationsystem.

The navigation system providesdetailed maps of most majorfreeways and roads. After adestination has been set, thesystem provides turn-by-turninstructions for reaching thedestination. In addition, the systemcan help locate a variety of points ofinterest (POI), such as banks,airports, restaurants, and more.

See the Navigation System Manualfor more information.

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The DIC display is located at thebottom of the instrument panelcluster. It shows the status of manyvehicle systems and enablesaccess to the personalization menu.

The DIC buttons are located on theinstrument panel to the left of thesteering wheel.

3 : Press to scroll through thetrip and fuel displays.


1-20 In Brief

T : Press to scroll through thevehicle information displays.

U : Press to customize the featuresettings on your vehicle. SeeVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑46 for more information.

V : Press to reset certain DICfeatures and to acknowledge DICwarning messages and clear themfrom the DIC display.

yz : Press to scroll up and downthe menu items.

For more information, see DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑27.

Vehicle Customization

Some vehicle features can beprogrammed by using the DICbuttons on the instrument panel tothe left of the steering wheel. Thesefeatures include:. Language. Door Lock and Unlock Settings. Lighting

. Chime Volume

. Memory Settings

See Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑46.

Rear VisionCamera (RVC)The rear vision camera displays aview of the area behind the vehicleon either the navigation screen orthe inside rear view mirror when thevehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).Once shifted out of R (Reverse), thenavigation screen will go back to thelast screen that had been displayed,after a delay or the video imageautomatically disappears from theinside rear view mirror.

To clean the camera lens, locatedabove the license plate, rinse it withwater and wipe it with a soft cloth.

See, Rear Vision Camera (RVC) onpage 9‑44 for more information.

Ultrasonic Parking AssistFor vehicles with this feature, it usessensors on the rear bumper todetect objects while parking thevehicle. It operates at speedsless than 8 km/h (5 mph) whilein R (Reverse).

Keep the sensors on the vehicle'srear bumper clean to ensure properoperation.

The system can be disabled throughthe Driver Information Center (DIC).

See "Park Assist" under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑46 formore information.


In Brief 1-21

Storage Compartments

Press the bottom of the load floorhandle assembly to lift the top onthe handle. Pull up on the handleto open the cargo managementsystem.

See Cargo Management System(Wagon Only) on page 4‑3 for moreinformation.

Power OutletsAccessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or MP3 player.

There are three accessory poweroutlets. The power outlets locatedbelow the climate control system,inside the center console storagebin, and on the rear of the centerconsole are powered while thevehicle is in ON/RUN, START orACC/ACCESSORY mode, or untilthe driver door is opened within10 minutes of turning off the vehicle.

On the CTS Wagon there is anadditional accessory power outletlocated near the rear cargo net thatis powered at all times.

Remove the cover to access andreplace when not in use.

See Power Outlets on page 5‑9.

Universal Remote System

The Universal Home RemoteSystem allows for garage dooropeners, security systems, andhome automation devices to beprogrammed to work with thesebuttons in the vehicle.

See Universal Remote System onpage 5‑54.


1-22 In Brief

SunroofThe ignition must be in ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY, or in RetainedAccessory Power (RAP), to operatethe sunroof and power sunshade.See Ignition Positions (Key Access)on page 9‑17 or Ignition Positions(Keyless Access) on page 9‑18 andRetained Accessory Power (RAP)on page 9‑22.

The sunroof switches are on theoverhead console.

The driver side switch operates thesunshade.

Open/Close: Press the front orrear of the switch to open or closethe sunshade.

Express Open/Express Close:Press and release the rear or frontof the switch to express open orexpress close the sunshade.

The passenger side switch operatesthe sunroof.

Vent: Press and hold the front ofthe switch to vent the sunroof. Pressand hold the rear of the switch toclose the sunroof vent.

Express Open/Express Close:For Sedan and Wagon only, pressand release the rear or front of theswitch to express open or expressclose the sunroof.

For more information see Sunroof(Sedan and Wagon) on page 2‑33or Sunroof (Coupe) on page 2‑34.

Performance andMaintenance

Traction ControlSystem (TCS)The traction control system limitswheel spin. The system turns onautomatically every time the vehicleis started.. To turn off traction control,

press and release thetlocated on the Instrument panel(CTS) or the steering wheel(CTS-V). F illuminates and theappropriate DIC message isdisplayed. See Ride ControlSystem Messages on page 5‑40.

. Press the button again to turntraction control back on.

For more information, see TractionControl System (TCS) onpage 9‑38.


In Brief 1-23

StabiliTrak® SystemStabiliTrak assists with directionalcontrol of the vehicle in difficultdriving conditions. The system turnson automatically every time thevehicle is started.. To turn off both traction control

and electronic stability control,press and holdt on theinstrument panel (CTS) orsteering wheel (CTS-V)until F illuminates and theappropriate DIC message isdisplayed. See Ride ControlSystem Messages on page 5‑40.

. Press the button again to turn onboth systems.

For more information, seeStabiliTrak® System on page 9‑39.

Tire Pressure MonitorThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).

The TPMS warning light alerts youto a significant loss in pressure ofone of the vehicle's tires. If thewarning light comes on, stop assoon as possible and inflate thetires to the recommended pressureshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑11. The warninglight will remain on until the tirepressure is corrected.

During cooler conditions, the low tirepressure warning light may appearwhen the vehicle is first started andthen turn off. This may be an earlyindicator that the tire pressures aregetting low and the tires need to beinflated to the proper pressure.

The TPMS does not replace normalmonthly tire maintenance. It is thedriver’s responsibility to maintaincorrect tire pressures.

See Tire Pressure Monitor Systemon page 10‑74.

Tire Sealant andCompressor KitThis vehicle may come with a jackand spare tire or a tire sealant andcompressor kit. The kit can be usedto temporarily seal small puncturesin the tread area of the tire.

See Tire Sealant and CompressorKit on page 10‑89 for completeoperating information.


1-24 In Brief

If the vehicle came with a jack andspare tire, see If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 10‑87.

Engine Oil Life SystemThe engine oil life system calculatesengine oil life based on vehicle useand displays the CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message when it is timeto change the engine oil and filter.The oil life system should be resetto 100% only following an oilchange.

Resetting the Oil Life System

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN withthe engine off.

2. Fully press and release theaccelerator pedal three timeswithin five seconds.

See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑14.

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuelmileage. Here are some drivingtips to get the best fuel economypossible.. Avoid fast starts and accelerate

smoothly.. Brake gradually and avoid

abrupt stops.. Avoid idling the engine for long

periods of time.. When road and weather

conditions are appropriate, usecruise control.

. Always follow posted speedlimits or drive more slowly whenconditions require.

. Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.

. Combine several trips into asingle trip.

. Replace the vehicle's tires withthe same TPC Spec numbermolded into the tire's sidewallnear the size.

. Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.

Roadside ServiceU.S. or Canada: 1-800-882-1112

TTY Users (U.S. or Canada):1-888-889-2438

Mexico: 01-800-466-0805

As the owner of a new Cadillac, youare automatically enrolled in theRoadside Service program.

See Roadside Service (U.S. andCanada) on page 13‑7 or RoadsideService (Mexico) on page 13‑9 formore information.


In Brief 1-25

Roadside Service and OnStar(U.S. and Canada)

If you have an active OnStarsubscription, press theQ buttonand the current GPS location willbe sent to an OnStar advisor whowill assess your problem, contactRoadside Service, and relay yourexact location to get the helpyou need.

Online Owner Center(U.S. and Canada)

The Online Owner Center is acomplimentary service that includesonline service reminders, vehiclemaintenance tips, online ownermanual, special privileges,and more.

Sign up today at:www.cadillacownercenter.com(U.S.) or www.gm.ca (Canada).

OnStar®

For vehicles with an active OnStarsubscription, OnStar uses severalinnovative technologies and liveAdvisors to provide a wide rangeof safety, security, navigation,diagnostics, and calling services.

Automatic Crash Response

In a crash, built‐in sensors canautomatically alert an OnStarAdvisor who is immediatelyconnected to the vehicle to see ifyou need help.

How OnStar Service Works

Q : Push this blue button toconnect to a specially trainedOnStar Advisor to verify youraccount information and to answerquestions.

] : Push this red emergencybutton to get priority help fromspecially trained OnStar EmergencyAdvisors.

X : Push this button for hands‐free,voice‐activated calling and to givevoice commands for Hands‐FreeCalling and Turn‐by‐TurnNavigation.

Automatic Crash Response,Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,Stolen Vehicle Assistance, VehicleDiagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,Roadside Assistance, Turn‐by‐TurnNavigation, and Hands‐Free Callingare available on most vehicles.


1-26 In Brief

Not all OnStar services areavailable on all vehicles. For moreinformation, see the OnStar Owner'sGuide; visit www.onstar.com (U.S.)or www.onstar.ca (Canada); contactOnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1‐888‐466‐7827) orTTY 1‐877‐248‐2080; or pushtheQ button to speak with anOnStar Advisor 24 hours a day,7 days a week.

For a full description of OnStarservices and system limitations, seethe OnStar Owner's Guide in theglove box.

OnStar service is subject to theOnStar Terms and Conditionsincluded in the OnStar GloveBox Kit.

OnStar service requires wirelesscommunication networks and theGlobal Positioning System (GPS)satellite network. Not all OnStarservices are available everywhereor on all vehicles at all times.

OnStar service can’t work unlessthe vehicle is in a place whereOnStar has an agreement with awireless service provider for servicein that area, and the wirelessservice provider has coverage,network capacity, reception, andtechnology compatible with OnStarservice. Service involving locationinformation about the vehicle can’twork unless GPS signals areavailable, unobstructed, andcompatible with the OnStarhardware. The vehicle has to have

a working electrical system andadequate battery power for theOnStar equipment to operate.OnStar service may not work if theOnStar equipment isn’t properlyinstalled or you haven’t maintainedit and the vehicle is in good workingorder and in compliance with allgovernment regulations. If youtry to add, connect, or modifyany equipment or software in thevehicle, OnStar service may notwork. Other problems OnStar can’tcontrol may prevent service to you,such as hills, tall buildings, tunnels,weather, electrical system designand architecture of the vehicle,damage to important parts of thevehicle in a crash, or wireless phonenetwork congestion or jamming.


In Brief 1-27

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑18 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-210/220/310.

OnStar Steering WheelControls

This vehicle may havea b g / $i Talk/Mute buttonthat can be used to interact withOnStar Hands-Free calling. SeeSteering Wheel Controls (Audio) onpage 5‑3 for more information.

On some vehicles, the $i buttoncan be used to dial numbers intovoice mail systems, or to dial phoneextensions. See the OnStar Owner'sGuide for more information.

Your Responsibility

Increase the volume of the radio ifthe OnStar Advisor cannot beheard.

If the light next to the OnStarbuttons is red, the system maynot be functioning properly. PushtheQ button and request a vehiclediagnostic check. If the lightappears clear (no light appears),your OnStar subscription hasexpired and all services have beendeactivated. Push theQ button toconfirm that the OnStar equipmentis active.


1-28 In Brief

2 NOTES


Keys, Doors and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors andWindows

Keys and LocksKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation (KeyAccess) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation (KeylessAccess) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . 2-12Door Locks (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . 2-14Door Locks (Coupe) . . . . . . . . . 2-15Central Door UnlockingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . 2-17Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Safety Locks (Sedan andWagon) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

DoorsTrunk (Sedan, Coupe) . . . . . . . 2-19Liftgate (Wagon) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

Vehicle SecurityVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . 2-25Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26Immobilizer Operation (KeyAccess) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26

Immobilizer Operation(Keyless Access) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27

Exterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29

Interior MirrorsAutomatic Dimming RearviewMirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29

WindowsWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32

RoofSunroof (Sedan andWagon) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33

Sunroof (Coupe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34


2-2 Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys and Locks

Keys

{ WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe ignition key is dangerous formany reasons. Children or otherscould be badly injured or evenkilled. They could operate thepower windows or other controlsor even make the vehicle move.The windows will function with thekeys in the ignition and childrencould be seriously injured or killedif caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave the keys ina vehicle with children.

{ WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe keyless access transmitter isdangerous for many reasons,children or others could be badlyinjured or even killed. They couldoperate the power windows orother controls or even make thevehicle move. The windows willfunction with the keyless accesstransmitter in the vehicle and theycould be seriously injured or killedif caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave the keylessaccess transmitter in a vehiclewith children.

One of the following keys comeswith the vehicle.



Key Access

This key is used for the driver door,ignition, and glove box.

Keyless Access

This key, located inside the keylessaccess transmitter, is used for thedriver door, glove box, and rear seatpass-through door. See “Rear SeatPass-Through Door” under Trunk(Sedan, Coupe) on page 2‑19 formore information.

Keyless Access

If the vehicle has the KeylessAccess System, the transmitter hasa thin button (A) near the bottom ofthe transmitter used to remove thekey. Press (A) and pull the key out.Do not pull the key out withoutpressing the button.



Key Access

If the vehicle has the Key AccessSystem, there is no key in thetransmitter.

Notice: If the transmitter does nothave a button near the base, donot pull on the chrome base ofthe transmitter. Pulling on thebase of this transmitter coulddamage it.

This vehicle may have the KeyAccess System or a Keyless AccessSystem. See Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation (KeyAccess) on page 2‑5 or RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation (Keyless Access) onpage 2‑7 for more information. SeeIgnition Positions (Key Access) onpage 9‑17 or Ignition Positions(Keyless Access) on page 9‑18 forinformation on starting the vehicle.

See your dealer if a new key isneeded.

Notice: If the keys get locked inthe vehicle, it may have to bedamaged to get them out. Alwayscarry a spare key.

Contact Roadside Service if youare locked out of the vehicle.See Roadside Service (U.S. andCanada) on page 13‑7 or RoadsideService (Mexico) on page 13‑9.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑18 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-210/220/310.

If there is a decrease in the RKEoperating range:. Check the distance. The

transmitter may be too far fromthe vehicle.

. Check the location. Othervehicles or objects may beblocking the signal.

. Check the transmitter's battery.See “Battery Replacement” laterin this section.



. If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see yourdealer or a qualified technicianfor service.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation(Key Access)The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter works up to 20 m(65 feet) away.

There are other conditions that canaffect the performance of thetransmitter. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System on page 2‑4.

Do not pull on the chrome base ofthe transmitter.

Q (Lock): Press to lock all thedoors.

If enabled through the DriverInformation Center (DIC), theparking lamps may flash once toindicate locking has occurred.The horn may chirp when Q ispressed again within five seconds.See Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑46 for additional information.

K (Unlock): Press to unlock thedriver door. If K is pressed againwithin five seconds, all remainingdoors unlock. The interior lampscome on and stay on for 20 secondsor until the ignition is turned on.

If enabled through the DIC, theparking lamps flash twice to indicateunlocking has occurred. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑46.

V /& (Remote Trunk/LiftgateRelease): Press and hold for aboutone second to unlock the trunk/liftgate. The automatic transmissionmust be in P (Park) or the manualtransmission must be in Neutral withthe parking brake set.

L (Vehicle Locator/PanicAlarm): Press and release tolocate the vehicle. The turn signallamps flash and the horn soundsthree times.



Press and holdL for more thantwo seconds to activate the panicalarm. The turn signal lampsflash and the horn sounds for30 seconds. The alarm turns offwhen the ignition is moved toSTART orL is pressed again. Theignition must be in LOCK/OFF forthe panic alarm to work.

The vehicle comes withtwo transmitters. Each transmitterwill have a number on topof it, “1” or “2”. These numberscorrespond to the driver of thevehicle. For example, the memoryseat position for driver 1 will berecalled when using the transmitterlabeled “1”, if enabled through theDIC. See “Memory Seat” underPower Seat Adjustment on page 3‑5and Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑46 for more information.

Programming Transmitters tothe Vehicle

Only RKE transmitters programmedto the vehicle will work. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased andprogrammed through your dealer.When the replacement transmitteris programmed to the vehicle, allremaining transmitters must alsobe programmed. Any lost or stolentransmitters no longer work once thenew transmitter is programmed.Each vehicle can have up toeight transmitters programmed to it.

Battery Replacement

Replace the battery if the ReplaceBattery In Remote Key messagedisplays in the DIC. See “ReplaceBattery In Remote Key” under Keyand Lock Messages on page 5‑37for additional information.

Notice: When replacing thebattery, do not touch any of thecircuitry on the transmitter. Staticfrom your body could damage thetransmitter.

To replace the battery:

1. Separate the transmitter witha flat, thin object inserted intothe notch, located above themetal base.

2. Remove the old battery. Do notuse a metal object.



3. Insert the new battery, positiveside facing up. Replace with aCR2032 or equivalent battery.

4. Snap the transmitter backtogether.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation(Keyless Access)The Keyless Access Systemtransmitter will work up to 60 m(195 feet) away.

The Keyless Access System locksand unlocks the doors and trunkwithout pressing the buttons on thekeyless access transmitter. Thekeyless access transmitter must bewithin 1 m (3 feet) of the door ortrunk being opened.

Keyless Unlocking

With the keyless access transmitterwithin 1 m (3 feet), approach thefront door and pull the handle tounlock and open the door. On somemodels there is a touch sensor onthe door handle. If the transmitter isrecognized, the door will unlockand open.

To access the rear doors first, pullthe rear door handle once to unlockall doors and a second time to openthe door.

Entering any door other than thedriver door will cause all of thedoors to unlock. This is notcustomizable.

To customize which doors unlockwhen the driver door is opened, see“Keyless Unlock” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑46.

Keyless Locking

The doors lock after severalseconds if all doors are closedand at least one keyless accesstransmitter has been removedfrom the interior of the vehicle. Tocustomize if the doors automaticallylock upon exiting the vehicle, see“Keyless Locking” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑46.

Keyless Trunk Opening

Press the trunk release buttonlocated on the trunk above thelicense plate to open the trunk if thekeyless access transmitter is withinrange. See Trunk (Sedan, Coupe)on page 2‑19 for additionalinformation.



There are other conditions thataffect the performance of thetransmitter. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System on page 2‑4.

With Remote Start Shown, WithoutSimilar

Q (Lock): Press once to lock thedoors. The turn signal indicatorsflash. When Q is pressed twice, theturn signal indicators flash twice,and the horn sounds once toconfirm locking.

To program the vehicle so the turnsignal indicators do not flash andthe horn does not sound whenpressing Q on the keyless accesstransmitter, see “Remote DoorLock Feedback” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑46.

K (Unlock): Press once to unlockonly the driver door. The turn signalindicators flash twice.

Press K twice within five secondsto unlock all the doors. The interiorlamps may come on.

To program the vehicle so the turnsignal indicators do not flash andthe fog lamps and reverse lampsremain on steady for about20 seconds when the keylessaccess transmitter is used to unlockthe vehicle, see “Remote DoorUnlock Feedback” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑46.

For vehicles with the memoryfeature, press K on the keylessaccess transmitter to program andrecall the memory settings. See“Memory Seat” under Power SeatAdjustment on page 3‑5 for moreinformation.

/ (Remote Start): Press tooperate the remote start feature.See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2‑12 for additional information.

V /& (Remote Trunk/LiftgateRelease): Press and hold for aboutone second to unlock the trunk/liftgate. The automatic transmissionmust be in P (Park) or the manualtransmission must be in Neutral withthe parking brake set.

L (Vehicle Locator/PanicAlarm): Press and release tolocate the vehicle. The horn soundsthree times and the turn signallamps flash three times.



Press and holdL forthree seconds to sound thepanic alarm. The horn soundsand the turn signal lamps flashfor 30 seconds. Press andreleaseL again to stop the alarm.

The vehicle comes withtwo transmitters. Each transmitterwill have a number on top ofit, “1” or “2”. These numberscorrespond to the driver of thevehicle. For example, the memoryseat position for driver 1 will berecalled when using the transmitterlabeled “1”, if enabled through theDIC. See “Memory Seat” underPower Seat Adjustment on page 3‑5and Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑46 for more information.

Programming Transmitters tothe Vehicle

Only keyless access transmittersprogrammed to the vehicle will work.If a transmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased andprogrammed through your dealer.

The vehicle can be reprogrammedso that lost or stolen transmitters nolonger work. Each vehicle can haveup to four transmitters matched to it.

Programming with a RecognizedTransmitter

A new transmitter can beprogrammed to the vehicle whenthere is one recognized transmitter.For vehicles sold in Canada,two recognized transmitters arerequired to program a newtransmitter.

1. The vehicle must be off.

2. Place the recognizedtransmitter(s) in the cupholder.Have the new transmitteravailable with you.

3. Insert the vehicle key into thekey lock cylinder located on theoutside of the driver door.

4. Turn the key to the unlockposition five times withinfive seconds.

5. The Driver Information Center(DIC) displays Ready To LearnElectronic Key #2, 3 or 4.

6. Place the new transmitter intothe transmitter pocket with thebuttons facing the front of thevehicle. The transmitter pocketis inside the center consolestorage area located betweenthe driver and front passengerseats.



7. A beep sounds once thetransmitter is programmed.The DIC displays Ready ToLearn Electronic Key #3 or 4,or Maximum # Electronic KeysLearned.

8. Press the ignition control knob toexit programming mode.

9. Remove the transmitter fromthe transmitter pocket andpress K on the keyless accesstransmitter two times.

10. To program additionaltransmitters, repeatSteps 6 through 9.

Programming without aRecognized Transmitter

United States owners are permittedto program a new transmitter totheir vehicle when a recognizedtransmitter is not available. TheCanadian immobilizer standardrequires that Canadian owners seetheir dealer for programming newtransmitters when two recognizedtransmitters are not available.

The procedure requires three,ten minute cycles to complete thematching process.

1. The vehicle must be off.

2. Place the new transmitter intothe transmitter pocket with thebuttons facing the front of thevehicle. The transmitter pocketis inside the center consolestorage area located betweenthe driver and front passengerseats.

3. Insert the vehicle key into thekey lock cylinder located on thedriver door.

4. Turn the key to the unlockposition five times withinfive seconds.

5. The DIC displays Press StartControl To Learn Keys.

6. Press the ignition switch in.

7. The DIC reads Learn DelayActive Wait XX Min and countsdown to zero.

8. The DIC displays Press StartControl To Learn Keys again.

9. Press the ignition switch inagain.

10. Repeat Steps 7, 8 and 9.

11. The DIC reads Learn DelayActive Wait XX Min and countsdown to zero.

12. A beep sounds and the DICreads Ready To LearnElectronic Key # X. Allpreviously known transmitterprogramming has been erased.



13. A beep sounds onceprogramming is complete. TheDIC displays Ready To LearnElectronic Key # 2.

To program additionaltransmitters, insert eachtransmitter in the pocket untila beep is heard and theDIC advances to the nextelectronic key number. Upto four transmitters can beprogrammed. The DIC displaysMaximum # Electronic KeysLearned and exits theprogramming mode.

Press the ignition control knobto complete the process.

14. Press the ignition control knobif programming is complete.

15. Press K on each newlyprogrammed transmitter tocomplete the process.

Starting the Vehicle with a LowTransmitter Battery

Replace the battery if the ReplaceBattery In Remote Key messagedisplays in the DIC. See “ReplaceBattery In Remote Key” under Keyand Lock Messages on page 5‑37for additional information.

If the transmitter battery is weak,the DIC may display Electronic KeyNot Detected when you try to startthe vehicle. To start the vehicle,place the transmitter in the centerconsole storage area transmitterpocket with the buttons facing to thefront of the vehicle. Then, with thevehicle in P (Park) or Neutral, pressthe brake pedal and the ignitioncontrol knob. See Starting theEngine on page 9‑19, for additionalinformation about the vehicle'selectronic keyless ignition with pushstart. Replace the transmitter batteryas soon as possible.

Battery Replacement

Notice: When replacing thebattery, do not touch any of thecircuitry on the transmitter. Staticfrom your body could damage thetransmitter.

1. Separate the transmitter with aflat, thin object inserted into theslot on the side or back of thetransmitter.

2. Remove the old battery. Do notuse a metal object.



3. Insert the new battery, positiveside facing down. Replace with aCR2032 or equivalent battery.

4. Snap the transmitter backtogether.

Remote Vehicle StartThis vehicle may have a remotestarting feature that allows you tostart the engine from outside thevehicle.

/ (Remote Vehicle Start):This button will be on the RKEtransmitter if you have remote start.

The automatic climate control willbegin to heat or cool your vehicleduring remote start depending onthe temperature inside and outsideof the vehicle. The windshielddefroster and/or rear windowdefogger turn on if it is cold outside.If the vehicle has heated seats,they may also be turned on duringremote start to warm up the seatin cold weather. Normal operationof the climate control systemreturns after the ignition is turned

to ON/RUN. See Dual AutomaticClimate Control System onpage 8‑1.

Laws in some local communitiesmay restrict the use of remotestarters. For example, some lawsmay require a person using remotestart to have the vehicle in viewwhen doing so. Check localregulations for any requirementson remote starting of vehicles.

If your vehicle is low on fuel, do notuse the remote start feature. Thevehicle may run out of fuel.

If your vehicle has the remotestart feature, the RKE transmitterfunctions will have an increasedrange of operation. However, therange may be less while the vehicleis running.

There are other conditions whichcan affect the performance of thetransmitter, see Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System on page 2‑4 foradditional information.

Starting the Engine Using RemoteStart

To start the engine using the remotestart feature:

1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicleand press Q on the transmitter.

2. Press and hold/ for at leastfour seconds or until thevehicle's turn signal lamps flash.The parking lamps will turn onand remain on as long as theengine is running. The vehicle'sdoors will be locked.

3. After entering the vehicle duringa remote start, press the brakepedal and turn the ignition toON/RUN to drive the vehicle.

After a remote start, the enginewill automatically shut off after10 minutes unless a timeextension has been done orthe ignition has been turned toON/RUN.



Extending Engine Run Time

To extend the engine run time by10 minutes, repeat Steps 1 and 2while the engine is still running.The engine run time can only beextended if it is the first remote startsince the vehicle has been driven.Remote start can be extendedone time.

If the remote start procedureis used again before thefirst 10 minute time frame hasended, the first 10 minutes willimmediately expire and thesecond 10 minute time frame willstart.

For example, if the lock button andthen the remote start buttons arepressed again after the vehiclehas been running for five minutes,10 minutes are added, allowingthe engine to run for a total of15 minutes.

A maximum of two remote starts orremote start attempts are allowedbetween ignition cycles.

After the vehicle's engine has beenstarted two times using the remotestart button, the ignition must beturned on and then back off beforethe remote start procedure can beused again.

Shutting the Engine Off After aRemote Start

To manually shut off the engineafter a remote start, do any of thefollowing:

. Press/ until the parking lampsturn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the ignition switch on andthen off.

Conditions in Which Remote StartWill Not Work

The remote vehicle start feature willnot operate if any of the followingoccur:. The ignition is in any position

other than LOCK/OFF.. A keyless access transmitter is

inside the vehicle.. The vehicle's hood is not closed.. The hazard warning flashers

are on.. There is an emission control

system malfunction.. The engine coolant temperature

is too high.. The oil pressure is low.. Two remote vehicle starts

have already been used. Themaximum number of remotestarts or remote start attemptsbetween ignition cycles with thekey is two.



Door Locks (Sedan)

{ WARNING

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

. Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily open thedoors and fall out of a movingvehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will notopen it. The chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle ina crash is increased if thedoors are not locked. So,all passengers should wearsafety belts properly andthe doors should be lockedwhenever the vehicle isdriven.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A child canbe overcome by extreme heatand can suffer permanentinjuries or even death fromheat stroke. Always lock thevehicle whenever leaving it.

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen you slow down or stopthe vehicle. Locking the doorscan help prevent this fromhappening.

There are several ways to lock andunlock the vehicle.

From the outside, use the key,or press the lock or unlock button onthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation (KeyAccess) on page 2‑5 or Remote

Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation (Keyless Access) onpage 2‑7 for more information.

On vehicles with the RemoteKeyless Access system, the doorunlocks by pulling the door handlewhen you have the transmitter withyou. See Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation (KeyAccess) on page 2‑5 or RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation (Keyless Access) onpage 2‑7 for more information.

If the windows are down and thedoors are locked, do not reachin to manually unlock the vehiclebecause you will set off the alarm.

From the inside, press the powerdoor lock switch located on the frontdoor. See Power Door Locks onpage 2‑17.

Push down or pull up on the manuallock knob, located at the top of thedoor near the window, for the reardoors.



Door Locks (Coupe)

{ WARNING

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

. Passengers — especiallychildren — can easily openthe doors and fall out of amoving vehicle. When a dooris locked it will not open. Youincrease the chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in acrash if the doors are notlocked. So, wear safety beltsproperly and lock the doorswhenever you drive.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A child canbe overcome by extreme heatand can suffer permanentinjuries or even death fromheat stroke. Always lockyour vehicle whenever youleave it.

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen you slow down or stopyour vehicle. Locking yourdoors can help prevent thisfrom happening.

There are several ways to lock andunlock your vehicle.

From the outside, press the lock orunlock button on the keyless accesstransmitter.

When you have the transmitter withyou, you may also unlock and openthe door by squeezing the doorhandle sensor (A). You do not haveto press the unlock button on thetransmitter. You will be able to openthe door when you press the doorhandle sensor and the vehiclerecognizes your keyless accesstransmitter. When the passengerdoor is opened first, the driver'sdoor will also unlock.



From the inside, use the power doorlock switch (C) located on the doorpanel near the power windowswitches. See Power Door Locks onpage 2‑17.

To open a door from the inside,press the button (B) on the door trimpull handle and push the door open.You will hear a tone when the buttonis pressed.

If power to the vehicle or thekeyless access transmitter islost, there are two ways to openthe door.

1. From inside the vehicle, use thedoor release handle located onthe floor next to each seat. Pullthe handle up to unlock andunlatch the door.

2. From outside the vehicle, usethe key in the cylinder above thelicense plate to open the trunk.

3. Pull the door release tab,located under the package shelfat the top of the trunk, to unlockand unlatch the driver door.



Central Door UnlockingSystemThe vehicle has a central doorunlocking feature. When unlockingthe driver door, the other doors canbe unlocked by holding the keyin the turned position for a fewseconds or by quickly turning thekey twice in the lock cylinder.

Power Door LocksThe switches are located on thefront doors.

K (Unlock): Press to unlock thedoors.

Q (Lock): Remove the key fromthe ignition and press to lock thedoors.

Delayed LockingWith this feature, you can delay theactual locking of the doors.

When the power door lock switchis pressed when the key is not inthe ignition and the driver dooris opened, a chime will soundthree times indicating that delayedlocking is active.

When all the doors are closed, thedoors will lock automatically afterfive seconds. If a door is reopenedbefore five seconds have elapsed,the five second timer will reset itselfonce all the doors are closed again.

You can press the door lock switchagain or the lock button on the RKEtransmitter to override this featureand lock the doors immediately.

Automatic Door LocksFor vehicles with an automatictransmission, the doors will lockautomatically when all doors areclosed, the ignition is on, and theshift lever is moved out of P (Park).The doors will automatically unlockwhen the vehicle is stopped and theshift lever is moved into P (Park).

For vehicles with a manualtransmission, the doors will lockautomatically after the vehiclespeed reaches 8 km (5 mph). Thedoors will automatically unlock whenthe key is turned off and removedfrom the ignition.

Use the manual or power door locksto unlock the doors if someoneneeds to exit, and to lock the doorsagain.

The power door locks can beprogrammed through the DriverInformation Center (DIC). SeeVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑46.



Lockout ProtectionIf the power door lock switch ispressed when the key is in theignition and a door is open, all thedoors will lock and only the driverdoor will unlock. If the doors areclosed, they can be locked by usingthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. Be sure to remove thekey from the ignition when lockingthe vehicle.

This feature can be overridden bypressing the lock button on the RKEtransmitter or by pressing the powerlock switch a second time.

On vehicles with a Keyless AccessSystem, the system can beprogrammed to alert you whenall the doors are closed and atransmitter has been left insideof the vehicle. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑46 formore information.

Safety Locks (Sedan andWagon)The vehicle has rear door securitylocks. These prevent passengersfrom opening the rear doors fromthe inside.

Lock Label shown

The rear door security locks arelocated on the inside edge of eachrear door. The rear doors must beopen to access them. The labelshowing lock and unlock positions islocated near the lock.

To set the locks:

1. Insert the key into the securitylock slot and turn it so the slot isin the horizontal position.

2. Close the door.

When you want to open a rear doorwhen the security lock is on:

1. Unlock the door using theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)or Keyless Access Systemtransmitter, if the vehicle hasone, the power door lock switch,or the rear door manual lock.

2. Open the door from the outside.

To cancel the rear doorsecurity lock:

1. Unlock the door and open it fromthe outside.

2. Insert the key into the securitylock slot and turn it so the slot isin the vertical position.



Doors

Trunk (Sedan, Coupe)

{ WARNING

Exhaust gases can enter thevehicle if it is driven with theliftgate, trunk/hatch open, or withany objects that pass through theseal between the body and thetrunk/hatch or liftgate. Engineexhaust contains CarbonMonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:

. Close all of the windows.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Adjust the Climate Controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside air andset the fan speed to thehighest setting. See ClimateControl System in the Index.

. If the vehicle is equipped witha power liftgate, disable thepower liftgate function.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑25.

Trunk Lock Release

The remote trunk release button ison the driver door.

For vehicles with an automatictransmission, the shift lever mustbe in P (Park) or N (Neutral).For vehicles with a manualtransmission, the shift lever mustbe in N (Neutral), and the parkingbrake set.

Press the button to open the trunkor press the button with the trunksymbol on the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter.



With the Keyless Access System,when you have the transmitter, thetrunk can be opened by the trunkrelease button located above thelicense plate. The vehicle must bein P (Park) and the valet modeturned off.

If the vehicle is locked, thekeyless access transmitter mustbe within 1 m (3 ft) of the trunkopening for it to be recognized.

If the vehicle is ever without power,the trunk area can still be accessed.

On vehicles with a rear seatpass-through door:

1. Fold the rear armrest down andopen the pass-through door.See “Rear-Seat Pass Through”following for more information.

2. Reach upward through theopening to locate the emergencytrunk release handle. See“Emergency Trunk ReleaseHandle” following for moreinformation.

3. Pull forward on the trunkrelease handle to open thetrunk lid.

On vehicles with a split foldingrear seat:

1. Fold down the rear seatback.See Rear Seats on page 3‑13for more information.

2. Reach upward through theopening to locate the trunkrelease handle.

3. Pull forward on the trunk releasehandle to open the trunk lid.

Close the trunk by pulling on thehandle. Do not use the handle as atie-down.

Rear-Seat Pass Through

If the vehicle has the rear-seat passthrough door, the trunk can beaccessed through the rear seat.This is useful when transportinglong items.

To open the door, pull down the rearseat armrest. Then pull the lever allthe way down to release the door.

To close the door, push it up andback into place. Then try to openthe door without pulling up on thelever to make sure it is locked intoplace.



Emergency Trunk ReleaseHandle

Notice: Do not use theemergency trunk release handleas a tie-down or anchor pointwhen securing items in the trunkas it could damage the handle.The emergency trunk releasehandle is only intended to aid aperson trapped in a latched trunk,enabling them to open the trunkfrom the inside.

There is a glow-in-the-darkemergency trunk release handlelocated on the back wall of thetrunk. This handle will glow followingexposure to light. Pull the releasehandle toward the front of thevehicle to open the trunk from theinside.

Liftgate (Wagon)

Power Liftgate Operation

{ WARNING

Exhaust gases can enter thevehicle if it is driven with theliftgate, trunk/hatch open, or withany objects that pass through theseal between the body and thetrunk/hatch or liftgate. Engineexhaust contains CarbonMonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:

. Close all of the windows.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

. Adjust the Climate Controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside air andset the fan speed to thehighest setting. See ClimateControl System in the Index.

. If the vehicle is equipped witha power liftgate, disable thepower liftgate function.




{ WARNING

You or others could be injured ifcaught in the path of the powerliftgate. Make sure there is no onein the way of the liftgate as it isopening and closing.

Notice: If you open the liftgatewithout checking for overheadobstructions such as a garagedoor, you could damage theliftgate or the liftgate glass.Always check to make sure thearea above and behind the liftgateis clear before opening it.

The power liftgate mode selectorswitch is located on the driver door.The vehicle must be in P (Park) touse the power feature. The taillampsflash when the power liftgatemoves.

Turn the selector switch to chooseone of three modes:

MAX: The liftgate power opens tothe full open height.

3/4: The liftgate power opens to areduced open height that can be setin a range of approximately ¾ opento full open. Use this setting toprevent the liftgate from opening

into overhead obstructions such asa garage door or roof mountedcargo during power operation. Theliftgate can still be opened fullymanually.

OFF: The liftgate only operatesmanually in this position.

Manual operation of a liftgate thatalso has power operation requiresmore effort than a standard manualliftgate.

In either the MAX or the ¾ mode,the liftgate can be power openedand closed by:. Pressing and holding the power

liftgate button& on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitteruntil the liftgate starts moving.See Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation (KeyAccess) on page 2‑5 or RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation (Keyless Access) onpage 2‑7.



. Pressing the power liftgatebutton in the center of the modeselector switch on the driverdoor, with the driver doorunlocked.

. Pressing the touchpad on theliftgate outside handle, with alldoors unlocked, to open theliftgate.

. Pressing and releasing thepower liftgate button on theliftgate adjacent to the latch toclose the liftgate.

Pressing any button that operatesthe power liftgate, or the touchpadwhile the liftgate is moving, stops it.Pressing the button or RKE againreverses the direction. There is aminimum that the power liftgatemust already be open for thesystem to hold it open. If movementis stopped below that minimum, theliftgate closes.

Do not force the liftgate open orclosed during a power cycle.

The power liftgate may betemporarily disabled under extremetemperatures or low batteryconditions. If this occurs, the liftgatecan still be operated manually.

If the transmission is shifted out ofP (Park) while the power functionis in progress, the liftgate powerfunction will continue to completion.If the transmission is shifted out ofP (Park) and accelerate before thepower liftgate latch is closed, theliftgate may reverse to the open

position. Cargo could fall out of thevehicle. Close and latch the powerliftgate before driving.

If the liftgate is powered open andthe liftgate support struts have lostpressure, the turn signals will flashand a chime will sound. The liftgatewill stay open, and then slowlyclose. See your dealer for servicebefore using the liftgate.

Obstacle Detection Features

If the liftgate encounters an obstacleduring a power open or closecycle, a warning chime will soundand the liftgate will automaticallyreverse direction to the full closedor open position. After removingthe obstacle, the power liftgateoperation can be used again.If the liftgate encounters multipleobstacles on the same power cycle,the power function will deactivate.After removing the obstacles, theliftgate will resume normal poweroperation.



The vehicle has pinch sensorslocated on the side edges of theliftgate. If an object is caughtbetween the liftgate and the bodyand presses against this sensor, theliftgate will reverse direction andopen fully. The liftgate will remainopen until it is activated again orclosed manually.

Setting the Power LiftgateIntermediate Mode

To change the liftgate stop position:

1. Turn the liftgate switch to eitherthe MAX, or the ¾ mode positionand power open the liftgate.

2. Stop the liftgate movement atthe desired height by pressingany button that operates thepower liftgate, or the touchpad.Manually adjust the liftgateposition if required.

3. Press and hold the button on theliftgate adjacent to the latch untilthe turn signals flash and a beepsounds to indicate that the newsetting is recorded.

When power opened withthe ¾ mode selected, the liftgatestops at the new set position.

If an audible and visual responseis not received when setting theintermediate stop position, theliftgate height is below the ¾ openheight minimum, approximately5 feet at the edge of the liftgate.

Manual Operation of PowerLiftgate

To change the liftgate to manualoperation, turn the mode selectorswitch to OFF.

With the power liftgate disabled andall of the doors unlocked, the liftgatecan be manually opened andclosed. Manual operation of avehicle with a power liftgate requiresmore effort than a standardnon-power liftgate.

To open the liftgate, press thetouchpad on the handle on theoutside of the liftgate and lift. Toclose the liftgate, use the pull cup.With the power liftgate disabled, theliftgate electric latch will still powerlatch once contact is made with thestriker. Always close the liftgatebefore driving.

If the RKE button is pressed whilepower operation is disabled, the turnsignals will flash and the liftgate willnot move.

The liftgate has an electric latch.If the battery is disconnected or haslow voltage, the liftgate will notopen. The liftgate will resumeoperation when the battery isreconnected and charged.



Vehicle SecurityThis vehicle has theft-deterrentfeatures; however, they do not makeit impossible to steal.

Anti-Theft Alarm SystemThis vehicle has an anti-theft alarmsystem.

The security light, located in theinstrument panel cluster, comes onwhen the system is arming.

Arming the System

To arm the system,

1. Open the door.

2. Lock the door with thetransmitter. The security lightshould come on and stay on.

3. Close all doors. The securitylight should go off after about30 seconds. The alarm is notarmed until the security lightgoes off.

If a locked door or trunk is openedwithout using the key in the driverdoor key cylinder or the transmitter,a ten second pre-alarm will occur.The horn will chirp and the lights willflash. If the key is not placed in theignition and turned to START or thedoor is not unlocked by pressingthe unlock button on the transmitterduring the ten second pre-alarm,the alarm will go off. The headlampswill flash and the horn will sound forabout 30 seconds, then will turn offto save the battery power.

The theft-deterrent system will notactivate if the doors are locked withthe key or the manual door lock.It activates only if the power doorlock switch is used while the door isopen or with the transmitter. Youshould also remember that you can

start the vehicle with the correctignition key if the alarm has beenset off.

To avoid setting off the alarm byaccident:. Lock the vehicle with the door

key after the doors are closed.. Always unlock a door with the

transmitter or by using the keyin the driver door cylinder.Unlocking a door any other waywill set off the alarm.

Turn off the alarm by pressing theunlock button on the transmitter.

How to Detect a TamperCondition

If K is pressed and the hornsounds, an attempted break-in hasoccurred while the system wasarmed.

If the alarm has been activated,the Theft Attempted message willappear on the DIC. See Key andLock Messages on page 5‑37 foradditional information.



ImmobilizerSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑18 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-210/220/310.

Immobilizer Operation(Key Access)This vehicle has a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The system does not have to bemanually armed or disarmed.

The vehicle is automaticallyimmobilized when the key isremoved from the ignition.

The system is automaticallydisarmed when the vehicle isstarted with the correct key. Thekey uses a transponder thatmatches an immobilizer control

unit in the vehicle and automaticallydisarms the system. The vehiclemay not start if the key is damaged.

The security light, located in theinstrument panel cluster, comes onif there is a problem with armingor disarming the theft-deterrentsystem.

When trying to start the vehicle, thesecurity light comes on briefly whenthe ignition is turned on.

If the engine does not start and thesecurity light stays on, there is aproblem with the system. Turn theignition off and try again.

If the engine still does not start andthe key appears to be undamaged,try another ignition key.

If the engine still does not start andthe light continues to stay on, tryanother key.

If the engine still does not start withthe other key, the vehicle needsservice. If the vehicle does start,the first key may be damaged. Seeyour dealer who can service thetheft-deterrent system and have anew key made.

It is possible for the theft-deterrentsystem decoder to learn thetransponder value of a new orreplacement key. Up to 10 keyscan be programmed for the vehicle.The following procedure is forprogramming additional keys only.

To program a new key do thefollowing:

1. Verify that the new keyhas 1 stamped on it.

2. Insert the current key in theignition and start the engine.If the engine will not start seeyour dealer for service.



3. After the engine has started,turn the key to LOCK/OFF, andremove the key.

4. Insert the key to be programmedand turn it to ON/RUN withinfive seconds of the ignition beingturned to LOCK/OFF in Step 3.

5. The security light will turnoff once the key has beenprogrammed. It may not beapparent that the security lightwent on due to how quickly thekey is programmed.

6. Repeat the Steps 1 through 4 ifadditional keys are to beprogrammed.

Do not leave the key or device thatdisarms or deactivates the theftdeterrent system in the vehicle.

Immobilizer Operation(Keyless Access)This vehicle has a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The system does not have to bemanually armed or disarmed.

The vehicle is automaticallyimmobilized when the ignitioncontrol knob is turned to LOCK/OFF.

The immobilization system isdisarmed when the ignition controlknob is pushed in and a validtransmitter is found in the vehicle.

The security light, located in theinstrument panel cluster, comes onif there is a problem with arming ordisarming the theft-deterrentsystem.

The system has one or morekeyless access transmitters that arematched to an immobilizer controlunit in your vehicle. Only a correctlymatched keyless access transmitterwill start the vehicle. If the keylessaccess transmitter is ever damaged,you may not be able to start yourvehicle.

When trying to start the vehicle, thesecurity light comes on briefly whenthe ignition is turned on.

If the engine does not start and thesecurity light stays on, there is aproblem with the system. Turn theignition control knob off and tryagain.

If the ignition control knob doesnot rotate, and the keylessaccess transmitter appears to beundamaged, try another keylessaccess transmitter. Or, you maytry placing the transmitter in thetransmitter pocket located in thecenter console. See “Electronic KeyNot Detected” under Key and LockMessages on page 5‑37.



If the ignition control knob still doesnot rotate with the other transmitter,the vehicle needs service. If theignition control knob does rotate, thefirst transmitter may be faulty. Seeyour dealer who can service thetheft-deterrent system and have anew keyless access transmitterprogrammed to the vehicle.

It is possible for the immobilizersystem to learn new or replacementkeyless access transmitters. Upto 4 keyless access transmitters canbe programmed for the vehicle. Toprogram additional transmitters, see“Programming Transmitters to theVehicle” for Keyless Access underRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation (Key Access) onpage 2‑5 or Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation (KeylessAccess) on page 2‑7.

Do not leave the key or device thatdisarms or deactivates the theftdeterrent system in the vehicle.

Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors

{ CAUTION

A convex mirror can make things,like other vehicles, look fartheraway than they really are. If youcut too sharply into the right lane,you could hit a vehicle on theright. Check the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convexshaped. A convex mirror's surface iscurved so more can be seen fromthe driver seat.

Power Mirrors

Controls for the outside powermirrors are on the driver door.

To adjust each mirror:

1. Press} or| to select thedriver or passenger side mirror.

2. Press one of the four arrows tomove the mirror.

3. Press either} or| again todeselect the mirror.



Folding Mirrors

Manual

Vehicles with manual fold mirrorsare folded inward toward the vehicleto prevent damage when goingthrough an automatic car wash.Push the mirror outward, to return itto the original position.

Heated Mirrors= (Rear Window Defogger):Press to heat the mirrors.

See Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8‑1.

Interior Mirrors

Automatic DimmingRearview MirrorThe vehicle has an automaticdimming inside rearview mirror.

Automatic dimming reduces theglare of headlamps from behindyou. The dimming feature comes onand the indicator light illuminateseach time the vehicle is started.

O (On/Off): Press to turn thedimming feature on or off.

If the vehicle has a rear visioncamera (RVC), see Rear VisionCamera (RVC) on page 9‑44 formore information.

Vehicles with OnStar® will havecontrols located at the bottom of themirror. See your dealer for moreinformation on the system and howto subscribe to OnStar. See theOnStar Owner's Guide for moreinformation about the servicesOnStar provides.

Cleaning the Mirror

Do not spray glass cleaner directlyon the mirror. Use a soft toweldampened with water.



Windows

{ WARNING

Leaving children, helpless adults,or pets in a vehicle with thewindows closed is dangerous.They can be overcome bythe extreme heat and sufferpermanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke. Never leave achild, a helpless adult, or a petalone in a vehicle, especially withthe windows closed in warm orhot weather.

The vehicle aerodynamics aredesigned to improve fuel economyperformance. This may result in apulsing sound when either rearwindow is down and the frontwindows are up. To reduce thesound, open either a front windowor the sunroof (if equipped).

Power Windows

{ WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe keys is dangerous for manyreasons. Children or others couldbe badly injured or even killed.They could operate the powerwindows or other controls oreven make the vehicle move. Thewindows will function and theycould be seriously injured or killedif caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave keys in avehicle with children.

When there are children in therear seat use the window lockoutbutton to prevent unintentionaloperation of the windows.



Sedan Driver Side Shown, Wagonand Coupe Similar

The power window switches are onthe driver door. Each passengerdoor has a switch that controls onlythat window.

Press the switch to lower thewindow to the desired level. Pull theswitch up to raise the window.

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)allows the use of the powerwindows after the ignition has beenturned off. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 9‑22.

Express-Down/Up Windows

Windows with the express featureallow the windows to be raised andlowered all the way without holdingthe switch.

Press or pull the switch fully andrelease it to activate the expressfeature.

The express mode can be canceledby briefly pressing or pulling theswitch.

Express Window Anti-PinchFeature

If any object is in the path of thewindow when the express‐up isactive, the window will stop at theobstruction and auto‐reverse to apreset factory position. Weatherconditions such as severe icingmay also cause the window toauto‐reverse. The window willreturn to normal operation after theobstruction or condition is removed.

Express Window Anti‐PinchOverride

{ WARNING

If express override is activated,the window will not reverseautomatically. You or others couldbe injured and the window couldbe damaged. Before you useexpress override, make sure thatall people and obstructions areclear of the window path.

The anti‐pinch feature can beoverridden. Hold the windowswitch all the way up to thesecond position. The window willrise for as long as the switch is held.Once the switch is released, theexpress mode is re‐activated.

In this mode, the window can closeon an object in its path. Use carewhen using the override mode.



Programming the PowerWindows

If the vehicle battery has beenrecharged, disconnected or notworking, the front power windowswill need to be reprogrammed forthe express-up feature to work.Before reprogramming, replace orrecharge the vehicle's battery.

To program:

1. With the ignition in ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY, or whenRetained Accessory Power(RAP) is active, close all doors.

2. Press and hold the powerwindow switch until the windowis fully open.

3. Pull the power window switch upuntil the window is fully closed.

4. Continue holding the switch upfor approximately two secondsafter the window is completelyclosed.

The window is now reprogrammed.Repeat the process for the otherwindows.

Window Lockout

o (Window Lockout): The rearwindow lockout button is located onthe driver door near the windowswitches.

Press the right side of the button todisable the rear window switches.The light on the button indicates it ison. The rear windows still can beraised or lowered using the driverwindow switches when the lockoutfeature is active.

To restore power to the rearwindows, press the button again.The light on the button will go out.

Sun Visors

Pull the sun visor down to blockglare. Detach the sun visor from thecenter mount to pivot to the sidewindow, or to extend along the rod,if available.



Roof

Sunroof (Sedan andWagon)If the vehicle has a power sunroof itwill only operate when the ignition isin ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY,or when Retained Accessory Power(RAP) is active. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9‑22.

The sunroof switches are located onthe overhead console.


Press and hold the rear of theswitch to open the sunshade. Pressand hold the front of the switch toclose the sunshade.

Express-Open: To open thesunshade, fully press and releasethe rear of the driver side switch.The sunshade will automaticallyopen. To stop the sunshadepartway, press the switch asecond time.

Express-Close: To close thesunshade, fully press and releasethe front of the driver side switch.The sunshade will automaticallyclose. To stop the sunshadepartway, press the switch asecond time.

The sunshade will openautomatically with the sunroof, butcan also be opened manually.


Express-Open: To open thesunroof, fully press and release therear of the passenger side switch.The sunroof will automatically open.To stop the sunroof partway, pressthe switch a second time.

Express-Close: To close thesunroof, fully press and release thefront of the driver's side switch. Thesunroof will automatically close. Tostop the sunroof partway, press theswitch a second time.

Comfort Stop Feature: Thesunroof has a comfort stop featurewhich stops the sunroof fromopening to the full-open position.From the comfort stop position,press the rear of the passenger sideswitch a second time to open thesunroof to the full-open position.

Vent Feature: Press and hold thefront of the passenger side switch tovent the sunroof. The sunshade willautomatically open approximatelyfifteen inches. Press and hold therear of the passenger side switch toclose the sunroof vent.



Anti-Pinch Feature

If an object is in the path of thesunroof/sunshade when it isclosing, the anti-pinch feature willdetect the object and stop thesunroof/sunshade from closing atthe point of the obstruction. Thesunroof/sunshade will then returnto the full-open position. To closethe sunroof/sunshade, see“Express-Close” earlier in thissection.

Dirt and debris may collect on thesunroof seal or in the track. Thiscould cause an issue with sunroof

operation, noise or plugging thewater drainage system. Periodicallyopen the sunroof and remove anyobstacles or loose debris. Wipe thesunroof seal and roof sealing areausing a clean cloth, mild soap, andwater. Do not remove grease fromsunroof.

Sunroof (Coupe)If the vehicle has a power sunroof itwill only operate when the ignition isin ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY,or when Retained Accessory Power(RAP) is active. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9‑22.

The sunroof switches are located onthe overhead console.


Press and hold the rear of theswitch to open the sunshade. Pressand hold the front of the switch toclose the sunshade.

Express-Open: To open thesunshade, fully press and releasethe rear of the driver side switch.The sunshade will automaticallyopen. To stop the sunshadepartway, press the switch asecond time.

Express-Close: To close thesunshade, fully press and releasethe front of the driver side switch.The sunshade will automaticallyclose. To stop the sunshadepartway, press the switch asecond time.



The sunshade will openautomatically with the sunroof, butcan also be opened manually.


Press and hold the front of thepassenger side switch to ventthe sunroof. The sunshade willautomatically open approximatelyfifteen inches. Press and hold therear of the passenger side switch toclose the sunroof vent.

Anti-Pinch Feature

If an object is in the path of thesunroof/sunshade when it isclosing, the anti-pinch feature willdetect the object and stop thesunroof/sunshade from closingat the point of the obstruction.The sunroof/sunshade will thenreturn to the full-open position. Toclose the sunroof/sunshade, see“Express-Close” earlier in thissection.

Dirt and debris may collect on thesunroof seal or in the track. Thiscould cause an issue with sunroofoperation, noise or plugging thewater drainage system. Periodicallyopen the sunroof and remove anyobstacles or loose debris. Wipe thesunroof seal and roof sealing areausing a clean cloth, mild soap, andwater. Do not remove grease fromsunroof.



2 NOTES


Seats and Restraints 3-1

Seats andRestraints

Head RestraintsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Active Head Restraints . . . . . . . . 3-3

Front SeatsSeat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Easy Entry Seat (CoupeModels Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-5Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Thigh Support Adjustment . . . . 3-8Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . 3-10Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

Rear SeatsRear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

Safety BeltsSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-28Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-28Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-29

Airbag SystemAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-32When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35

How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35

What Will You See After anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37

Servicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-42

Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-43Replacing Airbag SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-44

Child RestraintsOlder Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44Infants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47

Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-49Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-51Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-59

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59

Securing Child Restraints(Front Passenger Seat) . . . . 3-61


3-2 Seats and Restraints

Head RestraintsThe vehicle's front seats haveadjustable head restraints in theoutboard seating positions.

The vehicle's rear seats have headrestraints in the outboard seatingpositions, but they are notadjustable.

{ WARNING

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do notdrive until the head restraints forall occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

Adjust the head restraint so that thetop of the restraint is at the sameheight as the top of the occupant'shead. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

Pull the head restraint up to raise it.To lower the head restraint, pressthe button, located on the topof the seatback, and push therestraint down.

Push down on the head restraintafter the button is released to makesure that it is locked in place.

The vehicle's head restraints are notdesigned to be removed.



Active Head RestraintsThe vehicle has an active headrestraint system in the front seatingpositions. These automatically tiltforward to reduce the risk of neckinjury if the vehicle is hit frombehind.

Front Seats

Seat Adjustment

{ WARNING

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust amanual driver seat while thevehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle andconfuse you, or make you push apedal when you do not want to.Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

To adjust a manual seat:

1. Lift the bar to unlock the seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the bar.

3. Try to move the seat back andforth to be sure the seat islocked in place.



Easy Entry Seat(Coupe Models Only)

A. Folding Seatback Handle

B. Seat Adjustment Switch

On coupe models, the front seatscan be moved out of the way tomake it easier to get in and out ofthe rear seat.

To fold the seatback, pull thehandle (A) on the upper seatback.The seatback will fold forward.

To move the seat forward, pressand hold the top of the switch (B) onthe upper seatback. To move theseat rearward, press and hold thebottom of the switch (B). Releasethe switch when the seat reachesthe desired position.

After entering or exiting the rearseat, return the seatback to theupright position. Push and pull onthe seatback to make sure islocked.

{ WARNING

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

A driver seat entry/exit positioncan be recalled automatically usingthe vehicle personalization menu.See “Memory Seat, Mirrors, andSteering Column” under Power SeatAdjustment on page 3‑5 and VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑46 formore information.



Power Seat Adjustment

Power Seats

To adjust a power seat, if equipped:. Move the seat forward or

rearward by sliding thehorizontal control forward orrearward.

. Raise or lower the front or rearpart of the seat cushion bymoving the front or rear of thehorizontal control up or down.

. Raise or lower the entire seatby moving the entire horizontalcontrol up or down.

To adjust the seatback, see“Power Reclining Seatbacks” underReclining Seatbacks on page 3‑8 formore information.

Memory Seat, Mirrors, andSteering Column

On vehicles with the memoryfeature, memory buttons 1 and 2 onthe driver door are used to save andrecall memory settings for the driverseat cushion and seatback, outside

mirrors, and the steering columnposition, if the vehicle is equippedwith the power tilt and telescopicsteering column.



B (Exit Button): Moves the driverseat and/or power steering columnto the exit position. See “Exit Recall”later in this section for moreinformation.

Storing Memory Positions

To save into memory:

1. Adjust the driver seat, outsidemirrors, and the power steeringcolumn, if equipped, to thedesired driving positions.

2. Press and hold “1” untiltwo beeps sound.

3. Repeat for a second driverusing “2.”



The vehicle comes with two keylessentry transmitters. Each transmitterhas a number “1” or “2” on it. Thesenumbers correspond to “1” and “2”on the driver door. The currentdriver is identified when the unlockbutton on the transmitter is pressed,or when “1” or “2” on the driver dooris pressed.

To recall memory positions, pressand release “1” or “2.” The vehiclemust be in P (Park) for an automatictransmission, or the parking brakemust be applied for a manualtransmission. A single beep willsound when the button is pressed.The seat, outside mirrors, and/orpower steering column will move tothe position previously stored for theidentified driver.

Automatic Entry Recall

If entry/exit recall is programmedon in the vehicle personalizationmenu, automatic entry recall occurswhen the ignition is turned on. See“Entry/Exit Recall” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑46 formore information.

To stop recall movement, pressone of the power seat, memory,or outside mirror buttons, or thepower steering column switch,if equipped.

If something has blocked thedriver seat or the steering columnwhile recalling a memory position,the recall may stop. Removethe obstruction; then press theappropriate control for the area thatis not recalling for two seconds. Tryrecalling the memory position againby pressing the appropriate memorybutton. If the memory position is stillnot recalling, see your dealer forservice.

Exit Recall

B (Exit Button): Press to movethe driver seat and/or powersteering column, if equipped, to theexit position. A single beep soundswhen the exit feature activates.The vehicle must be in P (Park) foran automatic transmission, or theparking brake must be applied for amanual transmission.

If entry/exit recall is programmed onin the vehicle personalization menu,automatic seat and/or steeringcolumn movement occurs under thefollowing conditions:. The ignition key is removed on

vehicles with Remote KeylessEntry (RKE).

. The ignition is turned to OFFand the driver door is opened onvehicles with Remote KeylessAccess.



If entry/exit recall is programmedoff and the exit button is pressed,the driver seat will move back apreset distance and the steeringcolumn, if equipped, will moveup and forward. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑46 formore information.

If something has blocked the driverseat while recalling the exit position,the recall may stop. Remove theobstruction; then press and hold thepower seat control rearward fortwo seconds. Try recalling the exitposition again. If the exit position isstill not recalling, see your dealer forservice.

Lumbar Adjustment

If available, hold the control on theoutboard side of the seat forward orrearward to increase or decreasethe lumbar support on the driver orfront passenger seat.

A. Side Bolster Adjustment

B. Lumbar Support Adjustment

C. Seatback Bolster Adjustment



Power Lumbar

To adjust the lumbar support,if equipped:. Press and hold the top of

control (B) to increase supportto the top of the seatback anddecrease support to the bottomof the lumbar.

. Press and hold the bottom of thecontrol to decrease support tothe top of the seatback andincrease support to the bottomof the seatback.

. Press and hold the front or rearof the control to increase ordecrease support to the entireseatback.

Side Bolster

To adjust the side bolster support,if equipped:. Press the top or bottom of

control (A) to increase ordecrease support in seatcushion bolsters.

. Press the top or bottom ofcontrol (C) to increase ordecrease support in theseatback bolsters.

Thigh SupportAdjustment

If available, adjust the manual legextension by reaching under it, inthe pocketed area. Press the buttonand pull or push to lengthen orshorten it. Release the button tolock it in place.

Reclining Seatbacks

{ WARNING

Sitting in a reclined position whenthe vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even when buckledup, the safety belts cannot dotheir job when reclined like this.

The shoulder belt cannot do itsjob because it will not be againstyour body. Instead, it will be infront of you. In a crash, you couldgo into it, receiving neck or otherinjuries.

The lap belt cannot do its jobeither. In a crash, the belt couldgo up over your abdomen. Thebelt forces would be there, not atyour pelvic bones. This couldcause serious internal injuries.

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear thesafety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined ifthe vehicle is moving.

Manual Reclining Seatbacks

{ WARNING


To recline a manual seatback:

1. Lift the lever.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, and thenrelease the lever to lock theseatback in place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.



To return the seatback to the uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatback willreturn to the upright position.

2. Push and pull on theseatback to make sure itis locked.

Power Reclining Seatbacks

To adjust a power seatback,if equipped:. Tilt the top of the vertical control

rearward to recline.. Tilt the top of the vertical control

forward to raise.

Heated Front Seats

{ WARNING

If you cannot feel temperaturechange or pain to the skin, theseat heater may cause burnseven at low temperatures. Toreduce the risk of burns, peoplewith such a condition should usecare when using the seat heater,especially for long periods oftime. Do not place anything onthe seat that insulates againstheat, such as a blanket, cushion,cover, or similar item. Thismay cause the seat heater tooverheat. An overheated seatheater may cause a burn or maydamage the seat.



If available, the buttons are on theclimate control panel.

Press M or L to heat the driver orpassenger seat and seatback.

A light bar in the climate controldisplay shows the setting; high,medium, or low.

Press either button to turn on theheated seats at the highest setting.Press and release the button todecrease the setting. To turn theheated seat off, press and releasethe button until the light turns off.

The heated seats turn off when thevehicle is turned off.

Remote Start Heated Seats

When it is cold outside, the heatedseats may turn on during a vehicleremote start. The heated seats willbe canceled when the ignition isturned on. Press the button to usethe heated seats after the vehicle isstarted.

The indicator lights on the climatecontrol display do not turn on duringa remote start.

The performance of an unoccupiedheated seat may be reduced.

See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2‑12 for more information.



Heated and VentilatedFront Seats

{ WARNING

If you cannot feel temperaturechange or pain to the skin, theseat heater may cause burnseven at low temperatures. Seethe Warning under Heated FrontSeats on page 3‑10.

If available, the buttons are on theclimate control panel.

Press M to heat the seat or { tocool the seat.

Press the button once for thehighest setting. With each press ofthe button, the seat will change tothe next lower setting, and then tothe off setting. The lights on theclimate control display indicatethree for the highest setting andone for the lowest.

The passenger seat may takelonger to heat up.

The heated or ventilated seats turnoff when the vehicle is turned off.

Remote Start Heated Seats

During a remote start, the heatedseats may turn on, depending uponthe outside temperature. They arecanceled when the ignition is turnedon. Press the button to use theheated seats after the vehicle isstarted.

The indicator lights on the climatecontrol display do not turn on duringa remote start.

The temperature performance of anunoccupied seat may be reduced.

See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2‑12 for more information.



Rear SeatsNotice: Folding a rear seat withthe safety belts still fastened maycause damage to the seat or thesafety belts. Always unbuckle thesafety belts and return them totheir normal stowed positionbefore folding a rear seat.

The vehicle may have a split foldingrear seat.

Sedan or Coupe

To lower one or both of the rearseatbacks:

1. Pull forward on the tab, on theoutboard side of the seatback, tounlock the seatback.

2. Fold the seatback down. Thisallows access to the trunk.

See Trunk (Sedan, Coupe) onpage 2‑19 for more information.

Wagon

To lower one or both of the rearseatbacks:

1. Pull on the lever, on the topoutboard side of the seatback, tounlock the seatback.

2. Fold the seatback down.



To return a seatback to the uprightposition:

{ WARNING


1. Lift the seatback up and push itback into place.

2. Make sure the seatback islocked into place by pushing andpulling on it.

3. Repeat Steps 1 and 3 for theother seatback.

When the seatback is not in use, itshould be kept in the upright, lockedposition.

Safety BeltsThis section of the manualdescribes how to use safety beltsproperly. It also describes somethings not to do with safety belts.

{ WARNING

Do not let anyone ride wherea safety belt cannot be wornproperly. In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearingsafety belts, the injuries can bemuch worse. You can hit thingsinside the vehicle harder or beejected from the vehicle. Youand your passenger(s) can beseriously injured or killed. In thesame crash, you might not be,if you are buckled up. Alwaysfasten your safety belt, andcheck that your passenger(s)are restrained properly too.

{ WARNING

It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area, inside or outsideof a vehicle. In a collision, peopleriding in these areas are morelikely to be seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to ridein any area of your vehicle thatis not equipped with seats andsafety belts. Be sure everyone inthe vehicle is in a seat and usinga safety belt properly.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminders onpage 5‑16 for additional information.

In most states and in all Canadianprovinces, the law requires wearingsafety belts. Here is why:

You never know if you will be ina crash. If you do have a crash,you do not know if it will be aserious one.



A few crashes are mild, and somecrashes can be so serious that evenbuckled up, a person would notsurvive. But most crashes are inbetween. In many of them, peoplewho buckle up can survive andsometimes walk away. Withoutsafety belts they could have beenbadly hurt or killed.

After more than 40 years of safetybelts in vehicles, the facts are clear.In most crashes buckling up doesmatter ... a lot!

Why Safety Belts Work

When you ride in or on anything,you go as fast as it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Supposeit is just a seat on wheels.

Put someone on it.



Get it up to speed. Then stop thevehicle. The rider does not stop.

The person keeps going untilstopped by something. In a realvehicle, it could be the windshield...

or the instrument panel...



or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow downas the vehicle does. You get moretime to stop. You stop over moredistance, and your strongest bonestake the forces. That is why safetybelts make such good sense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing asafety belt?

A: You could be — whether you arewearing a safety belt or not. Butyour chance of being consciousduring and after an accident,so you can unbuckle and getout, is much greater if you arebelted. And you can unbucklea safety belt, even if you areupside down.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear safetybelts?

A: Airbags are supplementalsystems only; so they work withsafety belts — not instead ofthem. Whether or not an airbagis provided, all occupants stillhave to buckle up to get themost protection. That is true notonly in frontal collisions, butespecially in side and othercollisions.



Q: If I am a good driver, and Inever drive far from home,why should I wear safetybelts?

A: You may be an excellent driver,but if you are in a crash — evenone that is not your fault — youand your passenger(s) can behurt. Being a good driver doesnot protect you from thingsbeyond your control, such asbad drivers.

Most accidents occur within40 km (25miles) of home.And the greatest number ofserious injuries and deathsoccur at speeds of less than65 km/h (40 mph).

Safety belts are for everyone.

How to Wear Safety BeltsProperlyThis section is only for people ofadult size.

Be aware that there are specialthings to know about safety beltsand children. And there are differentrules for smaller children andinfants. If a child will be riding inthe vehicle, see Older Children onpage 3‑44 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 3‑47. Follow thoserules for everyone's protection.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who arewearing safety belts.

Occupants who are not buckled upcan be thrown out of the vehicle in acrash. And they can strike others inthe vehicle who are wearing safetybelts.

First, before you or yourpassenger(s) wear a safety belt,there is important information youshould know.

Sit up straight and always keep yourfeet on the floor in front of you. Thelap part of the belt should be wornlow and snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs. In a crash, this



applies force to the strong pelvicbones and you would be less likelyto slide under the lap belt. If youslid under it, the belt would applyforce on your abdomen. This couldcause serious or even fatal injuries.The shoulder belt should go overthe shoulder and across the chest.These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restraining forces.

The shoulder belt locks if there is asudden stop or crash.

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose.It will not give as muchprotection this way.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously hurt if theshoulder belt is too loose. In acrash, you would move forwardtoo much, which could increaseinjury. The shoulder belt should fitsnugly against your body.




A: The lap belt is too loose. It willnot give nearly as muchprotection this way.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously hurt if thelap belt is too loose. In a crash,you could slide under the lapbelt and apply force on yourabdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries. Thelap belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touchingthe thighs.


A: The belt is buckled in the wrongbuckle.



{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured if thebelt is buckled in the wrong placelike this. In a crash, the belt wouldgo up over your abdomen. Thebelt forces would be there, noton the pelvic bones. This couldcause serious internal injuries.Always buckle the belt into thebuckle nearest you.


A: The belt is over an armrest.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured if thebelt goes over an armrest likethis. The belt would be much toohigh. In a crash, you can slideunder the belt. The belt forcewould then be applied on theabdomen, not on the pelvicbones, and that could causeserious or fatal injuries. Be surethe belt goes under the armrests.




A: The shoulder belt is worn underthe arm. It should be worn overthe shoulder at all times.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured ifyou wear the shoulder belt underyour arm. In a crash, your bodywould move too far forward,which would increase the chanceof head and neck injury. Also, thebelt would apply too much forceto the ribs, which are not asstrong as shoulder bones. Youcould also severely injure internalorgans like your liver or spleen.The shoulder belt should go overthe shoulder and across thechest.


A: The belt is behind the body.



{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured bynot wearing the lap-shoulder beltproperly. In a crash, you wouldnot be restrained by the shoulderbelt. Your body could move toofar forward increasing the chanceof head and neck injury. Youmight also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.


A: The belt is twisted acrossthe body.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured by atwisted belt. In a crash, you wouldnot have the full width of the beltto spread impact forces. If a beltis twisted, make it straight so itcan work properly, or ask yourdealer to fix it.



Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt.

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see “Seats”in the Index.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not let itget twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock ifyou pull the belt across you veryquickly. If this happens, let thebelt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across youmore slowly.

If the shoulder portion of apassenger belt is pulled outall the way, the child restraintlocking feature may be engaged.If this happens, let the belt goback all the way and start again.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If the beltis not long enough, see SafetyBelt Extender on page 3‑28.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

4. If equipped with a shoulder beltheight adjuster, move it to theheight that is right for you. See“Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”later in this section for use andimportant safety information.

5. To make the lap part tight, pullup on the shoulder belt.

It may be necessary to pullstitching on the safety beltthrough the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smalleroccupants.



To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. The belt shouldreturn to its stowed position.

Before a door is closed, be surethe safety belt is out of the way. If adoor is slammed against a safetybelt, damage can occur to both thesafety belt and the vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster(Sedan and Wagon)

The vehicle has a shoulder beltheight adjuster for the driver andright front passenger seatingpositions.

Adjust the guide so the shoulderportion of the belt is on the shoulderand not falling off of it. The beltshould be close to, but notcontacting, the neck. Impropershoulder belt height adjustmentcould reduce the effectiveness ofthe safety belt in a crash. See Howto Wear Safety Belts Properly onpage 3‑18.

Push down on the release button (A)and move the height adjuster to thedesired position. The adjuster canbe moved up by pushing up on theshoulder belt guide.

After the height adjuster is set to thedesired position, try to move it downwithout pressing the release buttonto make sure it has locked intoposition.



Safety Belt Pretensioners

This vehicle has safety beltpretensioners for front outboardoccupants. Although the safety beltpretensioners cannot be seen, theyare part of the safety belt assembly.They can help tighten the safetybelts during the early stages of amoderate to severe frontal ornear frontal crash if the thresholdconditions for pretensioneractivation are met. And, if thevehicle has side impact airbags,safety belt pretensioners can helptighten the safety belts in a side orrear crash.

Pretensioners work only once. If thepretensioners activate in a crash,the pretensioners and possibly otherparts of the safety belt system willneed to be replaced. See ReplacingSafety Belt System Parts After aCrash on page 3‑29.

Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides

This vehicle may have rear shoulderbelt comfort guides. If not, they areavailable through your dealer. Theguides may provide added safetybelt comfort for older children whohave outgrown booster seats andfor some adults. When installed andproperly adjusted, the comfort guidepositions the shoulder belt awayfrom the neck and head.

Here is how to install a comfortguide to the safety belt:

1. Pull the elastic cord out frombetween the edge of theseatback and the interior bodyto remove the guide from itsstorage clip.



2. Place the guide over the beltand insert the two edges of thebelt into the slots of the guide.

3. Be sure that the belt is nottwisted and it lies flat. Theelastic cord must be under thebelt and the guide on top.

{ WARNING

A safety belt that is not properlyworn may not provide theprotection needed in a crash.The person wearing the belt couldbe seriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulder

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

and across the chest. These partsof the body are best able to takebelt restraining forces.

4. Buckle, position, and releasethe safety belt as describedpreviously in this section. Makesure the shoulder portion of thebelt is on the shoulder and notfalling off of it. The belt shouldbe close to, but not contacting,the neck.



To remove and store the comfortguide, squeeze the belt edgestogether so that the safety belt canbe removed from the guide. Pull theguide upward to expose its storageclip, and then slide the guide ontothe clip. Turn the guide and clipinward and slide them in betweenthe seatback and the interior body,leaving only the loop of the elasticcord exposed.

Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancySafety belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likely tobe seriously injured if they do notwear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should weara lap-shoulder belt, and the lapportion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding,throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus isto protect the mother. When a safetybelt is worn properly, it is more likelythat the fetus will not be hurt in acrash. For pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making safetybelts effective is wearing themproperly.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle's safety belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not longenough, your dealer will order youan extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat youwill wear, so the extender will belong enough for you. To help avoidpersonal injury, do not let someoneelse use it, and use it only for theseat it is made to fit. The extenderhas been designed for adults. Neveruse it for securing child seats. Towear it, attach it to the regular safetybelt. For more information, see theinstruction sheet that comes withthe extender.

Safety System CheckNow and then, check that the safetybelt reminder light, safety belts,buckles, latch plates, retractors,and anchorages are workingproperly. Look for any other looseor damaged safety belt system partsthat might keep a safety belt system



from doing its job. See your dealerto have it repaired. Torn or frayedsafety belts may not protect you ina crash. They can rip apart underimpact forces. If a belt is torn orfrayed, get a new one right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminderlight is working. See Safety BeltReminders on page 5‑16 for moreinformation.

Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Safety Belt Care on page 3‑29.

Safety Belt CareKeep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be ableto provide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts After aCrash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the safetybelt system in the vehicle.A damaged safety belt systemmay not properly protect theperson using it, resulting inserious injury or even death in acrash. To help make sure thesafety belt systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

After a minor crash, replacement ofsafety belts may not be necessary.But the safety belt assemblies thatwere used during any crash mayhave been stressed or damaged.See your dealer to have the safetybelt assemblies inspected orreplaced.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the safety beltsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Have the safety belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in acrash, or if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start the vehicleor while you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑17.



Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the followingairbags:. A frontal airbag for the driver.. A frontal airbag for the outboard

front passenger.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the driver.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the outboard frontpassenger.

. A roof-rail airbag for the driverand the passenger seateddirectly behind the driver.

. A roof-rail airbag for theoutboard front passenger andthe passenger seated directlybehind the outboard frontpassenger.

All of the airbags in the vehicle willhave the word AIRBAG embossedin the trim or on an attached labelnear the deployment opening.

For frontal airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear on the middlepart of the steering wheel for thedriver and on the instrument panelfor the outboard front passenger.

With seat-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG willappear on the side of the seatbackclosest to the door.

With roof-rail airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear along theheadliner or trim.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by safetybelts. Even though today's airbagsare also designed to help reducethe risk of injury from the force of aninflating bag, all airbags must inflatevery quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:

{ WARNING

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing a safety belt— even ifthe vehicle has airbags. Airbagsare designed to work with safetybelts, but do not replace them.Also, airbags are not designed todeploy in every crash. In somecrashes safety belts are the onlyrestraint. See When Should anAirbag Inflate? on page 3‑33.

Wearing a safety belt during acrash helps reduce your chanceof hitting things inside the vehicleor being ejected from it. Airbagsare “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. Everyone in thevehicle should wear a safety beltproperly—whether or not there isan airbag for that person.



{ WARNING

Airbags inflate with great force,faster than the blink of an eye.Anyone who is up against, orvery close to, any airbag when itinflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Do not sit unnecessarilyclose to any airbag, as you wouldbe if you were sitting on the edgeof the seat or leaning forward.Safety belts help keep you inposition before and during acrash. Always wear a safety belt,even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle.

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbagsand/or roof-rail airbags.

{ WARNING

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbagwhen it inflates can be seriouslyinjured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protectionfor adults and older children, butnot for young children and infants.Neither the vehicle's safety beltsystem nor its airbag system isdesigned for them. Youngchildren and infants need theprotection that a child restraintsystem can provide. Alwayssecure children properly in thevehicle. To read how, see OlderChildren on page 3‑44 or Infantsand Young Children onpage 3‑47.

There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument panel cluster,which shows the airbag symbol. Thesystem checks the airbag electricalsystem for malfunctions. The lighttells you if there is an electricalproblem. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑17 for moreinformation.



Where Are the Airbags?

The driver's frontal airbag is in themiddle of the steering wheel.

The outboard front passengerfrontal airbag is in the instrumentpanel on the passenger side.

Driver Side shown, PassengerSide similar

The seat-mounted side impactairbags for the driver and outboardfront passenger are in the side ofthe seatbacks closest to the door.



Driver Side shown, PassengerSide similar

The roof-rail airbags for the driver,outboard front passenger, andsecond row outboard passengersare in the ceiling above the sidewindows.

{ WARNING

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflate properlyor it might force the object into

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

that person causing severe injuryor even death. The path of aninflating airbag must be keptclear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any otherairbag covering.

Do not use seat accessoriesthat block the inflation path of aseat-mounted side impact airbag.

Never secure anything to the roofof a vehicle with roof-rail airbagsby routing a rope or tie downthrough any door or windowopening. If you do, the path ofan inflating roof-rail airbag will beblocked.

When Should an AirbagInflate?Frontal airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe frontalor near-frontal crashes to helpreduce the potential for severeinjuries mainly to the driver's oroutboard front passenger's headand chest. However, they areonly designed to inflate if theimpact exceeds a predetermineddeployment threshold. Deploymentthresholds are used to predict howsevere a crash is likely to be in timefor the airbags to inflate and helprestrain the occupants.

Whether your frontal airbags willor should deploy is not based onhow fast your vehicle is traveling.It depends largely on what you hit,the direction of the impact, and howquickly your vehicle slows down.



Frontal airbags may inflate atdifferent crash speeds. Forexample:. If the vehicle hits a stationary

object, the airbags could inflateat a different crash speed than ifthe vehicle hits a moving object.

. If the vehicle hits an object thatdeforms, the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits an objectthat does not deform.

. If the vehicle hits a narrow object(like a pole), the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a wideobject (like a wall).

. If the vehicle goes into an objectat an angle, the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle goes straightinto the object.

Thresholds can also vary withspecific vehicle design.

Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, rearimpacts, or in many side impacts.

In addition, the vehicle hasdual-stage frontal airbags.Dual-stage airbags adjust therestraint according to crash severity.Your vehicle has electronic frontalsensors, which help the sensingsystem distinguish between amoderate frontal impact and a moresevere frontal impact. For moderatefrontal impacts, dual-stage airbagsinflate at a level less than fulldeployment. For more severe frontalimpacts, full deployment occurs.

The vehicle has seat-mounted sideimpact and roof-rail airbags. SeeAirbag System on page 3‑30.Seat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags are intended toinflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes. In addition, these roof-railairbags are intended to inflateduring a rollover or in a severefrontal impact. Seat-mounted sideimpact and roof-rail airbags willinflate if the crash severity is above

the system's designed thresholdlevel. The threshold level can varywith specific vehicle design.

Roof-rail airbags are notintended to inflate in rear impacts.A seat-mounted side impact airbagis intended to deploy on the side ofthe vehicle that is struck. Bothroof-rail airbags will deploy wheneither side of the vehicle is struck orif the sensing system predicts thatthe vehicle is about to roll over, or ina severe frontal impact.

In any particular crash, no onecan say whether an airbag shouldhave inflated simply becauseof the damage to a vehicle orbecause of what the repair costswere. For frontal airbags, inflation isdetermined by what the vehicle hits,the angle of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down.For seat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags, deployment isdetermined by the location andseverity of the side impact.



In a rollover event, roof‐rail airbagdeployment is determined by thedirection of the roll.

What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills theairbag causing the bag to break outof the cover and deploy. The inflator,the airbag, and related hardware areall part of the airbag module.

Frontal airbag modules are locatedinside the steering wheel andinstrument panel. For vehicles withseat-mounted side impact airbags,there are airbag modules in the sideof the front seatbacks closest tothe door. For vehicles with roof-railairbags, there are airbag modules inthe ceiling of the vehicle, near theside windows that have occupantseating positions.

How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions,even belted occupants can contactthe inside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement theprotection provided by safetybelts. Frontal airbags distributethe force of the impact more evenlyover the occupant's upper body,stopping the occupant moregradually. Seat‐mounted side impactand roof-rail airbags distribute theforce of the impact more evenlyover the occupant's upper body.

Rollover capable roof-rail airbagsare designed to help contain thehead and chest of occupantsin the outboard seating positionsin the first and second rows. Therollover capable roof-rail airbags aredesigned to help reduce the risk of

full or partial ejection in rolloverevents, although no system canprevent all such ejections.

But airbags would not help inmany types of collisions, primarilybecause the occupant's motionis not toward those airbags. SeeWhen Should an Airbag Inflate? onpage 3‑33 for more information.

Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplementto safety belts.

What Will You See Afteran Airbag Inflates?After the frontal airbags andseat-mounted side impact airbagsinflate, they quickly deflate, soquickly that some people may noteven realize an airbag inflated.Roof-rail airbags may still be at leastpartially inflated for some time afterthey deploy. Some components ofthe airbag module may be hot forseveral minutes. For location of theairbag modules, see What Makesan Airbag Inflate? on page 3‑35.



The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may be warm,but not too hot to touch. There maybe some smoke and dust comingfrom the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does notprevent the driver from seeing out ofthe windshield or being able to steerthe vehicle, nor does it preventpeople from leaving the vehicle.

{ WARNING

When an airbag inflates, theremay be dust in the air. This dustcould cause breathing problemsfor people with a history ofasthma or other breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon asit is safe to do so. If you havebreathing problems but cannotget out of the vehicle after anairbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door.If you experience breathing

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

problems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.

The vehicle has a feature that mayautomatically unlock the doors, turnon the interior lamps, turn on thehazard warning flashers, and shutoff the fuel system after the airbagsinflate. You can lock the doors, turnoff the interior lamps, and turn offthe hazard warning flashers byusing the controls for thosefeatures.

{ WARNING

A crash severe enough to inflatethe airbags may have alsodamaged important functions inthe vehicle, such as the fuelsystem, brake and steeringsystems, etc. Even if the vehicle

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

appears to be drivable after amoderate crash, there may beconcealed damage that couldmake it difficult to safely operatethe vehicle.

Use caution if you should attemptto restart the engine after a crashhas occurred.

In many crashes severe enough toinflate the airbag, windshields arebroken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakagemay also occur from the right frontpassenger airbag.. Airbags are designed to inflate

only once. After an airbaginflates, you will need somenew parts for the airbag system.If you do not get them, theairbag system will not be thereto help protect you in anothercrash. A new system will includeairbag modules and possibly



other parts. The service manualfor your vehicle covers the needto replace other parts.

. The vehicle has a crash sensingand diagnostic module whichrecords information after acrash. See Vehicle DataRecording and Privacy onpage 13‑16 and Event DataRecorders on page 13‑16.

. Let only qualified technicianswork on the airbag systems.Improper service can mean thatan airbag system will not workproperly. See your dealer forservice.

Passenger SensingSystemThe vehicle has a passengersensing system for the outboardfront passenger position. Thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill be visible on the instrumentpanel when the vehicle is started.

United States

Canada and Mexico

The words ON and OFF, or thesymbol for on and off, will be visibleduring the system check. If thevehicle has remote start, and it isbeing used to start the vehicle froma distance, you may not see thesystem check. When the systemcheck is complete, either the wordON or OFF, or the symbol for on oroff, will be visible. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator onpage 5‑18.

The passenger sensing systemturns off the outboard frontpassenger frontal airbag undercertain conditions. The driver airbag,seat‐mounted side impact airbagsand the roof-rail airbags are notaffected by the passenger sensingsystem.

The passenger sensing systemworks with sensors that are part ofthe outboard front passenger seat.The sensors are designed to detectthe presence of a properly-seatedoccupant and determine if theoutboard front passenger frontalairbag should be enabled (mayinflate) or not.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlysecured in a rear seat in the correctchild restraint for their weightand size.



We recommend that children besecured in a rear seat, including:an infant or a child riding in arear-facing child restraint; a childriding in a forward-facing child seat;an older child riding in a boosterseat; and children, who are largeenough, using safety belts.

A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the riskto the rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the rightfront passenger airbag inflates.This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right front

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

passenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag,no system is fail-safe. No onecan guarantee that an airbag willnot deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though theairbag is turned off.

Secure rear-facing childrestraints in a rear seat, even ifthe airbag is off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the outboardfront passenger airbag if:. The outboard front passenger

seat is unoccupied.. The system determines an infant

is present in a child restraint.. An outboard front passenger

takes his/her weight off of theseat for a period of time.

. Or, if there is a critical problemwith the airbag system or thepassenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the outboardfront passenger frontal airbag, theoff indicator will light and stay lit toremind you that the airbag is off.See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5‑18.



The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn on (may inflate) theoutboard front passenger frontalairbag anytime the system sensesthat a person of adult size is sittingproperly in the outboard frontpassenger seat.

When the passenger sensingsystem has allowed the airbag to beenabled, the on indicator will lightand stay lit to remind you that theairbag is active.

For some children, includingchildren in child restraints,and for very small adults, thepassenger sensing system may ormay not turn off the outboard frontpassenger frontal airbag, dependingupon the person’s seating postureand body build. Everyone in thevehicle who has outgrown childrestraints should wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑17 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

If the On Indicator is Lit for aChild Restraint

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.

3. Remove any additional itemsfrom the seat such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

4. Reinstall the child restraintfollowing the directionsprovided by the child restraintmanufacturer and refer toSecuring Child Restraints(Rear Seat) on page 3‑59 orSecuring Child Restraints (FrontPassenger Seat) on page 3‑61.

5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting thevehicle, the on indicator isstill lit, turn the vehicle off.Then slightly recline the vehicleseatback and adjust the seatcushion, if adjustable, to makesure that the vehicle seatback isnot pushing the child restraintinto the seat cushion.



Also make sure the childrestraint is not trapped underthe vehicle head restraint.If this happens, adjust the headrestraint. See Head Restraintson page 3‑2.

6. Restart the vehicle.

The passenger sensing systemmay or may not turn off theairbag for a child in a childrestraint depending upon thechild's seating posture and bodybuild. It is better to secure thechild restraint in a rear seat.

If the Off Indicator is Lit for anAdult-Size Occupant

If a person of adult-size is sitting inthe outboard front passenger seat,but the off indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sittingproperly in the seat. If this happens,

use the following steps to allow thesystem to detect that person andenable the outboard front passengerfrontal airbag:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat, such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.

4. Have the person sit upright inthe seat, centered on the seatcushion, with legs comfortablyextended.

5. Restart the vehicle and have theperson remain in this position fortwo to three minutes after the onindicator is lit.



Additional Factors AffectingSystem Operation

Safety belts help keep thepassenger in position on theseat during vehicle maneuversand braking, which helps thepassenger sensing system maintainthe passenger airbag status.See “Safety Belts” and “ChildRestraints” in the Index foradditional information about theimportance of proper restraint use.

A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion,or aftermarket equipment suchas seat covers, seat heaters, andseat massagers can affect howwell the passenger sensing systemoperates. We recommend thatyou not use seat covers or otheraftermarket equipment except whenapproved by GM for your specificvehicle. See Adding Equipment tothe Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑42 for more informationabout modifications that can affecthow the system operates.

A wet seat can affect theperformance of the passengersensing system. Here is how:. The passenger sensing system

may turn off the passengerairbag when liquid is soaked intothe seat. If this happens, the offindicator will be lit, and theairbag readiness light on theinstrument panel will also be lit.

. Liquid pooled on the seat thathas not soaked in may make itmore likely that the passengersensing system will enable (turnon) the passenger airbag while achild restraint or child occupantis on the seat. If the passengerairbag is turned on, the onindicator will be lit.

If the passenger seat gets wet, drythe seat immediately. If the airbagreadiness light is lit, do not install achild restraint or allow anyone tooccupy the seat. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑17 forimportant safety information.

The on indicator may be lit if anobject, such as a briefcase,handbag, grocery bag, laptop orother electronic device, is put onan unoccupied seat. If this is notdesired remove the object fromthe seat.

{ WARNING

Stowing of articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion andseatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passengersensing system.

Servicing theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicleshould be serviced. There are partsof the airbag system in severalplaces around the vehicle. Yourdealer and the service manual haveinformation about servicing thevehicle and the airbag system.



To purchase a service manual, seeService Publications OrderingInformation on page 13‑14.

{ WARNING

For up to 10 seconds after theignition is turned off and thebattery is disconnected, an airbagcan still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if youare close to an airbag when itinflates. Avoid yellow connectors.They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, andmake sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped VehicleQ: Is there anything I might add

to or change about the vehiclethat could keep the airbagsfrom working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things thatchange the vehicle's frame,bumper system, height, front endor side sheet metal, they maykeep the airbag system fromworking properly. Changing ormoving any parts of the frontseats, safety belts, the airbagsensing and diagnostic module,steering wheel, instrumentpanel, roof-rail airbag modules,ceiling headliner or pillar garnishtrim, overhead console, frontsensors, side impact sensors,rollover sensor module, or airbagwiring can affect the operation ofthe airbag system.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing systemfor the right front passengerposition, which includes sensorsthat are part of the passengerseat. The passenger sensingsystem may not operateproperly if the original seat trimis replaced with non-GM covers,upholstery or trim, or withGM covers, upholstery ortrim designed for a differentvehicle. Any object, such as anaftermarket seat heater or acomfort enhancing pad ordevice, installed under or on topof the seat fabric, could alsointerfere with the operation ofthe passenger sensing system.This could either prevent properdeployment of the passengerairbag(s) or prevent thepassenger sensing systemfrom properly turning off thepassenger airbag(s). SeePassenger Sensing System onpage 3‑37.



If you have questions, callCustomer Assistance. Thephone numbers and addressesfor Customer Assistance are inStep Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure inthis manual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure (U.S.and Canada) on page 13‑1or Customer SatisfactionProcedure (Mexico) onpage 13‑3.

If the vehicle has rolloverroof-rail airbags, see DifferentSize Tires and Wheels onpage 10‑83 for additionalimportant information.

Q: Because I have a disability,I have to get my vehiclemodified. How can I find outwhether this will affect myairbag system?

A: If you have questions, callCustomer Assistance. Thephone numbers and addressesfor Customer Assistance arein Step Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure inthis manual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure (U.S.and Canada) on page 13‑1 orCustomer SatisfactionProcedure (Mexico) onpage 13‑3.

In addition, your dealer and theservice manual have informationabout the location of the airbagsensors, sensing and diagnosticmodule and airbag wiring.

Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenance orreplacement. Make sure the airbagreadiness light is working. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5‑17 for more information.

Notice: If an airbag covering isdamaged, opened, or broken, theairbag may not work properly.Do not open or break the airbagcoverings. If there are anyopened or broken airbag covers,have the airbag covering and/orairbag module replaced. For thelocation of the airbag modules,see What Makes an AirbagInflate? on page 3‑35. See yourdealer for service.



Replacing Airbag SystemParts After a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage theairbag systems in the vehicle.A damaged airbag systemmay not work properly andmay not protect you and yourpassenger(s) in a crash, resultingin serious injury or even death.To help make sure the airbagsystems are working properlyafter a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

If an airbag inflates, you will need toreplace airbag system parts. Seeyour dealer for service.

If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson when you are driving, the airbagsystem may not work properly. Havethe vehicle serviced right away.See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 5‑17 for more information.

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear thevehicle safety belts.



The manufacturer's instructions thatcome with the booster seat state theweight and height limitations for thatbooster. Use a booster seat with alap-shoulder belt until the childpasses the fit test below:. Sit all the way back on the seat.

Do the knees bend at the seatedge? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.Does the shoulder belt rest onthe shoulder? If yes, continue.If no, try using the rear safetybelt comfort guide. See “RearSafety Belt Comfort Guides”under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3‑24 for more information.If the shoulder belt still does notrest on the shoulder, then returnto the booster seat.

. Does the lap belt fit low andsnug on the hips, touching thethighs? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Can proper safety belt fit bemaintained for the length ofthe trip? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

Q: What is the proper way towear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide. The shoulderbelt should not cross the faceor neck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, justtouching the top of the thighs.

This applies belt force to thechild's pelvic bones in a crash.It should never be worn over theabdomen, which could causesevere or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

Also see “Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3‑24.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are saferwhen properly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.



In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Olderchildren need to use safety beltsproperly.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never allow two children to wearthe same safety belt. The safetybelt can not properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, thetwo children can be crushedtogether and seriously injured.A safety belt must be used byonly one person at a time.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never allow a child to wear thesafety belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly.In a crash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt.The child could move too farforward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. The child

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

might also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would thenbe applied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.



Infants and YoungChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infantsand all other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age andsize of the traveler changes theneed, for everyone, to use safetyrestraints. In fact, the law in everystate in the United States and inevery Canadian province sayschildren up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and neverallow children to play with thesafety belts.

Airbags plus lap‐shoulder beltsoffer protection for adults and olderchildren, but not for young childrenand infants. Neither the vehicle'ssafety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Everytime infants and young children ridein vehicles, they should have theprotection provided by appropriatechild restraints.

Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people,or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

For example, in a crash at only40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)infant will suddenly become a110 kg (240 lb) force on a person'sarms. An infant should besecured in an appropriaterestraint.



{ WARNING

Never do this.

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Never put a rear-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat. Secure a rear-facing childrestraint in a rear seat. It is alsobetter to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in a rear seat. If youmust secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat, always move the frontpassenger seat as far back as itwill go.

Q: What are the different types ofadd-on child restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, whichare purchased by the vehicleowner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particularrestraint should take intoconsideration not only the child'sweight, height, and age but alsowhether or not the restraint willbe compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of childrestraints, there are manydifferent models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, besure it is designed to be usedin a motor vehicle. If it is, therestraint will have a label sayingthat it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer'sinstructions that come with therestraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particularchild restraint. In addition, thereare many kinds of restraintsavailable for children withspecial needs.



{ WARNING

To reduce the risk of neck andhead injury during a crash, infantsneed complete support. This isbecause an infant's neck is notfully developed and its headweighs so much compared withthe rest of its body. In a crash,an infant in a rear-facing childrestraint settles into the restraint,so the crash forces can bedistributed across the strongestpart of an infant's body, the backand shoulders. Infants shouldalways be secured in rear-facingchild restraints.

{ WARNING

A young child's hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle's regularsafety belt may not remain lowon the hip bones, as it should.Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child's abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on abody area that is unprotected byany bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatalinjuries. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, young children shouldalways be secured in appropriatechild restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

(A) Rear‐Facing Infant Seat

A rear-facing infant seat (A)provides restraint with the seatingsurface against the back of theinfant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts tokeep the infant positioned in therestraint.



(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat

A forward-facing child seat (B)provides restraint for the child'sbody with the harness.

(C) Booster Seats

A booster seat (C) is a child restraintdesigned to improve the fit of thevehicle's safety belt system.A booster seat can also help a childto see out the window.

Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injuredor killed in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly securedin the vehicle. Secure the childrestraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle safety belt orLATCH system, following theinstructions that came with thatchild restraint and the instructionsin this manual.

To help reduce the chance ofinjury, the child restraint must besecured in the vehicle. Childrestraint systems must be securedin vehicle seats by lap belts or thelap belt portion of a lap-shoulderbelt, or by the LATCH system. SeeLower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3‑53 for more information.



Children can be endangered in acrash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructionsthat come with the restraint whichmay be on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual.The child restraint instructionsare important, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacementcopy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle — even when no childis in it.

In some areas of the UnitedStates and Canada, CertifiedChild Passenger SafetyTechnicians (CPSTs) are availableto inspect and demonstrate howto correctly use and install childrestraints. In the U.S., refer to theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) websiteto locate the nearest child safetyseat inspection station. For CPSTavailability in Canada, check withTransport Canada or the ProvincialMinistry of Transportation office.

Securing the Child Within theChild Restraint

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injuredor killed in a crash if the childis not properly secured in thechild restraint. Secure the childproperly following the instructionsthat came with that child restraint.

Where to Put theRestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are saferwhen properly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

We recommend that children andchild restraints be secured in a rearseat, including: an infant or a childriding in a rear-facing child restraint;a child riding in a forward-facingchild seat; an older child riding in abooster seat; and children, who arelarge enough, using safety belts.



A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing childrestraint in the front.” This isbecause the risk to the rear-facingchild is so great if the airbagdeploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates.This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one can

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

guarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

Secure rear-facing childrestraints in a rear seat, even ifthe airbag is off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3‑37 for additionalinformation.

When securing a child restraintin a rear seating position, studythe instructions that came with thechild restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

Child restraints and booster seatsvary considerably in size, and somemay fit in certain seating positionsbetter than others. Always makesure the child restraint is properlysecured.

Depending on where you placethe child restraint and the size ofthe child restraint you may not beable to access adjacent safetybelt assemblies or LATCH anchorsfor additional passengers orchild restraints. Adjacent seatingpositions should not be used if thechild restraint prevents access to orinterferes with the routing of thesafety belt.

Wherever a child restraint isinstalled, be sure to secure the childrestraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraintin the vehicle — even when no childis in it.



Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System)The LATCH system holds a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.This system is designed to makeinstallation of a child restraint easier.The LATCH system uses anchors inthe vehicle and attachments on thechild restraint that are made for usewith the LATCH system.

Make sure that a LATCH-compatiblechild restraint is properly installedusing the anchors, or use thevehicle's safety belts to secure therestraint, following the instructionsthat came with that restraint, andalso the instructions in this manual.

When installing a child restraint witha top tether, you must also useeither the lower anchors or thesafety belts to properly secure thechild restraint. A child restraint mustnever be installed using only the toptether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCH systemin your vehicle, you need achild restraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraintmanufacturer will provide youwith instructions on how to use thechild restraint and its attachments.The following explains how toattach a child restraint with theseattachments in your vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions orchild restraints have lower anchorsand attachments or top tetheranchors and attachments.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal barsbuilt into the vehicle. There aretwo lower anchors for eachLATCH seating position that willaccommodate a child restraint withlower attachments (B).



Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors thetop of the child restraint to thevehicle. A top tether anchor is builtinto the vehicle. The top tetherattachment (B) on the child restraintconnects to the top tether anchor inthe vehicle in order to reduce theforward movement and rotation ofthe child restraint during driving or ina crash.

Your child restraint mayhave a single tether (A) or adual tether (C). Either will havea single attachment (B) to securethe top tether to the anchor.

Some child restraints with toptethers are designed for use withor without the top tether beingattached. Others require the toptether always to be attached. InCanada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for your childrestraint.

Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

Rear Seat ‐ Sedan or Wagon



Rear Seat ‐ Coupe

i (Top Tether Anchor): Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor): Seatingpositions with two lower anchors.

To assist you in locating the loweranchors, each seating position withlower anchors has two labels, nearthe crease between the seatbackand the seat cushion. For a wagonthe lower anchors are beneathzippers, located near the labels.Open the zippers to access thelower anchors.

To assist you in locating the toptether anchors, the top tether anchorsymbol is located on the cover.

Sedan

Coupe



Wagon

The top tether anchors for a sedanor a coupe are located under thetether covers, on the rear seatbackfiller panel. For the wagon, theoutboard top tether anchors arelocated under the tether coversbehind the rear seatback. Thewagon's center top tether anchor isunder the tether cover, located on

the vehicle floor, behind the rearseatback. Be sure to use an anchorlocated on the same side of thevehicle as the seating positionwhere the child restraint will beplaced.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be attached, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tethermust be attached.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are saferwhen properly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition. See Where to Put theRestraint on page 3‑51 foradditional information.

Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCHSystem

{ WARNING

If a LATCH-type child restraint isnot attached to anchors, the childrestraint will not be able to protectthe child correctly. In a crash, thechild could be seriously injuredor killed. Install a LATCH-typechild restraint properly using theanchors, or use the vehicle safetybelts to secure the restraint,following the instructions thatcame with the child restraint andthe instructions in this manual.



{ WARNING

Do not attach more than one childrestraint to a single anchor.Attaching more than one childrestraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachmentto come loose or even breakduring a crash. A child or otherscould be injured. To reduce therisk of serious or fatal injuriesduring a crash, attach onlyone child restraint per anchor.

{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Buckle any unused safetybelts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pullthe shoulder belt all the way out

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

of the retractor to set the lock,if the vehicle has one, after thechild restraint has been installed.

Notice: Do not let the LATCHattachments rub against thevehicle’s safety belts. This maydamage these parts. If necessary,move buckled safety belts toavoid rubbing the LATCHattachments.

Do not fold the empty rear seatwith a safety belt buckled. Thiscould damage the safety belt orthe seat. Unbuckle and return thesafety belt to its stowed position,before folding the seat.

1. Attach and tighten thelower attachments to thelower anchors. If the childrestraint does not have lowerattachments or the desiredseating position does not havelower anchors, secure the childrestraint with the top tether and

the safety belts. Refer to yourchild restraint manufacturerinstructions and the instructionsin this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchorsfor the desired seatingposition.

1.2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

1.3. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments on the childrestraint to the loweranchors.

2. If the child restraint manufacturerrecommends that the top tetherbe attached, attach and tightenthe top tether to the top tetheranchor, if equipped. Refer to thechild restraint instructions andthe following steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.

2.2. Press the ribbed area of thecover to open the cover andexpose the anchor.



2.3. If you have an adjustablehead restraint, raise thehead restraint.

2.4. Route, attach, and tightenthe top tether accordingto your child restraintinstructions and thefollowing instructions:

If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrestor head restraint and youare using a single tether,route the tether over theseatback.

If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrestor head restraint and youare using a dual tether,route the tether over theseatback.

If the position you are usinghas a fixed headrest orhead restraint and you areusing a dual tether, routethe tether around theheadrest or head restraint.



If the position you are usinghas a fixed headrest orhead restraint and you areusing a single tether, routethe tether over the headrestor head restraint.

3. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. Tocheck, grasp the child restraintat the LATCH path and attemptto move it side‐to‐side andback‐and‐forth. There should beno more than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement for proper installation.

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage theLATCH system in the vehicle.A damaged LATCH system maynot properly secure the childrestraint, resulting in seriousinjury or even death in a crash.To help make sure the LATCHsystem is working properly aftera crash, see your dealer to havethe system inspected and anynecessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If the vehicle has the LATCH systemand it was being used during acrash, new LATCH system partsmay be needed.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the LATCHsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat)When securing a child restraint ina rear seating position, study theinstructions that came with thechild restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

If the child restraint has theLATCH system, see Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑53 for how andwhere to install your child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured in the vehicle using asafety belt and it uses a top tether,see Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3‑53 for top tether anchorlocations.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.



In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

If the child restraint does not havethe LATCH system, you will beusing the safety belt to secure thechild restraint in this position. Besure to follow the instructions thatcame with the child restraint. Securethe child in the child restraint whenand as the instructions say.

If more than one child restraintneeds to be installed in the rearseat, be sure to read Where to Putthe Restraint on page 3‑51.

1. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.


Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

4. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.



5. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint,it may be helpful to use yourknee to push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 4 and 5.

6. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer's instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑53 for moreinformation.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.If the top tether is attached to a toptether anchor, disconnect it.

Securing Child Restraints(Front Passenger Seat)This vehicle has airbags. A rearseat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint onpage 3‑51

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system whichis designed to turn off the frontpassenger frontal airbag undercertain conditions. See PassengerSensing System on page 3‑37and Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5‑18 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.



A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the riskto the rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the front passengerairbag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close tothe inflating airbag. A child in aforward-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if thefront passenger airbag inflatesand the passenger seat is in aforward position.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontpassenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

Secure rear-facing childrestraints in a rear seat, even ifthe airbag is off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front seat, always move thefront passenger seat as far backas it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3‑37 for additionalinformation.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑53 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured using a safety belt and ituses a top tether, see LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3‑53 fortop tether anchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.



You will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint inthis position. Follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.

1. Move the seat as far back asit will go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontpassenger frontal airbag, theoff indicator on the passengerairbag status indicator shouldlight and stay lit when thevehicle is started. SeePassenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5‑18.

2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.


Position the release button onthe buckle, so that the safetybelt could be quickly unbuckledif necessary.

5. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.



6. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint,it may be helpful to use yourknee to push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 5 and 6.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. Tocheck, grasp the child restraintat the safety belt path andattempt to move it side‐to‐sideand back‐and‐forth. Whenthe child restraint is properlyinstalled, there should be nomore than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement.

If the airbag is off, the off indicatorin the passenger airbag statusindicator will come on and stay onwhen the vehicle is started.

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit, see “Ifthe On Indicator is Lit for a ChildRestraint” under Passenger SensingSystem on page 3‑37 for moreinformation.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.


Storage 4-1

Storage

Storage CompartmentsInstrument Panel Storage . . . . 4-1Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-2

Additional Storage FeaturesCargo Cover (Wagon) . . . . . . . . . 4-2Cargo Management System(Wagon Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Cargo Net (Wagon) . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Convenience Net (Sedan andCoupe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

Roof Rack SystemRoof Rack System (Wagon) . . . 4-6

StorageCompartments

Instrument Panel Storage

There is a storage area below theclimate control system. To access,push the cover.

Glove BoxTo open, press the button. Use thekey to lock and unlock. The glovebox has a shelf that can be removedby pulling it out.

Cupholders

There are cupholders in the frontof the center console. Push thecover (A) to open.

There are also cupholders in therear center armrest. Pull the armrestdown to use.


4-2 Storage

Center Console Storage

The center console has an upperand lower storage area. To access,lift the levers on either side ofthe center console. There is anadditional storage area behind thecenter console. To access, push thecover.

Additional StorageFeatures

Cargo Cover (Wagon)The cargo cover can be used tocover items in the cargo area.

To install the cargo cover:

1. Hold the cartridge with thepull-out shade toward the rearof the vehicle.

2. Align the cartridge over thepin (B) on both sides. Pressthe cartridge down and turn itslightly forward until it clicks.

3. The cartridge is properlyinstalled if it fits firmly whenpulled and pushed.

4. Grasp the handle and unroll thecover. Latch the posts into thesockets.

To remove the cargo cover:

1. Release the cover from thelatch posts and carefully roll itback up.

2. Pull the handle (A) back andremove it from the pin (B) on thetrim panel. Repeat this on theother side.


Storage 4-3

{ WARNING

An improperly stored cargo covercould be thrown about the vehicleduring a collision or suddenmaneuver. Someone could beinjured. If the cover is removed,always store it in the properstorage location. When it isreplaced, always be sure thatit is securely reattached.

Cargo ManagementSystem (Wagon Only)

Press the bottom of the load floorhandle assembly to lift the top onthe handle. Pull up on the handleto open the cargo managementsystem.

The cover can be opened totwo positions to allow access tothe storage area.

Some items may be stored in thecargo area when the cover isclosed.


4-4 Storage

D-Ring Sliders

There are four D-Ring sliders thatmove along rails on both sides ofthe cargo management area. Thesecan be used as tie-downs whenstoring cargo.

Installing D-Ring Sliders

To install the D-Ring slider (A),insert it into the channel (B) locatedin the middle of each rail.

The loop of the D-Ring slider mustbe facing inward toward the storagearea and the ring must be in the upposition for proper usage.

Push the button to move the D-Ringslider. The rings can be locked intovarious positions along the rail.

Cargo Net (Wagon)

{ WARNING

Do not stack items higher thanthe upper end of the cargo net orhang anything from the net. Avoiditems that have sharp edges orthat apply excessive force to thenet. If items are not properlystored, damage to the net couldoccur and items can be thrownabout the vehicle. You or otherscould be injured. Always storeitems behind the net.

For vehicles equipped with a cargonet, it can be used to store lightloads, keeping them from fallingover or being thrown.

The net should not be overloaded orused to store heavy loads.


Storage 4-5

1. There are four installation pointsin the roof, two located in front ofand two behind the rear seats.

Insert the top corners of thecargo net into the large openingin the roof and secure by slidingthem into the small opening.

2. There are four tether positionsfor the lower hook straps. In thefront position, the seat backsshould be down for the net toproperly hold items.

3. Mount the cargo net to the rearseat tethers located on the frontof the bottom cushions.

4. The net can also be mounted tothe tethers on the back of therear seats when the seats areupright.


4-6 Storage

5. Pull on the straps to tightenthe net.

Convenience Net(Sedan and Coupe)The vehicle may have aconvenience net in the rear. Putsmall loads behind the net. It canalso be positioned into an envelopestyle to hold smaller items. The netis not for heavier loads. Store itemsas far forward as you can.

Roof Rack System

Roof Rack System(Wagon)

{ WARNING

If something is carried on top ofthe vehicle that is longer or widerthan the roof rack— like paneling,plywood, or a mattress— the windcan catch it while the vehicle isbeing driven. The item beingcarried could be violently torn off,and this could cause a collision,and damage the vehicle. Nevercarry something longer or widerthan the roof rack on top of thevehicle unless using a GMcertified accessory carrier.

For vehicles with a roof rack, therack can be used to load items.For roof racks that do not havecrossrails included, GM Certified

crossrails can be purchased asan accessory. See your dealer foradditional information.

Notice: Loading cargo on theroof rack that weighs more than75 kg (165 lbs) or hangs over therear or sides of the vehicle maydamage the vehicle. Load cargoso that it rests evenly betweenthe crossrails, making sure tofasten cargo securely.

To prevent damage or loss of cargowhen driving, check to make surecrossrails and cargo are securelyfastened. Loading cargo on the roofrack will make the vehicle’s centerof gravity higher. Avoid high speeds,sudden starts, sharp turns, suddenbraking or abrupt maneuvers,otherwise it may result in loss ofcontrol. If driving for a long distance,on rough roads, or at high speeds,occasionally stop the vehicle tomake sure the cargo remains in itsplace.


Storage 4-7

Do not exceed the maximum vehiclecapacity when loading the vehicle.For more information on vehiclecapacity and loading, see VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑11.

Installing the Crossrails

A. Crossrails

B. Siderail Cover

Before installing the crossrails (A),remove the siderail covers (B). Pullstraight up on the rear of the siderailcover. Store covers flat, do not stackitems on them.

1. Identify the front and rearcrossrail.

2. The front crossrail (A) is smallerthan the rear crossrail (B).

3. The crossrail supports arelabeled with an arrow that needsto point toward the front of thevehicle. A pin (A) will be visibleon the bottom when the crossrailsupport lever is down. To installthe crossrail support, move thelever into the forward upperposition, the pin (A) will not bevisible.


4-8 Storage

4. Locate the forward or rearwardcut-out (A) in the siderailchannel.

5. Insert both crossrail ends intothe cut-outs, making sure thearrows are pointed toward thefront of the vehicle.

6. Levers must still be in theforward up position. Move thefront crossrail forward beyondthe cut-out area (B). For therear crossrail, slide the crossrailassembly (A) rearward until theentire crossrail support is infirst position beyond the channelcut-out area (B).

7. Move the levers on bothcrossrails to the down position.Slide the crossrail until thecrossrail pin engages.

8. The crossrails should lock in thesame hole position on each side.

Removing the Crossrails

1. Move both levers of the crossrailinto the upper forward position.

2. Slide the crossrail into thecut-out area.

3. Remove the crossrail from thevehicle.

4. Repeat for the other crossrail.

5. Replace the siderail covers onthe siderails.


Instruments and Controls 5-1

Instruments andControls

ControlsSteering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2Steering Wheel Controls(Audio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Heated Steering Wheel . . . . . . . 5-4Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-4Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Headlamp Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Boost Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14Engine Speed Limiter . . . . . . . . 5-14Engine Oil PressureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-16Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-17Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-19MalfunctionIndicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Brake System WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Up-Shift Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . 5-24

Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-24Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-25Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-26

Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-26Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . 5-26Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-27

Information DisplaysDriver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

Vehicle MessagesVehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31

Brake System Messages . . . . 5-32Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-34Cruise Control Messages . . . . 5-34Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-34Engine Cooling SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35

Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-35Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-36Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-36Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-37Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39Object Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40

Ride Control SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40

Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-43


5-2 Instruments and Controls

Anti-Theft Alarm SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43

Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-43Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-45Vehicle Speed Messages . . . . 5-45Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . 5-46

Vehicle PersonalizationVehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-46

Universal Remote SystemUniversal Remote System . . . 5-54Universal Remote SystemProgramming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54

Universal Remote SystemOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57

Controls

Steering WheelAdjustment

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel upor down.

3. Pull or push the steering wheelcloser or away from you.

4. Pull the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in place.

Power Tilt Wheel

For vehicles with the power tiltwheel, the control is on the left sideof the steering column.. Push the control up or down to

tilt the steering wheel upor down.

. Push the control forward orrearward to move the steeringwheel toward the front or rear ofthe vehicle.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.



Steering Wheel Controls(Audio)

Some audio steering wheel controlscould differ depending on thevehicle's options. Controls that canbe adjusted at the steering wheelmay include:

SRCE (Source): Press toswitch between the radio AM, FM,XM™ (if equipped), CD, DVD(if equipped), HDD (if equipped),auxiliary input jack, and USB(if equipped).

y /cz (Previous/Next): Pressto go to the previous or next radiostation stored as a favorite, or theprevious or next track of a CD.

Press to interact with the Bluetooth®

system. See Bluetooth onpage 7‑37 for more information.

+ e − (Volume): Press to increaseor to decrease the volume.

b g (Mute/Speech Recognition/Push to Talk): Press and releaseto silence the vehicle speakers only.The audio of the wireless and wiredheadphones, if the vehicle hasthese features, does not mute.Press and release b g again, toturn the sound on.. For vehicles with a navigation

system, press and hold g fortwo seconds to initiate speechrecognition. See “SpeechRecognition” in the NavigationSystem manual for moreinformation.

. For vehicles without a navigationsystem, press and hold g fortwo seconds to interact withOnStar® or Bluetooth. Seethe OnStar Owner's Guide,or Bluetooth on page 7‑37 formore information about thesefeatures.

. For vehicles with a navigationsystem, OnStar, or Bluetooth,press and hold g fortwo seconds and say “handsfree” to interact with OnStar orBluetooth. See the OnStarOwner's Guide , or Bluetooth onpage 7‑37 for more informationabout these features.



Heated Steering WheelFor vehicles with a heated steeringwheel.

( : Press to turn the heatedsteering wheel on or off. A light onthe button displays when the featureis turned on.

The steering wheel takes aboutthree minutes to start heating.

HornPress near the horn symbols orpress on the steering wheel pad tosound the horn.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

Sedan and Coupe Model Shown

Wagon Model Shown

The windshield wiper lever is on theright side of the steering column.

Move the windshield wiper lever toselect the wiper speed.

7 (Mist): Single wipe, brieflymove the lever down and release.Several wipes, hold the lever down.

T (Off): Turns the wipers off.

& (Adjustable Interval Wipes):For a delayed wiping cycle, turn theadjustable interval wiper band to setthe frequency of wipes.

6 (Adjustable Interval WiperBand): Turn the band up for morefrequent wipes or down for lessfrequent wipes.

1 : Slow wipes.

2 : Fast wipes.



If the windshield wipers are in usefor about six seconds while you aredriving, the exterior lamps come onautomatically if the exterior lampcontrol is in AUTO. See “WiperActivated Headlamps” for moreinformation.

Clear snow and ice from the wiperblades before using them. If frozento the windshield, carefully loosen orthaw them. Damaged wiper bladesshould be replaced. For moreinformation, see Wiper BladeReplacement on page 10‑34.

Heavy snow or ice can overload thewiper motor. A circuit breaker willstop the motor until it cools down.

Wiper Arm Assembly Protection

When using an automatic car wash,move the windshield wiper lever tothe OFF position. This disablesthe windshield wipers and/or rearwipers, if equipped.

Windshield Washer

{ WARNING


Sedan and Coupe Model

K (Washer Fluid): Press the endof the windshield washer lever, towash the windshield. The washerfluid sprays onto the windshield andthe wipers run for a few cycles toclear the windshield. Press andholdK for more wash cycles.

Wagon Model

Pull the lever to spray washerfluid on the windshield. The spraycontinues until the lever is released.The wipers will run a few times.

Washer Fluid Low Add Fluiddisplays on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) when the washer fluidis low. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑27.

See Washer Fluid on page 10‑26 forinformation on filling the windshieldwasher fluid reservoir.

If the headlamps are on while thewindshield is being washed, theheadlamp washers, if the vehiclehas them, will also turn on. See“Headlamp Washer” following formore information.

Wiper Activated Headlamps

This feature activates theheadlamps and parking lampsafter the windshield wipers havebeen in use for about six seconds.For this feature to work, the exteriorlamp control must be in AUTO.

The wiper-activated headlampsimmediately turn off when theignition is turned to LOCK/OFF,or the windshield wiper control isturned off.



Rear WindowWiper/WasherFor vehicles with a rear windowwiper/washer, the controls are onthe end of the windshield wiperlever.

Press the upper or lower portion ofthe button to control the rear wiperand rear wiper delay.

The system turns off when thebutton is returned to the middleposition.

Z (Rear Wiper Delay Short):Sets a five‐second delay betweenwipes.

5 (Rear Wiper Delay Long): Setsa 10‐second delay between wipes.

= (Rear Washer): Push thewindshield wiper lever forward tospray washer fluid on the rearwindow. The lever returns to itsstarting position when released.

The windshield washer reservoir isused for the windshield and the rearwindow. Check the fluid level in thereservoir if either washer is notworking. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑26.

{ WARNING


Headlamp WasherFor vehicles with headlamp washersthey clear debris from the headlamplenses.

The headlamp washers are beneaththe headlamps.

Press the washer button at the endof the windshield wiper lever, towash the headlamps. Both theheadlamps and the windshield willbe washed. After the first wash, theheadlamps will not be washed untilthe fifth press of the windshieldwasher button.



The headlamps must be on to bewashed. If the headlamps are off,only the windshield will be washedwhen the washer button is pressed.If the washer fluid is low, theheadlamp washers will not work.

See Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑4 for more information.

CompassThe vehicle may have a compass inthe Driver Information Center (DIC).

Compass Zone

The zone is set to zone eight. If youdo not live in zone eight or drive outof the area, the variance needs tobe changed to the appropriate zone.

To adjust for compass variance, usethe following procedure:

Compass Variance (Zone)Procedure

1. Do not set the compass zonewhen the vehicle is moving.On an automatic transmissionvehicle, only set it when the

vehicle is in P (Park). On amanual transmission vehicle,only set it when the vehicle isstopped.

PressT until Press V ToChange Compass Zonedisplays.

2. Find the vehicle's currentlocation and variance zonenumber on the map.

Zones 1 through 15 areavailable.

3. Press V to scroll through andselect the appropriatevariance zone.

4. Press3 until the vehicleheading, for example, N forNorth, is displayed in the DIC.

5. Calibrate the compass. See“Compass CalibrationProcedure” following.

Compass Calibration

The compass can be manuallycalibrated. Only calibrate thecompass in a magnetically cleanand safe location, such as an openparking lot, where driving thevehicle in circles is not a danger.Also, away from tall buildings, utilitywires, manhole covers, or otherindustrial structures, if possible.



If the DIC display does not show aheading, for example, N for North,or the heading does not changeafter making turns, there may be astrong magnetic field interfering withthe compass. Interference may becaused by a magnetic antennamount, magnetic note pad holder,or any other magnetic item. Turn offthe vehicle, move the magneticitem, then turn on the vehicle andcalibrate the compass.

Compass Calibration Procedure

1. Before calibrating the compass,check that the compass is set tothe correct variance zone. See“Compass Variance (Zone)Procedure” earlier in thissection.

Do not operate any switchessuch as window, sunroof,climate controls, seats, etc.during the calibration procedure.

2. PressT until Press V ToCalibrate Compass displays.

3. Press V to start the compasscalibration.

4. The DIC will display CalibratingDrive In Circles. Drive thevehicle in tight circles at lessthan 8 km/h (5 mph) to completethe calibration. The DIC willdisplay Calibration Complete fora few seconds then returns tothe Press V To CalibrateCompass display.

ClockThe analog clock is located on theinstrument panel above the radio.The clock is not connected with anyother vehicle system and runs byitself. To adjust the clock:

1. Locate the adjustment buttonsdirectly below the clock.

2. Push and release the rightadjustment button to move theclock hands forward or the leftadjustment button to make theclock hands go backward.Holding either button down willcause the clock to advancefaster. Release the button beforethe desired time is reached.

3. Push and release either buttonto adjust the time by one minuteincrements.



Power OutletsAccessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or MP3 player.

There are three accessory poweroutlets. The power outlets locatedbelow the climate control system,inside the center console storagebin, and on the rear of the centerconsole are powered while thevehicle is in ON/RUN, START orACC/ACCESSORY mode, or untilthe driver door is opened within10 minutes of turning off the vehicle.

On the CTS Wagon there is anadditional accessory power outletlocated near the rear cargo net thatis powered at all times.

Remove the cover to access andreplace when not in use.

Notice: Leaving electricalequipment plugged in for anextended period of time whilethe vehicle is off will drain thebattery. Always unplug electricalequipment when not in use anddo not plug in equipment thatexceeds the maximum 20 ampererating.

Certain electrical accessoriesmay not be compatible with theaccessory power outlet and couldoverload vehicle or adapter fuses.If a problem is experienced, seeyour dealer.

When adding electrical equipment,be sure to follow the properinstallation instructions includedwith the equipment. See Add-OnElectrical Equipment on page 9‑59.

Notice: Hanging heavyequipment from the poweroutlet can cause damage notcovered by the vehicle warranty.The power outlets are designedfor accessory power plugs only,such as cell phone charge cords.

Cigarette LighterThe vehicle may have a cigarettelighter. To use the lighter, push it inall the way and let go. When it isready, it will pop back out by itself.

Notice: Holding a cigarette lighterin while it is heating does not letthe lighter back away from theheating element when it is hot.Damage from overheating canoccur to the lighter or heatingelement, or a fuse could beblown. Do not hold a cigarettelighter in while it is heating.



AshtraysThe vehicle may havetwo removable ashtrays.One ashtray can be placed intothe instrument panel storagecompartment and the other into thecenter console rear compartment.

To empty the ashtrays, hold on tothe edges of the bin and pull straightout. To reinstall, push the tray backinto place.

Notice: If papers, pins, or otherflammable items are put in theashtray, hot cigarettes or othersmoking materials could ignitethem and possibly damage thevehicle. Never put flammableitems in the ashtray.

Warning Lights,Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning lights and gauges cansignal that something is wrongbefore it becomes serious enoughto cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to thewarning lights and gauges couldprevent injury.

Warning lights come on when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Some warning lights comeon briefly when the engine is startedto indicate they are working.

Gauges can indicate when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Often gauges and warninglights work together to indicate aproblem with the vehicle.

When one of the warning lightscomes on and stays on whiledriving, or when one of the gaugesshows there may be a problem,check the section that explains whatto do. Follow this manual's advice.Waiting to do repairs can be costlyand even dangerous.



Instrument Cluster

English shown, Metric similar



English V-Series shown, Metric and Manual similar



SpeedometerThe speedometer shows thevehicle's speed in either kilometersper hour (km/h) or miles perhour (mph).

OdometerThe odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven, in eitherkilometers or miles.

This vehicle has a tamper‐resistantodometer. The digital odometer willread 999,999 if it is turned back.

If the vehicle needs a new odometerinstalled, it must be set to themileage total of the old odometer.If that is not possible, then it mustbe set at zero and a label must beput on the driver door to show theold mileage reading when the newodometer was installed.

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer can record thenumber of kilometers or milestraveled for up to two trips.

The trip odometer is part of theDriver Information Center (DIC);for more information see DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑27.

For vehicles that have thenavigation system, see theNavigation System manual formore information.

TachometerThe tachometer displays theengine speed in revolutions perminute (rpm).

Notice: If the engine is operatedwith the tachometer in the shadedwarning area, the vehicle couldbe damaged, and the damageswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Do not operatethe engine with the tachometer inthe shaded warning area.

The CTS-V tachometer has tracerlights that follow the movement ofthe tachometer indicator. The tracerlights also flash when it is time to

up-shift to avoid the enginespeed limit. See AutomaticTransmission on page 9‑26 orManual Transmission on page 9‑31for more information.

Fuel Gauge

When the ignition is on, the fuelgauge indicates how much fuel isleft in the tank.

An arrow on the fuel gaugeindicates the side of the vehiclethe fuel door is on.



The Fuel Level Low messageappears in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) and a single chimesounds. See Fuel SystemMessages on page 5‑36 for moreinformation.

Normal operation of the fuel gaugeincludes:. At the service station, the fuel

pump shuts off before the gaugereads full.

. It takes a little more or lessfuel to fill up than the gaugeindicated.

. The gauge moves a little whileturning a corner or speeding up.

. The gauge takes a few secondsto stabilize after the ignition isturned on, and goes back toempty when the ignition isturned off.

Boost Gauge

Metric

English

For the CTS-V, this gauge is locatedin the instrument panel cluster.

This gauge indicates positivemanifold pressure which is theinduction air pressure level in theintake manifold before it enters thecombustion chamber. This gaugereads zero under light throttle beforeboost is generated.

The gauge automatically resetsto zero every time the engine isstarted.

Engine Speed LimiterThis feature prevents the enginespeed from reaching an unsafelevel. If the level is too high, thethrottle closes or limits the fuelsupply until the engine speedreturns to a safe level. Throttleoperation and fuel supply returnto normal when engine speed islowered.



For the CTS-V, the tachometertracer lights flash prior to reachingengine speed limit. The tracer lightsalso flash on automatic transmissionvehicles while in the DSC or TapShift modes.

Engine Oil PressureGauge

Metric

English

For vehicles with an engine oilpressure gauge, it shows the engineoil pressure in kPa (kilopascals)or psi (pounds per square inch)when the engine is running.

Oil pressure may vary with enginespeed, outside temperature, and oilviscosity, but if readings are outsidethe normal operating range, the oilpressure light will come on. SeeEngine Oil Pressure Light onpage 5‑25 for more information.

A reading outside the normaloperating range may be causedby a dangerously low oil level orsome other problem causing low oilpressure. Oil should be checked assoon as possible. See Oil PressureLow Stop Engine under DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑27 and Engine Oil onpage 10‑10.

{ WARNING

Do not keep driving if the oilpressure is low. The engine canbecome so hot that it catches fire.Someone could be burned. Checkthe oil as soon as possible andhave the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always follow the maintenanceschedule for changing engine oil.



Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge

Metric

English

This gauge shows the enginecoolant temperature. If the enginecoolant overheats, the enginecoolant temperature warning lightcomes on. See Engine CoolantTemperature Warning Light onpage 5‑24 and Engine Overheatingon page 10‑24 for more information.

Safety Belt Reminders

Driver Safety Belt ReminderLight

There is a driver safety beltreminder light on the instrumentpanel cluster.

When the engine is started, this lightcomes on and a chime sounds forseveral seconds to remind a driverto fasten the safety belt, unless thedriver safety belt is already buckled.The safety belt light flashes forseveral seconds, then comes onsolid for several more.

This cycle repeats if the driverremains unbuckled and the vehicleis moving.



If the driver safety belt is alreadybuckled, neither the light nor thechime comes on.

Passenger Safety BeltReminder Light

Several seconds after the engineis started, a chime sounds for anumber of seconds to remind thefront passenger to buckle theirsafety belt. The passenger safetybelt light comes on and stays on forseveral seconds, flashes for severalmore seconds, and then comes onsolid for several more.

This cycle repeats if the passengerremains unbuckled and the vehicleis moving.

If the passenger safety belt isbuckled, neither the chime nor thelight comes on.

The front passenger safety beltwarning light and chime may turnon if an object such as a briefcase,handbag, grocery bag, laptop,or other electronic device is put onthe seat . To turn off the warninglight and/or chime, remove theobject from the seat or buckle thesafety belt.

Airbag Readiness LightThis light shows if there is anelectrical problem. The systemcheck includes the airbag sensor,the pretensioners, the airbagmodules, the wiring, and the crashsensing and diagnostic module.For more information on the airbagsystem, see Airbag System onpage 3‑30.

The airbag readiness light comes onand stays on for several secondswhen the vehicle is started. Thenthe light goes out.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags inthe vehicle might not inflate in acrash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoidinjury, have the vehicle servicedright away.



Passenger Airbag StatusIndicatorThe vehicle has a passengersensing system. See PassengerSensing System on page 3‑37 forimportant safety information. Theinstrument panel has a passengerairbag status indicator.

United States

Canada and Mexico

When the vehicle is started, thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light the words ON and OFF,or the symbols for on and off, for

several seconds as a system check.If the vehicle has remote start, andit is being used to start the vehiclefrom a distance, you may not seethe system check. Then, afterseveral more seconds, the statusindicator will light either ON or OFF,or either the on or off symbol, to letyou know the status of the right frontpassenger frontal airbag.

If the word ON or the on symbol islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that the outboardfront passenger frontal airbag isenabled (may inflate).

If the word OFF or the off symbolis lit on the passenger airbagstatus indicator, it means that thepassenger sensing system hasturned off the outboard frontpassenger frontal airbag.

If, after several seconds, bothstatus indicator lights remain on,or if there are no lights at all, theremay be a problem with the lights orthe passenger sensing system. Seeyour dealer for service.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑17 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.



Charging System Light

The charging system light comes onbriefly when the ignition is turnedon, but the engine is not running, asa check to show the light is working.It should go out when the engine isstarted.

If the light stays on, or comes onwhile driving, there may be aproblem with the electrical chargingsystem. Have it checked by yourdealer. Driving while this light is oncould drain the battery.

When this light comes on, the DriverInformation Center (DIC) alsodisplays a message.

See Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages on page 5‑31.

If a short distance must be drivenwith the light on, be sure to turn offall accessories, such as the radioand air conditioner.

MalfunctionIndicator LampA computer system called OBD II(On-Board Diagnostics-SecondGeneration) monitors operation ofthe fuel, ignition, and emissioncontrol systems. It ensures thatemissions are at acceptable levelsfor the life of the vehicle, helping toproduce a cleaner environment.

This light should come on when theignition is on, but the engine is notrunning, as a check to show it isworking. If it does not, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.

If the Malfunction Indicator Lampcomes on and stays on while theengine is running, this indicates thatthere is an OBD II problem andservice is required.



Malfunctions often are indicated bythe system before any problem isapparent. Being aware of the lightcan prevent more serious damageto the vehicle. This system assiststhe service technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.

Notice: If the vehicle iscontinually driven with this lighton, after a while, the emissioncontrols might not work as well,the vehicle fuel economy mightnot be as good, and the enginemight not run as smoothly. Thiscould lead to costly repairs thatmight not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Notice: Modifications made to theengine, transmission, exhaust,intake, or fuel system of thevehicle or the replacementof the original tires with otherthan those of the same TirePerformance Criteria (TPC) canaffect the vehicle's emissioncontrols and can cause this lightto come on. Modifications tothese systems could lead to

costly repairs not covered bythe vehicle warranty. Thiscould also result in a failureto pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10‑3.

This light comes on during amalfunction in one of two ways:

Light Flashing: A misfire conditionhas been detected. A misfireincreases vehicle emissions andcould damage the emission controlsystem on the vehicle. Diagnosisand service might be required.

To prevent more serious damage tothe vehicle:. Reduce vehicle speed.. Avoid hard accelerations.. Avoid steep uphill grades.. If towing a trailer, reduce the

amount of cargo being hauledas soon as it is possible.

If the light continues to flash,when it is safe to do so, stop thevehicle. Find a safe place to parkthe vehicle. Turn the vehicle off,wait at least 10 seconds, andrestart the engine. If the light is stillflashing, follow the previous stepsand see your dealer for service assoon as possible.

Light On Steady: An emissioncontrol system malfunction hasbeen detected on the vehicle.Diagnosis and service might berequired.

The following may correct anemissions system malfunction:. Make sure the fuel cap is

fully installed. See Filling theTank on page 9‑50. Thediagnostic system can determineif the fuel cap has been left off orimproperly installed. A loose ormissing fuel cap allows fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere.A few driving trips with the capproperly installed should turn thelight off.



. Make sure the electricalsystem is not wet. The systemcould be wet if the vehicle wasdriven through a deep puddle ofwater. The condition is usuallycorrected when the electricalsystem dries out. A few drivingtrips should turn the light off.

. Make sure to fuel the vehiclewith quality fuel. Poor fuel qualitycauses the engine not to run asefficiently as designed and cancause: stalling after start-up,stalling when the vehicle ischanged into gear, misfiring,hesitation on acceleration,or stumbling on acceleration.These conditions might go awayonce the engine is warmed up.

If one or more of theseconditions occurs, change thefuel brand used. It will require atleast one full tank of the properfuel to turn the light off.

See Recommended Fuel onpage 9‑48.

If none of the above have madethe light turn off, your dealercan check the vehicle. The dealerhas the proper test equipmentand diagnostic tools to fix anymechanical or electrical problemsthat might have developed.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance Programs

Some state/provincial and localgovernments may have programsto inspect the on-vehicle emissioncontrol equipment. For theinspection, the emission systemtest equipment is connectedto the vehicle’s Data LinkConnector (DLC).

The DLC is under the instrumentpanel to the left of the steeringwheel. See your dealer if assistanceis needed.

The vehicle may not passinspection if:. The malfunction indicator

lamp is on with the enginerunning, or if the light does notcome on when the ignition isturned to ON/RUN while theengine is off.

. The critical emissioncontrol systems have notbeen completely diagnosedby the system. This canhappen if the battery hasrecently been replaced orif the battery has run down.



The diagnostic system evaluatescritical emission control systemsduring normal driving. This cantake several days of routinedriving. If this has been doneand the vehicle still does notpass the inspection, your dealercan prepare the vehicle forinspection.

Brake System WarningLightThe vehicle brake system consistsof two hydraulic circuits. If onecircuit is not working, the remainingcircuit can still work to stop thevehicle. For normal brakingperformance, both circuits needto be working

If the warning light comes on, thereis a brake problem. Have the brakesystem inspected right away.

Metric English

This light should come on brieflywhen the ignition is placed inON/RUN. If it does not come onthen, have it fixed so it will be readyto warn if there is a problem.

When the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light also comes onwhen the parking brake is set.

The light flashes or stays on if theparking brake is not fully released.

If the light stays on after the parkingbrake is fully released, there is abase brake problem.

{ CAUTION

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on.Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to acrash. If the light is still on afterthe vehicle has been pulled offthe road and carefully stopped,have the vehicle towed forservice.

For vehicles with the Electric ParkBrake (EPB), this red brake warninglight comes on when the park brakeis applied. If the light continuesflashing after the park brake isreleased, or while driving, there is aproblem with the Electric ParkingBrake system.

If the light does not come on,or remains flashing, see yourdealer.



For vehicles with the Electric ParkBrake (EPB), this park brake statuslight should come on briefly whenignition is placed in ON/RUN. If itdoes not come on then, have it fixedso it will be ready to warn if there isa problem.

If this park brake light comes on,there is a problem with a system onthe vehicle that is causing the parkbrake system to work at a reducedlevel. The vehicle can still be driven,but should be taken to a dealer

See Brake Assist (Except CTS-V)on page 9‑37 for more information.

Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

For vehicles with the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), this light comes onbriefly when the engine is started.

If the light does not come on, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn ifthere is a problem.

If the ABS light stays on, turn theignition off. If the light comes onwhile driving, stop as soon as it issafely possible and turn the ignitionoff. A chime may also sound whenthe light comes on steady. If thishappens, start the engine again toreset the system. If the ABS lightstays on, or comes on again whiledriving, the vehicle needs service.If the regular brake system warninglight is not on, the vehicle still has

brakes, but not antilock brakes.If the regular brake system warninglight is also on, the vehicle does nothave antilock brakes and there is aproblem with the regular brakes.See Brake System Warning Light onpage 5‑22.

For vehicles with a DriverInformation Center (DIC), seeDriver Information Center (DIC) onpage 5‑27 for all brake related DICmessages.

Up-Shift Light

The vehicle may have an up-shiftlight. It indicates when to shift tothe next higher gear for best fueleconomy.

See Manual Transmission onpage 9‑31 for more information.



For the CTS-V, the tracer lightsfunction as a performance up-shiftlight.

The tracers flash to indicate whento shift to the next higher gear toavoid the engine speed limit.See Automatic Transmission onpage 9‑26 or Manual Transmissionon page 9‑31 for more information.

Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light

The Traction Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak warning light shouldcome on briefly when the engine isstarted.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If thesystem is working normally, theindicator light then goes off.

If the light comes on or stays onwhile driving, there may be aproblem with the TCS/StabiliTrakand the vehicle may need service.When this warning light is on, thesystem does not limit wheel spin.Adjust driving accordingly.

See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9‑38 and StabiliTrak®

System on page 9‑39 for moreinformation.

Engine CoolantTemperature WarningLight

The engine coolant temperaturewarning light comes on briefly whenthe engine is started.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If thesystem is working normally, theindicator light then goes off.

If the light comes on and stays onwhile driving, the vehicle may havea problem with the cooling system.Stop the vehicle and turn off theengine to avoid damage to theengine. A warning chime soundswhen this light is on.

See Engine Overheating onpage 10‑24 for more information.

Tire Pressure Light

For vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), this lightcomes on briefly when the engineis started. It provides informationabout tire pressures and the TPMS.



When the Light is On Steady

This indicates that one or moreof the tires are significantlyunderinflated.

A tire pressure message canaccompany the light. See TireMessages on page 5‑44 for moreinformation. Stop as soon aspossible, and inflate the tires to thepressure value shown on the Tireand Loading Information label. SeeTire Pressure on page 10‑72 formore information.

When the Light Flashes First andThen is On Steady

This indicates that there may be aproblem with the Tire PressureMonitor System. The light flashesfor about a minute and stays onsteady for the remainder of theignition cycle. This sequencerepeats with every ignition cycle.See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10‑75 for moreinformation.

Engine Oil Pressure Light

{ WARNING

Do not keep driving if the oilpressure is low. The engine canbecome so hot that it catches fire.Someone could be burned. Checkthe oil as soon as possible andhave the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always follow the maintenanceschedule for changing engine oil.

The oil pressure light should comeon briefly as the engine is started.If it does not come on have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.

If the light comes on and stays on, itmeans that oil is not flowing throughthe engine properly. The vehiclecould be low on oil and might havesome other system problem. Seeyour dealer.



Security Light

This light flashes when the securitysystem is activated.

For more information, see VehicleSecurity on page 2‑25.

High-Beam On Light

The high-beam on light comes onwhen the high-beam headlamps arein use.

See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger on page 6‑2 for moreinformation.

Front Fog Lamp Light

The front fog lamp light comes onwhen the fog lamps are in use.

The light goes out when the foglamps are turned off. See FogLamps on page 6‑5 for moreinformation.

Lamps On Reminder

This light comes on whenever theparking lamps are on.

See Exterior Lamps Off Reminderon page 6‑2 for more information.



Cruise Control Light

This light comes on whenever thecruise control is active.

The light goes out when the cruisecontrol is turned off. See CruiseControl on page 9‑41 for moreinformation.

Information Displays

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The Driver Information Center (DIC)provides status of many vehiclesystems. The DIC displays warning/status messages. The DIC displayis at the bottom of the instrumentpanel cluster. The DIC buttons areon the instrument panel next to thesteering wheel.

The DIC comes on when the ignitionis on. After a short delay, the DICdisplays the information that waslast displayed before the enginewas turned off.

The top line of the DIC displayshows the DIC information. Thebottom line shows the compass.The compass displays in thetrip/fuel menus and in somevehicle information menus.

If a problem is detected, a warningmessage appears on the display. Allmessages should be taken seriouslyand clearing the message does notcorrect the problem.

DIC Operation and Displays

Press the DIC buttons to access thedifferent displays.

3 (Trip/Fuel): Press to scrollthrough the trip and fuel displays.See “Trip/Fuel Display Menu Items”following for more information.



T (Vehicle Information): Pressto scroll through the vehicleinformation displays. See “VehicleInformation Display Menu Items”following for more information.

U (Customization): Pressto scroll through each of thecustomization features. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑46 formore information.

V (Set/Reset): Press to resetcertain DIC features and toacknowledge and clear DICwarning messages.

yz (Menu Up/Down): Press toscroll up and down the menu items.

Trip/Fuel Display Menu Items

3 (Trip/Fuel): Press to displaythe following menu items:

Odometer

Displays the distance the vehiclehas been driven in either miles (mi)or kilometers (km).

Trip A or Trip B

Displays the current distancetraveled since the last reset for eachtrip odometer in either miles (mi) orkilometers (km). Both odometerscan be used at the same time.Reset each trip odometer to zero bypressing and holding the set/resetbutton when Trip A or Trip B isdisplayed.

Fuel Range

Displays the approximate remainingkilometers (km) or miles (mi) youcan drive without refilling the fueltank. This estimate is based on thecurrent driving conditions andchanges if the driving conditionschange. For example, freewaydriving may produce better fueleconomy than city driving withfrequent stops, so the range wouldadjust for that.

Once the range drops below about30 miles (48 km) remaining, thedisplay shows Low Range.

If the fuel is low, the Fuel Level Lowmessage displays. See “Fuel LevelLow” under Fuel System Messageson page 5‑36 for more information.

AVG (Average) Economy

Displays the approximate averageliters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km)or miles per gallon (mpg). Thecalculation is based on the numberof L/100 km (mpg) recorded sincethe last time this display was reset.Press the set/reset button to resetto zero.

Timer

Can be used to measure time. Forexample, timing how long it takes totravel from one point to another. Toaccess the timer, press the trip/fuelbutton until Timer 00:00:00 displays.

To turn on the timer, press theset/reset button.



To turn off the timer, press theset/reset button again. The timerdisplays the end timing value.

To reset the timer to zero, press andhold the set/reset button.

Inst (Instantaneous) Economy

Displays the current fuel economyin either liters per 100 kilometers(L/100 km) or miles pergallon (mpg). This numberchanges frequently as drivingconditions change. It cannot bereset.

AVG (Average) Speed

Displays the average speed of thevehicle in either kilometers perhour (km/h) or miles per hour (mph).This calculation is based on thevarious vehicle speeds recordedsince the last reset of this display.Press the set/reset button to resetto zero.

Speedometer

Displays a digital speedometer inthe DIC. The speed displays ineither miles per hour (mph) orkilometers per hour (km/h). Tochange the units from English tometric, see “Units” later in thissection.

Blank Display

This display shows no information.

Vehicle Information DisplayMenu Items

T (Vehicle Information): Pressto display the following menu items:

Oil Life Remaining

If the vehicle has this display,it shows the estimated oil liferemaining. If you see 99% Oil LifeRemaining on the display, thatmeans that 99% of the current oillife remains.

When the oil life is depleted, theChange Engine Oil Soon messagedisplays. Change the oil as soon aspossible. Additional maintenanceis also recommended in theMaintenance Schedule in thismanual. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 11‑2 andEngine Oil on page 10‑10.

The Oil Life must be reset aftereach oil change. Avoid accidentalresetting of the Oil Life system.It cannot be reset accurately untilthe next oil change. To reset theengine oil life system, See EngineOil Life System on page 10‑14.The system is reset when100% displays.

Units

Select to display English orMetric units of measure. Press theset/reset button to select when unitsis displayed.



Parking Assist

If the vehicle has the UltrasonicRear Parking Assist (URPA) system,this display allows the system tobe turned on or off. Once in thisdisplay, press the set/reset buttonto select between On or Off. TheURPA system automatically turnsback on after each vehicle start.When the URPA system is turnedoff and the vehicle is shifted outof P (Park), the DIC displays theParking Assist Off message as areminder that the system has beenturned off. See Object DetectionSystem Messages on page 5‑40and Ultrasonic Parking Assist onpage 9‑43 for more information.

Tire Pressure

Tire pressure is displayed inthe DIC for each tire in eitherkilopascals (kPa) or pounds persquare inch (psi). Press the vehicleinformation button until the DICdisplays Front Tire kPa (PSI)Left ## Right ##. Press the vehicle

information button again until theDIC displays Rear Tire kPa (PSI)Left ## Right ##.

If a low tire pressure conditionis detected by the system whiledriving, a message advises to addair to a specific tire displays. SeeTire Pressure on page 10‑72 andTire Messages on page 5‑44 formore information.

Battery Voltage

This display shows the currentbattery voltage. The vehicle'scharging system regulates voltagebased on the state of the battery.The battery voltage may fluctuatewhen viewing this information on theDIC. This is normal.

If there is a problem with thebattery charging system, thecharging system light illuminatesand/or the DIC displays a message.See Charging System Light onpage 5‑19, Battery Voltage andCharging Messages on page 5‑31and Battery Load Management onpage 6‑6 for more information.

Calibrate Compass

The vehicle may have this feature.The compass can be manuallycalibrated. To calibrate the compassthrough the DIC, see “DICCompass” later in this section.

Change Compass Zone

The vehicle may have this feature.To change the compass zonethrough the DIC, see “DICCompass” later in this section.

Trans (Transmission) Temp(Temperature) (CTS-V Only)

This display shows the transmissionfluid temperature in either degreesFahrenheit (°F) or degreesCelsius (°C).

Oil Pressure (CTS-V Only)

This display shows the oil pressurein either pounds per squareinch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa).



Lateral Acceleration (CTS-V Only)

Lateral Acceleration measures theforce of a turn or corner. Forexample, when turning right, itforces to the left. This gaugedisplays the “g” force from 0.0 gto 2.0 g.

Blank Display

This display shows no information.

DIC Compass

The vehicle may have a compass inthe Driver Information Center (DIC).See Compass on page 5‑7 forinformation.

Vehicle MessagesMessages displayed on the DICindicate the status of the vehicleor some action may be neededto correct a condition. Multiplemessages may appear one afteranother.

The messages that do notrequire immediate action can beacknowledged and cleared bypressing V (Set/Reset).

The messages that requireimmediate action cannot be cleareduntil that action is performed.

All messages should be takenseriously and clearing the messagedoes not correct the problem.

The following are the possiblemessages and some informationabout them.

Battery Voltage andCharging Messages

BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE

This message displays when thesystem detects that the batteryvoltage is dropping below expectedlevels. The battery saver systemstarts reducing certain features ofthe vehicle that may be noticeable.At the point that the features aredisabled, this message is displayed.It means that the vehicle is trying tosave the charge in the battery.

Turn off all unnecessaryaccessories to allow the batteryto recharge.

The normal battery voltage rangeis 11.5 to 15.5 volts. You can monitorbattery voltage on the DIC bypressing the vehicle informationbutton until Battery Voltage isdisplayed.



BATTERY VOLTS LOW

This message displays when theelectrical system is charging lessthan 10 volts or the battery hasbeen drained.

If this message appearsimmediately after starting theengine, it is possible that thegenerator can still recharge thebattery. The battery should rechargewhile driving, but may take a fewhours to do so. Consider usingan auxiliary charger to boost thebattery after returning home orto a final destination. Make sureyou follow the manufacturer'sinstructions.

If this message appears whiledriving or after starting the vehicleand stays on, have it checkedimmediately to determine the causeof this problem.

To help the generator recharge thebattery quickly, reduce the load onthe electrical system by turning offthe accessories.

The normal battery voltage range is11.5 to 15.5 volts. Monitor batteryvoltage on the DIC by pressing thevehicle information button untilBattery Voltage is displayed.

SERVICE BATTERYCHARGING SYSTEM

This message displays when thereis a problem with the generator andbattery charging systems. Drivingwith this problem could drain thebattery. Turn off all unnecessaryaccessories. Stop and turn off thevehicle as soon as it is safe to doso. Have the electrical systemchecked by your dealer. Undercertain conditions, the chargingsystem light may also turn on inthe instrument panel cluster.See Charging System Light onpage 5‑19 for more information.

Brake System Messages

PARK BRAKE RELEASED

For vehicles with the ElectricParking Brake, this messagedisplays when the parking brakehas been released from the setposition. See the Electric ParkingBrake information under ParkingBrake (Manual) on page 9‑34or Parking Brake (Electric) onpage 9‑35 for more information.

PARK BRAKE SET

For vehicles with the ElectricParking Brake, this messagedisplays when the parking brakehas been applied to the set position.See the Electric Parking Brakeinformation under Parking Brake(Manual) on page 9‑34 or ParkingBrake (Electric) on page 9‑35 formore information.



PRESS BRAKE TO STARTENGINE (AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION ONLY)

If the vehicle has the keylessaccess system, this messagedisplays if you try to start the enginewithout having the brake pressed.The brake needs to be pressedwhen starting the engine. SeeIgnition Positions (Key Access) onpage 9‑17 or Ignition Positions(Keyless Access) on page 9‑18 formore information.

RELEASE PARK BRAKESWITCH

For vehicles with the ElectricParking Brake, this messagedisplays if the Park Brake switch ispulled while the vehicle is moving.See the Electric Parking Brakeinformation under Parking Brake(Manual) on page 9‑34 or ParkingBrake (Electric) on page 9‑35 formore information.

SERVICE BRAKE ASSIST

This message displays if there isa problem with the brake system.The brake system warning light andthe antilock brake system (ABS)warning light may also display onthe instrument panel cluster. SeeBrake System Warning Light onpage 5‑22 and Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) Warning Light onpage 5‑23 for more information.Stop as soon as possible and turnoff the vehicle. Restart the vehicleand check for the message on theDIC display. If the message displaysimmediately or again after you begindriving, the brake system needsservice. See your dealer as soonas possible. See Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) on page 9‑33 formore information.

SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM

This message displays, while theignition is on, when the brake fluidlevel is low. The brake systemwarning light on the instrumentpanel cluster also comes on. SeeBrake System Warning Light onpage 5‑22 for more information. Thismessage may also be displayed forother brake system problems. Havethe brake system serviced by yourdealer as soon as possible.

SERVICE PARK BRAKE

For vehicles with the ElectricParking Brake, this messagedisplays if a problem is detectedwith the electric parking brakesystem. See your dealer for service.



STEP ON BRAKE TORELEASE PARK BRAKE

For vehicles with the ElectricParking Brake, this messagedisplays if you try to release thepark brake system without firstpressing the brake pedal. See theElectric Parking Brake informationunder Parking Brake (Manual) onpage 9‑34 or Parking Brake(Electric) on page 9‑35 for moreinformation.

Compass Messages

CALIBRATING DRIVE INCIRCLES

This message displays whencalibrating the compass. Drive thevehicle in circles at less than 5 mph(8 km/h) to complete the calibration.See Compass on page 5‑7 for moreinformation.

CALIBRATION COMPLETE

This message displays when thecompass calibration is complete.See Compass on page 5‑7 for moreinformation.

Cruise Control Messages

CRUISE SET TO XXXMPH(KM/H)

This message displays wheneverthe cruise control is set. See CruiseControl on page 9‑41 for moreinformation.

Door Ajar Messages

DRIVER DOOR OPEN

This message displays when thedriver door is not closed completely.Close the door completely.

HOOD OPEN

This message displays when thehood is not closed completely.Make sure that the hood is closedcompletely.

LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN

This message displays when thedriver side rear door is not closedcompletely. Make sure that the dooris closed completely.

PASSENGER DOOR OPEN

This message displays when thepassenger side front door is notclosed completely. Make sure thatthe door is closed completely.

REAR ACCESS OPEN (Wagon)

This message displays when theliftgate is not closed completely.Make sure that the liftgate is closedcompletely.

RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN

This message displays when thepassenger side rear door is notclosed completely. Make sure thatthe door is closed completely.



TRUNK OPEN(Sedan and Coupe)

This message displays when thetrunk is not closed completely.Make sure that the trunk is closedcompletely.

Engine Cooling SystemMessages

ENGINE HOT A/C (AIRCONDITIONING) OFF

This message displays when theengine coolant becomes hotter thanthe normal operating temperature.See Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge on page 5‑16. To avoidadded strain on a hot engine,the air conditioning compressorautomatically turns off. When thecoolant temperature returns tonormal, the air conditioningcompressor turns back on. Youcan continue to drive the vehicle.

If this message continues to appear,have the system repaired by yourdealer as soon as possible to avoiddamage to the engine.

ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLEENGINE

Notice: If you drive the vehiclewhile the engine is overheating,severe engine damage mayoccur. If an overheat warningappears on the instrument panelcluster and/or DIC, stop thevehicle as soon as possible.Do not increase the enginespeed above normal idling speed.See Engine Overheating onpage 10‑24 for more information.

This message displays when theengine coolant temperature is toohot. Stop and allow the vehicleto idle until it cools down. If themessage does not clear in a fewminutes or if the overheat light stayson, shut the vehicle off and haveit serviced before driving again.See Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light on page 5‑24.

See Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode on page 10‑25 forinformation on driving to a safeplace in an emergency.

Engine Oil Messages

CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON

When this message displays, itmeans that service is requiredfor the vehicle. See your dealer.See Scheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2 and Engine Oil onpage 10‑10 for more information.

When you reset the Change EngineOil Soon message by clearing itfrom the display, you still must resetthe engine oil life system separately.For more information on resettingthe engine oil life system, seeEngine Oil Life System onpage 10‑14.



ENGINE OIL LOW ADD OIL

If the vehicle has an oil level sensor,this message displays if the oil levelin the vehicle is low. Check the oillevel and correct it as necessary.You may need to let the vehicle coolor warm up and cycle the ignition tobe sure this message clears.

This message clears itself after10 seconds, until the next ignitioncycle. See Engine Oil onpage 10‑10 for additionalinformation.

OIL PRESSURE LOW STOPENGINE

Notice: If you drive the vehiclewhile the engine oil pressureis low, severe engine damagemay occur. If a low oil pressurewarning appears on theinstrument panel cluster and/orDIC, stop the vehicle as soon aspossible. Do not drive the vehicleuntil the cause of the low oil

pressure is corrected. See EngineOil on page 10‑10 for moreinformation.

This message displays when thevehicle's engine oil pressure is low.The oil pressure light may alsoappear on the instrument panelcluster. See Engine Oil PressureLight on page 5‑25. See Engine Oilon page 10‑10 for more information.

Stop the vehicle immediately, asengine damage can result fromdriving a vehicle with low oilpressure. Have the vehicle servicedby your dealer as soon as possiblewhen this message is displayed.

Engine Power Messages

ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED

This message displays when theengine power is being reduced toprotect the engine from damage.There could be several malfunctionsthat might cause this message.Reduced engine power can affectthe vehicle's ability to accelerate.

If this message is on, but thereis no reduction in performance,proceed to your destination. Theperformance may be reduced thenext time the vehicle is driven. Thevehicle may be driven at a reducedspeed while this message is on,but acceleration and speed may bereduced. Anytime this messagestays on, the vehicle should betaken to your dealer for service assoon as possible.

Fuel System Messages

FUEL LEVEL LOW

This message displays when thevehicle is low on fuel. Refill the fueltank as soon as possible. A chimemay sound when this messagedisplays. See Filling the Tank onpage 9‑50.



TIGHTEN GAS CAP

This message displays whenthe fuel cap has not been fullytightened. Recheck the fuel cap toensure that it is on and tightenedproperly.

Key and Lock Messages

ACCESSORY MODE ACTIVE

If the vehicle has the keylessaccess system, this messagedisplays when the accessory modeis active. See Ignition Positions (KeyAccess) on page 9‑17 or IgnitionPositions (Keyless Access) onpage 9‑18 for more information.

ELECTRONIC KEY ALREADYKNOWN

If the vehicle has the keylessaccess system, this messagedisplays if you try to match atransmitter that has already beenlearned. See the Keyless Access

information for Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation (KeyAccess) on page 2‑5 or RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation (Keyless Access) onpage 2‑7 for more information.

ELECTRONIC KEY NOTDETECTED

If the vehicle has the keylessaccess system, this messagedisplays if the vehicle does notdetect the presence of a transmitterwhen you have attempted to startthe vehicle or a vehicle door hasjust closed. The following conditionsmay cause this message to appear:. Driver-added equipment plugged

into the accessory power outleton the center console is causinginterference. Examples of thesedevices are cell phones and cellphone chargers, two-way radios,power inverters, or similar items.

Try moving the keyless accesstransmitter away from thesedevices when starting thevehicle. In addition, PDA devicesand remote garage and gateopeners may also generateElectromagnetic Interference(EMI) that may interfere with thekeyless access transmitter. Donot carry the keyless accesstransmitter in the same pocket orbag as these devices.

. The vehicle is experiencingElectromagnetic Interference(EMI). Some locations, such asairports, automatic toll booths,and some gas stations have EMIfields which may interfere withthe keyless access transmitter.



If moving the transmitter todifferent locations within thevehicle does not help, place thetransmitter in the center consoletransmitter pocket with thebuttons facing the front of thevehicle and then start thevehicle.

. The vehicle's battery voltage islow. The battery voltage mustbe above 10 volts for thekeyless access transmitterto be detected properly.

ELECTRONIC KEY NOTDETECTED RESTARTALLOWED

If the vehicle has the keylessaccess system, this messagedisplays when the keyless accesstransmitter is not detected inside thevehicle while you are trying to turnthe ignition off. The vehicle may benear a strong radio antenna signalcausing the keyless access systemto be jammed. If you have thekeyless access transmitter withyou, get out of the vehicle and lockthe doors. If you do not have thekeyless access transmitter with you,you will be able to start the vehicleagain within five minutes, or until thevehicle's content theft deterrentsystem is armed. See Starting theEngine on page 9‑19 for moreinformation.

LEARN DELAY ACTIVE WAITXXMIN (MINUTES)

If the vehicle has the keylessaccess system, this messagedisplays when matching newtransmitters to the vehicle. Seethe Keyless Access informationfor Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation (Key Access) onpage 2‑5 or Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation (KeylessAccess) on page 2‑7 for moreinformation.

MAXIMUM # ELECTRONICKEYS LEARNED

If the vehicle has the keylessaccess system, this messagedisplays when the maximumnumber of transmitters have beenlearned. See the Keyless Accessinformation for Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation (KeyAccess) on page 2‑5 or RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation (Keyless Access) onpage 2‑7 for more information.



PRESS START CONTROL TOLEARN KEYS

If the vehicle has the keylessaccess system, this messagedisplays when matching newtransmitters to the vehicle. See theKeyless Access information forRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation (Key Access) onpage 2‑5 or Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation (KeylessAccess) on page 2‑7 for moreinformation.

READY TO LEARNELECTRONIC KEY # X

If the vehicle has the keylessaccess system, this messagedisplays while matching newtransmitters to the vehicle. See theKeyless Access information forRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation (Key Access) onpage 2‑5 or Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation (KeylessAccess) on page 2‑7 for moreinformation.

REPLACE BATTERY INREMOTE KEY

This message displays when thebattery in the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) or keyless accesstransmitter needs to be replaced.To replace the battery, see“Battery Replacement” underRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation (Key Access) onpage 2‑5 or Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation (KeylessAccess) on page 2‑7.

ROTATE CONTROL TO OFFPOSITION

If the vehicle has the keylessaccess system, this messagedisplays when the ignition is inACC/ACCESSORY and the shiftlever has just been moved toP (Park). The message displays asa reminder to turn the ignition off.To avoid draining the battery, makesure the ignition is turned off beforeleaving the vehicle.

SERVICE KEYLESS STARTSYSTEM

If the vehicle has the keylessaccess system, this messagedisplays when there is a problemwith this feature. See your dealer.

Lamp Messages

AFL (ADAPTIVE FORWARDLIGHTING) LAMPS NEEDSERVICE

This message displays when theAdaptive Forward Lighting (AFL)system is disabled and needsservice. See your dealer. SeeAdaptive Forward Lighting (AFL) onpage 6‑4 for more information.



AUTOMATIC LIGHTCONTROL OFF

This message displays whenthe automatic headlamps areturned off.

AUTOMATIC LIGHTCONTROL ON

This message displays when theautomatic headlamps are turned on.

TURN SIGNAL ON

This message displays as areminder to turn off the turnsignal if you drive the vehicle formore than about 1.6 km (1 mile)with a turn signal on. A multiplechime sounds when this messagedisplays.

Object Detection SystemMessages

PARKING ASSIST OFF

If the vehicle has the UltrasonicRear Parking Assist (URPA) system,after the vehicle has been started,this message displays to remind thedriver that the URPA system hasbeen turned off. Press the set/resetbutton to acknowledge this messageand clear it from the DIC display.To turn the URPA system back on,see “Parking Assist” under DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑27. See Ultrasonic ParkingAssist on page 9‑43 for moreinformation.

SERVICE PARKING ASSIST

If the vehicle has the UltrasonicRear Parking Assist (URPA) system,this message displays if there is aproblem with the URPA system.See Ultrasonic Parking Assist onpage 9‑43 for more information. Seeyour dealer for service.

Ride Control SystemMessages

ALL WHEEL DRIVE OFF

If the vehicle has the All-WheelDrive (AWD) system, this messagedisplays when there is a temporarycondition making the AWD systemunavailable. The vehicle will runin 2WD. This could be caused by:. Loss of wheel or vehicle speed. AWD system overheat. Certain vehicle electrical

conditions

This message turns off when theabove conditions are no longerpresent and by resetting thewarning message.

To reset the warning message, turnthe ignition off and then back onagain after 30 seconds. If themessage stays on, see your dealerright away. See All-Wheel Drive onpage 9‑33 for more information.



SERVICE ALL WHEEL DRIVE

This message displays if a problemoccurs with the All-Wheel Drive(AWD) system. The vehicle will runin 2WD. This could be caused by:. An electronics problem. An AWD system oil overheat. Worn out or overheated clutch

plates. Various electrical issues

If this message appears, stop assoon as possible and turn off theignition for 30 seconds. Restart thevehicle and check for the messageon the DIC display. If the messageis still displayed or appears againwhen you begin driving, the systemneeds service. See your dealerright away.

SERVICE POWER STEERING

This message displays if a problemis detected with the speed variableassist steering system. When thismessage is displayed, you may

notice that the effort required tosteer the vehicle increases or feelsheavier, but you will still be able tosteer the vehicle. See Steering onpage 9‑4.

SERVICE STABILITRAK

This message displays if therehas been a problem detectedwith the StabiliTrak® system. TheTCS/StabiliTrak warning light onthe instrument panel cluster alsocomes on.

If this message comes on while youare driving, pull off the road as soonas possible and stop carefully. Tryresetting the system by turning theignition off then back on. If thismessage still stays on or comesback on again while you are driving,the vehicle needs service. Have theStabiliTrak system inspected byyour dealer as soon as possible.See StabiliTrak® System onpage 9‑39 for more information.

SERVICE SUSPENSIONSYSTEM

This message displays when thereis a problem with the Magnetic RideControl system. See Magnetic RideControl on page 9‑40 for moreinformation. Have the vehicleserviced by your dealer.

SERVICE TRACTIONCONTROL

This message displays whenthere is a problem with theTraction Control System (TCS). TheTCS/StabiliTrak warning light on theinstrument panel cluster also comeson. When this message displays,the system will not limit wheel spin.Adjust your driving accordingly. Seeyour dealer for service. See TractionControl System (TCS) on page 9‑38for more information.



STABILITRAKCOMPETITIVE MODE

This message displays whenthe Competitive Driving mode isselected. When in this mode,the Traction Control System (TCS)will not be operating and the TCS/StabiliTrak warning light will turn on.Adjust your driving accordingly. See“Competitive Driving Mode” underTraction Control System (TCS) onpage 9‑38 for more information.

STABILITRAK NOT READY

This message may display after firstdriving the vehicle and exceeding30 km/h (19 mph) for 30 seconds.The TCS/StabiliTrak warning lighton the instrument panel cluster alsocomes on. The StabiliTrak system isnot functional until the message hasturned off. See StabiliTrak® Systemon page 9‑39 for more information.

STABILITRAK OFF

This message displays whenyou turn off StabiliTrak, or whenthe stability control has beenautomatically disabled. TheTCS/StabiliTrak warning light onthe instrument panel cluster alsocomes on.

To realize the full benefits of thestability enhancement system, youshould normally leave StabiliTrakon. To turn the StabiliTrak systemon or off, see StabiliTrak® Systemon page 9‑39.

There are several conditions thatcan cause this message to appear.. One condition is overheating,

which could occur if StabiliTrakactivates continuously for anextended period of time.

. The message also displays ifthe brake system warning light ison. See Brake System WarningLight on page 5‑22.

. The message could displayif the stability system takeslonger than usual to complete itsdiagnostic checks due to drivingconditions.

. The message displays if anengine or vehicle relatedproblem has been detectedand the vehicle needs service.See your dealer.

The message turns off as soon asthe conditions that caused themessage to be displayed are nolonger present.

SUSPENSION MODE SPORT(CTS-V ONLY)

This message will be displayedwhen sport mode is selected usingthe Magnetic Ride Control button inthe center of the instrument panel.See Magnetic Ride Control onpage 9‑40 for more information.



SUSPENSION MODE TOUR(CTS-V ONLY)

This message will be displayedwhen touring mode is selectedusing the Magnetic Ride Controlbutton in the center of theinstrument panel. See MagneticRide Control on page 9‑40 for moreinformation.

Airbag System Messages

SERVICE AIR BAG

This message displays when thereis a problem with the airbag system.Have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer immediately. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑17 formore information.

Anti-Theft Alarm SystemMessages

SERVICE THEFT DETERRENTSYSTEM

This message displays when thereis a problem with the theft-deterrentsystem programmed in the key.A fault has been detected in thesystem which means that thesystem is disabled and it is notprotecting the vehicle. The vehicleusually restarts; however, you maywant to take the vehicle to yourdealer before turning off theengine. See Immobilizer Operation(Key Access) on page 2‑26 orImmobilizer Operation (KeylessAccess) on page 2‑27 for moreinformation.

START ABORTED BY THEFTDETERRENT

This message displays if there is acommunication problem betweenthe keyless access system andthe vehicle. The vehicle cannot bestarted when this message displays.See your dealer for service.

THEFT ATTEMPTED

This message displays if thetheft-deterrent system has detecteda break-in attempt while you wereaway from the vehicle. SeeAnti-Theft Alarm System onpage 2‑25 for more information.

Service Vehicle Messages

SERVICE A/C SYSTEM

This message displays when theelectronic sensors that control theair conditioning and heatingsystems are no longer working.Have the climate control systemserviced by your dealer if younotice a drop in heating and airconditioning efficiency.



SERVICE VEHICLE SOON

This message displays when anon-emissions related malfunctionoccurs. Have the vehicle servicedby your dealer as soon as possible.

Tire Messages

SERVICE TIRE MONITORSYSTEM

This message displays if a part onthe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) is not working properly.The tire pressure light also flashesand then remains on during thesame ignition cycle. See TirePressure Light on page 5‑24.Several conditions may causethis message to appear. See TirePressure Monitor Operation onpage 10‑75 for more information.If the warning comes on and stayson, there may be a problem with theTPMS. See your dealer.

TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE

This message displays when theTire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) is re-learning the tirepositions on the vehicle. The tirepositions must be re-learned afterrotating the tires or after replacing atire or sensor. See Tire Rotation onpage 10‑79, Tire Pressure MonitorSystem on page 10‑74, and TirePressure on page 10‑72 for moreinformation.

TIRE LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE

On vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays when thepressure in one or more of thevehicle’s tires is low. This messagealso displays LEFT FRONT, RIGHTFRONT, LEFT REAR, or RIGHTREAR to indicate the location of thelow tire.

The low tire pressure warninglight will also come on. See TirePressure Light on page 5‑24.

If a tire pressure message appearson the DIC, stop as soon as youcan. Inflate the tires by adding airuntil the tire pressure is equal to thevalues shown on the Tire LoadingInformation label. See Tires onpage 10‑64, Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑11, and Tire Pressure onpage 10‑72.

If the vehicle does not have a sparetire, the message will display “UseInflator Kit in Trunk”. Use the inflatorkit to inflate the tires to the correctpressure. See Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit on page 10‑89 formore information.

More than one tire pressuremessage can be received at atime. To read the other messages,press the set/reset button.

The DIC display also shows thetire pressure values. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑27.



Transmission Messages

DIFFERENTIAL HOT, REDUCESPEED (CTS-V ONLY)

This message displays and achime sounds if the differentialfluid temperature exceeds 150°C(300°F). Driving aggressively orat high speeds can cause thedifferential fluid temperature to behigher than normal. If this messageappears, you may continue to driveat a slower speed. If you have beenoperating the vehicle under normaldriving conditions, the vehicle mayneed service. See your dealer for aninspection.

To acknowledge the message,press V. The message reappearsand a chime sounds everytwo minutes until this conditionchanges. If you do not clear themessage, it will remain on until thecondition changes.

SERVICE TRANSMISSION

This message displays when thereis a problem with the vehicle'stransmission. Have the vehicleserviced by your dealer.

SHIFT TO PARK (AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION ONLY)

If the vehicle has the keylessaccess system, this messagedisplays if the vehicle is not inP (Park) while the engine is beingturned off. The vehicle will be inACC/ACCESSORY. Once the shiftlever is moved to P (Park), theignition needs to be turned off. If theignition is not turned off, the vehiclewill remain in ACC/ACCESSORY.To avoid draining the battery, turnthe ignition to off before leaving thevehicle.

SPORT MODE

This message displays when thevehicle is in sport mode. Thetransmission gear position will alsobe displayed when DSC is in use.See “Driver Shift Control (DSC)”under Automatic Transmission onpage 9‑26 for more information.

TRANSMISSION HOT IDLEENGINE

This message displays when thetransmission fluid in the vehicle istoo hot. Stop the vehicle and allow itto idle until the transmission coolsdown or until this message isremoved.

Vehicle Speed Messages

ICE POSSIBLE DRIVEWITH CARE

This message displays when theoutside temperature is cold enoughto create icy road conditions. Adjustyour driving accordingly.



SPEED LIMITED TOXXXKM/H (MPH)

This message displays when thevehicle speed is limited to 128 km/h(80 mph) because the vehicledetects a problem in the speedvariable assist steering, magneticride control, or automatic levelingcontrol systems. Have the vehicleserviced by your dealer.

Washer Fluid Messages

WASHER FLUID LOW ADDFLUID

This message displays when thevehicle is low on windshield washerfluid. Refill the windshield washerfluid reservoir as soon as possible.See Washer Fluid on page 10‑26 formore information.

VehiclePersonalizationVehicle customization allows certainfeatures to be programmed for onepreferred setting.

Only the customization optionsavailable will be displayed onthe DIC.

The default settings were presetwhen the vehicle left the factory, butmay have been changed.

The customization preferences areautomatically recalled.

To change customizationpreferences, use the followingprocedure.

Entering the FeatureSettings Menu

1. Turn the ignition on.

To avoid excessive drain on thebattery, it is recommended thatthe headlamps are turned off.

2. Press the customizationbutton to enter the featuresettings menu.

Feature Settings Menu Items

The following are customizationfeatures that allow you to programsettings to the vehicle:

Display In English

This feature will only display if alanguage other than English hasbeen set. This feature allows forchanging the language of the DICmessages back to English.

Press the customization button untilthe Press V To Display In Englishscreen appears on the DIC display.Press the set/reset button once toselect English as the language inwhich all DIC messages will appear.

Display Language

This feature allows you to selectthe language in which the DICmessages will appear.



Press the customization buttonuntil the Display Language screenappears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button once to accessthe settings for this feature. Thenpress the menu up/down button toscroll through the following settings:

English (default): All messageswill appear in English.

Deutsch: All messages will appearin German.

Italiano: All messages will appearin Italian.

Francais: All messages will appearin French.

Espanol: All messages will appearin Spanish.

Portugese: All messages willappear in Portugese.

Arabic: All messages will appear inArabic.

Chinese: All messages will appearin Chinese.

Japanese: All messages willappear in Japanese.

No Change: No change will bemade to this feature. The currentsetting will remain.

To select a setting, press theset/reset button while the desiredsetting is displayed on the DIC.

Auto Door Lock

This feature allows you to selectwhen the vehicle's doors willautomatically lock. See AutomaticDoor Locks on page 2‑17 for moreinformation.

Press the customization buttonuntil Auto Door Lock appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press themenu up/down button to scrollthrough the following settings:

Shift Out Of Park (default onAutomatic Transmission)(Automatic Transmission Only):The vehicle's doors automaticallylock when the doors are closed andthe vehicle is shifted out of P (Park).

At Vehicle Speed (default onManual Transmission): Thevehicle's doors automatically lockwhen the vehicle speed is above5 mph (8 km/h) for three seconds.



Auto Door Unlock

This feature allows you to selectwhether or not the door(s) willautomatically unlock. It also allowsyou to select which doors and whenthey will automatically unlock. SeeAutomatic Door Locks on page 2‑17for more information.



Press the customization button untilAuto Door Unlock appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press themenu up/down button to scrollthrough the following settings:

Off: None of the doors willautomatically unlock.

Driver Only At Off: Only the driverdoor will unlock when the ignition isturned off.

All At Off (default on ManualTransmission): All of the doorswill unlock when the ignition isturned off.

All In Park (default on AutomaticTransmission) (AutomaticTransmission Only): All of thedoors will unlock when the vehicle isshifted into P (Park).



Remote Door Lock Feedback

This feature allows you to select thetype of feedback you will receivewhen locking the vehicle with theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) orkeyless access transmitter, or whenthe vehicle is automatically lockedusing the Keyless Locking feature.You will not receive feedbackwhen locking the vehicle with thetransmitter if the doors are open.See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation (Key Access) onpage 2‑5 or Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation (KeylessAccess) on page 2‑7 or “KeylessLocking” later in this section formore information.

Press the customization button untilRemote Door Lock appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press themenu up/down button to scrollthrough the following settings:

Off: There will be no feedbackwhen you press the lock button onthe transmitter.

Lights Only: The exterior lampswill flash when you press the lockbutton on the transmitter.

Horn Only: The horn will sound onthe second press of the lock buttonon the transmitter.

Horn & Lights (default): Theexterior lamps will flash whenyou press the lock button on thetransmitter, and the horn will soundwhen the lock button is pressedagain within five seconds of theprevious command.





Remote Door Unlock Feedback

This feature allows you to select thetype of feedback you will receivewhen unlocking the vehicle with theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) orkeyless access transmitter, orwhen the vehicle is automaticallyunlocked using the Keyless Unlockfeature. You will not receivefeedback when unlocking thevehicle with the transmitter if thedoors are open. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation (Key Access) onpage 2‑5 or Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation (KeylessAccess) on page 2‑7 or “KeylessUnlock” later in this section for moreinformation.

Press the customization button untilRemote Door Unlock appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press themenu up/down button to scrollthrough the following settings:

Lights Off: The exterior lamps willnot flash when you press the unlockbutton on the transmitter.

Lights On (default): The exteriorlamps will flash when you press theunlock button on the transmitter.



Exit Lighting

This feature allows you to selectthe amount of time you want theexterior lamps to remain on whenit is dark enough outside. Thishappens after the key is turnedfrom ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF.

Press the customization buttonuntil Exit Lighting appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press themenu up/down button to scrollthrough the following settings:

Off: The exterior lamps will notturn on.

10 Seconds (default): The exteriorlamps will stay on for 10 seconds.

30 Seconds: The exterior lampswill stay on for 30 seconds.

2Minutes: The exterior lamps willstay on for two minutes.





Approach Lighting

This feature allows you to selectwhether or not to have the exteriorlights turn on briefly during low lightperiods after unlocking the vehicleusing the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) or keyless access transmitter.

Press the customization button untilApproach Lighting appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press themenu up/down button to scrollthrough the following settings:

Off: The exterior lights will not turnon when you unlock the vehicle withthe transmitter.

On (default): If it is dark enoughoutside, the exterior lights will turnon briefly when you unlock thevehicle with the transmitter.

The lights will remain on for20 seconds or until the lock buttonon the transmitter is pressed, orthe vehicle is no longer off. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)

System Operation (Key Access) onpage 2‑7 or Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation (KeylessAccess) on page 2‑7 for moreinformation.


To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the desiredsetting is displayed on the DIC.

Factory Settings

This feature allows you to set all ofthe customization features back totheir factory default settings.

Press the customization button untilFactory Settings appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press themenu up/down button to scrollthrough the following settings:

Restore All (default): Thecustomization features will be setto their factory default settings.

No Change: The customizationfeatures will not be set to theirfactory default settings.


Keyless Locking

If the vehicle has the keylessaccess system, this feature allowsyou to select whether the doorsautomatically lock during normalvehicle exit. When the ignition isturned off and all doors becomeclosed, the vehicle will determinehow many keyless accesstransmitters remain in the vehicleinterior. If at least one keylessaccess transmitter has beenremoved from the interior of thevehicle, the doors will lock afterseveral seconds.



For example, if there aretwo keyless access transmitters inthe vehicle and one is removed, theother will be locked in. The keylessaccess transmitter locked in thevehicle can still be used to startthe vehicle or unlock the doors,if needed. A person approachingthe outside of the locked vehiclewithout an authorized keylessaccess transmitter, however, willnot be able to open the door, evenwith a transmitter in the vehicle.See the Keyless Access informationfor Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation (Key Access) onpage 2‑5 or Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation (KeylessAccess) on page 2‑7 for moreinformation.

You may temporarily disablethe keyless locking feature bypressing the door unlock switch forthree seconds on an open door. Toenable keyless locking, transitionthe power mode from off.

To select whether the horn soundsor the lights flash when the vehicleis locked, see “Remote Door Lock”earlier in this section.

Press the customization button untilKeyless Locking appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press themenu up/down button to scrollthrough the following settings:

Off (default): The keyless lockingfeature will be disabled.

On: The keyless locking feature willbe enabled.

The doors will automatically lockseveral seconds after you turnthe ignition off, remove a keylessaccess transmitter from the interiorof the vehicle, and close all of thedoors.



Keyless Unlock

If the vehicle has the keylessaccess system, this feature allowsyou to select which doors willautomatically unlock when youapproach the vehicle with thekeyless access transmitter andopen the driver door. See theKeyless Access information forRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation (Key Access) onpage 2‑5 or Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation (KeylessAccess) on page 2‑7 for moreinformation.

To select whether the lights flashwhen the vehicle is unlocked, see“Remote Door Unlock” earlier in thissection.



Press the customization buttonuntil Keyless Unlock appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press themenu up/down button to scrollthrough the following settings:

Entry Door Only: Only the driverdoor will automatically unlock whenyou approach the vehicle with thekeyless access transmitter andopen the driver door.

All Doors (default): All doors willautomatically unlock when youapproach the vehicle with thekeyless access transmitter andopen the driver door.



Chime Volume

This feature allows you to select thevolume level of the chime.

Press the customization buttonuntil Chime Volume appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press themenu up/down button to scrollthrough the following settings:

Normal: The chime volume will beset to a normal level.

Loud: The chime volume will beset to a loud level.


There is no default for chimevolume. The volume will stay at thelast known setting.


Entry/Exit Recall

If the vehicle has this feature, itallows you to select your preferredautomatic recall of stored memoryand exit positions. See the “MemorySeat, Mirrors, and Steering Column”information under Power SeatAdjustment on page 3‑5 for moreinformation.

Press the customization button untilEntry/Exit Recall appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press themenu up/down button to scrollthrough the following settings.




Entry/Exit Recall Off (default):No automatic Entry/Exit Recall willoccur when entering or leaving thevehicle. The Exit recall will onlyoccur after pressing the doormounted EXIT button. This buttonwill cause the drivers seat to moverearward a certain distance, and thesteering column to move full upand full forward, if equipped. EntryRecall will only occur by pressingthe door mounted “1” or “2” button.

Entry/Exit Recall On (Vehicleswithout Power Tilt SteeringWheel): If this setting is selectedthe following option will be available.

Easy Exit will automatically movethe driver seat rearward a certaindistance when the key is removedfrom the ignition on Key Accessvehicles, or when the ignition isturned off and the driver dooropened on Keyless Accessvehicles. This movement will alsooccur when the door mounted EXITbutton is pressed.

Easy Entry will automatically recallthe driver seat and outside mirrormemory positions of the currentdriver (1 or 2) when the ignition isturned on.

Entry/Exit Recall On (Vehicleswith Power Tilt Steering Wheel):If this setting is selected thefollowing two options will beavailable.. Entry/Exit Steering and Seat:

Easy Exit will automaticallymove the steering column to afull up and full forward positionand move the driver seatrearward a certain distancewhen the key is removed fromthe ignition on Key Accessvehicles, or when the ignition isturned off and the driver dooropened on Keyless Accessvehicles. These movementswill also occur when the doormounted EXIT button is pressed.

Easy Entry will automaticallyrecall the driver seat, outsidemirrors and steering columnmemory positions of the currentdriver (1 or 2) when the ignitionis turned on.

. Entry/Exit Steering Only:Easy Exit will automaticallymove the steering column to afull up and full forward positionwhen the key is removed fromthe ignition on Key Accessvehicles, or when the ignition isturned off and the driver dooropened on Keyless Accessvehicles. This movement willalso occur when the doormounted EXIT button is pressed.

Easy Entry will automaticallyrecall the driver seat, outsidemirrors and steering columnmemory positions of the currentdriver (1 or 2) when the ignitionis turned on.




Exiting the FeatureSettings Menu

The feature settings menu will beexited when any of the followingoccurs:. The vehicle is no longer in

ON/RUN.. The trip/fuel or vehicle

information DIC buttons arepressed.

. The end of the feature settingsmenu is reached and exited.

. A 40 second time period haselapsed with no selection made.

Universal RemoteSystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑18 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-210/220/310.

Universal Remote SystemProgramming

This system provides a way toreplace up to three remote controltransmitters used to activatedevices such as garage dooropeners, security systems, andhome automation devices.

Do not use the Universal HomeRemote with any garage dooropener that does not have the stopand reverse feature. This includesany garage door opener modelmanufactured before April 1, 1982.

Read the instructions completelybefore attempting to program theUniversal Home Remote. Becauseof the steps involved, it may behelpful to have another personavailable to assist you withprogramming the Universal HomeRemote.

Keep the original hand-heldtransmitter for use in other vehiclesas well as for future Universal HomeRemote programming. It is alsorecommended that upon the saleof the vehicle, the programmedUniversal Home Remote buttonsshould be erased for securitypurposes. See “Erasing UniversalHome Remote Buttons” later in thissection.



When programming a garage door,park outside of the garage. Parkdirectly in line with and facing thegarage door opener motor-head orgate motor-head. Be sure thatpeople and objects are clear of thegarage door or gate that is beingprogrammed.

It is recommended that a newbattery be installed in yourhand-held transmitter for quickerand more accurate transmission ofthe radio-frequency signal.

Programming the UniversalHome Remote System

For questions or help programmingthe Universal Home RemoteSystem, call 1‐800‐355‐3515 or goto www.homelink.com.

Programming a garage door openerinvolves time-sensitive actions, soread the entire procedure beforestarting. Otherwise, the device willtime out and the procedure will haveto be repeated.

To program up to three devices:

1. From inside the vehicle, pressand hold down the two outsidebuttons at the same time,releasing only when theUniversal Home Remoteindicator light begins to flash,after 20 seconds. This step willerase the factory settings or allpreviously programmed buttons.

Do not hold down the buttons forlonger than 30 seconds and donot repeat this step to programthe remaining two UniversalHome Remote buttons.

2. Hold the end of your hand-heldtransmitter about 3 to 8 cm(1 to 3 inches) away from theUniversal Home Remote buttonswhile keeping the indicatorlight in view. The hand-heldtransmitter was supplied by themanufacturer of your garagedoor opener receiver (motorhead unit).

3. At the same time, press andhold both the Universal HomeRemote button to be used tocontrol the garage door and thehand-held transmitter button. Donot release the Universal HomeRemote button or the hand-heldtransmitter button until Step 4has been completed.

Some entry gates and garagedoor openers may requiresubstitution of Step 3 withthe procedure noted in “GateOperator and CanadianProgramming” later in thissection.



4. The indicator light on theUniversal Home Remote willflash slowly at first and thenrapidly after Universal HomeRemote successfully receivesthe frequency signal from thehand-held transmitter. Releaseboth buttons.

5. Press and hold the newly-trainedUniversal Home Remote buttonand observe the indicator light.. If the indicator light stays

on continuously, theprogramming is completeand the garage door shouldmove when the UniversalHome Remote button ispressed and released.There is no need tocontinue programmingSteps 6 through 8.

. If the Universal HomeRemote indicator lightblinks rapidly fortwo seconds and thenturns to a constantlight, continue with theprogramming Steps 6through 8.

It may be helpful to haveanother person assist withthe remaining steps.

6. After Steps 1 through 5 havebeen completed, locate insidethe garage the garage dooropener receiver (motor-headunit). Locate the “Learn” or

“Smart” button. The name andcolor of the button may vary bymanufacturer.

7. Firmly press and release the“Learn” or “Smart” button. Afteryou press this button, you willhave 30 seconds to completeStep 8.

8. Immediately return to thevehicle. Firmly press and holdthe Universal Home Remotebutton, selected in Step 3 tocontrol the garage door, fortwo seconds, and then releaseit. If the garage door does notmove, press and hold thesame button a second time fortwo seconds, and then releaseit. Again, if the door does notmove, press and hold thesame button a third time fortwo seconds, and then release.

The Universal Home Remoteshould now activate thegarage door.



To program the remaining twoUniversal Home Remote buttons,begin with Step 2 of “Programmingthe Universal Home RemoteSystem.” Do not repeat Step 1,as this will erase all previousprogramming from the UniversalHome Remote buttons.

Gate Operator and CanadianProgramming

If you have questions or needhelp programming the UniversalHome Remote System, call1-800-355-3515 or go towww.homelink.com.

Canadian radio-frequency lawsrequire transmitter signals to timeout or quit after several secondsof transmission. This may not belong enough for Universal HomeRemote to pick up the signal duringprogramming. Similarly, some U.S.gate operators are manufactured totime out in the same manner.

If you live in Canada, or you arehaving difficulty programming agate operator or garage dooropener by using the “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote”procedures, regardless of whereyou live, replace Step 3 under“Programming Universal HomeRemote” with the following:

Continue to press and hold theUniversal Home Remote buttonwhile you press and releaseevery two seconds (cycle) thehand-held transmitter button untilthe frequency signal has beensuccessfully accepted by theUniversal Home Remote.

The Universal Home Remoteindicator light will flash slowly atfirst and then rapidly. Proceedwith Step 4 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” tocomplete the training procedure.

Universal Remote SystemOperation

Using Universal Remote

Press and hold the appropriateUniversal Remote button for at leasthalf of a second. The indicator lightwill come on while the signal isbeing transmitted.



Erasing Universal RemoteButtons

All programmed buttons should beerased when the vehicle is sold orthe lease ends.

To erase all programmed buttons onthe Universal Remote device:

1. Press and hold down thetwo outside buttons until theindicator light begins to flash,after 20 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

Reprogramming a SingleUniversal Remote Button

To reprogram any of the threeUniversal Remote buttons, repeatthe programming instructionsearlier in this section, beginningwith Step 2.

For help or information on theUniversal Home Remote System,call the customer assistance phonenumber under Customer AssistanceOffices (U.S. and Canada) onpage 13‑4 or Customer AssistanceOffices (Mexico) on page 13‑5.


Lighting 6-1

Lighting

Exterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lamps OffReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Automatic HeadlampSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Adaptive ForwardLighting (AFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-4Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Interior LightingInstrument Panel IlluminationControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Lighting FeaturesEntry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Battery Load Management . . . . 6-6Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-8Exterior Lighting BatterySaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamp Controls

The exterior lamp control is locatedtoward the end of the turn signal/lane change lever.

O (Exterior Lamp Control): Turnthe band with this symbol on it tooperate the exterior lamps.

The exterior lamp control hasfour positions:

O (Off): Turns off all lamps, exceptthe Daytime Running Lamps (DRL).


6-2 Lighting

AUTO (Automatic): Turns theheadlamps on and off automatically,depending upon how much light isavailable outside of the vehicle.

; (Parking Lamps): Turns on theparking lamps together with thefollowing:. Sidemarker Lamps. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights

5 (Headlamps): Turns on theheadlamps, together with thepreviously listed lamps and lights.

Exterior Lamps OffReminderA warning chime will sound if theexterior lamp control is left on ineither the headlamp or parking lampposition and the driver door isopened with the ignition off.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam ChangerPush the turn signal/lane changelever away from you to turn the highbeams on. Pull the lever toward youand then release it to return to lowbeams.

If the vehicle is turned off while thehighbeams are on, they will comeon the next time the vehicle isstarted.

This indicator light turns on in theinstrument panel cluster when thehigh‐beam headlamps are on.

Flash-to-PassThis feature allows the high-beamheadlamps to be used to signal thedriver in front of you that you wantto pass.

Pull and hold the turn signal/lanechange lever toward you to use thisfeature. When this is done thefollowing will occur:. If the headlamps are off or in

low-beam mode, the high-beamheadlamps will turn on. They willstay on as long as the lever isheld there. Release the lever toturn them off.

. If the headlamps are already inhigh-beam mode, they willremain on high‐beam.


Lighting 6-3

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) canmake it easier for others to see thefront of your vehicle during the day.Fully functional daytime runninglamps are required on all vehiclesfirst sold in Canada.

The DRL system will make eitherthe reduced intensity low‐beamheadlamps or dedicated DRLs comeon when the following conditionsare met:. It is still daylight and the ignition

is in ON/RUN or START.. The exterior lamp control is in off

or AUTO and the headlampsare off.

. The automatic transmission isnot in P (Park).

When DRLs are on, only thereduced intensity low‐beamheadlamps or dedicated DRLs willbe on. The other exterior lamps andthe instrument panel cluster will notbe on.

When the exterior lamp control is inAUTO and it is dark enough outside,the DRL turns off and the low-beamheadlamps will turn on. When it isbright enough outside, the low-beamheadlamps will go off, and theDRL will turn back on. If the vehicleis started in a dark garage, theautomatic headlamp system comeson immediately. Once the vehicleleaves the garage, it takes aboutone minute for the automaticheadlamp system to change toDRL if it is light outside. During thatdelay, the instrument panel clustermay not be as bright as usual. Makesure the instrument panel brightnesslever is in the full bright position.See Instrument Panel IlluminationControl on page 6‑5.

Turning the exterior lamp control tooff or to the low-beam headlampposition will turn off the DRL. If theparking lamps or the fog lamps wereturned on instead, the DRL will stillturn off.

This will work regardless of gearposition and whether or not theparking brake is set.

Automatic HeadlampSystemWhen it is dark enough outside andthe exterior lamps control is in theautomatic position, the headlampscome on automatically. See ExteriorLamp Controls on page 6‑1.

The vehicle has a light sensorlocated on top of the instrumentpanel. Make sure it is not covered,or the headlamps will be on whenthey are not needed.

The system may also turn on theheadlamps when driving through aparking garage or tunnel.


6-4 Lighting

Adaptive ForwardLighting (AFL)The Adaptive Forward LightingSystem (AFL) pivots the headlampshorizontally to provide greater roadillumination while turning. To enableAFL, set the exterior lamp switch onthe multifunction lever to the AUTOposition. Moving the switch out ofthe AUTO position will deactivatethe system. AFL will operate whenthe vehicle speed is greater than3 km/h (2 mph). AFL will notoperate when the transmission is inR (Reverse). AFL is not immediatelyoperable after starting the vehicle;driving a short distance is requiredto calibrate the AFL. See ExteriorLamp Controls on page 6‑1.

Hazard Warning Flashers| Hazard Warning Flasher:Press this button located on theinstrument panel near the audiosystem, to make the front and rearturn signal lamps flash on and off.

This warns others that you arehaving trouble. Press again to turnthe flashers off.

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

An arrow on the instrument panelcluster flashes in the direction of theturn or lane change.

Move the lever all the way up ordown to signal a turn.

Raise or lower the lever until thearrow starts to flash to signal a lanechange. Hold it briefly until the lanechange is complete. The arrow willautomatically flash three times.

The lever returns to its startingposition when it is released.

If after signaling a turn or lanechange the arrow flashes rapidly ordoes not come on, a signal bulbmay be burned out.

Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulbis not burned out, check the fuse.See Fuses and Circuit Breakers onpage 10‑41.

Turn Signal On Chime

If the turn signal is left on for about1.6 km (1 mile), a warning chime willsound and the TURN SIGNAL ONmessage will appear on the DriverInformation Center (DIC) display.See “Turn Signal On” under DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑27 for more information.


Lighting 6-5

Fog LampsUse the fog lamps for better visionin foggy or misty conditions. The foglamp control is located on the turnsignal/multifunction lever.

# (Fog Lamps): Turn the foglamp band on the lever up to # andrelease it, to turn the fog lamps onor off. The band will return to itsoriginal position.

The parking lamps must be on forthe fog lamps to work.

If the high-beam headlamps areturned on, the fog lamps will alsoturn off. They will turn back on againwhen you change back to low-beamheadlamps.

Some localities have laws thatrequire the headlamps to be onalong with the fog lamps.

Interior Lighting

Instrument PanelIllumination ControlThe instrument panel brightnessknob is located on the instrumentpanel to the left of the steeringcolumn.

D (Instrument PanelBrightness): Turn the knobclockwise or counterclockwise tobrighten or dim the lights. Turn theknob completely clockwise to turnon the interior lamps.

Reading LampsThe reading lamps are located onthe overhead console. These lampscome on automatically when anydoor is opened.

For manual operation, press thebutton next to each lamp to turn iton or off.

If the reading lamps are left on, theyautomatically shut off 10 minutesafter the ignition has beenturned off.


6-6 Lighting

Lighting Features

Entry LightingThe headlamps, taillamps, licenseplate lamps, reverse lamps, domelamps, and most of the interior lightsturn on briefly, when the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) K is pressed,or when the door handle is pulledon a Keyless Access Vehicle. SeeIgnition Positions (Key Access) onpage 9‑17 or Ignition Positions(Keyless Access) on page 9‑18.After about 30 seconds the exteriorlamps turn off, and then the domeand remaining interior lights will dimto off. Entry lighting can be disabledmanually by changing the ignitionout of the OFF position, or bypressing the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) Q button.

This feature can be changed. SeeVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑46.

Exit LightingThe headlamps, taillamps, parkinglamps, reverse lamps, and licenseplate lamps come on at night, or inareas with limited lighting, when thekey is removed from the ignition.The dome lamps also come onwhen the key is removed from theignition. The exterior lights anddome lamps remain on after thedoor is closed for a set amount oftime, then automatically turn off.

For a vehicle with Keyless Access,the exterior lights and dome lampsautomatically turn on when a door isopened after the ignition is turnedoff. See Ignition Positions (KeyAccess) on page 9‑17 or IgnitionPositions (Keyless Access) onpage 9‑18.

The exterior lights turn offimmediately by turning the exteriorlamps control to OFF.

This feature can be changed. SeeVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑46.

Parade DimmingThis feature does not let theinstrument panel backlight dimduring daylight hours while thekey is in the ignition and theheadlamps are on. Parade dimmingautomatically works with the lightsensor, located on top of thedashboard. If it is dark enoughoutside and the parking lamps areon, the backlight on the instrumentpanel can be adjusted by turning theinstrument panel brightness knobclockwise or counterclockwise tobrighten or dim the lighting. SeeInstrument Panel IlluminationControl on page 6‑5.

Battery LoadManagementThe vehicle has Electric PowerManagement (EPM) that estimatesthe battery's temperature and stateof charge. It then adjusts the voltagefor best performance and extendedlife of the battery.


Lighting 6-7

When the battery's state of chargeis low, the voltage is raised slightlyto quickly bring the charge back up.When the state of charge is high,the voltage is lowered slightly toprevent overcharging. If the vehiclehas a voltmeter gauge or a voltagedisplay on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), you may see thevoltage move up or down. This isnormal. If there is a problem, analert will be displayed.

The battery can be discharged atidle if the electrical loads are veryhigh. This is true for all vehicles.This is because the generator(alternator) may not be spinning fastenough at idle to produce all thepower that is needed for very highelectrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs whenseveral of the following are on, suchas: headlamps, high beams, foglamps, rear window defogger,climate control fan at high speed,heated seats, engine cooling fans,trailer loads, and loads plugged intoaccessory power outlets.

EPM works to prevent excessivedischarge of the battery. It does thisby balancing the generator's outputand the vehicle's electrical needs.It can increase engine idle speed togenerate more power, wheneverneeded. It can temporarily reducethe power demands of someaccessories.

Normally, these actions occur insteps or levels, without beingnoticeable. In rare cases at thehighest levels of corrective action,this action may be noticeable to thedriver. If so, a Driver InformationCenter (DIC) message might bedisplayed, such as BATTERYSAVER ACTIVE or BATTERYVOLTS LOW. If this message isdisplayed, it is recommended thatthe driver reduce the electrical loadsas much as possible. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑27.


6-8 Lighting

Battery Power ProtectionThis feature helps to prevent batterydrain if accessory lamps are left on.If accessory lamps such as thevanity mirror, cargo, reading,console, or glove box are left on,they automatically time-out afterabout 20 minutes. To reset thebattery protection, all of the abovelamps must be turned off or theignition must be in the ACC/ACCESSORY position.

Exterior Lighting BatterySaverThe exterior lamps turn off about10 minutes after the ignition isturned to LOCK/OFF, if the parkinglamps or headlamps have been lefton. This protects against drainingthe battery. The battery saver doesnot work if the headlamps areturned on after the ignition is turnedto LOCK/OFF.

To keep the lamps on for more than10 minutes, turn the lamps back onwith the exterior lamp control.


Infotainment System 7-1

InfotainmentSystem

IntroductionInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

RadioAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16Backglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-17Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-17

Audio PlayersCD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25Hard Drive Device (HDD) . . . . 7-29Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37

Introduction

InfotainmentRead the following pages tobecome familiar with the audiosystem's features.

{ WARNING

Taking your eyes off the roadfor extended periods couldcause a crash resulting in injuryor death to you or others. Donot give extended attention toentertainment tasks while driving.

This system provides access tomany audio and non‐audio listings.

To minimize taking your eyes off theroad while driving, do the followingwhile the vehicle is parked:. Become familiar with the

operation and controls of theaudio system.

. Set up the tone, speakeradjustments, and preset radiostations.

For more information, see DefensiveDriving on page 9‑2.

Notice: Contact your dealerbefore adding any equipment.

Adding audio or communicationequipment could interfere withthe operation of the engine, radio,or other systems, and coulddamage them. Follow federalrules covering mobile radio andtelephone equipment.

The vehicle has RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP,the audio system can be playedeven after the ignition is turned off.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9‑22 for moreinformation.


7-2 Infotainment System

Navigation System

For vehicles with a navigationsystem, see the separate NavigationSystem Manual.

Theft-Deterrent FeatureTheftLock® is designed todiscourage theft of the vehicle'sradio by learning a portion of theVehicle Identification Number (VIN).The radio does not operate if it isstolen or moved to a differentvehicle.

Operation

Full View of Radio with CD Shown, Radio with Six-Disc CD Similar



Partial View of Radio with DVD Audio, Hard Drive Device (HDD),and USB

The vehicle may have one of theseradios as its audio system.

If the vehicle does not have one ofthese radio systems, it may have anavigation radio system. See theNavigation System manual for moreinformation on the navigation audiosystem.

Turning the System On or Off

VOLP (Volume/Power): Pressto turn the system on and off.

Volume Control

VOLP (Volume/Power): Turnclockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease the volume.

Setting the Tone(Bass/Midrange/Treble)

BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange,or Treble): To adjust bass,midrange, or treble:

1. Press the TUNE/TONE knobuntil the tone control tabsdisplay.

2. Continue pressing theTUNE/TONE knob, or pressthe softkey under the desiredtab to highlight the desired tonesetting.

3. To increase the highlightedsetting, do one of the following:. Turn the TUNE/TONE knob

clockwise.. Turn the MENU/SELECT

knob clockwise.

. Press the\ FWD button.

. Press the ¨ SEEK button.



4. To decrease the highlightedsetting, do one of the following:. Turn the TUNE/TONE knob

counterclockwise.. Turn the MENU/SELECT

knob counterclockwise.

. Press thes REV button.

. Press the © SEEK button.

To quickly adjust bass, midrange,or treble to the middle position,press the softkey under the BASS,MID, or TREB tab for more thantwo seconds.

To quickly adjust all tone andspeaker controls to the middleposition, press the TUNE/TONEknob for more than two seconds.

Adjusting the Speakers(Balance/Fade)

BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade):To adjust balance or fade:

1. Press the TUNE/TONE knobuntil the speaker control tabsdisplay.

2. Continue pressing the TUNE/TONE knob, or press the softkeyunder the desired tab to highlightthe desired tone setting.

3. To increase the highlightedsetting, do one of the following:. Turn the TUNE/TONE knob

clockwise.. Turn the MENU/SELECT

knob clockwise.

. Press the\ FWD button.

. Press the ¨ SEEK button.

4. To decrease the highlightedsetting, do one of the following:. Turn the TUNE/TONE knob

counterclockwise.. Turn the MENU/SELECT

knob counterclockwise.

. Press thes REV button.

. Press the © SEEK button.

To quickly adjust balance or fadeto the middle position, press thesoftkey under the BAL or FADE tabfor more than two seconds.

To quickly adjust all speaker andtone controls to the middle position,press the TUNE/TONE knob formore than two seconds.



Adjusting the Equalizer (EQ)

If the radio has this feature, the EQcan be adjusted between talk andmanual.

To choose an EQ setting:

1. Press the TUNE/TONE knob.

2. Select EQ.

3. Select Talk or Manual.

4. Press the Back button to goback to the Tone Settings menu.

Digital SignalProcessing (DSP)

If the radio has this feature, it haseither a Bose® sound system or aBose® 5.1 Cabin Surround® soundsystem. DSP is used to providea choice of different listeningexperiences.

To choose a DSP setting:

1. Press the TUNE/TONE knob todisplay the tone/speaker andDSP tabs.

2. Press the softkey under theDSP tab.

3. Press the softkey below theBack tab to return to the originaltone/speaker display, or wait forthe display to time out.

The DSP settings available are:. Normal: Select for normal mode;

this provides the best soundquality for all seating positions.

. Driver: Select to adjust theaudio for the driver to receivethe best possible sound quality.

. Rear: Select to adjust the audiofor the rear seat passengers toreceive the best possible soundquality.

. Centerpoint®: Select to enableBose® Centerpoint signalprocessing circuitry. Centerpointcreates a Bose® surround soundlistening experience from stereoCDs, MP3s, and satellite radio.As a result, vehicle owners enjoya surround sound listeningexperience from many audiosources. Simply turn it on, and itoperates automatically.

This feature is not available inAM/FM radio mode.

If the vehicle is equipped withthe Bose 5.1 Cabin Surroundsound system, the radio cansupport the playback of 5.1surround sound DVD-A discs orDTS 5.1 surround sound CDdiscs. When a 5.1 surroundsound formatted disc is playing,DSP options available are:

‐ 5.1 Surround + Normal: Bestfor all seating positions.

‐ 5.1 Surround + Rear: Best forthe rear seating positions.



System Settings

CONFIG: Press to adjust thenumber of favorites pages, autovolume, XM (if equipped), and HDD(if available) settings. The FAV,AUTO VOL, XM (if equipped), andHDD (if available) tabs display.The display will time out afterapproximately ten seconds.

Configuring the Number ofFavorite Pages

The number of favorite pages canbe set up using the CONFIG button.To setup the number of favoritepages:

1. Press the CONFIG button todisplay the radio setup menu.

2. Press the softkey located belowthe FAV tab.

3. Select the desired number offavorites pages by pressingthe softkey located below thedisplayed page numbers.

4. Press the FAV button, or let themenu time out, to return to theoriginal main radio screenshowing the radio stationfrequency tabs and to beginthe process of programmingfavorites for the chosen numberof pages.

Speed CompensatedVolume (SCV)

A radio with SCV automaticallyadjusts the sound to compensate forroad and wind noise as the vehiclespeeds up or slows down, so thatthe volume is consistent whiledriving. To activate SCV:

1. Set the radio volume to thedesired level.


3. Press the softkey under theAUTO VOL tab on the radiodisplay.

4. Press the softkey under thedesired Speed CompensatedVolume setting (OFF, Low, Med,or High) to select the level ofradio volume compensation.The display times out afterapproximately 10 seconds. Eachhigher setting allows for moreradio volume compensation atfaster vehicle speeds.

Noise Compensation Technology

If the vehicle has the radio with DVDAudio, HDD, and USB, it has BoseAudioPilot® noise compensationtechnology.

When turned on, AudioPilotcontinuously adjusts the audiosystem equalization, to compensatefor background noise.

To activate AudioPilot:


2. Press the softkey under theAUTO VOL tab on the radiodisplay.



3. Press the softkey below the Onor Off tab located under theAUTO VOL display to turn thisfeature on or off. The displaytimes out after approximately10 seconds.

This feature is most effective atlower radio volume settings wherebackground noise can affect howthe music being played through thevehicle's audio system is heard. Athigher volume settings, where themusic is much louder than thebackground noise, there maybe little or no adjustments byAudioPilot. For additionalinformation on AudioPilot, visitwww.bose.com/audiopilot.

Radio Message

Locked: Displays when theTheftLock® system has locked upthe infotainment system. Take thevehicle to your dealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly orif an error cannot be corrected,contact your dealer.

Other Information

The radio with DVD Audio, HDD,and USB utilizes Gracenote®

technology to provide Song, Artist,Album, and Genre informationfor many CD audio discs and iscapable of playing DVD-A andDTS‐encoded discs (DTS and DTSDigital Surround are registeredtrademarks of Digital TheaterSystems, Inc.).

Dolby and the double-D symbol aretrademarks of Dolby Laboratories.Manufactured under license fromDolby Laboratories.

Gracenote® Database

Gracenote Music RecognitionService, Music recognitiontechnology, and related data areprovided by Gracenote®. Gracenoteis the industry standard in musicrecognition technology andrelated content delivery.For more information, visitwww.gracenote.com.

CD and music-related data fromGracenote, Inc., copyright ©2000-2007 Gracenote. GracenoteSoftware, copyright © 2000-2007Gracenote. This product andservice may practice one ormore of the following U.S.Patents: #5,987,525;#6,061,680; #6,154,773;#6,161,132; #6,230,192;#6,230,207; #6,240,459;#6,330,593, and other patentsissued or pending. Some servicessupplied under license fromOpen Globe, Inc. for U.S.Patent: #6,304,523.

Gracenote and CDDB are registeredtrademarks of Gracenote. TheGracenote logo and logotype, andthe “Powered by Gracenote” logoare trademarks of Gracenote.

If you require more informationregarding the use of the GracenoteService, visit: www.gracenote.com/corporate.



For the data provided byGracenote® Music RecognitionService, the content is notnecessarily guaranteed 100%.

Regarding the use of GracenoteMusic Recognition Service. Whenthis product is used, it is necessaryto agree to the following articles.

This application or device containssoftware from Gracenote, Inc. ofEmeryville, California (“Gracenote”).

The software from Gracenote (the“Gracenote Software”) enablesthis application to perform discand/or file identification and obtainmusic-related information, includingname, artist, track, and titleinformation (“Gracenote Data”)from online servers or embeddeddatabases (collectively, “GracenoteServers”) and to perform otherfunctions.

You may use Gracenote Data onlyby means of the intended End-Userfunctions of this application ordevice. You agree that you will useGracenote Data, the Gracenote

Software, and GracenoteServers for your own personalnon-commercial use only. Youagree not to assign, copy, transfer,or transmit the Gracenote Softwareor any Gracenote Data to any thirdparty.

YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OREXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THEGRACENOTE SOFTWARE, ORGRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPTAS EXPRESSLY PERMITTEDHEREIN. You agree that yournon-exclusive license to use theGracenote Data, the GracenoteSoftware, and Gracenote Serverswill terminate if you violatethese restrictions. If your licenseterminates, you agree to cease anyand all use of the Gracenote Data,the Gracenote Software, andGracenote Servers.

Gracenote reserves all rights inGracenote Data, the GracenoteSoftware, and the GracenoteServers, including all ownershiprights.

Under no circumstances willGracenote become liable for anypayment to you for any informationthat you provide. You agree thatGracenote, Inc. may enforce itsrights under this Agreement againstyou directly in its own name.

The Gracenote service uses aunique identifier to track queries forstatistical purposes.

The purpose of a randomlyassigned numeric identifier is toallow the Gracenote service tocount queries without knowinganything about who you are. Formore information, see the web pagefor the Gracenote Privacy Policy forthe Gracenote service.

The Gracenote Software and eachitem of Gracenote Data are licensedto you “AS IS.” Gracenote makesno representations or warranties,express or implied, regarding theaccuracy of any Gracenote Datafrom in the Gracenote Servers.



Gracenote reserves the right todelete data from the GracenoteServers or to change datacategories for any cause thatGracenote deems sufficient.

No warranty is made that theGracenote Software or GracenoteServers are error-free or thatfunctioning of Gracenote Softwareor Gracenote Servers will beuninterrupted.

Gracenote is not obligated toprovide you with new enhanced oradditional data types or categoriesthat Gracenote may provide in thefuture and is free to discontinue itsservices at any time.

GRACENOTE DISCLAIMSALL WARRANTIES EXPRESSOR IMPLIED, INCLUDING,BUT NOT LIMITED TO,IMPLIED WARRANTIES OFMERCHANTABILITY, FITNESSFOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT.GRACENOTE DOES NOTWARRANT THE RESULTSTHAT WILL BE OBTAINEDBY YOUR USE OF THEGRACENOTE SOFTWAREOR ANY GRACENOTESERVER. IN NO CASE WILLGRACENOTE BE LIABLE FORANY CONSEQUENTIAL ORINCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FORANY LOST PROFITS OR LOSTREVENUES.

Radio

AM-FM Radio

Control Buttons

The buttons used to control theradio are:

FM/AM: Press to choose betweenFM and AM.

TUNE: Turn to search for stations.

MENU/SELECT: Turn clockwise orcounterclockwise to scroll throughthe station list. Press the MENU/SELECT knob to select the desiredstation.


¨ SEEK or © SEEK: Press to go tothe previous or to the next radiostation and stay there.



The radio only tunes into stationswith a strong signal that are in theselected band.

FAV: Press to change thefavorites page.

Softkeys: Press to select presetstations.

Radio Data System (RDS)

The audio system has a RadioData System (RDS) feature. RDSis available for use only on FMstations that broadcast RDSinformation. This system relies uponreceiving specific information fromthese stations and only works whenthe information is available. Whilethe radio is tuned to an FM-RDSstation, the station name or callletters display. In rare cases, a radiostation can broadcast incorrectinformation that causes the radiofeatures to work improperly. If thishappens, contact the radio station.

Selecting a Station

Seek Tuning

If the radio station is not known:

Briefly press ¨ SEEK or © SEEK.The radio will search for the nextreceivable station. If the radiodoes not find a station, it switchesautomatically to a more sensitivesearch level. If it still does not find astation, the frequency that was lastactive begins to play and “NoneFound” displays.

If the radio station is known:

Press and hold ¨ SEEK or © SEEKuntil the desired station on thepop‐up frequency display is almostreached, then release the button.

Manual Tuning

Turn the TUNE knob to select thefrequency on the pop‐up display.

Station List

Turn the MENU/SELECT knob todisplay the station list. To create alist of available stations, select“Refresh AM Station List” or“Refresh FM Station List”,depending on which band isbeing used.

In FM, RDS information may beutilized to categorize the stations bygenre.

In both AM and FM, the stations arearranged in frequency order.

Storing a Radio Station as aFavorite

Drivers are encouraged to set uptheir radio station favorites while thevehicle is stopped. Tune to favoritestations using the presets, favoritesbutton, and steering wheel controls,if the vehicle has this feature.



FAV (Favorites): A maximum of36 stations can be programmed asfavorites using the six softkeysbelow the radio station frequencytabs on the display and by using theradio favorites page button (FAVbutton). Press the FAV button to gothrough up to six pages of favorites,each having six favorite stationsavailable per page. Each pageof favorites can contain anycombination of AM, FM, or XMstations.

To store a station as a favorite,perform the following steps:

1. Tune to the desired radio station.

2. Press the FAV button to displaythe page where the station is tobe stored.

3. Press and hold one of thesix softkeys until a beep soundsand “Favorite Saved” displays.When that softkey is pressedand released, the radio recallsthe station that was set.

4. Repeat the steps for each radiostation to be stored as a favorite.

The number of favorites pages canbe set up using the CONFIG button.To set up the number of favoritespages, perform the following steps:


2. Press the softkey located belowthe FAV label.


4. Press the FAV button, or let themenu time out, to return to theoriginal main radio screenshowing the radio stationfrequency labels and to beginthe process of programmingfavorites for the chosen numberof pages.

Time-shifting — Pause andRewind Live FM and AM

The Radio with DVD Audio, HDD,and USB has the ability to rewind60 minutes of FM and AM content.While listening to the radio, thecontent from the current station isalways being buffered to the HDD.

Press r / j (play/pause) to pausethe radio. The radio display willshow the Time Shift buffer statusbar. The status bar shows theamount of content stored in thebuffer and the current pause point.

To resume playback fromthe current pause point,press r / j again. The radiowill no longer be playing “live”radio. Instead, time shifted contentis being played from the buffer.When the radio is playing timeshifted content from the buffer, abuffer status bar shows below thestation number on the left side ofscreen.



Press and hold the REV or FWDbuttons to rewind or fast forwardthrough the time shift buffer. HoldFWD until the end of the currentlyrecorded buffer to resume “live”radio playback. With “live” radioplaying, the radio display will nolonger show the buffer bar belowthe station number.

On FM or AM, press the REV orFWD button multiple times to rewindor fast forward. Each press willrewind or fast forward 30 seconds ofcontent.

When the radio station ischanged, the buffer is cleared andautomatically restarted for thecurrent station. You cannot rewindto content from a previously tunedstation.

Time shifting of FM or AM is notavailable while recording or whileother sources of playback areselected.

Pausing FM or AM with theVehicle Turned Off

If FM or AM is paused before thevehicle is turned off, the radio willcontinue to buffer the current radiostation for up to one hour. If thevehicle is turned back on withinone hour, the radio will automaticallyresume playback from the pausepoint.

Satellite RadioVehicles with an XM™ SatelliteRadio tuner and a valid XM SatelliteRadio subscription can receive XMprogramming.

XM Satellite Radio Service

XM is a satellite radio service basedin the 48 contiguous United Statesand 10 Canadian provinces. XMSatellite Radio has a wide variety ofprogramming and commercial-freemusic, coast-to-coast, and indigital-quality sound. A servicefee is required to receive the XMservice. A service fee is required to

receive the XM service. Formore information, contactXM at www.xmradio.com or1-800-929-2100 in the U.S.,and www.xmradio.ca or1-877-438-9677 in Canada.

Control Buttons

The buttons used to control theradio are:

m (XM): Press to choose the XMband (if equipped).

TUNE: Turn to search for stations.

MENU/SELECT: Turn clockwiseor counterclockwise to scrollthrough the category list. Press theMENU/SELECT knob to select thedesired category.


¨ SEEK or © SEEK: Press to go tothe next or to the previous radiostation.



FAV: Press to change thefavorites page.

Softkeys: Press to select presetstations.

XM Categories

XM stations are organized incategories.

Removing or Adding Categories(Radio with CD and Radio withSix-Disc CD Only)

1. Press the CONFIG button.

2. Press the softkey below theXM tab.

3. Turn the TUNE/TONE knob orthe MENU/SELECT knob toscroll through the availablecategories.

4. Press any softkey below theRemove or Add tab to add orremove the displayed category.

5. Press any softkey below theRestore All tab to restore allremoved categories.

Selecting an XM Station

Seek Tuning

Press ¨ SEEK or © SEEK to go tothe next or previous station.

Selecting a Station by Station List

The infotainment system can list allXM stations.

To select a station from thestation list:

1. Turn the TUNE/TONE knob andhighlight the desired station.

2. Press the TUNE/TONE knob toselect the station.

The highlighted station will alsoautomatically be selected if theTUNE/TONE is released and nolonger turned.

Selecting a Station by Category

The infotainment system can list XMstations by genre.

To select a station from thecategory list:

1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knoband highlight the desired genre,then press the MENU/SELECTknob to select the genre.

2. Turn the MENU/SELECT knoband highlight the desired station,then press the MENU/SELECTknob to select the station.

Storing an XM Station as aFavorite

Drivers are encouraged to set uptheir radio station favorites while thevehicle is stopped. Tune to favoritestations using the presets, favoritesbutton, and steering wheel controls,if the vehicle has this feature.



FAV (Favorites): A maximum of36 stations can be programmed asfavorites using the six softkeysbelow the radio station frequencytabs on the display and by using theradio favorites page button (FAVbutton). Press the FAV button to gothrough up to six pages of favorites,each having six favorite stationsavailable per page. Each pageof favorites can contain anycombination of AM, FM, or XMstations.

To store a station as a favorite:

1. Tune to the desired radio station.

2. Press the FAV button to displaythe page where the station is tobe stored.

3. Press and hold one of thesix softkeys until a beep sounds.When that softkey is pressedand released, the radio recallsthe station that was set.

4. Repeat the steps for each radiostation to be stored as a favorite.

The number of favorites pages canbe set up using the CONFIG button.To set up the number of favoritespages, perform the following steps:


2. Press the softkey located belowthe FAV label.


4. Press the FAV button, or let themenu time out, to return to theoriginal main radio screenshowing the radio stationfrequency labels and to beginthe process of programmingfavorites for the chosen numberof pages.

Time-shifting — Pause andRewind Live XM

The Radio with DVD Audio, HDD,and USB has the ability to rewind60 minutes of XM content. Whilelistening to the radio, the contentfrom the current station is alwaysbeing buffered to the HDD.

Press r / j (play/pause) To pausethe radio. The radio display willshow the Time Shift buffer statusbar. The status bar shows theamount of content that is stored inthe buffer and the current pausepoint.

To resume playback fromthe current pause point,press r / j again. The radio will nolonger be playing “live” radio.Instead, time shifted content isbeing played from the buffer. Whenthe radio is playing time shiftedcontent from the buffer, a bufferstatus bar shows below the stationnumber on the left side of screen.




Press the REV or FWD buttonmultiple time to jump to the previousor next song or commercial.

When the radio station ischanged, the buffer is clearedand automatically restarted for thecurrent station. You cannot rewindto content from a previously tunedstation.

Time shifting of XM is not availablewhile recording or while othersources of playback are selected.

Pausing XM with the VehicleTurned Off

If XM is paused before the vehicle isturned off, the radio will continue tobuffer the current radio station forup to one hour. If the vehicle isturned back on within one hour, theradio will automatically resumeplayback from the pause point.

XM Messages

XL (Explicit LanguageChannels): These channels,or any others, can be blocked at acustomer's request, by calling1-800-929-2100.

XM Updating: The encryption codein the receiver is being updated,and no action is required. Thisprocess should take no longer than30 seconds.

No XM Signal: The system isfunctioning correctly, but the vehicleis in a location that is blocking theXM signal. When the vehicle ismoved into an open area, the signalshould return.

Loading XM: The audio system isacquiring and processing audio andtext data. No action is needed. Thismessage should disappear shortly.

Channel Off Air: This channel isnot currently in service. Tune in toanother channel.

Channel Unauth: This channel isblocked or cannot be received withyour XM Subscription package.

Channel Unavail: This previouslyassigned channel is no longerassigned. Tune to another station.If this station was one of thepresets, choose another station forthat preset button.

No Artist Info: No artistinformation is available at thistime on this channel. The systemis working properly.

No Title Info: No song titleinformation is available at this timeon this channel. The system isworking properly.



No CAT Info: No categoryinformation is available at this timeon this channel. The system isworking properly.

No Information: No text orinformational messages areavailable at this time on thischannel. The system is workingproperly.

CAT Not Found: There are nochannels available for the selectedcategory. The system is workingproperly.

XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0,this message alternates with the XMRadio 8‐digit radio ID label. Thislabel is needed to activate theservice.

Unknown: If this message isreceived when tuned to channel 0,there could be a receiver fault.Consult with your dealer.

Check XM Receivr: If thismessage does not clear within ashort period of time, the receivercould have a fault. Consult with yourdealer.

XM Not Available: If this messagedoes not clear within a short periodof time, the receiver could have afault. Consult with your dealer.

Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and staticcan occur during normal radioreception if items such as cell phonechargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronicdevices are plugged into theaccessory power outlet. If there isinterference or static, unplug theitem from the accessory poweroutlet.

FM

FM signals only reach about 16 to65 km (10 to 40 miles). Although theradio has a built-in electronic circuitthat automatically works to reduceinterference, some static can occur,especially around tall buildings orhills, causing the sound to fade inand out.

AM

The range for most AM stations isgreater than for FM, especially atnight. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interferewith each other. For better radioreception, most AM radio stationsboost the power levels during theday, and then reduce these levelsduring the night. Static can alsooccur when things like storms andpower lines interfere with radioreception. When this happens, tryreducing the treble on the radio.



XM™ Satellite Radio Service

XM Satellite Radio Service givesdigital radio reception from coast tocoast in the 48 contiguous UnitedStates, and in Canada. Just aswith FM, tall buildings or hills caninterfere with satellite radio signals,causing the sound to fade in andout. In addition, traveling orstanding under heavy foliage,bridges, garages, or tunnels maycause loss of the XM signal for aperiod of time.

Cellular Phone Usage

Cellular phone usage may causeinterference with the vehicle's radio.This interference may occur whenmaking or receiving phone calls,charging the phone's battery,or simply having the phone on.This interference can cause anincreased level of static whilelistening to the radio. If static isreceived while listening to the radio,unplug the cellular phone and turnit off.

Backglass AntennaThe AM-FM antenna is integratedwith the rear window defogger,located in the rear window. Makesure that the inside surface of therear window is not scratched andthat the lines on the glass are notdamaged. If the inside surface isdamaged, it could interfere withradio reception. For proper radioreception, the antenna connectorneeds to be properly attached to thepost on the glass.

If a cellular telephone antennaneeds to be attached to the glass,make sure that the grid lines for theAM-FM antenna are not damaged.There is enough space betweenthe grid lines to attach a cellulartelephone antenna withoutinterfering with radio reception.

Notice: Using a razor blade orsharp object to clear the insiderear window can damage the rearwindow antenna and/or the rearwindow defogger. Repairs would

not be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not clear the insiderear window with sharp objects.

Notice: Do not apply aftermarketglass tinting with metallic film.The metallic film in some tintingmaterials will interfere with ordistort the incoming radioreception. Any damage caused toyour backglass antenna due tometallic tinting materials willnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Multi-Band AntennaThe antenna located on the roof ofthe vehicle is used for the OnStar,XM Satellite Radio Service System,and GPS (Global PositioningSystem), if the vehicle has thesefeatures. Keep the antenna clearof obstructions for clear reception.If the vehicle has a sunroof and it isopen, the performance of OnStar,XM, and GPS can be affected.



Audio Players

CD PlayerThe infotainment system's CDplayer can play audio CDs andMP3 CDs.

CDs that are 8 cm (3 in) in diameterwill not work in the CD player.

Care of CDs

If playing a CD, the sound qualitycan be reduced due to disc quality,the method of recording, thequality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the dischas been handled. Handle discscarefully. Store CDs in their originalcases or other protective cases andaway from direct sunlight and dust.The CD player scans the bottomsurface of the disc. If the surface ofa disc is damaged, such as cracked,broken, or scratched, the disc maynot play properly or not at all. Donot touch the bottom side of a discwhile handling it; this could damage

the surface. Pick up discs bygrasping the outer edges or theedge of the hole and the outer edge.

If the surface of a disc is soiled,take a soft, lint‐free cloth or dampena clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutraldetergent solution mixed with water,and clean it. Make sure the wipingprocess starts from the center tothe edge.

Care of the CD Player

Do not add a label to a disc; it couldget caught in the CD player. If alabel is needed, label the top of therecorded disc with a marking pen.

The use of disc lens cleaners fordiscs is not advised, due to the riskof contaminating the lens of the discoptics with lubricants internal to theCD player mechanism.

Notice: If a label is added to aCD, or more than one CD isinserted into the slot at a time,or an attempt is made to playscratched or damaged CDs, theCD player could be damaged.

While using the CD player, useonly CDs in good conditionwithout any label, load one CD ata time, and keep the CD playerand the loading slot free offoreign materials, liquids, anddebris.

Control Buttons

The buttons used to control the CDplayer are:

CD: Press to play a CD whenlistening to the radio. The discand/or track number display when aCD is in the player.

¨ SEEK/© SEEK: Press to selecttracks.

TUNE/TONE: Turn and then pressto select tracks.

MENU/SELECT: Turn and thenpress to select.

r /j (Play/Pause): Press to pauseand restart CD playback.

s REV (Fast Reverse): Pressand hold to reverse playback quicklywithin a track.



\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly within a track.

^ (Load): Press to load CDs intothe Six-Disc CD player.

Z (Eject): Press to eject the disc.

For the Six-Disc CD player, pressand hold for two seconds to eject alldiscs.

Inserting a CD (Single DiscPlayer)

With the printed side facing up,insert a CD into the audio CD slotuntil it is drawn in. The CD tracknumber and a Shuffle tab displayand playback begins.

If the ignition or radio is turned offwhile a CD is in the player, it staysin the player. When the ignition orradio is turned on, the CD startsplaying where it stopped, if it wasthe last selected audio source.

Inserting a CD (Six-Disc CDPlayer)

^ (Load): Press to load CDs intothe CD player. This CD player holdsup to six CDs.

To insert one CD:

1. Press and release the loadbutton.

2. Wait for the message to insertthe disc.

3. Load a CD. Insert the CDpartway into the slot, label sideup. The player pulls the CD in.A Shuffle tab and the DISC icondisplay.

4. Press the softkey located belowthe Shuffle tab to play the tracksof a current disc in randomorder. Press the softkey againto turn Shuffle off. Shuffle Offdisplays.

5. The CD resumes normalplayback.

To insert multiple CDs:

1. Press and hold the^ buttonfor five seconds. A beep soundsand Load All Discs displays.

2. Follow the displayed instructionon when to insert the discs. TheCD player takes up to six CDs.

3. Press the^ button again tocancel loading more CDs.

If the ignition or radio is turned offwhile a CD is in the player, it staysin the player. When the ignition orradio is turned on, the CD startsplaying where it stopped, if it wasthe last selected audio source.

When a CD is inserted, the discnumber displays on the upper rightside of the screen and the tracknumber displays at the left andcenter of the screen. The Shuffleand Disc labels appear below.



Press the softkeys located underthe Disc tab to change to anotherdisc. The CD begins playback of thefirst track on the selected disc. Aseach new track starts to play, thetrack number displays in the left andcenter of the screen.

Playing a CD

Selecting a CD Track

Tracks can be selected using theseek buttons, TUNE/TONE knob,or the MENU/SELECT knob.

To use the seek buttons:

Press the © SEEK button to go tothe start of the current track, if morethan five seconds have played.Press the ¨ SEEK button to go to

the next track. If © SEEK or ¨ SEEKis held, or pressed multiple times,the player continues movingbackward or forward through thetracks on the CD.

To use the TUNE/TONE knob or theMENU/SELECT knob:

Turn the TUNE/TONE knob or theMENU/SELECT knob to highlightthe desired track, then press theTUNE/TONE knob or MENU/SELECT knob to select the track.

Fast Forward and Rewind

s REV (Fast Reverse): Pressand hold to reverse playback quicklywithin a track. Sound is heard at areduced volume and the elapsedtime of the track displays. Releaseto resume playing the track.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly within a track. Sound isheard at a reduced volume and theelapsed time of the track displays.Release to resume playing thetrack.

Playing Tracks in Random Order

Press the softkey under the Shuffletab to play the tracks of a CD inrandom order. Press again to turnShuffle off. Shuffle Off displays.

For vehicles with a Radio withSix-Disc CD player, the shufflefeature only works on the disc thatis currently playing.

Playing an MP3/WMA Disc

CD players with the MP3 feature arecapable of playing an MP3/WMACD-R or CD-RW disc. See MP3 onpage 7‑25 for more information.

Disc Messages

DISC ERROR: If this messagedisplays and/or the disc ejects, itcould be for one of the followingreasons:. The radio system does not

support the playlist format, thecompressed audio format, or thedata file format.

. It is very hot. When thetemperature returns to normal,the disc should play.

. The road is very rough. Whenthe road becomes smoother, thedisc should play.



. The disc is dirty, scratched, wet,or upside down.

. The air is very humid. If so, waitabout an hour and try again.

. There was a problem whileburning the disc.

. The label is caught in theCD/DVD-A player.

If the disc is not playing correctly,for any other reason, try a knowngood disc.

If any error occurs repeatedly orif an error cannot be corrected,contact your dealer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write itdown and provide it to your dealerwhen reporting the problem.

CD/DVD PlayerThe infotainment system's CD/DVDplayer can play audio discs andMP3 discs.

Discs that are 8 cm (3 in) indiameter will not work in theCD/DVD player.

The CD/DVD player does notsupport the playback of DVD videodiscs. If a DVD video disc isinserted into the player, the radiodisplays “Read Error Please CheckDisc” and ejects the disc.

Care of CDs and DVDs

If playing a CD/DVD, the soundquality can be reduced due to discquality, the method of recording, thequality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the dischas been handled. Handle discscarefully. Store CDs and DVDsin their original cases or otherprotective cases and away from

direct sunlight and dust. TheCD/DVD player scans the bottomsurface of the disc. If the surface ofa disc is damaged, such as cracked,broken, or scratched, the disc maynot play properly or not at all. Donot touch the bottom side of a discwhile handling it; this could damagethe surface. Pick up discs bygrasping the outer edges or theedge of the hole and the outer edge.

If the surface of a disc is soiled,take a soft, lint‐free cloth or dampena clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutraldetergent solution mixed with water,and clean it. Make sure the wipingprocess starts from the center tothe edge.

Care of the CD/DVD Player

Do not add a label to a disc; itcould get caught in the CD/DVDplayer. If a label is needed, labelthe top of the recorded disc with amarking pen.



The use of disc lens cleaners fordiscs is not advised, due to the riskof contaminating the lens of the discoptics with lubricants internal to theCD/DVD player mechanism.

Notice: If a label is added to adisc, or more than one disc isinserted into the slot at a time,or an attempt is made to playscratched or damaged discs,the CD/DVD player could bedamaged. While using the CD/DVD player, use only discs ingood condition without any label,load one dosc at a time, andkeep the CD/DVD player and theloading slot free of foreignmaterials, liquids, and debris.

Control Buttons

The buttons used to control theCD/DVD player are:

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press toswitch between CD/DVD, auxiliaryinput, and USB devices.

¨ SEEK/© SEEK: Press to selecttracks.

TUNE/TONE: Turn and then pressto select tracks.

MENU/SELECT: Turn and thenpress to select.

r /j (Play/Pause): Press to pauseand restart CD or DVD playback.

s REV (Fast Reverse): In CD orMP3 playback mode, press andhold to reverse playback quicklywithin a track. Sound is heard at areduced volume. When released,normal playback resumes and theelapsed time of the track displays.

In DVD‐Audio playback mode,press once to change playback to aspeed of 2X. Each successive presschanges playback to a speed of 4X,10X, or 21X. Press r / j to resumenormal playback.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): In CD orMP3 playback mode, press andhold to advance playback quicklywithin a track. Sound is heard at a

reduced volume. When released,normal playback resumes and theelapsed time of the track displays.

In DVD‐Audio playback mode,press once to change playback to aspeed of 2X. Each successive presschanges playback to a speed of 4X,10X, or 21X. Press r / j to resumenormal playback.

Z (Eject): Press to eject the disc.

Inserting a Disc

With the printed side facing up,insert a disc into the audio CD/DVDslot until it is drawn in. The disctrack number and a Shuffle tabdisplay and playback begins.

If the ignition or radio is turned offwhile a disc is in the player, it staysin the player. When the ignition orradio is turned on, the disc startsplaying where it stopped, if it wasthe last selected audio source.



Playing a CD

Selecting a CD Track

Tracks can be selected using theseek buttons, TUNE/TONE knob,or the MENU/SELECT knob.



the next track. If © SEEK or ¨ SEEKis held, or pressed multiple times,the player continues movingbackward or forward through thetracks on the CD.

To use the TUNE/TONE knob:

Turn the TUNE/TONE knob tohighlight the desired track, thenpress the TUNE/TONE knob toselect the track.

To use the MENU/SELECT knob:

Turn the MENU/SELECT knob tohighlight the desired track, thenpress the MENU/SELECT knob toselect the track.





Press the softkey under the Shuffletab to play the tracks of a CD inrandom order. Press again to turnShuffle off. Shuffle Off displays.

Playing a DVD-A (Audio) Disc

The Radio with DVD Audio, HDD,and USB is capable of playing DVDaudio discs in the Bose® 5.1 Cabinsurround sound system.

Insert the DVD audio disc intothe CD/DVD player. DVD Audiodisplays and playback begins. TheGroup and track number displayduring playback.

Selecting a DVD‐A Track

Tracks can be selected usingthe seek buttons, or the TUNE/TONE knob.


Press the © SEEK button to go tothe start of the current track, if morethan five seconds have played.Press the ¨ SEEK button to go

to the next track. If the © SEEK

or ¨ SEEK button is held, orpressed multiple times, the playercontinues moving backward orforward through the tracks withinthe current group.




Turn the TUNE/TONE knob todisplay a list of all tracks in allgroups on the DVD audio disc andto highlight tracks. Stop turning theTUNE/TONE knob or press theTUNE/TONE knob to start playbackof the highlighted track.

To use the MENU/SELECT knob:

Press the softkey under the Menutab to display a list of all Groups.To change Groups, turn theMENU/SELECT knob to highlightthe desired Group. Press theMENU/SELECT knob to select it.Playback begins from track 1 of thehighlighted Group.


s REV (Fast Reverse): Press toreverse playback quickly within atrack. Sound is heard at a reducedvolume. Press once to changeplayback to a speed of 2X. Eachsuccessive press changes playback

to a speed of 4X, 10X, or 21X.Press r / j to resume normalplayback.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press toadvance playback quickly within atrack. Sound is heard at a reducedvolume. Press once to changeplayback to a speed of 2X. Eachsuccessive press changes playbackto a speed of 4X, 10X, or 21X.Press r / j to resume normalplayback.


Press the softkey under the Shuffletab to begin random playback of allsongs in the current Group. Pressagain to turn off random playback.

Stopping DVD Audio Playback

Press the softkey under the c tabto stop playback of the DVD audiodisc. “DVD PreStop” displays. Pressthe r / j button to resume playbackfrom where it was stopped.

Press the softkey underthe c tab again while in DVDPreStop. “DVD Stop” displays.Press the r / j button while inDVDStop to begin playbackfrom the beginning of the DVDaudio disc.

Press the r / j button during DVDaudio playback to pause or resumeplayback.

Selecting DVD Audio Streams

Each DVD audio Group may containaudio content that is encoded inone or two formats. For example, aparticular Group may have both a5.1 surround audio stream anda 2.0 stereo audio stream available.

Press the softkey located underthe Audio tab to display the currentaudio stream playing. “AudioStream 1” or “Audio Stream 2” brieflydisplays. Press the softkey locatedunder the Audio tab again to togglebetween Audio Stream 1 or AudioStream 2 (if available).



Check the DSP settings todetermine if a 5.1 surround soundaudio stream is playing. SeeOperation on page 7‑2 for moreinformation. Press the DSPtab to see if the 5.1 + Normalor 5.1 + Rear settings are availablefor selection. If these settings areavailable, Audio Stream 1 is playing.

Playing an MP3/WMA Disc

CD/DVD players with the MP3feature are capable of playing anMP3/WMA on DVD+/−R, CD−R,or CD−RW discs. For moreinformation, see MP3 on page 7‑25.

Disc Messages

DISC ERROR: If this messagedisplays and/or the disc ejects, itcould be for one of the followingreasons:. The radio system does not

support the playlist format, thecompressed audio format, or thedata file format.

. It is very hot. When thetemperature returns to normal,the disc should play.

. The road is very rough. Whenthe road becomes smoother, thedisc should play.

. The disc is dirty, scratched, wet,or upside down.

. The air is very humid. If so, waitabout an hour and try again.

. There was a problem whileburning the disc.

. The label is caught in theCD/DVD player.

If the disc is not playing correctly,for any other reason, try a knowngood disc.

If any error occurs repeatedly orif an error cannot be corrected,contact your dealer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write itdown and provide it to your dealerwhen reporting the problem.

MP3

MP3/WMA Format

The Single CD and the Six-DiscCD Radio will play MP3/WMA filesthat were recorded on a CD−R orCD−RW disc. The HDD Radio canalso play MP3/WMA files recordedon DVD+/−R discs or stored on aUSB storage device. Some USBstorage devices may not besupported.

The files can be recorded with thefollowing fixed bit rates: 32 kbps,40 kbps, 56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps,96 kbps, 112 kbps, 128 kbps,160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps,256 kbps, and 320 kbps or avariable bit rate. Song title, artistname, and album can display whenfiles are recorded using ID3 tagsversion 1 and 2.



Creating an MP3/WMA Disc

When creating an MP3/WMA disc:. Make sure the MP3/WMA files

are recorded on a CD−R orCD−RW disc.

. Do not mix standard audio andMP3/WMA files on one disc.

. Make sure the CD does nothave more than a maximum of50 folders and playlists, and255 files to read and play.

. Create a folder structure thatmakes it easy to find songswhile driving. Organize songs byalbums using one folder for eachalbum. Each folder or albumshould contain 18 songs or less.

. Avoid subfolders. The systemcan support up to 8 subfoldersdeep. Keep the total number offolders to a minimum to reducethe complexity and confusionduring playback.

. Create playlists that have a .m3uor .wpl extension; other fileextensions may not work.

. Minimize the length of the file,folder, or playlist names. Longfile, folder, or playlist names,or a combination of a largenumber of files, folders,or playlists can cause the playerto be unable to play up to themaximum number of files,folders, playlists, or sessions.

. Finalize the audio disc beforeburning it. Adding music to anexisting disc can cause the discnot to function.

Playlists can be selected by usingthe previous and next folderbuttons, the SEEK arrows, orthe\ FWD ors REV buttons.An MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW thatwas recorded using no file folderscan also be played. If a CD-R orCD-RW contains more than themaximum of 50 folders andplaylists, and 255 files, the playerlets you access and navigate up tothe maximum, but all items over themaximum are not accessible.

The HDD Radio can support morethan 255 files on an MP3/WMA disc.

The HDD Radio does not supportplaylists on a disc or USB storagedevice.

Root Directory

The root directory of the CD-R orCD-RW is treated as a folder. Ifthe root directory has compressedaudio files, the directory displaysas F1 DISC. All files containeddirectly under the root directory areaccessed prior to any root directoryfolders. Playlists (Px) are alwaysaccessed after root folders or files.

The HDD Radio displays the rootdirectory of an MP3/WMA disc asF1 MP3 and the root directory of aUSB storage device as F1 USB.



Empty Directory or Folder

If a root directory or a folder existssomewhere in the file structurethat contains empty folders andno compressed files in them, theplayer advances to the next folderin the file structure that containscompressed audio files.

No Folder

When the CD contains onlycompressed files, the files arelocated under the root folder. Thenext and previous folder functionsdo not display on a CD that wasrecorded without folders or playlists.The radio displays F1 DISC for theroot directory.

When the CD contains only playlistsand compressed audio files, but nofolders, all files are located underthe root folder. The folder downand the folder up buttons searchplaylists (Px) first and then go tothe root folder. The radio displaysF1 DISC for the root directory.

Order of Play

Tracks recorded to the CD-R orCD-RW play in the following order:. Play begins from the first track

in the first folder and continuessequentially through all tracksin each folder. When the lasttrack of the last folder hasplayed, play continues from thefirst track of the first playlist.

‐ Playlists can be changed bypressing the next and previousfolder button.

. Play begins from the first track inthe first playlist and continuessequentially through all tracksin each playlist. When the lasttrack of the last playlist hasplayed, play continues from thefirst track of the first folder.

When play enters a new folder, thedisplay does not automatically showthe new folder name unless thefolder mode has been chosen asthe default display. The new trackname displays.

File System and Naming

The song name that is contained inthe ID3 tag displays. If the songname is not in the ID3 tag, the radiodisplays the file name without theextension.

Track names longer than32 characters are shortened.Parts of words on the last page oftext and the extension of the filename are not displayed.

The HDD Radio will display filenames with the extension.

Preprogrammed Playlists

Preprogrammed playlists thatwere created using WinAmp™,MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™software can be accessed, howeverthey cannot be edited using theradio. These playlists are specialfolders containing compressedaudio song files. Playlists must havea file extension of PLS or M3U.



Playlists can be selected using theprevious and next folder buttons.Tracks can be changed by pressingthe seek buttons or turning thetune knob. Songs are playedsequentially; presss REV

or\ FWD to reverse or advancethrough the playing song.

The HDD Radio does not supportpreprogrammed playlists. To createa playlist on the HDD radio fromsongs recorded to the HDD, seeHard Drive Device (HDD) onpage 7‑29.

Playing an MP3/WMA from aDisc or a USB Storage Device

Selecting an MP3 Track

Tracks can be selected using theseek buttons, the TUNE/TONEknob, or the softkeys below thefolder tabs on the infotainmentdisplay.



the next track. If © SEEK or ¨ SEEKis held, or pressed multiple times,the player continues movingbackward or forward through thetracks on the disc.


Turn the TUNE/TONE knob tohighlight the desired track, thenpress the TUNE/TONE knob toselect the track.

To use the softkeys below thefolder tabs:

S Folder (Previous Folder): Pressthe softkey under the Folder tab togo to the first track in the previousfolder.

Folder T (Next Folder): Press thesoftkey under the Folder tab to go tothe first track in the next folder.




Searching for MP3 Tracks

Tracks can be searched for by usingthe menu system.

To use the menu system:

1. Press the MENU/SELECT knobto display the MP3 Menu.

2. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob tohighlight an option from the MP3Menu. The available options are:. Playlists*. Tracks



. Folders

. Artists

. Albums

. Song Titles

. AudioBook

3. Press the MENU/SELECT knobto select the desired option.

*The HDD Radio does not supportpreprogrammed playlists. To createa playlist on the HDD radio fromsongs recorded to the HDD, seeHard Drive Device (HDD) onpage 7‑29.

Quick Jump

To scroll up or down the list ofArtists, Albums, or Song Titles,press and hold the softkey locatedunder the FWD or REV tab.

To jump to the beginning, middle,or last section of the list:. Press the first softkey located

under the display to go to thebeginning section of the list.

. Press the second softkeylocated under the display to goto the middle section of the list.

. Press the third softkey locatedunder the display to go to thelast section of the list.


Press the softkey under the Shuffletab to play the tracks of the currentfolder in random order. Press againto turn Shuffle off. Shuffle Offdisplays.

Hard Drive Device (HDD)To use the HDD, tracks must berecorded from a CD, MP3 Disc,or USB device first.

Recording from Audio Discs

REC (Record): Press to startrecording tracks from the disc whileit is playing. The radio has theoption to record the current trackplaying or all tracks from the CD.Press the softkey under the desiredrecord option.

The last radio station that was onbegins playing and a status barappears on the top of the displaywhen the recording process starts.The status bar disappears when theprocess has ended. The recordedsongs are now available.

Copy Protected CD(s)

Make sure the disc is notcopy-protected. The radio doesnot copy a copy-protected CD tothe HDD.

Deleting a Recorded Song orCategory

DEL (Delete): Press the DELbutton to delete the track that iscurrently playing or select a trackfrom one of the song lists.

To delete an entire category, selecta category and press DEL.



Stopping the Recording

While recording from the audio CD,press the REC button to display thestop recording option. Press thesoftkey under this option to confirmthe selection.

Ejecting a CD or Turning Off theVehicle While Recording

If the CD is ejected or the vehicleis turned off before the recordingprocess has completed, tracks thathave been completely recordedare stored to the HDD. Incompletetracks are discarded.

Re-recording Audio CDs

If a CD has already been recorded,the radio system will not recordthe contents again. If a partiallyrecorded CD is selected forrecording, only those songs whichare not already on the HDD will berecorded.

Audio CD Song, Artist, Album,and Genre Information

Radios with HDD contain aGracenote® Database that the radiouses to determine the song, artist,album, and genre information. TheGracenote Database allows theradio to record an audio CD to theHDD and store the content usingsong, artist, album, and genreinformation.

Newly released audio CDs as wellas some less common audio CDsmay not be found in the GracenoteDatabase stored on the HDD.If these audio CDs contain CD-text,the radio will use the CD-textinformation when recording thecontent to the HDD. If an audioCD is not found in the GracenoteDatabase and it does not haveCD-text information, the radio willrecord the audio CD with all song,artist, album and genre names as“NO INFO.”

Songs recorded with “NO INFO”to the HDD will be hard to sort,identify, and select. To make HDDnavigation easier, CDs with “NOINFO” can first be converted to MP3format with Tag information on ahome computer and then recordedto the HDD from an MP3 disc orUSB device.

Occasionally, the radio may findmore than one match in theGracenote Database for an audioCD that has been recorded. If thishappens, the radio will display“Multi‐Hit” for the name informationwhen the songs are selected fromthe HDD. With a “Muli‐Hit” songplaying, press the button below theEDIT tab to bring up the list ofmultiple names found in theGracenote Database. Use theMENU/SELECT knob to highlightand select the correct name for the“Multi‐Hit” recorded CD.



The Gracenote Database stored onthe HDD can be updated so that itincludes name information for morerecently released audio CDs. Seeyour dealer for more information onGracenote® Database updates forthe HDD radio.

Recording from MP3/WMADiscs or USB

REC (Record): Press to startrecording tracks from a MP3/WMAdisc or a USB device (excludingiPods) while it is playing. The radiohas the option to record the currenttrack playing or all tracks from theCD. Press the softkey under thedesired record option.

The last radio station that was onbegins playing and a status barappears on the top of the displaywhen the recording process starts.The status bar disappears when theprocess has ended. The recordedsongs are now available.

AAC and OGG Vorbis file types arenot fully supported. These file typesmay or may not play and may beshown without Tag information.Without Tag information available,these file types may be identifiedonly by file name.

AudioBooks from www.audible.comcan also be transferred to the HDDusing the record function. See“AudioBooks” later in this section formore information.

USB Host Support

The USB connector uses the USBstandards, 1.1 and 2.0.

USB Supported Devices. USB Flash Drives. Portable USB Hard Drives

Playing from the Hard DriveDevice

HDD (Hard Drive Device): Pressthe HDD button to start playingtracks from the HDD. HDD displaysand playback resumes from where itwas last stopped.



HDD Playback Mode

The infotainment system displays the current HDD playback mode. Thefollowing table shows the display mode options and what happens as themode is displayed:

Mode When Displayed

Shuffle System is randomly playing back all HDD content.

Artist System is playing back content by a selected artist inalphabetical order.

AlbumSystem is playing back content from a selected album intrack order.

Genre System is playing back content in a selected genre inalphabetical order.

Song System is playing back all songs in alphabetical order.

Playlist System is playing back all songs from the selectedplaylist in the order they were added.

AudioBook System is playing back AudioBook content.

HDD Menu

1. Press the MENU/SELECT knobto display the HDD Menu.

2. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob tohighlight an option from the HDDMenu. The available options are:. Shuffle Songs. Playlist

. Artists

. Albums

. Song Titles

. Genres

. Recently Saved

. AudioBook

3. Press the MENU/SELECT knobto select the desired option.

Quick Jump

To scroll up or down the list ofArtists, Albums, or Song Titles,press and hold the softkey underthe FWD or REV tab.

To jump to the beginning, middle,or last section of the list:. Press the first softkey located

under the display to go to thebeginning section of the list.

. Press the second softkeylocated under the display to goto the middle section of the list.

. Press the third softkey locatedunder the display to go to thelast section of the list.



Shuffle Songs

Select this option from the HDDMenu to randomly play back HDDcontent.

Playlist

Select this option from the HDDMenu to display all six favoriteplaylists, then select one of thesix playlists to display a list ofsongs that have been added to thatfavorite playlist. Select a song fromthe list to begin playback of thatsong and to put the HDD into thePlaylist mode. See “Saving HDDFavorites” later in this section formore information.

HDD Categories

The HDD category mode can beused to select a song by a particularartist, album, or genre for playback.As an example, the HDD Menudisplays a layout such as:

Artists (5)

Albums (6)

Song Titles (77)

Genres (3)

The radio system displays thenumber of available items in eachindividual category as shown on thesample display. For example, thesample display shows there iscontent on the hard drive fromfive individual artists.

Select the HDD Menu category todisplay the available items in eachindividual category, then select anitem from one of these submenus todisplay a list of songs related to thatmenu item. Select a song to beginplayback of that song and to put theHDD in the playback mode.

Recently Saved

Select this option from the HDDMenu to display the last 50 songsadded since the vehicle waslast turned on. The songs arecategorized into songs recordedfrom CDs or USB devices.

AudioBook

The radio is able to play backAudioBook content downloadedfrom www.audible.com. This contentcan be transferred into the HDD byeither burning it to a CD or copyingit to a USB storage device and thenrecording it to the HDD.



The audible.com® playback requiresactivation of the vehicle as a playerfor downloaded content. The radiosystem activates the audible.comsystem when information is foundon either a CD inserted into theCD/DVD player or a USB storagedevice that is connected. TheVehicle Identification Number (VIN)is required in order to activate thevehicle.

Saving HDD Favorites

Press the FAV button to changebetween favorite modes during HDDplayback. The following favoritemodes are supported:. Playlists. Artists. Albums. Genres

Favorites can be saved by pressing and holding the softkey under thefavorites selection. Store favorites according to the following table:

FavoritesDisplay Mode

Action on Press-and-Hold

Playlist Adds currently playing track to the playlistselected.

ArtistSaves the artist associated with the currentlyplaying track in the indicated favorites position.

AlbumSaves the album associated with the currentlyplaying track in the indicated favorites position.

GenreSaves the genre associated with the currentlyplaying track in the indicated favorites position.

Configuring HDD Favorites

Press the CONFIG button to displaythe radio configuration options.Press the softkey under the HDDtab to display the available favoritemodes. Press the softkey under thefavorite tab to set the availablefavorite modes. Available favoritemodes are highlighted.

Time-shifting — Pause andRewind Live FM/AM and XM™(if equipped)

The Radio with DVD Audio, HDD,and USB has the ability to rewind60 minutes of FM/AM and XM(if equipped) content. While listeningto the radio, the content from thecurrent station is always beingbuffered to the HDD.



Press r / j (play/pause) to pausethe radio. The radio display willshow the Time Shift buffer statusbar. The status bar shows theamount of content that is stored inthe buffer and the current pausepoint.

To resume playback fromthe current pause point,press r / j again. The radiowill no longer be playing “live” radio.Instead, time shifted content isbeing played from the buffer. Whenthe radio is playing time shiftedcontent from the buffer, a bufferstatus bar shows below the stationnumber on the left side of screen.


On AM/FM, press the REV or FWDbutton multiple times to rewind orfast forward. Each press will rewindor fast forward 30 seconds ofcontent. On XM, press the REV orFWD button multiple times to jumpto the previous or next song orcommercial.

When the radio station ischanged, the buffer is clearedand automatically restarted for thecurrent station. You cannot rewindthe content from a previously tunedstation.

Time shifting of AM/FM or XM is notavailable while recording or whileother sources of playback areselected.

Pausing AM/FM or XM™(if equipped) with the VehicleTurned Off

If AM/FM or XM is paused beforethe vehicle is turned off, the radiowill continue to buffer the currentradio station for up to one hour.

If the vehicle is turned back onwithin one hour, the radio willautomatically resume playback fromthe pause point.

Auxiliary DevicesThe 3.5 mm (1/8 in) input jack andthe USB port (if equipped), locatedin the center console bin, allowportable devices to connect to thevehicle. This is not an audio output;do not plug headphones into theauxiliary input jack.

Set up auxiliary devices while thevehicle is stopped. See DefensiveDriving on page 9‑2 for moreinformation on driver distraction.

When a device is first connectedto the 3.5 mm (1/8 in) input jackor the USB port (if equipped) theinfotainment system automaticallyswitches to that device. If anauxiliary device has already beenconnected, press the AUX orCD/AUX button.



3.5mm Jack

Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable tothe auxiliary input jack to use aportable audio player.

Playback of an audio device that isconnected to the 3.5 mm (1/8 in)jack can only be controlled usingthe controls on the device.

VOL/ O (Volume/Power): Turnclockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease the volume ofthe portable player. Use the portabledevice to make additional volumeadjustments.

CD or CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary):Press to play a CD when a portableaudio device is playing. Press againto start playing audio from theconnected portable audio player.If a portable audio player is notconnected, “No Aux Device”displays.

USB Port

The USB connector uses the USBstandards, 1.1 and 2.0.

USB Supported Devices. USB Flash Drives. Portable USB Hard Drives. Fifth generation or later iPods*. First, Second, or Third

generation iPod nanos*. iPod classics*

*For proper operation, makesure the iPod has the latestfirmware from Apple®. The iPodfirmware can be updated using thelatest iTunes application. Seewww.apple.com/itunes.

Connecting a USB Storage Device

Connect the USB storage device tothe USB port located in the centerconsole. Some USB devices maynot be supported.

Playing an MP3/WMA from a USBStorage Device

See MP3 on page 7‑25 for moreinformation.

Connecting an iPod

To connect the iPod, connect oneend of the special iPod connectioncable to the iPod’s dock connector.Connect the other end to both theUSB port and the auxiliary input jacklocated in the center console. TheUSB port and the auxiliary input jackare located in the center consolebin. If the vehicle is on and the USBconnection works, a GM logo mayappear on the iPod. The iPod'smusic information will be shown onthe radio’s display and the musicbegins playing through the vehicle'saudio system.

The iPod's battery charges whileit is connected to the vehicleand if the ignition is turned toACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN.It can also be left connected to thevehicle after the vehicle is turnedoff. With the vehicle turned off, theiPod will automatically be poweredoff and will not charge or drawpower from the vehicle's battery.



A standard iPod USB cable, likethe one that came with the iPod,cannot be used to connect an iPodto the vehicle. The special iPodconnection cable that cameequipped with the vehicle or thatwas made available from yourdealer must be used to commandand control an iPod.

Use a standard 3.5 mm (1/8 in)stereo cable to connect an olderiPod model that is not supported,or if the special iPod connectioncable is missing. Command andcontrol of the iPod using theinfotainment control buttons andknobs is not supported when only a3.5 mm (1/8 in) stereo cable is used.

Commanding and Controllingan iPod

An iPod™ can be controlled byusing the radio buttons and knobs;the song information shows on theinfotainment system's display.

To connect and control the iPodusing the radio controls, use thespecial iPod connection cable thatcame as standard equipment withthe vehicle as part of the USBoption. The special iPod connectioncable can also be purchased ormade available, from your dealer.See your dealer for moreinformation.

Use the Menu/Select knob to bringup the iPod Menu and select Songs,Artists, Albums, Playlists and Audiobooks to play from the iPod.

Disconnecting an iPod

To properly dismount the iPodUSB device before disconnectingfrom the vehicle, press the softkeyunder the EJECT tab on theinfotainment display screen duringiPod playback.

Phone

BluetoothVehicles with a Bluetooth® systemcan use a Bluetooth‐capable cellphone with a Hands‐Free Profileto make and receive phone calls.The system can be used whilethe ignition is in the ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY position. Therange of the Bluetooth systemcan be up to 9.1 m (30 ft). Not allphones support all functions, andnot all phones are guaranteed towork with the Bluetooth system. Seewww.gm.com/bluetooth for moreinformation on compatible phones.



Voice Recognition

The Bluetooth system uses voicerecognition to interpret voicecommands to dial phone numbersand name tags.

For additional information say“Help” while you are in a voicerecognition menu.

Noise: Keep interior noise levels toa minimum. The system may notrecognize voice commands if thereis too much background noise.

When to Speak: A short tonesounds after the system respondsindicating when it is waiting for avoice command. Wait until the toneand then speak.

How to Speak: Speak clearly in acalm and natural voice.

Audio System

When using the in‐vehicle Bluetoothsystem, sound comes throughthe vehicle's front audio systemspeakers and over‐rides the audiosystem. Use the audio systemvolume knob, during a call, tochange the volume level. Theadjusted volume level remains inmemory for later calls. To preventmissed calls, a minimum volumelevel is used if the volume is turneddown too low.

Bluetooth Controls

Use the buttons located on thesteering wheel to operate thein‐vehicle Bluetooth system. SeeSteering Wheel Controls (Audio) onpage 5‑3 for more information.

b g (Push To Talk): Press toanswer incoming calls, to confirmsystem information, and to startspeech recognition.

cª (Phone On Hook): Pressto end a call, reject a call, or tocancel an operation.

For vehicles without a navigationsystem, the system responds with“Ready” followed by a tone.

For vehicles with a navigationsystem, the system responds witha tone. After the tone, say “HandsFree.” The system responds with“Ready” followed by a tone.



Pairing

A Bluetooth‐enabled cell phonemust be paired to the in‐vehicleBluetooth system first and thenconnected to the vehicle before itcan be used. See the cell phonemanufacturer's user guide forBluetooth functions before pairingthe cell phone. If a Bluetooth phoneis not connected, calls will be madeusing OnStar® Hands‐Free Calling,if available. Refer to the OnStarOwner's Guide for more information.

Pairing Information:. Up to five cell phones can be

paired to the Bluetooth system.. The pairing process is disabled

when the vehicle is moving.. Pairing only needs to be

completed once, unless thepairing information on the cellphone changes or the cell phoneis deleted from the system.

. Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the Bluetoothsystem at a time.

. If multiple paired cell phonesare within range of the system,the system connects to thefirst available paired cell phonein the order that they were firstpaired to the system. To link toa different paired phone, see“Connecting to a DifferentPhone” later in this section.

Pairing a Phone

1. Press and hold b g fortwo seconds. For vehicleswith a navigation system say“Hands Free” after the tone.

2. Say “Bluetooth.”

3. Say “Pair.” The system respondswith instructions and a four‐digitPersonal Identification Number(PIN). The PIN will be used inStep 5.

4. Start the pairing process on thecell phone that you want to pair.For help with this process, seeyour cell phone manufacturer'suser guide.

5. Locate the device named “YourVehicle” in the list on the cellphone. Follow the instructionson the cell phone to enter thePIN that was provided in Step 3.After the PIN is successfullyentered, the system prompts youto provide a name for the pairedcell phone. This name will beused to indicate which phonesare paired and connected to thevehicle. See “Listing All Pairedand Connected Phones” in thissection for more information.

6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 to pairadditional phones.



Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones



3. Say “List.”

Deleting a Paired Phone



3. Say “Delete.” The system askswhich phone to delete.

4. Say the name of the phone youwant to delete.

Connecting to a Different Phone

To connect to a different cell phone,the Bluetooth system looks for thenext available cell phone in theorder in which all the available cellphones were paired. Depending onwhich cell phone you want toconnect to, you may have to usethis command several times.

1. Press and hold b g fortwo seconds. For vehicles with anavigation system say “HandsFree” after the tone.


3. Say “Change phone.”. If another phone is found,

the response will be“<Phone name> is nowconnected.”

. If another phone is notfound, the original phoneremains connected.

Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers

The system can store up to30 phone numbers as name tags inthe Hands Free Directory that isshared between the Bluetooth andOnStar systems.



The following commands are used to delete and store phone numbers.

Command Usage

Store This command will store a phone number,or a group of numbers as a name tag.

Digit Store This command allows a phone number tobe stored as a name tag by entering thedigits one at a time.

Delete This command is used to delete individualname tags.

Delete All Name Tags This command deletes all stored name tagsin the Hands Free Calling Directory and theOnStar Turn by Turn Destinations Directory.

Using the “Store” Command


2. Say “Store.”

3. Say the phone number or groupof numbers you want to store allat once with no pauses, then

follow the directions given by thesystem to save a name tag forthis number.

Using the “Digit Store” Command

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear thelast number.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time.


2. Say “Digit Store.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to store. Aftereach digit is entered, the systemrepeats back the digit it heardfollowed by a tone. After thelast digit has been entered, say“Store,” and then follow thedirections given by the system tosave a name tag for this number.

Using the “Delete” Command


2. Say “Delete.”

3. Say the name tag you want todelete.



Using the “Delete All Name Tags”Command

This command deletes all storedname tags in the Hands FreeCalling Directory and the OnStarTurn by Turn Destinations Directory.

To delete all name tags:


2. Say “Delete all name tags.”

Listing Stored Numbers

The list command will list all thestored numbers and name tags.

Using the “List” Command


2. Say “Directory.”

3. Say “Hands Free Calling.”

4. Say “List.”

Making a Call

Calls can be made using the following commands.

Command Usage

Dial or Call The dial or call command can be usedinterchangeably to dial a phone number ora stored name tag.

Digit Dial This command allows a phone number tobe dialed by entering the digits one ata time.

Re‐dial This command is used to dial the lastnumber used on the cell phone.

Using the “Dial” or “Call”Command


2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing or say the name tag.

Once connected, the person calledwill be heard through the audiospeakers.

Using the “Digit Dial” Command

The digit dial command allows aphone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.After each digit is entered, thesystem repeats back the digit itheard followed by a tone.



If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear the lastnumber.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time.


2. Say “Digit Dial.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to dial. Aftereach digit is entered, the systemrepeats back the digit it heardfollowed by a tone. After thelast digit has been entered,say “Dial.”


Using the “Re‐dial” Command


2. After the tone, say “Re‐dial.”


Receiving a Call

When an incoming call is received,the audio system mutes and a ringtone is heard in the vehicle.

. Press b g to answer the call.

. Presscª to ignore a call.

Call Waiting

Call waiting must be supported onthe Bluetooth phone and enabled bythe wireless service carrier to work.

. Press b g to answer anincoming call when anothercall is active. The original call isplaced on hold.

. Press b g again to return to theoriginal call.

. To ignore the incoming call,continue with the original callwith no action.

. Presscª to disconnect thecurrent call and switch to the callon hold.



Three‐Way Calling

Three‐Way Calling must besupported on the Bluetoothphone and enabled by thewireless service carrier to work.

1. While on a call press b g.2. Say “Three‐way call.”

3. Use the dial or call command todial the number of the third partyto call.

4. Once the call is connected,press b g to link all the callerstogether.

Ending a Call

Presscª to end a call.

Muting a Call

During a call, all sounds from insidethe vehicle can be muted so that theperson on the other end of the callcannot hear them.

To mute a call, press b g and thensay “Mute Call.”

To cancel mute, press b g andthen say “Un‐mute Call.”

Transferring a Call

Audio can be transferred betweenthe in‐vehicle Bluetooth system andthe cell phone.

The cell phone must be pairedand connected with the Bluetoothsystem before a call can betransferred. The connection processcan take up to two minutes after theignition is turned to ON/RUN.

To Transfer Audio from theBluetooth System to a Cell Phone

1. Press b g.2. Say “Transfer Call.”

To Transfer Audio to the BluetoothSystem from a Cell Phone

During a call with the audio onthe cell phone, press b g fortwo seconds. For vehicles with anavigation system say “Hands Free”after the tone. The audio transfersto the vehicle. If the audio does nottransfer to the vehicle, use the audiotransfer feature on the cell phone.See your cell phone manufacturer'suser guide for more information.



Voice Pass‐Thru

Voice Pass‐Thru allows access tothe voice recognition commands onthe cell phone. See the cell phonemanufacturer's user guide to see ifthe cell phone supports this feature.This feature can be used to verballyaccess contacts stored in the cellphone.

1. Press and hold b g fortwo seconds.


3. Say “Voice.” The systemresponds with “OK, accessing<phone name>.”. The cell phone's normal

prompt messages willgo through their cycleaccording to the phone'soperating instructions.

Dual Tone Multi‐Frequency(DTMF) Tones

The Bluetooth system can sendnumbers and the numbers storedas name tags during a call. Youcan use this feature when callinga menu‐driven phone system.Account numbers can also bestored for use.

1. Press b g.2. Say “Dial.”

3. Say the number or name tagto send.

Clearing the System

Unless information is deleted out ofthe in‐vehicle Bluetooth system, itwill be retained indefinitely. Thisincludes all saved name tags inthe phone book and phone pairinginformation. For information on howto delete this information, see theprevious sections on “Deleting aPaired Phone” and “Storing andDeleting Phone Numbers.”

Other Information

The Bluetooth® word mark andlogos are owned by the Bluetooth®

SIG, Inc. and any use of such marksby General Motors is under license.Other trademarks and trade namesare those of their respective owners.

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑18 for FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards.



2 NOTES


Climate Controls 8-1

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemsDual Automatic Climate ControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Air VentsAir Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

MaintenancePassenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

Climate Control Systems

Dual Automatic Climate Control SystemThe heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled withthis system.

A. Display

B. Fan

C. Power

D. AUTO

E. PASS (Passenger ClimateControl)

F. Defrost

G. Air Delivery Mode

H. Temperature and Heated/Ventilated Seat

I. Air Conditioning

J. Recirculation


8-2 Climate Controls

K. Outside Air

L. Rear Window Defogger

Automatic Operation

AUTO (Automatic): The systemautomatically controls fan speed, airdelivery, and air conditioning inorder to heat or cool the vehicle tothe desired temperature. When theindicator light is on, the system is infull automatic operation. If the airdelivery mode or fan setting ismanually adjusted, the autoindicator turns off and displayswill show the selected settings.

1. Press the AUTO button.

2. Adjust the temperature to acomfortable setting between21°C (70°F) and 27°C (80°F).

Choosing the coldest or warmesttemperature setting will notcause the system to heat orcool any faster.

To avoid blowing cold air incold weather, the system delaysturning on the fan until warm airis available. The system startsout blowing air at the floor,but can automatically changemodes as the vehicle warmsup to maintain the chosentemperature setting. The lengthof time needed for warm updepends on the outsidetemperature and the lengthof time that has elapsed sincethe vehicle was last driven.

3. Wait for the system to regulate.This may take from 10 to30 minutes. Then adjust thetemperature, if necessary.

English can be changed tometric units through the DriverInformation Center (DIC). SeeDriver Information Center (DIC) onpage 5‑27.

Q /R (Temperature Control):The temperature can be adjustedseparately for the driver and thepassenger. Press to increase ordecrease the automatic temperaturesettings.

PASS (Passenger ClimateControl): Press to set a differenttemperature for the passenger.Then adjust the passengertemperature buttons to acomfortable setting.

Pressing the PASS button againautomatically sets the passenger'stemperature to the driver's setting.

Turning the passenger'stemperature display off doesnot shut the passenger's climatecontrol system off.



Manual Operation

O (Power): Press to turn theclimate control system on or off.When the climate control system isturned off the air inlet defaults tooutside air.

D C (Fan Control): Press thebuttons to increase or decrease thefan speed. Pressing either buttoncancels automatic fan control.Press AUTO to return to automaticoperation. The blower may reduceduring an Onstar® session to limitbackground noise.

If the airflow seems low when thefan speed is at the highest setting,the passenger compartment airfilter might need to be replaced. Formore information, see PassengerCompartment Air Filter on page 8‑7and Scheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2.

H G (Air Delivery Mode Control):Press the buttons to change thedirection of the airflow. The currentmode appears in the display screen.Changing the mode cancels theautomatic air delivery. Press AUTOto return to automatic operation.

The outboard air outlets alwaysreceive some airflow in every mode,except defrost.

To change the current mode, selectone of the following:

Y (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

\ (Bi-Level): Air is dividedbetween the instrument paneloutlets and the floor outlets. Inautomatic operation, cooler air isdirected to the upper outlets andwarmer air to the floor outlets.

[ (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets, with some air directedto the windshield and outboardoutlets.

- (Defog): This mode clears thewindows of fog or moisture. Air isdirected to the windshield, floor,and side window outlets. Whenthis mode is selected, the systemturns off recirculation and runs theair-conditioning compressor unlessthe outside temperature is at orbelow freezing. If recirculation isselected while in defog mode, it iscancelled after 10 minutes.

0 (Defrost): This mode clearsthe windshield of fog or frostmore quickly. Air is directed to thewindshield, with some air directedto the side windows. In this mode,the system automatically turnsoff recirculation and runs theair-conditioning compressor, unlessthe outside temperature is at orbelow freezing.

This mode can also cause the fanspeed and air temperature toincrease.



# (Air Conditioning): Press toturn the air conditioning system onor off and override the automaticsystem. When in AUTO, the airconditioning compressor comes onautomatically, as needed.

The air conditioning systemremoves moisture from the air, sowater might drip under the vehiclewhile idling or after turning off theengine. This is normal.

M (Recirculation): Press to turnon recirculation. An indicator lightcomes on. Air is recirculated insidethe vehicle. It helps to quickly coolthe air inside the vehicle or preventoutside air and odors from entering.Press the AUTO button to have thesystem select the best air deliverymode for the temperature setting.

Recirculation is not available in thedefrost mode and automaticallyturns off 10 minutes after defog isselected. This helps to limit windowfogging in the vehicle.

Using recirculation for long periodsof time could cause the air insidethe vehicle to become too dryor stuffy. To prevent this fromhappening, after the air in thevehicle has cooled, select outsideair or press the auto button.

F (Outside Air): Press to turnon the outside air. An indicator lightturns on. The outside air mode pullsfresh air from outside the vehicle.Outside air is always selected indefrost mode to prevent fogging.

Rear Window Defogger

The rear window defogger uses awarming grid to remove fog or frostfrom the rear window. It only workswhen the ignition is in ON/RUN.

= (Rear Window Defogger):Press to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off.

The rear window defogger stays onfor about 15 minutes, before turningoff if the vehicle is moving at aslower speed. At higher speeds, therear window defogger may stay oncontinuously. With each additionalpress, the defogger runs for about10 minutes. The defogger can alsobe turned off by turning off theengine.

The heated outside rearview mirrorsturn on when the rear windowdefogger button is on and helps toclear fog or frost from the surface ofthe mirrors. See Heated Mirrors onpage 2‑29.

Notice: Do not try to clear frostor other material from the insideof the front windshield and rearwindow with a razor blade oranything else that is sharp. Thismay damage the rear windowdefogger grid and affect yourradio's ability to pick up stationsclearly. The repairs wouldn't becovered by your warranty.



z / { (Heated and VentilatedSeats): Press to heat or ventilatethe seat. See Heated and VentilatedFront Seats on page 3‑12.

Remote Start Climate ControlOperation: For vehicles withremote vehicle start, the climatecontrol system automatically heatsand cools the vehicle based on thetemperature inside and outside ofthe vehicle. The climate controldisplays will be blank. See RemoteVehicle Start on page 2‑12.

In cold weather the windshielddefroster and/or rear windowdefogger automatically turn on.If the vehicle has heated seats, theywill also turn on.

When the ignition is turned toON/RUN, the climate control systemreturns to the settings used beforethe vehicle was last turned off.The heated seats will turn off,if equipped.

Sensors

The solar sensor located onthe instrument panel, near thewindshield, monitors the solar heat.

The interior temperature sensor,located on the instrument panelto the right of the steering wheel,measures the temperature of the airinside the vehicle.

The climate control system uses theinformation from these sensors toadjust the fan speed and the airdelivery, in order to maintain theselected temperature. The systemmay also supply cooler air to theside of the vehicle facing the sun.The recirculation mode will also beactivated, as necessary.



Do not cover the sensors or theautomatic climate control system willnot work properly.

Air Quality Sensor

For vehicles with an air qualitysensor, the climate control systemadjusts to limit some exhaust fumesfrom being pulled inside yourvehicle.

Press the AUTO button on theclimate control to activate the airquality sensor. The recirculationindicator light comes on when poorquality air is detected. The airquality sensor will not maintainrecirculation for an extended periodto prevent the air inside the vehiclefrom becoming too dry or stuffy.

Under certain conditions, the airquality sensor will not activaterecirculation, such as during coldweather or with odors, like skunk. Tolimit odors manually, pressM untilthe condition has passed.

The air quality sensor systemdoes not protect against carbonmonoxide (CO), which you cannotsee or smell. See Engine Exhauston page 9‑25.

Air VentsUse the air outlets located in thecenter and on the side of theinstrument panel to direct theairflow. Use the thumbwheels nearthe air outlets to open or close offthe airflow.

Operation Tips. Clear away any ice, snow,

or leaves from air inlets at thebase of the windshield that couldblock the flow of air into thevehicle.

. Keep the path under the frontseats clear of objects to helpcirculate the air inside of thevehicle more effectively.

. Use of non‐GM approved hooddeflectors can adversely affectthe performance of the system.Check with your dealer beforeadding equipment to the outsideof the vehicle.



Maintenance

Passenger CompartmentAir FilterThe passenger compartment airfilter traps most of the dust andpollen from the air entering thevehicle. The filter will need tobe changed periodically. SeeMaintenance Replacement Parts onpage 11‑9.

Using the climate control systemwithout the passenger air filterinstalled could let water or otherdebris enter the system. This couldcause a water leak or noises. Makesure a new air filter is installed afterremoving the old one.

The passenger compartment airfilter is located under the hoodbelow the windshield wiper armand the screen on the passengerside of the vehicle. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for more informationon location.

To replace the passengercompartment air filter:


2. Turn on the windshield wipersand turn the ignition off againwhen the wipers are straight upon the windshield.

This allows access to theleaf screen. The passengercompartment air filter is locatedunder the screen.

3. Open the hood to accessthe engine compartment. SeeHood on page 10‑5 for moreinformation.

4. Remove the three screws thathold the screen in place andlift off the screen by lifting andsliding it toward the center of thevehicle.



5. Pull out on the two tabs locatedon each end of the filter cover.

6. Lift the filter cover off by pullingit straight up.

7. Remove the old filter and inserta new one.

See Maintenance ReplacementParts on page 11‑9 for thecorrect part number for the filter.

8. Reverse Steps 1 through 6 toreinstall the cover.


Driving and Operating 9-1

Driving andOperating

Driving InformationDefensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Competitive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-7Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-8Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-11Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-11

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-16Ignition Positions (KeyAccess) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17

Ignition Positions (KeylessAccess) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18

Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-19Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22

Engine Coolant Heater . . . . . . . 9-22Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23Shifting Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-24Parking (ManualTransmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24

Parking Over ThingsThat Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25

Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26

Automatic TransmissionAutomatic Transmission . . . . . 9-26Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29

Manual TransmissionManual Transmission . . . . . . . . 9-31

Drive SystemsAll-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33

BrakesAntilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33

Parking Brake (Manual) . . . . . . 9-34Parking Brake (Electric) . . . . . . 9-35Brake Assist(Except CTS-V) . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37

Ride Control SystemsTraction ControlSystem (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38

StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 9-39Competitive Driving Mode . . . 9-39Magnetic Ride Control . . . . . . . 9-40Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . 9-40

Cruise ControlCruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41

Object Detection SystemsUltrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 9-43Rear VisionCamera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44


9-2 Driving and Operating

FuelFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-48Gasoline Specifications(U.S. and Canada Only) . . . . 9-48

California FuelRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48

Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-49Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52

TowingGeneral TowingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52

Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53

Trailer Towing(Except CTS-V andCoupe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57

Trailer Towing(CTS-V and Coupe) . . . . . . . . 9-58

Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58

Conversions and Add-OnsAdd-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59

Driving Information

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” The firststep in driving defensively is to wearthe safety belt. See Safety Belts onpage 3‑14.

{ WARNING

Assume that other road users(pedestrians, bicyclists, and otherdrivers) are going to be carelessand make mistakes. Anticipatewhat they might do and be ready.In addition:

. Allow enough followingdistance between you andthe driver in front of you.

. Focus on the task of driving.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Driver distraction can causecollisions resulting in injury orpossible death. These simpledefensive driving techniquescould save your life.

Drunk Driving

{ WARNING

Drinking and then driving isvery dangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected byeven a small amount of alcohol.You can have a serious — oreven fatal — collision if you driveafter drinking. Do not drink anddrive or ride with a driver who hasbeen drinking. Ride home in acab; or if you are with a group,designate a driver who will notdrink.



Death and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.

Alcohol affects four things thatanyone needs to drive a vehicle:judgment, muscular coordination,vision, and attentiveness.

Police records show thatalmost 40 percent of all motorvehicle-related deaths involvealcohol. In most cases, thesedeaths are the result of someonewho was drinking and driving.In recent years, more than17,000 annual motor vehicle-relateddeaths have been associated withthe use of alcohol, with about250,000 people injured.

For persons under 21, it is againstthe law in every U.S. state to drinkalcohol. There are good medical,psychological, and developmentalreasons for these laws.

The obvious way to eliminate theleading highway safety problem isfor people never to drink alcoholand then drive.

Medical research shows thatalcohol in a person's systemcan make crash injuries worse,especially injuries to the brain,spinal cord, or heart. This meansthat when anyone who has beendrinking — driver or passenger — isin a crash, that person's chance ofbeing killed or permanently disabledis higher than if the person had notbeen drinking.

Control of a VehicleThe following three systemshelp to control the vehicle whiledriving — brakes, steering, andaccelerator. At times, as whendriving on snow or ice, it is easy toask more of those control systemsthan the tires and road can provide.Meaning, you can lose control ofthe vehicle. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 9‑38.

Adding non‐dealer accessories canaffect vehicle performance. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10‑3.

BrakingSee Brake System Warning Light onpage 5‑22.

Braking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Deciding topush the brake pedal is perceptiontime. Actually doing it isreaction time.

Average reaction time is aboutthree‐fourths of a second. Butthat is only an average. It might beless with one driver and as long astwo or three seconds or more withanother. Age, physical condition,alertness, coordination, andeyesight all play a part. So doalcohol, drugs, and frustration.But even in three‐fourths ofa second, a vehicle moving at100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m(66 ft). That could be a lot ofdistance in an emergency, sokeeping enough space betweenthe vehicle and others is important.



And, of course, actual stoppingdistances vary greatly with thesurface of the road, whether it ispavement or gravel; the conditionof the road, whether it is wet, dry,or icy; tire tread; the condition of thebrakes; the weight of the vehicle;and the amount of brake forceapplied.

Avoid needless heavybraking. Some people drive inspurts — heavy accelerationfollowed by heavy braking — ratherthan keeping pace with traffic. Thisis a mistake. The brakes might nothave time to cool between hardstops. The brakes will wear outmuch faster with a lot of heavybraking. Keeping pace with thetraffic and allowing realisticfollowing distances eliminatesa lot of unnecessary braking. Thatmeans better braking and longerbrake life.

If the engine ever stops while thevehicle is being driven, brakenormally but do not pump thebrakes. If the brakes are pumped,the pedal could get harder to pushdown. If the engine stops, there willstill be some power brake assist butit will be used when the brake isapplied. Once the power assist isused up, it can take longer to stopand the brake pedal will be harderto push.

Adding non‐dealer accessories canaffect vehicle performance. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10‑3.

Steering

Power Steering

If power steering assist is lostbecause the engine stops or thepower steering system is notfunctioning, the vehicle can besteered but it will take more effort.

Speed Variable Assist Steering

The vehicle has a steering systemthat varies the amount of effortrequired to steer the vehicle inrelation to the speed of the vehicle.

The amount of steering effortrequired is less at slower speedsto make the vehicle moremaneuverable and easier to park.At faster speeds, the steering effortincreases to provide a sport-likefeel to the steering. This providesmaximum control and stability.

If the vehicle seems harder to steerthan normal when parking or drivingslowly, there may be a problem withthe system. You will still have powersteering, but steering will be stifferthan normal at slow speeds. Seeyour dealer for service.



Steering Tips

It is important to take curves at areasonable speed.

Traction in a curve depends on thecondition of the tires and the roadsurface, the angle at which thecurve is banked, and vehicle speed.While in a curve, speed is theone factor that can be controlled.

If there is a need to reduce speed,do it before entering the curve, whilethe front wheels are straight.

Try to adjust the speed so you candrive through the curve. Maintain areasonable, steady speed. Wait toaccelerate until out of the curve,and then accelerate gently into thestraightaway.

Steering in Emergencies

There are times when steering canbe more effective than braking. Forexample, you come over a hill andfind a truck stopped in your lane,or a car suddenly pulls out fromnowhere, or a child darts out frombetween parked cars and stops rightin front of you. These problems canbe avoided by braking— if you canstop in time. But sometimes youcannot stop in time because thereis no room. That is the time forevasive action— steering aroundthe problem.

The vehicle can perform verywell in emergencies like these.First apply the brakes. See Brakingon page 9‑3. It is better to removeas much speed as possible froma collision. Then steer aroundthe problem, to the left or rightdepending on the space available.

An emergency like this requiresclose attention and a quick decision.If holding the steering wheel at therecommended 9 and 3 o'clockpositions, it can be turned a full180 degrees very quickly withoutremoving either hand. But you haveto act fast, steer quickly, and just asquickly straighten the wheel onceyou have avoided the object.

The fact that such emergencysituations are always possible is agood reason to practice defensivedriving at all times and wear safetybelts properly.



Off-Road RecoveryThe vehicle's right wheels can dropoff the edge of a road onto theshoulder while driving.

If the level of the shoulder is onlyslightly below the pavement,recovery should be fairly easy.Ease off the accelerator and then,if there is nothing in the way, steerso that the vehicle straddles theedge of the pavement. Turn thesteering wheel 8 to 13 cm(3 to 5 in), about one-eighth turn,until the right front tire contacts the

pavement edge. Then turn thesteering wheel to go straight downthe roadway.

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving expertssay about what happens when thethree control systems— brakes,steering, and acceleration— do nothave enough friction where the tiresmeet the road to do what the driverhas asked.

In any emergency, do not give up.Keep trying to steer and constantlyseek an escape route or area ofless danger.

Skidding

In a skid, a driver can lose control ofthe vehicle. Defensive drivers avoidmost skids by taking reasonablecare suited to existing conditions,and by not overdriving thoseconditions. But skids are alwayspossible.

The three types of skidscorrespond to the vehicle'sthree control systems. In thebraking skid, the wheels are notrolling. In the steering or corneringskid, too much speed or steeringin a curve causes tires to slip andlose cornering force. And in theacceleration skid, too much throttlecauses the driving wheels to spin.

If the vehicle starts to slide, easeyour foot off the accelerator pedaland quickly steer the way youwant the vehicle to go. If you startsteering quickly enough, the vehiclemay straighten out. Always be readyfor a second skid if it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced whenwater, snow, ice, gravel, or othermaterial is on the road. For safety,slow down and adjust your driving tothese conditions. It is important toslow down on slippery surfacesbecause stopping distance is longerand vehicle control more limited.



While driving on a surface withreduced traction, try to avoidsudden steering, acceleration,or braking, including reducingvehicle speed by shifting to a lowergear. Any sudden changes couldcause the tires to slide. You mightnot realize the surface is slipperyuntil the vehicle is skidding. Learn torecognize warning clues— such asenough water, ice, or packed snowon the road to make a mirroredsurface— and slow down whenyou have any doubt.

Remember: Antilock brakes helpavoid only the braking skid.

Competitive DrivingCompetitive driving may affect thevehicle warranty. See the warrantybook before using the vehicle forcompetitive driving.

Notice: If you use your vehiclefor competitive driving, theengine may use more oil than itwould with normal use. Low oillevels can damage the engine.

Be sure to check the oil leveloften during competitive drivingand keep the level at or near theupper mark that shows the properoperating range on the engine oildipstick. For information on howto add oil, see Engine Oil onpage 10‑10.

CTS‐V Only: For competitivedriving, it is recommended thatthe brake fluid be replaced with ahigh performance brake fluid thathas a dry boiling point greater than279°C (534°F). After conversion tothe high performance brake fluid,follow the brake fluid servicerecommendations outlined by thefluid manufacturer. Do not usesilicone or DOT‐5 brake fluids.

Driving on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reducevehicle traction and affect yourability to stop and accelerate.

Always drive slower in these typesof driving conditions and avoiddriving through large puddles anddeep‐standing or flowing water.

{ WARNING

Wet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well ina quick stop and could causepulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a largepuddle of water or a car/vehiclewash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes worknormally.

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause thevehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.



Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Watercan build up under the vehicle'stires so they actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the roadis wet enough and you are goingfast enough. When the vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or nocontact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is toslow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:. Allow extra following distance.. Pass with caution.. Keep windshield wiping

equipment in good shape.

. Keep the windshield washer fluidreservoir filled.

. Have good tires with propertread depth. See Tires onpage 10‑64.

. Turn off cruise control.

Highway HypnosisAlways be alert and pay attentionto your surroundings while driving.If you become tired or sleepy, finda safe place to park the vehicleand rest.

Other driving tips include:. Keep the vehicle well ventilated.. Keep interior temperature cool.. Keep your eyes moving — scan

the road ahead and to the sides.. Check the rearview mirror and

vehicle instruments often.

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than drivingon flat or rolling terrain. Tips fordriving in these conditions include:. Keep the vehicle serviced and in

good shape.. Check all fluid levels and brakes,

tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

. Shift to a lower gear when goingdown steep or long hills.

{ WARNING

If you do not shift down, thebrakes could get so hot that theywould not work well. You wouldthen have poor braking or evennone going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let the engineassist the brakes on a steepdownhill slope.



{ WARNING

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)or with the ignition off isdangerous. The brakes will haveto do all the work of slowing downand they could get so hot thatthey would not work well. Youwould then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill. Youcould crash. Always have theengine running and the vehicle ingear when going downhill.

. Stay in your own lane. Do notswing wide or cut across thecenter of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in yourown lane.

. Top of hills: Bealert — something couldbe in your lane (stalled car,accident).

. Pay attention to special roadsigns (falling rocks area, windingroads, long grades, passing orno-passing zones) and takeappropriate action.

Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or Ice

Drive carefully when there is snowor ice between the tires and theroad, creating less traction or grip.Wet ice can occur at about 0°C(32°F) when freezing rain begins tofall, resulting in even less traction.Avoid driving on wet ice or infreezing rain until roads can betreated with salt or sand.

Drive with caution, whatever thecondition. Accelerate gently sotraction is not lost. Accelerating tooquickly causes the wheels to spinand makes the surface under thetires slick, so there is even lesstraction.

Try not to break the fragile traction.If you accelerate too fast, the drivewheels will spin and polish thesurface under the tires even more.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS)on page 9‑33 improves vehiclestability during hard stops onslippery roads, but apply the brakessooner than when on dry pavement.

Allow greater following distance onany slippery road and watch forslippery spots. Icy patches canoccur on otherwise clear roads inshaded areas. The surface of acurve or an overpass can remainicy when the surrounding roadsare clear. Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking whileon ice.

Turn off cruise control, if equipped,on slippery surfaces.

Blizzard Conditions

Being stuck in snow can be aserious situation. Stay with thevehicle unless there is help nearby.



If possible, use the RoadsideService (U.S. and Canada) onpage 13‑7 or Roadside Service(Mexico) on page 13‑9. To gethelp and keep everyone in thevehicle safe:. Turn on the hazard warning

flashers.. Tie a red cloth to an outside

mirror.

{ WARNING

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This maycause exhaust gases to getinside. Engine exhaust containsCarbon Monoxide (CO) whichcannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:. Clear away snow from aroundthe base of your vehicle,especially any that is blockingthe exhaust pipe.

. Check again from time totime to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

. Open a window about 5 cm(2 in) on the side of thevehicle that is away from thewind to bring in fresh air.

. Fully open the air outletson or under the instrumentpanel.

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatcirculates the air inside thevehicle and set the fan speedto the highest setting. SeeClimate Control System in theIndex.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)


Snow can trap exhaust gasesunder your vehicle. This cancause deadly CO (CarbonMonoxide) gas to get inside. COcould overcome you and kill you.You cannot see it or smell it, soyou might not know it is in yourvehicle. Clear away snow fromaround the base of your vehicle,especially any that is blocking theexhaust.

Run the engine for short periodsonly as needed to keep warm, butbe careful.

To save fuel, run the engine foronly short periods as needed towarm the vehicle and then shut theengine off and close the windowmost of the way to save heat.



Repeat this until help arrivesbut only when you feel reallyuncomfortable from the cold.Moving about to keep warmalso helps.

If it takes some time for help toarrive, now and then when you runthe engine, push the acceleratorpedal slightly so the engine runsfaster than the idle speed. Thiskeeps the battery charged to restartthe vehicle and to signal for helpwith the headlamps. Do this as littleas possible to save fuel.

If the Vehicle is StuckSlowly and cautiously spin thewheels to free the vehicle whenstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.

If stuck too severely for the tractionsystem to free the vehicle, turn thetraction system off and use therocking method.

{ WARNING

If the vehicle's tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and youor others could be injured. Thevehicle can overheat, causing anengine compartment fire or otherdamage. Spin the wheels as littleas possible and avoid goingabove 55 km/h (35 mph).

For information about using tirechains on the vehicle, see TireChains on page 10‑86.

Rocking the Vehicle to Getit Out

Turn the steering wheel left andright to clear the area around thefront wheels. Turn off any tractionsystem. Shift back and forthbetween R (Reverse) and a forwardgear, or with a manual transmission,between 1 (First) or 2 (Second) andR (Reverse), spinning the wheelsas little as possible. To preventtransmission wear, wait until the

wheels stop spinning before shiftinggears. Release the acceleratorpedal while shifting, and presslightly on the accelerator pedalwhen the transmission is in gear.Slowly spinning the wheels in theforward and reverse directionscauses a rocking motion that couldfree the vehicle. If that does not getthe vehicle out after a few tries, itmight need to be towed out. If thevehicle does need to be towedout, see Towing the Vehicle onpage 10‑111.

Vehicle Load LimitsIt is very important to know howmuch weight the vehicle cancarry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight andincludes the weight of alloccupants, cargo and allnonfactory‐installed options.



Two labels on the vehicleshow how much weight it mayproperly carry, the Tire andLoading Information label andthe Certification label.

{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.

Tire and Loading InformationLabel

Label Example

A vehicle specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the vehicle's centerpillar (B-pillar). With the driver'sdoor open, you will find the labelattached near the door lockpost. The Tire and LoadingInformation label shows thenumber of occupant seating

positions (A), and the maximumvehicle capacity weight (B) inkilograms and pounds.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label also showsthe tire size of the originalequipment tires (C) and therecommended cold tire inflationpressures (D). For moreinformation on tires and inflationsee Tires on page 10‑64 andTire Pressure on page 10‑72.

There is also important loadinginformation on the Certificationlabel. It tells you the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)and the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) for the front andrear axle. See “CertificationLabel” later in this section.



Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit

1. Locate the statement“The combined weight ofoccupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs” on your vehicle'splacard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kg orXXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equalsthe available amount of cargoand luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX”amount equals 1400 lbs andthere will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle,the amount of available cargo

and luggage load capacityis 650 lbs (1400 − 750(5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towinga trailer, the load from yourtrailer will be transferred toyour vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine how thisreduces the available cargoand luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.

See Trailer Towing (ExceptCTS-V) on page 9‑57 or TrailerTowing (CTS-V) on page 9‑58for important information ontowing a trailer, towing safetyrules and trailering tips.

Example 1

A. Vehicle Capacity Weightfor Example 1 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs).

B. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 =136 kg (300 lbs).

C. Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 317 kg(700 lbs).



Example 2


B. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 =340 kg (750 lbs).

C. Available Cargo Weight =113 kg (250 lbs).

Example 3


B. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 =453 kg (1,000 lbs).

C. Available Cargo Weight =0 kg (0 lbs).

Refer to the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information label forspecific information about thevehicle's capacity weight and

seating positions. The combinedweight of the driver, passengers,and cargo should never exceedthe vehicle's capacity weight.

Certification Label

Label Example

A vehicle specific Certificationlabel is attached to either thedriver's door edge or the lowercenter pillar on the driver's sideof the vehicle. The label tellsthe gross weight capacity ofthe vehicle, called the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).



The GVWR includes the weightof the vehicle, all occupants,fuel, and cargo. Never exceedthe GVWR for the vehicle, orthe Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR) for either the front orrear axle.

If the vehicle is carrying a heavyload, it should be spread out.See “Steps for DeterminingCorrect Load Limit” earlier in thissection.

{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This could

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

cause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.

{ WARNING

Things inside the vehicle canstrike and injure people in asudden stop or turn, or in acrash.

. Put things in the cargoarea of the vehicle. In thecargo area, put them asfar forward as possible.Try to spread the weightevenly.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Never stack heavierthings, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are abovethe tops of the seats.

. Do not leave anunsecured child restraintin the vehicle.

. Secure loose items in thevehicle.

. Do not leave a seat foldeddown unless needed.



Starting andOperating

New Vehicle Break-InFollow these recommendedguidelines during thefirst 2 414 km (1,500 miles)of driving this vehicle. Partshave a break-in period andperformance will be better inthe long run.

For the first 2 414 km (1,500 miles):. Avoid full throttle starts and

abrupt stops.. Do not exceed

4,000 engine rpm.. Avoid driving at any one

constant speed, fast or slow.

. Avoid downshifting to brake orslow the vehicle when theengine speed will exceed4000 rpm.

. Do not let the engine labor.Never lug the engine in highgear at low speeds. With amanual transmission, shift tothe next lower gear. This ruleapplies at all times, not justduring the break-in period.

. Do not participate in trackevents, sport driving schools,or similar activities during thisbreak–in period.

. Check engine oil with everyrefueling and add if necessary.Oil and fuel consumption may behigher than normal during thefirst 2 414 km (1,500 miles).

. To break in new tires, driveat moderate speeds andavoid hard cornering for thefirst 322 km (200 miles). Newtires do not have maximumtraction and may tend to slip.

. New brake linings also needa break–in period. Avoidmaking hard stops during thefirst 322 km (200 miles). This isrecommended every time brakelinings are replaced.



Ignition Positions(Key Access)

The ignition switch can be turned tofour different positions.

To shift out of P (Park), the ignitionswitch must be in ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY and the brakepedal must be applied.

Notice: Using a tool to force thekey from its cylinder could causedamage or break the key. Use thecorrect key and turn the key onlywith your hand. Make sure the

key is all the way in. If it is andyou have a manual transmissionvehicle, turn the steering wheelleft and right while you turn thekey hard. If none of this works,then the vehicle needs service.

A (STOPPING THE ENGINE/LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle isstopped, turn the ignition switch toLOCK/OFF to turn the engine off.Retained Accessory Power (RAP)will remain active. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9‑22 for more information.

This is the only position in which thekey can be removed. This positionlocks the ignition and shifter onautomatic transmission vehicles,and the ignition and steering wheelon manual transmission vehicles.

Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will cause aloss of power assist in the brakeand steering systems and disablethe airbags.

In an emergency:

1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.

2. Shift the vehicle to neutral. Thiscan be done while the vehicle ismoving. After shifting to neutral,firmly apply the brakes and steerthe vehicle to a safe location.

3. Come to a complete stop. Shiftto P (Park) with an automatictransmission, or Neutral with amanual transmission. Turn theignition to LOCK/OFF.

4. Set the parking brake. SeeParking Brake (Manual) onpage 9‑34 or Parking Brake(Electric) on page 9‑35.



The ignition switch can bind in theLOCK/OFF position with the wheelsturned off center. If this happens,move the steering wheel from rightto left while turning the key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If this does not work,then the vehicle needs service.

B (ACC/ACCESSORY): Thisposition lets you use things like theradio and the windshield wiperswhen the engine is off. This positionallows you to turn off the engine.

C (ON/RUN): This position is fordriving. It is the position the ignitionswitch returns to after the enginestarts, and the key is released.

To shift the transmission out ofP (Park), the ignition key has to bein ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN.

The battery could be drained if thekey is left in the ACC/ACCESSORYor ON/RUN position with the engineoff. The vehicle might not start if thebattery is allowed to drain for anextended period of time.

D (START): This position starts theengine. When the engine starts,release the key. The ignition switchreturns to ON/RUN for driving.

A warning tone will sound when thedriver door is opened, the ignition isin ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF, and the key is in the ignition.

Ignition Positions(Keyless Access)You can turn the ignition controlknob to four different positions.

To shift out of P (Park), theignition must be in ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY and the regularbrake pedal must be applied.

Using a tool to force the ignitioncontrol knob from its cylinder coulddamage it.

Make sure the keyless accesstransmitter is inside the vehiclewhen trying to turn the ignitioncontrol knob.

A (STOPPING THE ENGINE/LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle isstopped, turn the ignition switch toLOCK/OFF to turn the engine off.Retained Accessory Power (RAP)will remain active. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9‑22



The ignition control knob cannot beremoved from the vehicle. Thekeyless access transmitter mustbe inside the vehicle to start theengine. This position locks theignition and shifter on automatictransmission vehicles, and theignition and steering wheel onmanual transmission vehicles.

Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will cause aloss of power assist in the brakeand steering systems and disablethe airbags.

In an emergency:

1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.

2. Shift the vehicle to neutral. Thiscan be done while the vehicle ismoving. After shifting to neutral,firmly apply the brakes and steerthe vehicle to a safe location.

3. Come to a complete stop. Shiftto P (Park) with an automatictransmission, or Neutral with amanual transmission. Turn theignition to LOCK/OFF.

4. Set the parking brake. SeeParking Brake (Manual) onpage 9‑34 or Parking Brake(Electric) on page 9‑35

B (ACC/ACCESSORY): Thisposition allows you to use thingslike the radio and the windshieldwipers when the engine is off. Thisposition will allow you to turn off theengine.

C (ON/RUN): This position is fordriving. It is the position the ignitionswitch returns to after the enginestarts, and the control knob isreleased.

If you need to shift thetransmission out of P (Park),the ignition control knob has tobe in ACC/ACCESSORY orON/RUN.

The battery could be drained ifyou leave the ignition in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN positionwith the engine off. You may not beable to start the vehicle if the batteryis allowed to drain for an extendedperiod of time.

D (START): This position starts theengine.

Starting the EnginePlace the transmission in theproper gear.

If the vehicle has the keylessaccess system, the keyless accesstransmitter must be authenticatedin order for the ignition control knobto turn. The transmitter can beauthenticated either by puttingyour foot on the brake pedal or bypushing the ignition control knob in.



Automatic Transmission

Move the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). The engine will not startin any other position. To restart theengine when the vehicle is alreadymoving, use N (Neutral) only.

If the vehicle has the keylessaccess system, your foot must beon the brake pedal to start theengine. To rotate the ignition controlknob, put your foot on the brakepedal and turn the ignition controlknob to the START position. If theignition control knob does not turn,try pushing the knob in and turningagain. When the engine beginscranking, let go of the ignitioncontrol knob, it will return to theON/RUN position.

If the transmitter is not in thevehicle or something is interferingwith the transmitter, the DriverInformation Center (DIC) willdisplay ELECTRONIC KEY NOTDETECTED. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑27 for moreinformation.

If the battery in the keyless accesstransmitter needs replacing, theDIC displays REPLACE BATTERYIN REMOTE KEY. The vehiclecan still be driven. See “BatteryReplacement” under RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation (Key Access) onpage 2‑5 or Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation (KeylessAccess) on page 2‑7 for moreinformation.

Notice: Do not try to shift toP (Park) if the vehicle is moving.If you do, you could damage thetransmission. Shift to P (Park)only when the vehicle is stopped.

Manual Transmission

The shift lever should be in neutralposition and the parking brakeengaged. Hold the clutch pedaldown to the floor and start theengine. The vehicle will not startif the clutch pedal is not all theway down.

Starting Procedure

1. With your foot off the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key toSTART. If the vehicle has thekeyless access system, pushthe ignition control knob in androtate the knob to the STARTposition. When the engine starts,let go of the ignition. The idlespeed will go down as yourengine gets warm. Do not racethe engine immediately afterstarting it. Operate the engineand transmission gently to allowthe oil to warm up and lubricateall moving parts.

The vehicle has aComputer-Controlled CrankingSystem. This feature assists instarting the engine and protectscomponents. If the ignition keyis turned to the START position,and then released when theengine begins cranking, theengine will continue crankingfor a few seconds or until thevehicle starts. If the engine doesnot start and the key is held in



START for many seconds,cranking will be stopped after15 seconds to prevent crankingmotor damage. To prevent geardamage, this system alsoprevents cranking if the engineis already running. Enginecranking can be stopped byturning the ignition switchto ACC/ACCESSORY orLOCK/OFF.

When first starting the vehicle,the engine idle speed will beelevated to allow the catalyticconverter, an emissionscontrol device, to quickly reachoperating temperature. Afterapproximately 20 seconds, theengine will begin to transition toits normal, quieter idle speed,which can vary depending onthe temperature. This is normaloperation.

Notice: Cranking the engine forlong periods of time, by returningthe key to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not startafter 5‐10 seconds, especiallyin very cold weather (below 0°For −18°C), it could be floodedwith too much gasoline. Trypushing the accelerator pedal allthe way to the floor and holdingit there as you hold the key inSTART for up to a maximumof 15 seconds. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, toallow the cranking motor to cooldown. When the engine starts,let go of the key and accelerator.

If the vehicle starts briefly butthen stops again, do the samething. This clears the extragasoline from the engine. Do notrace the engine immediatelyafter starting it. Operate theengine and transmission gentlyuntil the oil warms up andlubricates all moving parts.

Notice: The engine is designed towork with the electronics in thevehicle. If you add electricalparts or accessories, you couldchange the way the engineoperates. Before adding electricalequipment, check with yourdealer. If you do not, the enginemight not perform properly. Anyresulting damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.



Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)These vehicle accessories can beused for up to 10 minutes after theengine is turned off:. Audio System. Power Windows. Sunroof (if equipped)

Power to the audio system willwork up to 10 minutes or until thedriver door is opened. Power tothe windows or sunroof will workup to 10 minutes or until anydoor is opened. For an additional10 minutes of operation, close allthe doors and turn the key toON/RUN and then back toLOCK/OFF.

Engine Coolant HeaterVehicles with the engine coolantheater can use this option incold weather conditions at orbelow −18°C (0°F) for easierstarting and better fuel economyduring engine warm-up. Plug in thecoolant heater at least four hoursbefore starting your vehicle. Aninternal thermostat in the plug-endof the cord may exist which willprevent engine coolant heateroperation at temperaturesabove −18°C (0°F).

To Use the Engine CoolantHeater

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrapthe electrical cord. The cord islocated near the driver side struttower.

Remove the plastic cap toaccess the plug.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded110-volt AC outlet.

{ WARNING

Plugging the cord into anungrounded outlet could causean electrical shock. Also, thewrong kind of extension cordcould overheat and cause a fire.You could be seriously injured.Plug the cord into a properlygrounded three-prong 110-volt ACoutlet. If the cord will not reach,use a heavy-duty three-prongextension cord rated for at least15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, besure to unplug and store thecord as it was before to keepit away from moving engineparts. If you do not, it could bedamaged.

Contact your dealer for informationon how long to use the heater inyour particular area.



Shifting Into Park

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the shift lever is notfully in P (Park) with the parkingbrake firmly set. The vehicle canroll. If you have left the enginerunning, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure the vehicle willnot move, even when you are onfairly level ground, use the stepsthat follow. If you are pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9‑53.

Use this procedure to shift intoP (Park):

1. Hold the brake pedal down andset the parking brake.

See Parking Brake (Manual) onpage 9‑34 or Parking Brake(Electric) on page 9‑35 for moreinformation.

2. Move the shift lever into P (Park)by holding in the button on theshift lever and pushing the leverall the way toward the front ofthe vehicle.

3. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.

4. For vehicles with key access,remove the key and take it withyou. If you can leave the vehiclewith the ignition key in yourhand, the vehicle is in P (Park).For vehicles with the keylessaccess system, take the keylessaccess transmitter with you.

Leaving the Vehicle With theEngine Running (AutomaticTransmission)

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.The vehicle could move suddenlyif the shift lever is not fully inP (Park) with the parking brake

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

firmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running, itcould overheat and even catchfire. You or others could beinjured. Do not leave the vehiclewith the engine running.

If you have to leave the vehicle withthe engine running, the vehicle mustbe in P (Park) and the parking brakeset. After shifting into P (Park), try tomove the shift lever out without firstpushing the button on the shift lever.

If you can, the shift lever was notfully locked into P (Park).



Torque Lock (AutomaticTransmission)

Torque lock is when the weightof the vehicle puts too muchforce on the parking pawl in thetransmission. This happens whenparking on a hill and shifting thetransmission into P (Park) is notdone properly and then it is difficultto shift out of P (Park). To preventtorque lock, set the parking brakeand then shift into P (Park). To findout how, see "Shifting Into Park"listed previously.

If torque lock does occur, thevehicle may need to be pusheduphill by another vehicle to relievethe parking pawl pressure, so youcan shift out of P (Park).

Shifting Out of ParkThis vehicle is equipped withan electronic shift lock releasesystem. The shift lock release isdesigned to:. Prevent ignition key removal

unless the shift lever is inP (Park) with the shift leverbutton fully released, for vehicleswith key access.

. Prevent movement of the shiftlever out of P (Park), unless theignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY and the brakepedal is applied.

The shift lock release is alwaysfunctional except in the case of anuncharged or low voltage (less than9 volt) battery.

If the vehicle has an unchargedbattery or a battery with low voltage,try charging or jump starting thebattery. See Jump Starting onpage 10‑106 for more information.

To shift out of P (Park):

1. Apply the brake pedal.

2. Press the shift lever button.

3. Move the shift lever.

If unable to shift out of P (Park):

1. Fully release the shift leverbutton.

2. While holding down the brakepedal, press the shift leverbutton again.

3. Move the shift lever.

If the shift lever will not move fromP (Park), consult your dealer or aprofessional towing service.

Parking (ManualTransmission)Before getting out of the vehicle,place the shift lever in R (Reverse)and firmly apply the parking brake.

For vehicles with the key accessignition, turn the ignition key toOFF/LOCK, and remove the key.



See Ignition Positions (Key Access)on page 9‑17 or Ignition Positions(Keyless Access) on page 9‑18 formore information.

For vehicles with the keylessaccess ignition, turn the ignition toLOCK/OFF and remove the keylessaccess transmitter.

If towing a trailer, see DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tips onpage 9‑53.

Parking Over ThingsThat Burn

{ WARNING

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under thevehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass,or other things that can burn.

Engine Exhaust

{ WARNING

Engine exhaust contains CarbonMonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:. The vehicle idles in areaswith poor ventilation (parkinggarages, tunnels, deep snowthat may block underbodyairflow or tail pipes).

. The exhaust smells orsounds strange or different.

. The exhaust system leaksdue to corrosion or damage.

. The vehicle exhaust systemhas been modified, damagedor improperly repaired.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or after-marketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected orif it is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

. Drive it only with the windowscompletely down.

. Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosedarea such as a garage or abuilding that has no fresh airventilation.



Running the VehicleWhile ParkedIt is better not to park with theengine running. But if you ever haveto, here are some things to know.

{ WARNING

Idling a vehicle in an enclosedarea with poor ventilation isdangerous. Engine exhaust mayenter the vehicle. Engine exhaustcontains Carbon Monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death. Never run theengine in an enclosed area thathas no fresh air ventilation. Formore information, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑25.

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to get outof the vehicle if the automatictransmission shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll. Donot leave the vehicle when theengine is running unless youhave to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).

Follow the proper steps to be surethe vehicle will not move. SeeShifting Into Park on page 9‑23.

If parking on a hill and pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9‑53.

AutomaticTransmissionThe shift lever is located on thecenter console between the frontseats.

There are several different positionsfor the shift lever.

P (Park): This position locks therear wheels. Use this position whenstarting the engine because thevehicle cannot move easily.



{ WARNING

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle whenthe engine is running unless youhave to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park onpage 9‑23. If you are pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9‑53.

Make sure the shift lever is fully inP (Park) before starting the engine.The vehicle has an electronic shiftlock release system. Fully apply theregular brakes first and then pressthe shift lever button before shiftingfrom P (Park) when the ignition keyis in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift outof P (Park), ease pressure on theshift lever and push the shift leverall the way into P (Park) as youmaintain brake application. Thenpress the shift lever button andmove the shift lever into anothergear. See Shifting Out of Park onpage 9‑24.

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)while the vehicle is movingforward could damage thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Shift to R (Reverse) onlyafter the vehicle is stopped.

R (Reverse): Use this gear toback up.

At low vehicle speeds, R (Reverse)can be used to rock the vehicleback and forth to get out of snow,ice, or sand without damaging yourtransmission. See If the Vehicle isStuck on page 9‑11 for additionalinformation.



N (Neutral): In this position, theengine does not connect with thewheels. To restart when the vehicleis already moving, use N (Neutral)only. You can also use N (Neutral)when the vehicle is being towed.

{ WARNING

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shiftinto a drive gear while the engineis running at high speed.

Notice: Shifting out of P (Park)or N (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Be sure theengine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.

D (Drive): This position is fornormal driving. It provides the bestfuel economy. If you need morepower for passing, and you are:. Going less than 55 km/h

(35 mph), push the acceleratorpedal about halfway down.

. Going about 55 km/h (35 mph) ormore, push the accelerator allthe way down.

The transmission will shift downto a lower gear and have morepower.

Downshifting the transmission inslippery road conditions could resultin skidding; see “Skidding” underLoss of Control on page 9‑6

While in D (Drive), the CTS‐Vvehicle's first forward gearautomatic shift after starting thevehicle will be from 1 (First).Afterwards, the CTS‐V vehicles willalways start in 2 (Second) gear.While in M (Manual Mode), forincreased performance, the vehiclewill start in 1 (First) gear.

M (Manual Mode): This positionallows the driver to select the rangeof gears appropriate for currentdriving conditions. See Driver ShiftControl (DSC) later in this section.

Notice: Spinning the tiresor holding the vehicle inone place on a hill using onlythe accelerator pedal maydamage the transmission. If youare stuck, do not spin the tires.When stopping on a hill, use thebrakes to hold the vehicle inplace.



Manual Mode

Driver Shift Control (DSC) orTap Shift

Notice: If you drive the vehicle ata high rpm without upshiftingwhile using Driver Shift Control(DSC), you could damage thevehicle. Always upshift whennecessary while using DSC.

Vehicles with Driver Shift Control(DSC) allow shifting an automatictransmission similar to a manualtransmission.

Use DSC through the shift lever orthe Tap Shift controls on the back ofthe steering wheel (if equipped).

To use the DSC feature using theshift lever:

1. Move the shift lever tothe right from D (Drive) toM (Manual Mode).

Once in M (Manual Mode)position, if you do not move theshift lever forward or rearward,the vehicle will be in sport mode.

When you are in sport modethe vehicle will still shiftautomatically. The transmissionmay remain in a gear longerthan it would in the normaldriving mode based on braking,throttle input, and vehicle lateralacceleration.

SPORT MODE will be displayedin the DIC momentarily. Thevehicle will remain in sportmode if the shift lever is notmoved. Sport mode will shiftautomatically, but remain in agear longer then it would innormal driving mode based onbraking and acceleration.

2. To go from sport mode to DSC,move the shift lever forward toupshift or rearward to downshift.

3. To exit DSC and enter sportmode, hold the shift lever in theupshift/forward position briefly.

To use the DSC feature with the TapShift controls (if equipped):

1. Move the shift lever tothe right from D (Drive) toM (Manual Mode).

2. The Tap Shift controls are on theback of the steering wheel. Tapthe left control to downshift, andthe right control to upshift.

3. To return to sport mode, hold theupshift/right control briefly.



The tachometer display indicateswhich gear the vehicle is in. Thenumber indicates the requestedgear range when moving the shiftlever forward or rearward.

CTS-V vehicles use tracerlights around the outside of thetachometer as a performanceupshift light. These tracers flash toindicate when to shift to the nexthigher gear to avoid the enginespeed limit. See Tachometer onpage 5‑13 for more information.

While using the DSC feature, thevehicle will have firmer, quickershifting. You can use this forsport driving or when climbing ordescending hills, to stay in gearlonger, or to downshift for morepower or engine braking.

The transmission will only allowyou to shift into gears appropriatefor the vehicle speed and enginerevolutions per minute (RPM). Thetransmission will not automaticallyshift to the next lower gear if theengine rpm is too high, nor to thenext higher gear when the maximumengine rpm is reached.

If shifting is prevented for anyreason, the currently selected gearwill flash multiple times, indicatingthat the transmission has not shiftedgears.

While in the DSC mode, theCTS automatic transmission willautomatically downshift when thevehicle comes to a stop. This willallow for more power duringacceleration.

The CTS-V automatic transmissionwill not automatically downshifton hard acceleration when inDSC mode.

When accelerating the vehiclefrom a stop in snowy and icyconditions, it is suggested to shiftinto second gear. A higher gearallows the vehicle to gain moretraction on slippery surfaces.



Manual TransmissionIf the vehicle has a manualtransmission, the shift lever islocated on the center consolebetween the front seats. Thefollowing explains how to operatethe manual transmission.

CTS

CTS—V

1 (First): Press the clutch pedaland shift into 1 (First). Slowly let upon the clutch pedal while pressingon the accelerator pedal.

Shift into 1 (First) when you aregoing less than 40 km/h (25 mph).For CTS-V, shift into 1 (First) whenyou are going less than 64 km/h(40 mph). After a complete stop, if itis hard to shift into 1 (First), let upon the clutch pedal, then press itback down and shift into 1 (First).

2 (Second): Press the clutch pedaland let up on the accelerator pedal,then shift into 2 (Second). Then,slowly let up on the clutch pedalwhile accelerating.

3 (Third), 4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth),and 6 (Sixth): Shift into 3 (Third),4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth), and 6 (Sixth) thesame for 2 (Second).

To stop, let up on the acceleratorpedal and press the brake pedal.Just before the vehicle stops, pressthe clutch pedal and the brakepedal, and shift to Neutral.

Neutral: Use this position whenyou start or idle your engine. Yourshift lever is in Neutral when it iscentered in the shift pattern, not inany gear.

R (Reverse): To back up, pressdown the clutch pedal, completelystop the vehicle, and shift intoR (Reverse). Let up on the clutchpedal slowly while pressing theaccelerator pedal.



The CTS-V transmission preventseasily shifting into R (Reverse)using normal shifting force whilethe vehicle is moving at more than5 km/h (3 mph), or when the ignitionis in LOCK/OFF.

Shift Speeds (ManualTransmission)

{ WARNING

If you skip a gear when youdownshift, you could lose controlof the vehicle. You could injureyourself or others. Do not shiftdown more than one gear at atime when you downshift.

Notice: If you skip more thanone gear when you downshift,or if you race the engine whenyou release the clutch pedal whiledownshifting, you could damagethe engine, clutch, driveshaft orthe transmission. Do not skipgears or race the engine whendownshifting.

If the vehicle speed drops below32 km/h (20 mph), or if the engine isnot running smoothly, downshift tothe next lower gear. You may haveto downshift two or more gears tokeep the engine running smoothlyor for good performance.

Up-Shift Light

Vehicles with a manual transmissionhave an up‐shift light on theinstrument panel. This light showswhen to shift to the next higher gearfor the best fuel economy.

When this light comes on, youcan shift to the next higher gear ifweather, road, and traffic conditionsallow. For the best fuel economy,accelerate slowly and shift when thelight comes on.

While you accelerate, it is normalfor the light to go on and off if youquickly change the position of theaccelerator. Ignore the light whenyou downshift.

CTS-V vehicles use tracerlights around the outside of thetachometer as a performanceup‐shift light. These tracers flash toindicate when to shift to the nexthigher gear to avoid the enginespeed limit. See Tachometer onpage 5‑13 for more information.

Skip Shift (CTS‐V)

Under light acceleration, thetransmission will only allow you toshift from 1 (First) to 4 (Fourth).Shifts from 1 (First) to 2 (Second) or3 (Third) are not allowed. This helpsimprove fuel mileage.

Under harder acceleration, SkipShift is disabled, and the driver hasall gears available.



Drive Systems

All-Wheel DriveVehicles with this featurealways send engine power to allfour wheels. It is fully automatic,and adjusts itself as needed forroad conditions.

When using a compact spare tireon an AWD vehicle, the systemautomatically detects the compactspare and disables AWD. To restoreAWD operation and preventexcessive wear on the system,replace the compact spare with afull-size tire as soon as possible.See Compact Spare Tire onpage 10‑106 for more information.

Brakes

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)This vehicle has the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), an advancedelectronic braking system that helpsprevent a braking skid.

When the engine is started and thevehicle begins to drive away, ABSchecks itself. A momentary motor orclicking noise might be heard whilethis test is going on, and it mighteven be noticed that the brakepedal moves a little. This is normal.

If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Lighton page 5‑23.

If driving safely on a wet roadand it becomes necessary to slamon the brakes and continue brakingto avoid a sudden obstacle, acomputer senses that the wheelsare slowing down. If one of thewheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work thebrakes at each wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressureto each wheel, as required, fasterthan any driver could. This can helpthe driver steer around the obstaclewhile braking hard.

As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controlsbraking pressure accordingly.



Remember: ABS does not changethe time needed to get a foot up tothe brake pedal or always decreasestopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you,there will not be enough time toapply the brakes if that vehiclesuddenly slows or stops. Alwaysleave enough room up ahead tostop, even with ABS.

Using ABS

Do not pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down firmly and letABS work. You might hear the ABSpump or motor operating and feelthe brake pedal pulsate, but this isnormal.

Braking in Emergencies

ABS allows the driver to steer andbrake at the same time. In manyemergencies, steering can helpmore than even the very bestbraking.

Parking Brake (Manual)

The parking brake pedal islocated on the lower portion ofthe instrument panel to the left ofthe steering wheel.

To set the parking brake, hold thebrake pedal down, then push theparking brake pedal down.

If the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light on theinstrument panel cluster shouldcome on. If it does not, you needto have the vehicle serviced. SeeBrake System Warning Light onpage 5‑22 for more information.

To release the parking brake, pullthe release lever located to theleft of the steering wheel on theinstrument panel.



Notice: Driving with the parkingbrake on can overheat the brakesystem and cause prematurewear or damage to brake systemparts. Make sure that the parkingbrake is fully released and thebrake warning light is off beforedriving.

A warning chime will sound if theparking brake is set, the ignition ison, and the vehicle begins to move.To stop the chime, fully release theparking brake.

If you are towing a trailer andparking on a hill, see DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tips onpage 9‑53 for more information.

Parking Brake (Electric)

{ WARNING

On vehicles with a manualtransmission, releasing the clutchand pressing the acceleratorwill release the Electric ParkingBrake. If the vehicle is not in agear, the vehicle could move, andyou or others could be injured.Make sure the vehicle is in a gearbefore attempting to drive away.To avoid unexpected vehiclemovement, do not partiallyrelease the clutch or press theaccelerator pedal until you areready to release the parkingbrake and drive away.

Vehicles with the electric parkingbrake (EPB) have a switch in thecenter console.

The EPB takes the place of themanual parking brake system, thefoot pedal and release handle.The EPB can always be activated,even if the ignition is OFF. To avoiddraining the battery, do not operatethe EPB too often without theengine running.



The system has two warning lightsand five Driver Information Center(DIC) messages. See Brake SystemWarning Light on page 5‑22 andDriver Information Center (DIC) onpage 5‑27 for more information. Incase of insufficient electrical power,the EPB cannot be applied orreleased.

EPB Apply

The EPB can be applied any timethe vehicle is stopped. The EPB isapplied by momentarily lifting up onthe EPB switch. Once fully applied,the BRAKE light will be on, and theDIC message PARK BRAKE SETwill be displayed. While the brake isbeing applied, the status light willflash until full apply is reached.If the light does not come on,or remains flashing, you need tohave the vehicle serviced. Do notdrive the vehicle if the BRAKE lightis flashing. See your dealer. SeeBrake System Warning Light onpage 5‑22 for more information.

If the EPB is applied while thevehicle is in motion, a chime willsound, and the DIC messageRELEASE PARK BRAKE SWITCHwill be displayed. The vehiclewill decelerate as long as theswitch is held in the up position.Releasing the EPB switch duringthe deceleration will release theparking brake. If the switch is heldin the up position until the vehiclecomes to a stop, the EPB willremain applied.

If the BRAKE light is on, either theEPB is applied, or there is a failurein the hydraulic brake system.

If this light is flashing continuously,the EPB is only partially appliedor released, or there is a problemwith the EPB. The DIC messageSERVICE PARK BRAKE will bedisplayed. If this light is flashingcontinuously, release the EPB, andattempt to apply it again. If this lightcontinues to flash, do not drive thevehicle. See your dealer.

If the yellow light is on, the EPB hasdetected an error in another systemand is operating with reducedfunctionality. To apply the EPB whenthis light is on, lift up on the EPBswitch and hold it in the up position.Full application of the parking brakeby the EPB system may take alonger period of time than normalwhen this light is on. Continue tohold the switch until the BRAKElight remains on. If the yellow light ison, see your dealer.

If the EPB fails to apply, the rearwheels should be blocked toprevent vehicle movement.

EPB Release

To release the EPB, turn theignition switch to the ON/RUNposition, apply and hold the brakepedal, and push down momentarilyon the EPB switch. If you attemptto release the EPB without thebrake pedal applied, a chime willsound, and the DIC messageSTEP ON BRAKE TO RELEASEPARK BRAKE will be displayed.



The EPB is released when theBRAKE light is off and theDIC message PARK BRAKERELEASED is displayed.

If the yellow light is on, the EPB hasdetected an error in another systemand is operating with reducedfunctionality. To release the EPBwhen this light is on, push down onthe EPB switch and hold it in thedown position. EPB release maytake a longer period of time thannormal when this light is on.Continue to hold the switch until theBRAKE light is off. If the yellow lightis on, see your dealer.

Notice: Driving with the parkingbrake on can overheat the brakesystem and cause prematurewear or damage to brake systemparts. Make sure that the parkingbrake is fully released and the redbrake warning light is off beforedriving.

Automatic EPB Release

The EPB will automatically releaseif the vehicle is running, placed intogear, and an attempt is made todrive away. Avoid rapid accelerationwhen the EPB is applied, topreserve park brake lining life.

The EPB can also be used toprevent roll back for vehicles witha manual transmission taking off ona hill. In a situation where no rollback is desired, an applied EPB willallow both feet to be used for theclutch and accelerator pedals inpreparation for starting the vehiclemoving in the intended direction.

In this situation, perform the normalclutch and/or accelerator actionsrequired to begin moving thevehicle. There is no need to pushthe switch to release the EPB.

If you are towing a trailer andparking on a hill, see DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tips onpage 9‑53 for more information.

Brake Assist(Except CTS-V)This vehicle has a brake assistfeature designed to assist thedriver in stopping or decreasingvehicle speed in emergency drivingconditions. This feature uses thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module to supplement thepower brake system underconditions where the driver hasquickly and forcefully applied thebrake pedal in an attempt to quicklystop or slow down the vehicle. Thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module increases brakepressure at each corner of thevehicle until the ABS activates.Minor brake pedal pulsation orpedal movement during this timeis normal and the driver shouldcontinue to apply the brake pedalas the driving situation dictates.The brake assist feature willautomatically disengage whenthe brake pedal is released orbrake pedal pressure is quicklydecreased.



Ride Control Systems

Traction ControlSystem (TCS)The vehicle has a Traction ControlSystem (TCS) that limits wheelspin. This is especially useful inslippery road conditions. On arear-wheel-drive vehicle, the systemoperates if it senses that one orboth of the rear wheels are spinningor beginning to lose traction. On anAll-Wheel-Drive (AWD) vehicle, thesystem will operate if it senses thatany of the wheels are spinning orbeginning to lose traction. When thishappens, the system brakes thespinning wheel(s) and/or reducesengine power to limit wheel spin.

The system may be heard or feltwhile it is working, but this isnormal.

The TCS/StabiliTrak warning lightflashes when the traction controlsystem is limiting wheel spin.

The TCS/StabiliTrak warning lightcomes on if there is a problemwith the traction control system.When the TCS/StabiliTrak warninglight is on, the system will not limitwheel spin. Adjust your drivingaccordingly. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light onpage 5‑24 for more information.

TCS automatically comes onwhenever the vehicle is started.To limit wheel spin, especially inslippery road conditions, the systemshould always be left on, but it maybe necessary to turn the system offif the vehicle is stuck in sand, mudor snow and rocking the vehicle isrequired. See If the Vehicle is Stuck

on page 9‑11 for more information.See Winter Driving on page 9‑9 forinformation on using TCS whendriving in snowy or icy conditions.

This button is located on theinstrument panel (CTS) or thesteering wheel (CTS-V).

Press and release the TCS/StabiliTrak button and the tractioncontrol system will turn off and theTCS/StabiliTrak warning light willcome on. Press the button againto turn the system back on. Forinformation on turning StabiliTrakoff and on, see StabiliTrak Systemfollowing.

Adding non‐dealer accessories canaffect your vehicle's performance.See Accessories and Modificationson page 10‑3 for more information.



StabiliTrak® SystemThe vehicle has an electronicstability control system calledStabiliTrak. It is an advancedcomputer controlled system thatassists with directional control of thevehicle in difficult driving conditions.

StabiliTrak activates when thesystem senses a discrepancybetween the intended path and thedirection the vehicle is actuallytraveling. StabiliTrak selectivelyapplies braking pressure at any oneof the vehicle's brakes to help steerthe vehicle in the direction whichyou are steering.

When the system activates, thiswarning light flashes on theinstrument panel. A noise may beheard or a vibration may be felt in

the brake pedal. This is normal.Continue to steer the vehicle in theintended direction.

If there is a problem detectedwith StabiliTrak, SERVICESTABILITRAK displays on theDriver Information Center (DIC) andthe TCS/StabiliTrak warning lightcomes on the instrument panelcluster. When this message andwarning light displays, the system isnot operational. Driving should beadjusted accordingly. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑27 and Messages andTraction Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light on page 5‑24 formore information.

This button is located on theinstrument panel (CTS) or thesteering wheel (CTS-V).

StabiliTrak comes on automaticallywhenever the vehicle is started. Thesystem should be left on to helpassist with directional control of thevehicle. If StabiliTrak needs to beturned off, press and hold the TCS/StabiliTrak button until the TCS/StabiliTrak warning light comes onand STABILITRAK OFF comes onthe DIC. More steering effort isrequired when the system isturned off.

If cruise control is being used whenthe StabiliTrak activates, the cruisecontrol will automatically disengage.When road conditions allow,reengage the cruise control. SeeCruise Control on page 9‑41 formore information.

Competitive Driving ModeTo select this optionalhandling mode, press theTCS/StabiliTrak button quicklytwo times and STABILITRAKCOMPETITIVE MODE displays inthe Driver Information Center (DIC).



While in the StabiliTrak CompetitiveMode, the TCS/StabiliTrak warninglight comes on, TCS does not limitwheel spin, and more effort isrequired to turn the steering wheel.Adjust your driving accordingly.

Press the TCS/StabiliTrak buttonagain, or turn the ignition toACC/ACCESSORY and restart thevehicle, to turn TCS back on andturn the TCS/StabiliTrak warninglight off.

Notice: When traction control isturned off, or Competitive DrivingMode is active, it is possibleto lose traction. If you attemptto shift with the drive wheelsspinning with a loss of traction, itis possible to cause damage tothe transmission. Do not attemptto shift when the drive wheels donot have traction. Damage causedby misuse of the vehicle is notcovered. See the warranty bookfor additional information.

Magnetic Ride ControlWith this feature on the CTS-V, theMagnetic Ride Control systemadjusts the ride of the vehicle toTour or Sport modes. Magnetic RideControl monitors the suspensionsystem to determine the propersystem response.

TOUR: Use for normal city andhighway driving. This settingprovides a smooth, soft ride.

SPORT: Use where road conditionsor personal preference demandmore control. This setting providesmore “feel,” or response to roadconditions.

The setting can be changed at anytime. Based on road conditions,steering wheel angle, and thevehicle speed, the systemautomatically adjusts to provide thebest handling while providing asmooth ride. The Tour and Sportmodes will feel similar on a smoothroad. Select a new setting wheneverdriving conditions change.

The Driver Information Center (DIC)briefly displays SUSPENSIONMODE TOUR or SUSPENSIONMODE SPORT on vehicle startup orwhen a new mode is selected.

Press and release this button,located in the center of theinstrument panel, to change modes.

Limited-Slip Rear AxleVehicles with a limited-slip rear axlecan give more traction on snow,mud, ice, sand, or gravel. Whentraction is low, this feature allowsthe drive wheel with the mosttraction to move the vehicle. Thelimited-slip rear axle also gives thedriver enhanced control whencornering hard or completing amaneuver, such as a lane change.



Cruise Control

{ WARNING

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely ata steady speed. So, do not usethe cruise control on windingroads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerouson slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not usecruise control on slippery roads.

With cruise control, a speed ofabout 40 km/h (25 mph) or more canbe maintained without keeping yourfoot on the accelerator. Cruisecontrol does not work at speedsbelow about 40 km/h (25 mph).

When the brakes are applied, thecruise control turns off.

If the vehicle has the Stabilitrak®

system and begins to limit wheelspin while you are using cruisecontrol, the cruise control willautomatically disengage. SeeStabiliTrak® System on page 9‑39.When road conditions allow you tosafely use it again, the cruisecontrol can be turned back on.


The cruise control buttons arelocated on the left side of thesteering wheel.

I (On/Off): Turns the system onor off. The indicator light on thebutton turns on when cruise controlis on.

+RES (Resume/Accelerate):Press briefly to make the vehicleresume to a previously set speed,or press and hold to accelerate.

−SET (Set/Coast): Press to set thespeed and activate cruise control ormake the vehicle decelerate.

[ (Cancel): Press to disengagecruise control without erasing theset speed from memory.

Setting Cruise Control

If the cruise button is on when not inuse, it could get bumped and go intocruise when not desired. Keep thecruise control switch off when cruiseis not being used.



The cruise control light on theinstrument panel cluster comes onafter the cruise control has been setto the desired speed.

1. Press theI button.

2. Get up to the desired speed.

3. Press the −SET button andrelease it.

4. Take your foot off theaccelerator.

Resuming a Set Speed

If the cruise control is set at adesired speed and then the brakesare applied, the cruise control isdisengaged without erasing the setspeed from memory.

Once the vehicle is driving at about40 km/h (25 mph) or more, press the+RES button on the steering wheel.The vehicle returns to the previousset speed and stays there.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated,. Press and hold the +RES button

on the steering wheel until thedesired speed is reached, thenrelease it.

. To increase vehicle speed insmall amounts, press the +RESbutton. Each time this is done,the vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h(1 mph) faster.

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated,. Press and hold the −SET button

on the steering wheel until thedesired speed is reached, thenrelease it.

. To slow down in small amounts,press the −SET button on thesteering wheel briefly. Each timethis is done, the vehicle goesabout 1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal toincrease the vehicle's speed.When you take your foot off thepedal, the vehicle will slow down tothe previous set cruise speed.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well the cruise control workson hills depends upon the vehiclespeed, load, and the steepnessof the hills. When going up steephills, you might have to step onthe accelerator pedal to maintainthe vehicle speed. When goingdownhill, you might have to brakeor shift to a lower gear to keep thevehicle's speed down. When thebrakes are applied the cruise controlis disengaged.



Ending Cruise Control

There are four ways to end cruisecontrol:. Step lightly on the brake pedal

(manual and automatictransmissions).

. Press the clutch pedal to thefloor (manual transmissions).

. Press [ on the steering wheel.

. To turn off the cruise control,pressI on the steering wheel.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed iserased from memory by pressingtheI button or if the ignition isturned off.

Object DetectionSystems

Ultrasonic Parking AssistThe Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist(URPA) system assists the driverwith parking and avoiding objectswhile in R (Reverse). URPAoperates at speeds less than 8 km/h(5 mph), and the sensors on the rearbumper detect objects up to 2.4 m(8 ft) behind the vehicle, and at least25.4 cm (10 in) off the ground.

{ WARNING

The Ultrasonic Rear ParkingAssist (URPA) system does notreplace driver vision. It cannotdetect:

. Objects that are below thebumper, underneath thevehicle, or too close or farfrom the vehicle.

. Children, pedestrians,bicyclists, or pets.

If you do not use proper carebefore and while backing, vehicledamage, injury, or death couldoccur. Even with URPA, alwayscheck behind the vehicle beforebacking up. While backing, besure to look for objects and checkthe vehicle's mirrors.



How the System Works

URPA comes on automaticallywhen the shift lever is moved intoR (Reverse). A single tone soundsto indicate the system is working.

Objects must be at least 25.4 cm(10 in) off the ground and belowtrunk level, and within 2.4 m (8 ft)from the rear bumper to bedetected. The distance may beless during warmer or humidweather.

A single beep sounds thefirst time an object is detectedbetween 1.0 m (40 in) and 2.4 m(8 ft) away. Beeping occurscontinuously when the vehicle is0.3 m (12 in) or closer to an object.

The system can be disabled throughthe Driver Information Center (DIC).See “Parking Assist” under DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑27 for more information.

When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

If the URPA system will not activatedue to a temporary condition, themessage PARK ASSIST OFF will bedisplayed on the DIC when the shiftlever is moved into R (Reverse).This occurs under the followingconditions:. The driver disables the system.. The ultrasonic sensors are not

clean. Keep the vehicle's rearbumper free of mud, dirt, snow,ice and slush. For cleaninginstructions, see Exterior Careon page 10‑113.

. A trailer was attached to thevehicle, or a bicycle or an objectwas hanging out of the trunkduring the last drive cycle. Oncethe attached object is removed,URPA will return to normaloperation.

. A tow bar is attached to thevehicle.

. The vehicle's bumper isdamaged. Take the vehicle toyour dealer to repair the system.

. Other conditions may affectsystem performance, such asvibrations from a jackhammer orthe compression of air brakes ona very large truck.

Rear VisionCamera (RVC)The vehicle may have a Rear VisionCamera system. Read this entiresection before using it.

The rear vision camera system isdesigned to help the driver whenbacking up by displaying a view ofthe area behind the vehicle.



{ WARNING

The Rear Vision Camera (RVC)system does not replace drivervision. RVC does not:

. Detect objects that areoutside the camera's field ofview, below the bumper,or underneath the vehicle.

. Detect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, or pets.

Do not back the vehicle by onlylooking at the RVC screen, or usethe screen during longer, higherspeed backing maneuvers orwhere there could be cross-traffic.Your judged distances using thescreen will differ from actualdistances.

If you do not use proper carebefore backing up, you couldhit a vehicle, child, pedestrian,bicyclist, or pet, resulting invehicle damage, injury, or death.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Even though the vehicle hasthe RVC system, always checkcarefully before backing up bychecking behind and around thevehicle.

Using the System

When the driver shifts the vehicleinto R (Reverse), the video imageautomatically appears on thenavigation screen, or on the insiderear view mirror. Once the drivershifts out of R (Reverse), thenavigation screen will go back to thelast screen that had been displayed,or the video image will automaticallydisappear from the mirror after adelay.

The delay that is received aftershifting out of R (Reverse) isapproximately 5 seconds.

The delay can be cancelledby performing one of thefollowing:. Shifting in to P (Park).. Reach a vehicle speed of

8 km/h (5 mph).

There may be a message on therear vision camera screen thatstates “Check Surroundings forSafety.”

Rear Vision Camera ErrorMessages

Service Rear Vision CameraSystem: This message can displaywhen the system is not receivinginformation it requires from othervehicle systems.

d (Service Rear Vision CameraSystem Icon): This icon candisplay when the system is notreceiving information it requires fromother vehicle systems.

If any other problem occurs or if aproblem persists, see your dealer.



Rear Vision Camera Location

The camera is located above thelicense plate.

The area displayed by the camera islimited and does not display objectsthat are close to either corner orunder the bumper. The areadisplayed can vary dependingon vehicle orientation or roadconditions. The distance of theimage that appears on the screendiffers from the actual distance.

The following illustration shows thefield of view that the cameraprovides.

A. View displayed by the camera.

B. Corner of the rear bumper.



When the System Does NotSeem To Work Properly

The rear vision camera systemmight not work properly or display aclear image if:. It is dark.. The sun or the beam of

headlights is shining directlyinto the camera lens.

. Ice, snow, mud, or anything elsebuilds up on the camera lens.Clean the lens, rinse it withwater, and wipe it with a softcloth.

. The back of the vehicle is inan accident, the position andmounting angle of the cameracan change or the camera canbe affected. Be sure to have thecamera and its position andmounting angle checked at yourdealer.

. There are extreme temperaturechanges.

FuelUse of the recommended fuel isan important part of the propermaintenance of this vehicle. To helpkeep the engine clean and maintainoptimum vehicle performance, werecommend the use of gasolineadvertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline.

Look for the TOP TIER label on thefuel pump to ensure gasoline meetsenhanced detergency standardsdeveloped by auto companies. A listof marketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be found atwww.toptiergas.com.

The eighth digit of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) showsthe code letter or number thatidentifies the vehicle's engine.The VIN is at the top left of theinstrument panel. See VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) onpage 12‑1.



Recommended FuelIf the vehicle has a V6 engine,use regular unleaded gasoline witha posted octane rating of 87 orhigher. If the octane rating is lessthan 87, an audible knocking noise,commonly referred to as sparkknock, might be heard when driving.If this occurs, use a gasoline ratedat 87 octane or higher as soon aspossible. If heavy knocking is heardwhen using gasoline rated at87 octane or higher, the engineneeds service.

If the vehicle has the 6.2L V8 engine(VIN Code P), use premiumunleaded gasoline with a postedoctane rating of 91 or higher. Forbest performance, use premiumunleaded gasoline with a postedoctane rating of 93. In anemergency, you can use regularunleaded gasoline with an octanerating of 87 or higher. If 87 octanefuel is used, do not perform anyaggressive driving maneuvers suchas wide open throttle applications.

You might also hear audible sparkknock during acceleration. Refill thetank with premium fuel as soon aspossible to avoid damaging theengine. If heavy knocking is heardwhen using gasoline rated at91octane or higher, the engineneeds service.

Gasoline Specifications(U.S. and Canada Only)At a minimum, gasoline shouldmeet ASTM specification D 4814 inthe United States or CAN/CGSB‐3.5or 3.511 in Canada. Somegasolines contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). We recommendagainst the use of gasolinescontaining MMT. See Fuel Additiveson page 9‑49 for additionalinformation.

California FuelRequirementsIf the vehicle is certified to meetCalifornia Emissions Standards, it isdesigned to operate on fuels thatmeet California specifications. Seethe underhood emission controllabel. If this fuel is not available instates adopting California EmissionsStandards, the vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meetingfederal specifications, but emissioncontrol system performance mightbe affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp could turn on and thevehicle might fail a smog‐check test.See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑19. If this occurs, return toyour authorized dealer for diagnosis.If it is determined that the conditionis caused by the type of fuel used,repairs might not be covered by thevehicle warranty.



Fuels in ForeignCountriesNever use leaded gasoline or anyother fuel not recommended in theprevious text on fuel. Costly repairscaused by use of improper fuelwould not be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask anauto club, or contact a major oilcompany that does business in thecountry where you will be driving.

Fuel AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolinesin the United States are nowrequired to contain additives thathelp prevent engine and fuel systemdeposits from forming, allowing theemission control system to workproperly. In most cases, nothingshould have to be added to the fuel.However, some gasolines containonly the minimum amount ofadditive required to meet U.S.Environmental Protection Agency

regulations. To help keep fuelinjectors and intake valves cleanand avoid problems due to dirtyinjectors or valves, look for gasolinethat is advertised as TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline. Look for theTOP TIER label on the fuel pump toensure gasoline meets enhanceddetergency standards developedby the auto companies. A list ofmarketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be found atwww.toptiergas.com.

For customers who do not use TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline regularly,one bottle of GM Fuel SystemTreatment PLUS, added to the fueltank at every engine oil change,can help clean deposits from fuelinjectors and intake valves. GM FuelSystem Treatment PLUS is the onlygasoline additive recommended byGeneral Motors. It is available atyour dealer.

Gasolines containing oxygenates,such as ethers and ethanol,and reformulated gasolinesmight be available in your area.

We recommend that you use thesegasolines, if they comply with thespecifications described earlier.However, E85 (85% ethanol) andother fuels containing more than10% ethanol must not be used invehicles that were not designed forthose fuels.

Notice: This vehicle was notdesigned for fuel that containsmethanol. Do not use fuelcontaining methanol. It cancorrode metal parts in the fuelsystem and also damage plasticand rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under thevehicle warranty.

Some gasolines that arenot reformulated for lowemissions can contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendantwhere you buy gasoline whether thefuel contains MMT. We recommendagainst the use of such gasolines.



Fuels containing MMT can reducespark plug life and affect emissioncontrol system performance. Themalfunction indicator lamp mightturn on. If this occurs, return to yourdealer for service.

Filling the Tank

{ WARNING

Fuel vapor burns violently and afuel fire can cause bad injuries.To help avoid injuries to you andothers, read and follow all theinstructions on the fuel pumpisland. Turn off the engine whenrefueling. Do not smoke near fuelor when refueling the vehicle. Donot use cellular phones. Keepsparks, flames, and smokingmaterials away from fuel. Do notleave the fuel pump unattendedwhen refueling the vehicle. This isagainst the law in some places.Do not re-enter the vehicle while

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

pumping fuel. Keep children awayfrom the fuel pump; never letchildren pump fuel.

The cap is behind a locking fueldoor on the passenger side of thevehicle. The fuel door is locked orunlocked every time the driver’sdoor is locked or unlocked with thepower door locks or the transmitter.

To open the fuel door, push therearward center edge in and releaseand it will open.

To remove the tethered fuel cap,turn it slowly counterclockwise.

While refueling, hang the tetheredfuel cap from the hook on thefuel door.

If the fuel cap is not installedproperly, the TIGHTEN GAS CAPmessage will appear on the DriverInformation Center display. See FuelSystem Messages on page 5‑36.

When reinstalling the cap, turn itclockwise until it clicks once,otherwise the MalfunctionIndicator Lamp could turn on.See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑19.



{ WARNING

Fuel can spray out on you if youopen the fuel cap too quickly.If you spill fuel and thensomething ignites it, you couldbe badly burned. This spray canhappen if the tank is nearly full,and is more likely in hot weather.Open the fuel cap slowly and waitfor any hiss noise to stop. Thenunscrew the cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do nottop off or overfill the tank and wait afew seconds after you have finishedpumping before removing thenozzle. Clean fuel from paintedsurfaces as soon as possible. SeeExterior Care on page 10‑113.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn itclockwise until it clicks once. Makesure the cap is fully installed. Thediagnostic system can determine ifthe fuel cap has been left off orimproperly installed. This wouldallow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 5‑19.

{ WARNING

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove thenozzle. Shut off the flow of fuelby shutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

Notice: If a new fuel cap isneeded, be sure to get the righttype of cap from your dealer. Thewrong type of fuel cap might notfit properly, might cause themalfunction indicator lamp tolight, and could damage the fueltank and emissions system. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑19.



Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ WARNING

Never fill a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle. Staticelectricity discharge from thecontainer can ignite the fuelvapor. You can be badly burnedand the vehicle damaged if thisoccurs. To help avoid injury to youand others:

. Dispense fuel only intoapproved containers.

. Do not fill a container while itis inside a vehicle, in avehicle's trunk, pickup bed,or on any surface other thanthe ground.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Bring the fill nozzle in contactwith the inside of the fillopening before operating thenozzle. Contact should bemaintained until the filling iscomplete.

. Do not smoke whilepumping fuel.

. Do not use a cellular phonewhile pumping fuel.

Towing

General TowingInformationOnly use towing equipment thathas been designed for the vehicle.Contact your dealer or traileringdealer for assistance with preparingthe vehicle for towing a trailer.

See the following trailer towinginformation in this section:. For information on driving

while towing a trailer, see“Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips.”

. For maximum vehicle and trailerweights, see “Trailer Towing.”

. For information on equipmentto tow a trailer, see “TowingEquipment.”



For information on towing a disabledvehicle, see Towing the Vehicle onpage 10‑111. For information ontowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle such as a motor home, seeRecreational Vehicle Towing onpage 10‑111.

Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips

{ WARNING

The driver can lose control whenpulling a trailer if the correctequipment is not used or thevehicle is not driven properly.For example, if the trailer is tooheavy, the brakes may not workwell— or even at all. The driverand passengers could beseriously injured. The vehicle mayalso be damaged; the resultingrepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Pull a traileronly if all the steps in this section

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

have been followed. Ask yourdealer for advice and informationabout towing a trailer with thevehicle.

The vehicle can tow a trailer if it isequipped with the proper trailertowing equipment. To identify thetrailering capacity of the vehicle, seeTrailer Towing (Except CTS-V) onpage 9‑57 or Trailer Towing (CTS-V)on page 9‑58. Trailering changeshandling, acceleration, braking,durability, and fuel economy. Withthe added weight, the engine,transmission, wheel assemblies,and tires are forced to work harderand under greater loads. Thetrailer also adds wind resistance,increasing the pulling requirements.For safe trailering, correctly use theproper trailering equipment.

The following information hasimportant trailering tips and rulesfor your safety and that of yourpassengers. Read this sectioncarefully before pulling a trailer.

Pulling a Trailer

Here are some important points:. There are many laws, including

speed limit restrictions that applyto trailering. Check for legalrequirements with state orprovincial police.

. Do not tow a trailer at all duringthe first 1 600 km (1,000 miles)the new vehicle is driven. Theengine, axle, or other parts couldbe damaged.

. During the first 800 km(500 miles) that a trailer istowed, do not drive over 80 km/h(50 mph) and do not make startsat full throttle. This reduces wearon the vehicle.



. Vehicles with automatictransmissions can tow inD (Drive) but M (Manual Mode)is recommended. See ManualMode on page 9‑29 for moreinformation. Use a lower gear ifthe transmission shifts too often.For vehicles with a manualtransmission, it is better not touse the highest gear.

. Use the cruise control whentowing.

. Obey speed limit restrictions.Do not drive faster than themaximum posted speed fortrailers, or no more than 90 km/h(55 mph), to reduce wear on thevehicle.

Driving with a Trailer

Towing a trailer requires experience.Get familiar with handling andbraking with the added trailerweight. The vehicle is now longerand not as responsive as thevehicle is by itself.

Check all trailer hitch parts andattachments, safety chains,electrical connectors, lamps, tires,and mirror adjustments. If the trailerhas electric brakes, start the vehicleand trailer moving and then applythe trailer brake controller by handto be sure the brakes are working.

During the trip, check regularly to besure that the load is secure, and thelamps and trailer brakes are workingproperly.

Towing with a Stability ControlSystem

When towing, the sound of thestability control system might beheard. The system is reacting to thevehicle movement caused by thetrailer, which mainly occurs duringcornering. This is normal whentowing heavier trailers.

Following Distance

Stay at least twice as far behind thevehicle ahead as you would whendriving the vehicle without a trailer.This can help to avoid situationsthat require heavy braking andsudden turns.

Passing

More passing distance is neededwhen towing a trailer. Because therig is longer, it is necessary to gomuch farther beyond the passedvehicle before returning to the lane.

Backing Up

Hold the bottom of the steeringwheel with one hand. Then, tomove the trailer to the left, movethat hand to the left. To move thetrailer to the right, move your handto the right. Always back up slowlyand, if possible, have someoneguide you.



Making Turns

Notice: Making very sharp turnswhile trailering could cause thetrailer to come in contact withthe vehicle. The vehicle could bedamaged. Avoid making verysharp turns while trailering.

When turning with a trailer, makewider turns than normal. Do thisso the trailer won't strike softshoulders, curbs, road signs, treesor other objects. Avoid jerky orsudden maneuvers. Signal well inadvance.

Turn Signals When Towing aTrailer

The arrows on the instrument panelflash whenever signaling a turn orlane change. Properly hooked up,the trailer lamps also flash, tellingother drivers the vehicle is turning,changing lanes, or stopping.

When towing a trailer, the arrows onthe instrument panel flash for turnseven if the bulbs on the trailer areburned out. For this reason you maythink other drivers are seeing thesignal when they are not. It isimportant to check occasionally tobe sure the trailer bulbs are stillworking.

Driving On Grades

Reduce speed and shift to alower gear before starting down along or steep downgrade. If thetransmission is not shifted down, thebrakes might have to be used somuch that they would get hot and nolonger work well.

Vehicles with an automatictransmission can tow inD (Drive) but M (Manual Mode)is recommended. Shift thetransmission to a lower gearif the transmission shifts too oftenunder heavy loads and/or hillyconditions. For vehicles with amanual transmission, it is betternot to use the highest gear.

When towing at high altitude onsteep uphill grades, consider thefollowing: Engine coolant will boil ata lower temperature than at normalaltitudes. If the engine is turned offimmediately after towing at highaltitude on steep uphill grades, thevehicle may show signs similar toengine overheating. To avoid this,let the engine run while parked,preferably on level ground, with theautomatic transmission in P (Park)for a few minutes before turning theengine off. For vehicles with manualtransmissions, let the engine runwhile parked, preferably on levelground, with the transmission out ofgear and the parking brake applied,for a few minutes before turning theengine off. If the overheat warningcomes on, see Engine Overheatingon page 10‑24.



Parking on Hills

{ WARNING

Parking the vehicle on a hillwith the trailer attached can bedangerous. If something goeswrong, the rig could start to move.People can be injured, and boththe vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged. When possible, alwayspark the rig on a flat surface.

If parking the rig on a hill:

1. Press the brake pedal, but donot shift into P (Park) yet forvehicles with an automatictransmission, or into gearfor vehicles with a manualtransmission. Turn the wheelsinto the curb if facing downhill orinto traffic if facing uphill.

2. Have someone place chocksunder the trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are inplace, release the brake pedaluntil the chocks absorb the load.

4. Reapply the brake pedal. Thenapply the parking brake and shiftinto P (Park) for vehicles with anautomatic transmission or intogear for vehicles with a manualtransmission.

5. Release the brake pedal.

Leaving After Parking on a Hill

1. Apply and hold the brake pedalwhile you:. Start the engine,. Shift into a gear, and. Release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer isclear of the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick upand store the chocks.

Maintenance When TrailerTowing

The vehicle needs service moreoften when pulling a trailer. See thismanual's Maintenance Schedule orIndex for more information. Thingsthat are especially important intrailer operation are automatictransmission fluid, engine oil, axlelubricant, belts, cooling system, andbrake system. It is a good idea toinspect these before and duringthe trip.

Check periodically to see that allhitch nuts and bolts are tight.

Engine Cooling When TrailerTowing

The cooling system may temporarilyoverheat during severe operatingconditions. See Engine Overheatingon page 10‑24.



Trailer Towing(Except CTS-V andCoupe)Before pulling a trailer, there arethree important considerations thathave to do with weight:. The weight of the trailer.. The weight of the trailer tongue.. The total weight on the vehicle's

tires.

Weight of the Trailer

How heavy can a trailer safely be?

It should never weigh more than450 kg (1,000 lbs). But even thatcan be too heavy.

Speed, altitude, road grades,outside temperature, specialequipment, and the amount oftongue weight the vehicle can carrymust be considered. See “Weight ofthe Trailer Tongue” later in thissection for more information.

Maximum trailer weight iscalculated assuming only thedriver is in the tow vehicle and ithas all the required traileringequipment. The weight of additionaloptional equipment, passengers,and cargo in the tow vehicle mustbe subtracted from the maximumtrailer weight.

Ask your dealer for our traileringinformation or advice, or write us atour Customer Assistance Offices.See Roadside Service (U.S. andCanada) on page 13‑7 or RoadsideService (Mexico) on page 13‑9 formore information.

Weight of the Trailer Tongue

The tongue load (A) of any trailer isan important weight to measurebecause it affects the total grossweight of the vehicle. The GrossVehicle Weight (GVW) includes thecurb weight of the vehicle, anycargo carried in it, and the peoplewho will be riding in the vehicle.

If there are a lot of options,equipment, passengers or cargo inthe vehicle, it will reduce the tongueweight the vehicle can carry, whichwill also reduce the trailer weight thevehicle can tow. If towing a trailer,the tongue load must be added tothe GVW because the vehicle willbe carrying that weight, too. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 9‑11for more information about thevehicle's maximum load capacity.

For a weight-carrying hitch,the trailer tongue (A) shouldweigh 10 to 15 percent of thetotal loaded trailer weight (B).



After loading the trailer, weighthe trailer and then the tongue,separately, to see if the weights areproper. If they are not, adjustmentsmight be made by moving someitems around in the trailer.

Total Weight on theVehicle's Tires

Inflate the vehicle's tires to theupper limit for cold tires. Thesenumbers can be found on theCertification label or see VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑11. Do not goover the GVW limit for the vehicle,or the GAWR, including the weightof the trailer tongue.

Trailer Towing(CTS-V and Coupe)The vehicle is neither designed norintended to tow a trailer.

Towing Equipment

Hitches

Use the correct hitch equipment.See your dealer or a hitch dealer forassistance.. The rear bumper on the vehicle

is not intended for hitches.Do not attach rental hitches orother bumper-type hitches to it.Use only a frame-mounted hitchthat does not attach to thebumper.

. Will any holes be made in thebody of the vehicle when thetrailer hitch is installed? If thereare, seal the holes when thehitch is removed. If the holesare not sealed, dirt, water, anddeadly carbon monoxide (CO)from the exhaust can get into thevehicle. See Engine Exhaust onpage 9‑25.

Safety Chains

Always attach chains between thevehicle and the trailer. Cross thesafety chains under the tongueof the trailer to help prevent thetongue from contacting the road if itbecomes separated from the hitch.Leave enough slack so the rig canturn. Never allow safety chains todrag on the ground.

Trailer Brakes

Does the trailer have its ownbrakes? Be sure to read and followthe instructions for the trailer brakesso they are installed, adjusted, andmaintained properly.

Because the vehicle has antilockbrakes, do not tap into the vehicle'sbrake system. If this is done, bothbrake systems will not work well,or at all.



Conversions andAdd-Ons

Add-On ElectricalEquipmentNotice: Do not add anythingelectrical to the vehicle unlessyou check with your dealer first.Some electrical equipment candamage the vehicle and thedamage would not be coveredby the vehicle's warranty. Someadd-on electrical equipment cankeep other components fromworking as they should.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle's 12‐volt battery, even if thevehicle is not operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, seeServicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3‑41 and AddingEquipment to the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3‑42.



2 NOTES


Vehicle Care 10-1

Vehicle Care

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-3California Proposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

California PerchlorateMaterials Requirements . . . . 10-3

Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your OwnService Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5Engine CompartmentOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6

Engine Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-14Automatic TransmissionFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14

Manual TransmissionFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15

Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-16Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-24Overheated EngineProtectionOperating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . 10-25Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-31Automatic Transmission ShiftLock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32

Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-33

Wiper BladeReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-35

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-37Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38License Plate Lamp (Coupeand Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38

License Plate Lamp(Wagon) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39

Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-39

Electrical SystemElectrical SystemOverload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40

Fuses and CircuitBreakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41

Engine Compartment FuseBlock (CTS Coupe andSedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41

Engine Compartment FuseBlock (CTS V Coupe andSedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45

Engine Compartment FuseBlock (CTS Wagon) . . . . . . . 10-48

Engine Compartment FuseBlock (CTS V Wagon) . . . . . 10-52


10-2 Vehicle Care

Rear Compartment FuseBlock (CTS Coupe andSedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55

Rear Compartment FuseBlock (CTS-V Coupe andSedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57

Rear Compartment FuseBlock (CTS Wagon) . . . . . . . 10-59

Rear Compartment FuseBlock (CTS-V Wagon) . . . . . 10-61

Wheels and TiresTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-66Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68Tire Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72Tire Pressure for High-SpeedOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73

Tire Pressure MonitorSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74

Tire Pressure MonitorOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75

Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81Different Size Tires andWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-85

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-85Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-87Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89

Storing the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit(Wagon) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-96

Storing the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit(Coupe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-97

Storing the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit(Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-97

Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-98Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . 10-106

Jump StartingJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-106

TowingTowing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-111Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-111

Appearance CareExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-113Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-117Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-120


Vehicle Care 10-3

General InformationFor service and parts needs, visityour dealer. You will receivegenuine GM parts and GM-trainedand supported service people.

Genuine GM parts have one ofthese marks:

California Proposition65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including thisone, contain and/or emit chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm. Engineexhaust, many parts and systems,many fluids, and some componentwear by-products contain and/oremit these chemicals.

California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbaginitiators, seat belt pretensioners,and lithium batteries contained inRemote Keyless Entry transmitters,may contain perchlorate materials.Special handling may be necessary.For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Accessories andModificationsAdding non‐dealer accessoriesto the vehicle can affect vehicleperformance and safety, includingsuch things as airbags, braking,stability, ride and handling,emissions systems, aerodynamics,durability, and electronic systemslike antilock brakes, traction control,and stability control. Some of theseaccessories could even causemalfunction or damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from the installation or useof non‐GM certified parts, includingcontrol module modifications, is notcovered under the terms of thevehicle warranty and may affectremaining warranty coverage foraffected parts.


10-4 Vehicle Care

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function with othersystems on the vehicle. Your GMdealer can accessorize the vehicleusing genuine GM Accessories.When you go to your GM dealerand ask for GM Accessories, youwill know that GM-trained andsupported service technicians willperform the work using genuine GMAccessories.

Also, see Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑42.

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your OwnService Work

{ WARNING

You can be injured and thevehicle could be damaged if youtry to do service work on a vehiclewithout knowing enough about it.

. Be sure you have sufficientknowledge, experience,the proper replacementparts, and tools beforeattempting any vehiclemaintenance task.

. Be sure to use the propernuts, bolts, and otherfasteners. Metric andEnglish fasteners can beeasily confused. If thewrong fasteners are used,parts can later break or falloff. You could be hurt.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper servicemanual. It tells you much moreabout how to service the vehiclethan this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Informationon page 13‑14.

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do your ownservice work, see Servicing theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑41.

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the dateof any service work performed.See Maintenance Records onpage 11‑11.


Vehicle Care 10-5

HoodTo open the hood:

1. Pull the hood release lever withthis symbol on it. It is locatedinside the vehicle on the lowerside of the instrument panel. 2. Go to the front of the vehicle and

find the secondary hood releaselever. The lever is located underthe front edge of the grille nearthe center. Push the releaselever up and raise the hood.

Before closing the hood, be sure allthe filler caps are on properly. Thenpull the hood down and close itfirmly.


10-6 Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment Overview

CTS 3.6 L V6 Engine Shown, 3.0 L V6 Engine Similar


Vehicle Care 10-7

A. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑26.

B. Engine Compartment FuseBlock (CTS Coupe and Sedan)on page 10‑41 or EngineCompartment Fuse Block(CTS V Coupe and Sedan) onpage 10‑45 or EngineCompartment Fuse Block(CTS Wagon) on page 10‑48 orEngine Compartment FuseBlock (CTS V Wagon) onpage 10‑52.

C. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.See Jump Starting onpage 10‑106.

D. Remote Negative (−) Terminal.See Jump Starting onpage 10‑106.

E. Passenger CompartmentAir Filter. See PassengerCompartment Air Filter onpage 8‑7.

F. Engine Cooling Fan (Out ofView). See Cooling System onpage 10‑18.

G. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir.See Power Steering Fluid onpage 10‑25.

H. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See EngineOil on page 10‑10.

I. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out ofView). See Engine Oil onpage 10‑10.

J. Hydraulic Clutch Reservoir(If Equipped) (Not Shown). SeeHydraulic Clutch on page 10‑15.

K. Brake Master CylinderReservoir (Out of View). SeeBrakes on page 10‑27.

L. Engine Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap. See EngineCoolant on page 10‑19.

M. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10‑16.


10-8 Vehicle Care

CTS-V 6.2 L V8 Engine


Vehicle Care 10-9

A. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑26.

B. Engine Compartment FuseBlock (CTS Coupe and Sedan)on page 10‑41 or EngineCompartment Fuse Block(CTS V Coupe and Sedan) onpage 10‑45 or EngineCompartment Fuse Block(CTS Wagon) on page 10‑48 orEngine Compartment FuseBlock (CTS V Wagon) onpage 10‑52.

C. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.See Jump Starting onpage 10‑106.

D. Remote Negative (−) Terminal.See Jump Starting onpage 10‑106.

E. Engine Oil Fill Cap (Out ofView). See Engine Oil onpage 10‑10.

F. Engine Oil Dipstick. See EngineOil on page 10‑10.

G. Passenger CompartmentAir Filter. See PassengerCompartment Air Filter onpage 8‑7.

H. Intercooler System PressureCap. See Cooling System onpage 10‑18.

I. Engine Cooling Fans (Out ofView). See Cooling System onpage 10‑18.

J. Hydraulic Clutch Reservoir(If Equipped) (Not Shown). SeeHydraulic Clutch on page 10‑15.

K. Brake Master CylinderReservoir. See Brakes onpage 10‑27.

L. Engine Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap. See EngineCoolant on page 10‑19.

M. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir(Under Engine Cover). SeePower Steering Fluid onpage 10‑25.

N. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10‑16.


10-10 Vehicle Care

Engine Cover

Engine Cover (CTS)

To remove:

1. Remove the oil fill cap (A).

2. Raise the right front corner ofthe engine cover (B) to release itfrom the ball stud.

3. Pull the engine cover (B) forwardto slide the rear tabs (C) out fromunder the retainers.

4. Lift and remove the enginecover.

5. Reverse Steps 1 through 4 toreinstall engine cover.

Engine Cover (CTS-V)

To remove:

The engine cover consists oftwo pieces. Only the larger frontpiece needs to be removed toaccess the engine oil and powersteering fill caps.

1. Raise the front of the enginecover (A) to release it from theball studs (B).

2. Pull the engine cover forwarduntil it is clear of the smallerpiece.

3. Lift and remove the enginecover.

4. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 toreinstall engine cover.

Engine OilTo ensure proper engineperformance and long life, carefulattention must be paid to engineoil. Following these simple, butimportant steps will help protectyour investment:. Always use engine oil approved

to the proper specification and ofthe proper viscosity grade. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil”in this section.

. Check the engine oil levelregularly and maintain theproper oil level. See “CheckingEngine Oil” and “When to AddEngine Oil” in this section.


Vehicle Care 10-11

. Change the engine oil at theappropriate time. See Engine OilLife System on page 10‑14.

. Always dispose of engine oilproperly. See “What to Do withUsed Oil” in this section.

Checking Engine Oil

It is a good idea to check the engineoil level at each fuel fill. In order toget an accurate reading, the vehiclemust be on level ground. Theengine oil dipstick handle is a yellowloop. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 10‑6 for thelocation of the engine oil dipstick.

1. If the engine has been runningrecently, turn off the engine andallow several minutes for the oilto drain back into the oil pan.Checking the oil level too soonafter engine shutoff will notprovide an accurate oil levelreading.

2. Pull out the dipstick and cleanit with a paper towel or cloth,then push it back in all the way.Remove it again, keeping the tipdown, and check the level.

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the cross-hatchedarea at the tip of the dipstick, add1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oiland then recheck the level. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil”in this section for an explanationof what kind of oil to use. Forengine oil crankcase capacity, seeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12‑2.

Notice: Do not add too much oil.Oil levels above or below theacceptable operating rangeshown on the dipstick are harmfulto the engine. If you find thatyou have an oil level above theoperating range, i.e., the enginehas so much oil that the oil levelgets above the cross-hatchedarea that shows the properoperating range, the engine couldbe damaged. You should drainout the excess oil or limit drivingof the vehicle and seek a serviceprofessional to remove theexcess amount of oil.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for the location of theengine oil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all the wayback in when through.


10-12 Vehicle Care

Selecting the Right Engine Oil

Selecting the right engine oildepends on both the proper oilspecification and viscosity grade:

Specification

Use and ask for engine oils withthe dexos™ certification mark. Oilsmeeting the requirements of thevehicle should have the dexos™certification mark on the container.This certification mark indicates thatthe oil has been approved to thedexos™ specification.

This vehicle was filled at the factorywith dexos™ approved engine oil.

Notice: Use only engine oilthat is approved to the dexos™specification or an equivalentengine oil of the appropriateviscosity grade. Engine oilsapproved to the dexos™specification will show thedexos™ symbol on the container.Failure to use the recommendedengine oil or equivalent canresult in engine damage notcovered by the vehicle warranty.If you are unsure whether theoil is approved to the dexos™specification, ask your serviceprovider.

Use of Substitute Engine Oils ifdexos™ is unavailable: In the eventthat dexos™ approved engine oil isnot available at an oil change or formaintaining proper oil level, youmay use substitute engine oildisplaying the API Starburst symboland of SAE 5W-30 viscosity grade.Use of oils that do not meet thedexos™ specification, however, mayresult in reduced performance undercertain circumstances.

Viscosity Grade

SAE 5W-30 is the best viscositygrade for the vehicle. Do notuse other viscosity oils such asSAE 10W‐30, 10W‐40, or 20W-50.


Vehicle Care 10-13

Cold Temperature Operation: In anarea of extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below −29°C

(−20°F), an SAE 0W-30 oil shouldbe used. An oil of this viscositygrade will provide easier coldstarting for the engine at extremelylow temperatures. When selectingan oil of the appropriate viscositygrade, be sure to always selectan oil that meets the requiredspecification, dexos™. See“Specification” earlier in thissection for more information.

Engine Oil Additives/EngineOil Flushes

Do not add anything to the oil. Therecommended oils with the dexos™specification and displaying thedexos™ certification mark are allthat is needed for good performanceand engine protection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could causeengine damage not covered by thevehicle warranty.

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and water,or a good hand cleaner. Wash orproperly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See themanufacturer's warnings about theuse and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change yourown oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Neverdispose of oil by putting it in thetrash or pouring it on the ground,into sewers, or into streams orbodies of water. Recycle it by takingit to a place that collects used oil.


10-14 Vehicle Care

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil

This vehicle has a computer systemthat indicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is basedon engine revolutions and enginetemperature, and not on mileage.Based on driving conditions, themileage at which an oil change isindicated can vary considerably. Forthe oil life system to work properly,the system must be reset every timethe oil is changed.

When the system has calculatedthat oil life has been diminished,it indicates that an oil change isnecessary. A CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message comes on. SeeEngine Oil Messages on page 5‑35.Change the oil as soon as possiblewithin the next 1 000 km (600 miles).It is possible that, if driving underthe best conditions, the oil lifesystem might indicate that an oilchange is not necessary for up to ayear. The engine oil and filter mustbe changed at least once a year

and, at this time, the system mustbe reset. Your dealer has trainedservice people who will perform thiswork and reset the system. It is alsoimportant to check the oil regularlyover the course of an oil draininterval and keep it at the properlevel.

If the system is ever resetaccidentally, the oil must bechanged at 5 000 km (3,000 miles)since the last oil change.Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine OilLife System

Reset the system whenever theengine oil is changed so that thesystem can calculate the nextengine oil change. To reset thesystem:


2. Fully press and release theaccelerator pedal three timeswithin five seconds.

The system is reset when theCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage goes off.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage comes back on when thevehicle is started, the engine oil lifesystem has not been reset. Repeatthe procedure.

Automatic TransmissionFluid

How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid

It is not necessary to checkthe transmission fluid level.A transmission fluid leak is theonly reason for fluid loss. If a leakoccurs, take the vehicle to thedealer service department and haveit repaired as soon as possible.

The vehicle is not equipped with atransmission fluid level dipstick.There is a special procedurefor checking and changing thetransmission fluid. Because thisprocedure is difficult, it should be


Vehicle Care 10-15

done at the dealer servicedepartment. Contact your dealerfor additional information or referto the procedure in the servicemanual. To purchase a servicemanual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 13‑14.

Change the fluid and filter at theintervals listed in ScheduledMaintenance on page 11‑2, and besure to use the fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑7.

Manual TransmissionFluidIt is not necessary to check themanual transmission fluid level.A transmission fluid leak is theonly reason for fluid loss. If a leakoccurs, take the vehicle to a dealerfor service. Have it repaired assoon as possible. You may alsohave the fluid level checked byyour dealer when the oil is changed.

See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑7 for theproper fluid to use.

Hydraulic ClutchIt is not necessary to regularlycheck clutch fluid unless yoususpect there is a leak in thesystem. Adding fluid will not correcta leak. A fluid loss in this systemcould indicate a problem. Have thesystem inspected and repaired.

When to Check and Whatto Use

The hydraulic clutch fluid reservoircap has this symbol on it. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for reservoir location.

Refer to the Maintenance Schedulefor the proper fluid to use. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑7. The fluidrequires changing every two years.See Scheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2.

How to Check and Add Fluid

Visually check the clutch fluidreservoir to make sure the fluid levelis at the MIN (minimum) line on theside of the reservoir. The hydraulicclutch fluid system should be closedand sealed.

Do not remove the cap to checkthe fluid level or to top‐off the fluidlevel. Remove the cap only whennecessary to add the proper fluiduntil the level reaches the MIN line.


10-16 Vehicle Care

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterThe engine air cleaner/filter is in theengine compartment on the driverside of the vehicle, near the front.See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for more informationon location.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

Inspect the air cleaner/filter at thescheduled maintenance intervalsand replace it at the first oil changeafter each 80 000 km (50,000 mile)interval. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 11‑2 for moreinformation. If you are driving industy/dirty conditions, inspect thefilter at each engine oil change.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

To inspect the air cleaner/filter,remove the filter from the vehicleand lightly shake the filter to releaseloose dust and dirt. If the filterremains covered with dirt, a newfilter is required.

To inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter:

1. Turn the ignition off.

2. Remove the side cover bypulling up on the front of thecover.

3. Disconnect the electricalconnector from the air box.

4. Loosen the screw on the clampholding the air outlet duct inplace. Do not remove the clamp.Move the duct aside.

5. Remove the hose from the aircleaner housing mounting arm.Move the hose aside.


Vehicle Care 10-17

6. Remove the three air cleanerhousing cover screws.

7. Move the air cleaner housingcover and remove the coverfrom the air cleaner housing.

8. Remove the air cleaner filterfrom the air cleaner housing.


10-18 Vehicle Care

How to Reinstall Engine AirCleaner/Filter

1. Install the air cleaner into the aircleaner housing. The outer aircleaner filter seal must be fittedproperly in the air cleanerhousing.

2. Align the air cleaner housingcover tabs to the air cleanerhousing.

3. Install the air cleaner housingcover.

4. Install the air cleaner housingcover screws.

5. Install the hose to the air cleanerhousing mounting arm. The hosemust be routed correctly.

6. Install the air cleaner outlet ductto the air cleaner housing.

7. Tighten the air cleaner outletduct screw clamp.

8. Attach the electrical connector tothe air box.

9. Reinstall the side cover.

{ WARNING

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you orothers to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air; ithelps to stop flames if the enginebackfires. Use caution whenworking on the engine and do notdrive with the air cleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter isoff, dirt can easily get into theengine, which could damage it.Always have the air cleaner/filterin place when you are driving.

Cooling SystemThe cooling system allows theengine to maintain the correctworking temperature.

When it is safe to lift the hood:

A. Electric Engine Cooling Fan(s)(Out of View)

B. Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap


Vehicle Care 10-19

{ WARNING

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{ WARNING

Heater and radiator hoses, andother engine parts, can be veryhot. Do not touch them. If you do,you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is aleak. If you run the engine, itcould lose all coolant. That couldcause an engine fire, and youcould be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

Notice: Using coolant other thanDEX-COOL® can cause prematureengine, heater core, or radiatorcorrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant could require changingsooner, at 50 000 km (30,000mi)or 24months, whichever occursfirst. Any repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Always use DEX-COOL(silicate-free) coolant in thevehicle.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in the vehiclefor all engines and the intercooleris filled with DEX-COOL®. Thiscoolant is designed to remain in thevehicle for 5 years or 240 000 km(150,000 mi), whichever occurs first.

The following explains the coolingsystem and how to check and addcoolant when it is low. If there is aproblem with engine overheating,see Engine Overheating onpage 10‑24.


10-20 Vehicle Care

What to Use

{ WARNING

Adding only plain water or someother liquid to the cooling systemcan be dangerous. Plain waterand other liquids, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.The coolant warning system is setfor the proper coolant mixture.With plain water or the wrongmixture, the engine could get toohot but you would not get theoverheat warning. The enginecould catch fire and you orothers could be burned. Use a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant.

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant. If using this mixture,nothing else needs to be added.This mixture:. Gives freezing protection down

to −37°C (−34°F), outsidetemperature.

. Gives boiling protection upto 129°C (265°F), enginetemperature.

. Protects against rust andcorrosion.

. Will not damage aluminum parts.

. Helps keep the proper enginetemperature.

Notice: If an improper coolantmixture is used, the engine couldoverheat and be badly damaged.The repair cost would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Too much water in the mixturecan freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and otherparts.

Never dispose of engine coolantby putting it in the trash, pouringit on the ground, or into sewers,streams, or bodies of water.Have the coolant changed by anauthorized service center, familiarwith legal requirements regardingused coolant disposal. This will helpprotect the environment and yourhealth.

Checking Coolant

The vehicle must be on a levelsurface when checking the coolantlevel.

The engine coolant reservoir islocated in the engine compartmenton the driver side of the vehicle.See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6.

Check to see if coolant is visible inthe surge tank. If the coolant insidethe surge tank is boiling, do not doanything else until it cools down.If coolant is visible but the coolantlevel is not at or above the FULLCOLD mark, add a 50/50 mixtureof clean, drinkable water and


Vehicle Care 10-21

DEX-COOL coolant at the coolantsurge tank, but be sure the coolingsystem is cool before this is done.

If the engine is warm or hot, thecoolant level should be at or abovethe FROID/FULL COLD line on theside of the coolant surge tank. If theengine is cold, the coolant levelshould be near the FROID/FULLCOLD line on the side of the coolantsurge tank. If it is not, there couldbe a leak in the cooling system.

How to Add Coolant to theSurge Tank

{ WARNING

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

Notice: This vehicle has aspecific coolant fill procedure.Failure to follow this procedurecould cause the engine tooverheat and be severelydamaged.

{ WARNING

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{ WARNING

Steam and scalding liquids froma hot cooling system can blowout and burn you badly. Theyare under pressure, and if youturn the surge tank pressurecap— even a little— they cancome out at high speed. Never

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

turn the cap when the coolingsystem, including the surge tankpressure cap, is hot. Wait for thecooling system and surge tankpressure cap to cool if you everhave to turn the pressure cap.

If coolant is needed, add the properDEX-COOL coolant mixture at thecoolant surge tank.

If no coolant is visible in the surgetank, add coolant as follows:

1. Remove the coolant surge tankpressure cap when the coolingsystem, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap andupper radiator hose, is no longerhot. Turn the pressure capslowly counterclockwise aboutone-quarter turn and then stop.

If you hear a hiss, wait for that tostop. A hiss means there is stillsome pressure left.


10-22 Vehicle Care

2. Then keep turning the pressurecap slowly and remove it.

3. Fill the coolant surge tank withthe proper mixture, to slightlyabove the FROID/FULL COLDline on the side of the coolantsurge tank.

4. With the coolant surge tankpressure cap off, start theengine and let it run until youcan feel the upper radiator hosegetting hot. The upper radiatorhose is the top hose coming outof the radiator, on the passengerside of the vehicle. Watch out forthe engine cooling fans.

By this time, the coolant levelinside the coolant surge tankmay be lower. If the level islower, add more of the propermixture to the coolant surgetank until the level reaches theFROID/FULL COLD line on theside of the coolant surge tank.

5. Then replace the pressure cap.Be sure the pressure cap ishand-tight and fully seated.

Notice: If the pressure cap isnot tightly installed, coolant lossand possible engine damage mayoccur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.

Recheck the coolant level in thebottle next time you use yourvehicle to ensure the system is fullwhen cold.


Vehicle Care 10-23

Checking Coolant in theIntercooler System (CTS-V)

The vehicle must be on a levelsurface when checking the coolantlevel.

The super charged engineintercooler coolant fill neck islocated in the engine compartmenton the passenger side of thevehicle. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 10‑6.

On the coolant fill neck, thereis a cold fill region between thetwo horizontal lines shown.

Check to see if coolant is visiblein the coolant fill neck. If the coolantis not visible or below the coldfill region in the fill neck, add a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant at thecoolant fill bottle, but be sure thecooling system is cool before thisis done.

Adding Coolant to theIntercooler SystemCoolant (CTS-V)

1. Remove the intercoolersystem pressure cap when theintercooler system hoses are nolonger hot. Turn the pressurecap slowly counterclockwiseabout one-quarter of a turn.If you hear a hiss, wait for that tostop. This allows any pressurestill left to be vented.

2. Then keep turning the pressurecap slowly and remove it.

3. Add the proper DEX-COOLcoolant mixture to the fill neckuntil the coolant is within thecold fill region.

With the intercooler systempressure cap off, start theengine and let it run for a coupleof minutes. Then turn the engineoff. By this time, the coolantlevel inside the fill neck may belower. If the level drops wherecoolant is no longer within thecold fill region of the fill neckwith the engine off, add more ofthe DEX-COOL coolant mixtureto the fill neck until the level isagain visible in the cold fillregion.


10-24 Vehicle Care

4. Then replace the pressure cap.Be sure the pressure cap ishand-tight and fully seated.

Notice: If the pressure cap isnot tightly installed, coolant lossand possible engine damage mayoccur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.

If the coolant is not at the properlevel when the system cools downagain, see your dealer.

Engine OverheatingThe vehicle has several indicatorsto warn of engine overheating.

There are two engine hot messagesthat may be displayed in the DriverInformation Center (DIC). SeeEngine Cooling System Messageson page 5‑35 for more information.

You may decide not to lift the hoodwhen one of these warnings appear,but get service help right away.See Roadside Service (U.S. andCanada) on page 13‑7 or RoadsideService (Mexico) on page 13‑9.

If you do decide to lift the hood,make sure the vehicle is parked ona level surface.

Then check to see if the enginecooling fans are running. If theengine is overheating, the fan(s)should be running. If they are not,do not continue to run the engineand have the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Engine damage fromrunning the engine withoutcoolant is not covered by thewarranty.

Notice: If the engine catches firebecause of being driven with nocoolant, the vehicle can be badlydamaged. The costly repairswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

If Steam Is Coming from theEngine Compartment

{ WARNING

Steam from an overheated enginecan burn you badly, even if youjust open the hood. Stay awayfrom the engine if you see or hearsteam coming from it. Just turn itoff and get everyone away fromthe vehicle until it cools down.Wait until there is no sign ofsteam or coolant before you openthe hood.

If you keep driving when theengine is overheated, the liquidsin it can catch fire. You or otherscould be badly burned. Stop theengine if it overheats, and get outof the vehicle until the engineis cool.


Vehicle Care 10-25

If No Steam Is Coming fromthe Engine Compartment

If an engine overheat warning isdisplayed but no steam can be seenor heard, the problem may not betoo serious. Sometimes the enginecan get a little too hot when thevehicle:. Climbs a long hill on a hot day.. Stops after high-speed driving.. Idles for long periods in traffic.. Tows a trailer.

If the overheat warning is displayedwith no sign of steam:

1. Turn the air conditioning off.

2. Turn the heater on to the highesttemperature and to the highestfan speed. Open the windows asnecessary.

3. In heavy traffic, let the engineidle in N (Neutral) while stopped.If it is safe to do so, pull offthe road, shift to P (Park)or N (Neutral) and let theengine idle.

If the temperature overheat gaugeis no longer in the overheat zoneor an overheat warning no longerdisplays, the vehicle can be driven.Continue to drive the vehicle slowfor about 10 minutes. Keep a safevehicle distance from the car in frontof you. If the warning does not comeback on, continue to drive normally.

If the warning continues, pullover, stop, and park the vehicleright away.

If there is no sign of steam, idlethe engine for three minutes whileparked. If the warning is stilldisplayed, turn off the engineuntil it cools down. Also, see“Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode” next in thissection.

Overheated EngineProtectionOperating ModeThis operating mode allows thevehicle to be driven to a safe placein an emergency. Should a hotengine condition exist, an overheatprotection mode which alternatesfiring groups of cylinders helpsprevent engine damage. In thismode, there is a loss in powerand engine performance. Drivingextended distances and/or towing atrailer in the overheat protectionmode should be avoided.

Power Steering Fluid

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for the location of thepower steering fluid reservoir.


10-26 Vehicle Care

When to Check Power SteeringFluid

It is not necessary to regularlycheck power steering fluid unlessyou suspect there is a leak in thesystem or you hear an unusualnoise. A fluid loss in this systemcould indicate a problem. Have thesystem inspected and repaired.

How to Check Power SteeringFluid

To check the power steering fluid:

1. Turn the key off and let theengine compartment cool down.

2. Wipe the cap and the top of thereservoir clean.

3. Unscrew the cap and wipe thedipstick with a clean rag.

4. Replace the cap and completelytighten it.

5. Remove the cap again and lookat the fluid level on the dipstick.

The level should be between theHOT and COLD marks. If necessary,add only enough fluid to bring thelevel between the marks.

What to Use

To determine what kind of fluid touse, see Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑7. Alwaysuse the proper fluid.

Washer Fluid

What to Use

When adding windshield washerfluid to the vehicle, be sure to readthe manufacturer's instructionsbefore use. If you will be operatingyour vehicle in an area where thetemperature may fall below freezing,use a fluid that has sufficientprotection against freezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

The WASHER FLUID LOW ADDFLUID message will appear on theDriver Information Center (DIC)when the fluid level is low. SeeWasher Fluid Messages onpage 5‑46 for more information.

Open the cap with the washersymbol on it. Add washer fluiduntil the tank is full. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for reservoir location.


Vehicle Care 10-27

Notice:. When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer's instructionsfor adding water.

. Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solutionto freeze and damage thewasher fluid tank and otherparts of the washer system.Also, water does not clean aswell as washer fluid.

. Fill the washer fluid tankonly three-quarters fullwhen it is very cold. Thisallows for fluid expansionif freezing occurs, whichcould damage the tank ifit is completely full.

. Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in the windshieldwasher. It can damage thewindshield washer systemand paint.

BrakesThis vehicle has disc brakes. Discbrake pads have built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or beheard all the time the vehicle ismoving, except when applying thebrake pedal firmly.

{ WARNING

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes willnot work well. That could lead toa crash. When the brake wearwarning sound is heard, have thevehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive withworn-out brake pads could resultin costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal whenthe brakes are first applied orlightly applied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help prevent brakepulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wearand evenly tighten wheel nutsin the proper sequence to torquespecifications in Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2.

Brake linings should always bereplaced as complete axle sets.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedaldoes not return to normal height,or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a signthat brake service might berequired.


10-28 Vehicle Care

Brake Adjustment

Every time the brakes are applied,with or without the vehicle moving,the brakes adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System Parts

The braking system on a vehicle iscomplex. Its many parts have to beof top quality and work well togetherif the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. The vehicle was designedand tested with top-quality brakeparts. When parts of the brakingsystem are replaced, be sure to getnew, approved replacement parts.If this is not done, the brakes mightnot work properly. For example,installing disc brake pads that arewrong for the vehicle, can changethe balance between the frontand rear brakes — for the worse.

The braking performance expectedcan change in many other ways ifthe wrong replacement brake partsare installed.

Brake Fluid

The brake master cylinder reservoiris filled with DOT 3 brake fluid asindicated on the reservoir cap. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for the location of thereservoir.

There are only two reasons whythe brake fluid level in the reservoirmight go down:. The brake fluid level goes down

because of normal brake liningwear. When new linings areinstalled, the fluid level goesback up.

. A fluid leak in the brakehydraulic system can also causea low fluid level. Have the brakehydraulic system fixed, since aleak means that sooner or laterthe brakes will not work well.

Do not top off the brake fluid.Adding fluid does not correct a leak.If fluid is added when the liningsare worn, there will be too muchfluid when new brake linings areinstalled. Add or remove brake fluid,as necessary, only when work isdone on the brake hydraulic system.


Vehicle Care 10-29

{ WARNING

If too much brake fluid is added, itcan spill on the engine and burn,if the engine is hot enough. Youor others could be burned, andthe vehicle could be damaged.Add brake fluid only when work isdone on the brake hydraulicsystem.

When the brake fluid falls to a lowlevel, the brake warning light comeson. See Brake System WarningLight on page 5‑22.

What to Add

Use only new DOT 3 brake fluidfrom a sealed container. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑7.

Always clean the brake fluidreservoir cap and the area aroundthe cap before removing it. Thishelps keep dirt from entering thereservoir.

{ WARNING

With the wrong kind of fluid inthe brake hydraulic system, thebrakes might not work well. Thiscould cause a crash. Always usethe proper brake fluid.

Notice:. Using the wrong fluidcan badly damage brakehydraulic system parts.For example, just a fewdrops of mineral-based oil,such as engine oil, in thebrake hydraulic system candamage brake hydraulicsystem parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced.Do not let someone put inthe wrong kind of fluid.

. If brake fluid is spilled on thevehicle's painted surfaces,the paint finish can bedamaged. Be careful notto spill brake fluid on thevehicle. If you do, wash it offimmediately.


10-30 Vehicle Care

BatteryThe battery is in the trunk, behindthe trim panel, on the passengerside of the vehicle. Refer to thereplacement number shown on theoriginal battery label when a newbattery is needed.

{ DANGER

Battery posts, terminals, andrelated accessories contain leadand lead compounds, chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and reproductiveharm. Wash hands after handling.

After a power loss, such asdisconnecting the battery orremoving the maxi fuses in thepower distribution fuse block, thefollowing steps must be performedto calibrate the electronic throttlecontrol. If this is not done, theengine will not run properly.

1. Turn the ignition on but do notstart the engine.

2. Leave the ignition on for atleast three minutes so that theelectronic throttle control willcycle and re-learn its homeposition.

3. Turn the ignition off.

4. Start and run the engine for atleast 30 seconds.

Vehicle Storage

{ WARNING

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode.You can be badly hurt if you arenot careful. See Jump Starting onpage 10‑106 for tips on workingaround a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery to keep the battery fromrunning down.

Extended Storage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery or use a battery tricklecharger.


Vehicle Care 10-31

All-Wheel DriveIf your vehicle is equipped withall-wheel-drive, this is an additionalsystem that needs lubrication.

Transfer Case

When to Check Lubricant

It is not necessary to regularlycheck the transfer case fluid unlessyou suspect there is a leak or youhear an unusual noise. A fluid losscould indicate a problem. Have itinspected and repaired.

How to Check Lubricant

A. Drain Plug

B. Fill Plug

To get an accurate reading, thevehicle should be on a levelsurface.

If the level is below the bottomof the filler plug hole, located onthe transfer case, you'll need toadd some lubricant. Add enoughlubricant to raise the level to thebottom of the filler plug hole. Usecare not to overtighten the plug.

What to Use

Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine what kind of lubricantto use. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 11‑7.

Starter Switch Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parkingbrake and the regular brake.See Parking Brake (Manual) onpage 9‑34 or Parking Brake(Electric) on page 9‑35.


10-32 Vehicle Care

Do not use the acceleratorpedal, and be ready to turn offthe engine immediately if itstarts.

3. For automatic transmissionvehicles, try to start the enginein each gear. The vehicle shouldstart only in P (Park) orN (Neutral). If the vehicle startsin any other position, contactyour dealer for service.

For manual transmissionvehicles, put the shift lever inNeutral, push the clutch pedaldown halfway, and try to startthe engine. The vehicle shouldstart only when the clutch pedalis pushed down all the way tothe floor. If the vehicle startswhen the clutch pedal is notpushed all the way down,contact your dealer for service.

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock ControlFunction Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle. It should beparked on a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake.See Parking Brake (Manual) onpage 9‑34 or Parking Brake(Electric) on page 9‑35.

Be ready to apply the regularbrake immediately if the vehiclebegins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn theignition on, but do not start theengine. Without applying theregular brake, try to move theshift lever out of P (Park) withnormal effort. If the shift levermoves out of P (Park), contactyour dealer for service.


Vehicle Care 10-33

Ignition TransmissionLock CheckWhile parked, and with the parkingbrake set, try to turn the ignitionto LOCK/OFF in each shift leverposition.. The ignition should turn to

LOCK/OFF only when the shiftlever is in P (Park).

. With the key access ignitionsystem, the ignition key shouldcome out only in LOCK/OFF.See Ignition Positions (KeyAccess) on page 9‑17 or IgnitionPositions (Keyless Access) onpage 9‑18.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing this check,the vehicle could begin to move.You or others could be injuredand property could be damaged.Make sure there is room in frontof the vehicle in case it begins toroll. Be ready to apply the regularbrake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keepingyour foot on the regular brake, setthe parking brake.. To check the parking brake's

holding ability: With the enginerunning and the transmission inN (Neutral), slowly remove footpressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.

. To check the P (Park)mechanism's holding ability:With the engine running, shiftto P (Park). Then release theparking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.


10-34 Vehicle Care

Wiper Blade ReplacementWindshield wiper blades shouldbe inspected for wear or cracking.See Scheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2.

It is a good idea to clean or replacethe wiper blade assembly on aregular basis or when worn. Forproper windshield wiper bladelength and type, see MaintenanceReplacement Parts on page 11‑9.

To replace the wiper bladeassembly:


2. Turn on the windshield wipersand turn them off again whenthe wipers are in the out-wipeposition. The driver side bladewill be straight up and down onthe windshield.

3. Pull the windshield wiperassembly away from thewindshield.

4. Lift up the wiper bladeassembly cap.

5. Pull the wiper blade assemblydown far enough to release itfrom the J-hooked end of thewiper arm. Slide the assemblyaway from the arm.

Allowing the wiper blade arm totouch the windshield when nowiper blade is installed coulddamage the windshield. Anydamage that occurs would notbe covered by your warranty. Donot allow the wiper blade arm totouch the windshield.

6. Replace the blade with anew one.

7. Reinstall the wiper bladeassembly by sliding it overthe wiper arm to engage theJ-hooked end. Pull up on theassembly to lock it into place.

8. Repeat the steps for the otherwiper.


Vehicle Care 10-35

Headlamp AimingThe vehicle has a visual opticalheadlamp aiming system. The aimhas been preset at the factory andshould need no further adjustment.

However, if the vehicle is damagedin a crash, the headlamp aim maybe affected and adjustment may benecessary.

If oncoming vehicles flash theirhigh beams at you, this may alsomean the vertical aim needs to beadjusted.

It is recommended that the vehicleis taken to your dealer for service ifthe headlamps need to be re-aimed.It is possible, however, to re-aim theheadlamps as described.

The vehicle should:. Be placed so the headlamps

are 7.6 m (25 ft) from a lightcolored wall.

. Have all four tires on a levelsurface which is level all the wayto the wall.

. Be placed so it is perpendicularto the wall.

. Not have any snow, ice, or mudon it.

. Be fully assembled and haveall other work stopped whileheadlamp aiming is beingperformed.

. Be loaded with a full tank offuel and one person or 75 kg(160 lbs) sitting on thedriver seat.

. Have all tires properly inflated.

. Have the spare tire (if equipped)in its original location in thevehicle.

Headlamp aiming is done with thevehicle's low-beam headlamps.The high-beam headlamps will becorrectly aimed if the low-beamheadlamps are aimed properly.

To adjust the vertical aim:

1. Open the hood. See Hood onpage 10‑5 for more information.

Halogen Headlamps


10-36 Vehicle Care

High Intensity DischargeHeadlamps

2. Locate the aim dot on the lens ofthe low‐beam headlamp.

3. Record the distance from theground to the aim dot on thelow‐beam headlamp.

4. At a wall, measure from theground upward (A) to therecorded distance fromStep 3 and mark it.

5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B)the width of the vehicle at thewall where it was marked inStep 4.

Notice: Do not cover a headlampto improve beam cut-off whenaiming. Covering a headlamp maycause excessive heat build-upwhich may cause damage to theheadlamp.

6. Turn on the low-beamheadlamps and place a pieceof cardboard or equivalent infront of the headlamp not being

aimed. This should allow onlythe beam of light from theheadlamp being aimed to beseen on the flat surface.

Driver Side Shown

7. Locate the vertical headlampaiming screws, which are underthe hood near each headlampassembly. They are covered byrubber caps.

The adjustment screw can beturned with a 6 mm hex driver.

8. Turn the vertical aiming screwuntil the headlamp beam isaimed to the horizontal tape line.


Vehicle Care 10-37

Turn it clockwise orcounterclockwise to raise orlower the angle of the beam.

The top edge of the cut-offshould be positioned at thebottom edge of the horizontaltape line.

9. Make sure that the light from theheadlamp is positioned at thebottom edge of the horizontaltape line. The lamp on theleft (A) shows the correctheadlamp aim. The lamp on theright (B) shows the incorrectheadlamp aim.

10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 forthe opposite headlamp.

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, see Replacement Bulbs onpage 10‑39.

For any bulb‐changing procedurenot listed in this section, contactyour dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

{ WARNING

Halogen bulbs have pressurizedgas inside and can burst if youdrop or scratch the bulb. You orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the instructionson the bulb package.

High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lighting

{ WARNING

The low beam high intensitydischarge lighting systemoperates at a very high voltage.If you try to service any of thesystem components, you couldbe seriously injured. Have yourdealer or a qualified technicianservice them.

After an HID headlamp bulb hasbeen replaced, the beam might be aslightly different shade than it wasoriginally. This is normal.


10-38 Vehicle Care

Fog Lamps

To replace a front fog lamp bulb:

1. Pull out the push-pins located onthe underside of the protectionshield to remove the shield.

2. Reach up behind the frontbumper area from under thevehicle to access the lamphousing.

3. Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by lifting thetwo plastic clips.

4. Remove the bulb socket fromthe lamp housing by turning thebulb socket one-quarter turncounterclockwise.

5. Pull the old bulb from the lamphousing keeping the bulbstraight as you pull it out.

6. Install a new bulb.

7. Reinstall the electrical connectorby pushing in the two plasticclips.

8. Push the bulb socket into thelamp housing and turn thesocket one‐quarter turnclockwise.

License Plate Lamp(Coupe and Sedan)To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Push the tab to remove thelicense plate lamp.

2. Turn the license plate lampassembly down to remove it.

3. Turn the socketcounterclockwise and remove it.

4. Pull the bulb straight out toremove it.

5. Push the new bulb straight intothe socket.

6. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 toreinstall the license plate lampassembly.


Vehicle Care 10-39

License Plate Lamp(Wagon)To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate(Wagon) on page 2‑21 for moreinformation.

Passenger Side Shown, DriverSide Similar

2. Push the left end of the lampassembly towards the right.

3. Turn the lamp assembly down toremove it from the liftgate.

A. Bulb Socket

B. Bulb

C. Lamp Assembly

4. Turn the bulb socket (A)counterclockwise to remove itfrom the lamp assembly (C).

5. Pull the bulb (B) straight out ofthe bulb socket.

6. Push the replacement bulbstraight into the bulb socket andturn the bulb socket clockwise toinstall it into the lamp assembly.

7. Turn the lamp assembly intothe liftgate engaging the clipside first.

8. Push on the lamp side oppositethe clip until the lamp assemblysnaps into place.

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior LampBulb

Number

Fog Lamp (UpLevel Only)

H11LL

License Plate Lamp W5WLL

For replacement bulbs not listedhere, contact your dealer.


10-40 Vehicle Care

Electrical System

Electrical SystemOverloadThe vehicle has fuses and circuitbreakers to protect against anelectrical system overload.

When the current electrical load istoo heavy, the circuit breaker opensand closes, protecting the circuituntil the current load returns tonormal or the problem is fixed.This greatly reduces the chance ofcircuit overload and fire caused byelectrical problems.

Fuses and circuit breakers protectthe following in the vehicle:. Headlamp Wiring. Windshield Wiper Motor. Power Windows and Other

Power Accessories

Replace a bad fuse with a new oneof the identical size and rating.

If there is a problem on the roadand a fuse needs to be replaced,the same amperage fuse can beborrowed. Choose some feature ofthe vehicle that is not needed to useand replace it as soon as possible.

Headlamp Wiring

An electrical overload may causethe lamps to go on and off, or insome cases to remain off. Havethe headlamp wiring checked rightaway if the lamps go on and off orremain off.

Windshield Wipers

If the wiper motor overheats due toheavy snow or ice, the windshieldwipers will stop until the motor coolsand will then restart.

Although the circuit is protectedfrom electrical overload, overloaddue to heavy snow or ice maycause wiper linkage damage.Always clear ice and heavy snowfrom the windshield before using thewindshield wipers.

If the overload is caused by anelectrical problem and not snow orice, be sure to get it fixed.


Vehicle Care 10-41

Fuses and CircuitBreakersThe wiring circuits in the vehicle areprotected from short circuits by acombination of fuses and circuitbreakers. This greatly reduces thechance of damage caused byelectrical problems.

To check a fuse, look at thesilver-colored band inside the fuse.If the band is broken or melted,replace the fuse. Be sure to replacea bad fuse with a new one of theidentical size and rating.

Fuses of the same amperagecan be temporarily borrowed fromanother fuse location, if a fuse goesout. Replace the fuse as soon asyou can.

To identify and check fuses, circuitbreakers, and relays, see EngineCompartment Fuse Block (CTSCoupe and Sedan) on page 10‑41or Engine Compartment Fuse Block(CTS V Coupe and Sedan) onpage 10‑45 or Engine CompartmentFuse Block (CTS Wagon) onpage 10‑48 or Engine CompartmentFuse Block (CTS V Wagon) onpage 10‑52 and Rear CompartmentFuse Block (CTS Coupe andSedan) on page 10‑55 or RearCompartment Fuse Block (CTS-VCoupe and Sedan) on page 10‑57or Rear Compartment Fuse Block(CTS Wagon) on page 10‑59 orRear Compartment Fuse Block(CTS-V Wagon) on page 10‑61.

Engine CompartmentFuse Block (CTS Coupeand Sedan)The underhood fuse block is locatedon the passenger side of the enginecompartment.

Lift the fuse block cover to accessthe fuses.

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses and relaysshown.

Notice: Spilling liquid on anyelectrical component on thevehicle may damage it. Alwayskeep the covers on any electricalcomponent.


10-42 Vehicle Care

Mini‐Fuses Usage

11 Not Used

19Antilock BrakingSystem (ABS)

22 Display

Mini‐Fuses Usage

23 Not Used

24Body ControlModule 1

25Automatic ForwardLighting System(HID Only)

Mini‐Fuses Usage

26 Body ControlModule 5


28 Navigation Motor

29 All-Wheel Drive

30TransmissionControl ModuleBattery

31 Horn

33

Left Low‐BeamHeadlamp(DomesticNon‐HID Only)

34PedestrianProtection System(Export Only)




Vehicle Care 10-43

Mini‐Fuses Usage

38 Headlamp Washer(HID Only)

40

Right Low‐BeamHeadlamp(DomesticNon‐HID Only)

41Air ConditioningCompressor Clutch

43

Low‐Beam DaytimeRunning Lamps(non‐HID), LeftDaytime RunningLamps (HID), LeftTrailer Turn Signal(Export Only)

46Left High‐BeamHeadlamp

47Right High‐BeamHeadlamp

Mini‐Fuses Usage

50

Right DaytimeRunning Lamp,WindshieldWasher Pump

51Airbag SystemIgnition Switch

52

Engine ControlModule Ignition,TransmissionControl ModuleIgnition

54

Power Moding(ImmobilizerModule, IgnitionSwitch)

55 Not Used

56 Windshield Wipers

57Right Low‐Beam(HID Only)

Mini‐Fuses Usage

58

Daytime RunningLamps (non‐HID),Left Low‐Beam(HID Only)

59

Right DaytimeRunning Lamp(HID Only), RightTrailer Turn Signal(Export Only)

60Instrument PanelAuxiliary PowerOutlet

61

Air Quality Sensor,Inside Rear ViewMirror, RearCamera

62 Ignition

64Steering WheelIllumination


10-44 Vehicle Care

Mini‐Fuses Usage

65 Front Fog Lamps(HID Only)

69Body ControlModule 6, BodyControl Module 7

70 Emissions 1

71 Even Ignition Coils

72Engine ControlModule

73 Emissions 2

74 Odd Ignition Coils

75

TransmissionOutput SpeedSensor, BrakeVacuum Relay

76 Spare

77 Spare

78 Spare

Mini‐Fuses Usage

79 Spare

80 Spare

81 Spare

J-CaseFuses

Usage

6 Cooling Fan 2

7 Cooling Fan 1

8 Starter

9BrakeVacuum Pump

10Antilock BrakeSystem Motor

13 Not Used

14Electric ParkingBrake

15 Not Used

16 Not Used

J-CaseFuses

Usage

17 Blower Motor

18Rear WindowDefogger

37 Not Used

Relays Usage

1 Cooling Fan 2

2 Cooling Fan 1

3 Starter



12 Horn

20Headlamp Washer(HID Only)


Vehicle Care 10-45

Relays Usage

21 Cooling Fan(Series/Parallel)


39WindshieldWasher Pump

42Right DaytimeRunning Lamp,Trailer Turn Signal

44

Low‐Beam(non‐HID), LeftDaytime RunningLamps (HID), LeftTrailer Turn Signal(Export Only)

45Front Fog Lamps(HID Only)

48High‐BeamHeadlamps

Relays Usage

49

Daytime RunningLamps (Non‐HID),Low‐BeamHeadlamps (HID)

53 Not Used

63 Main Ignition


67 Powertrain

68Windshield WipersHigh Speed

Engine CompartmentFuse Block (CTS V Coupeand Sedan)This fuse block is on the left side ofthe engine compartment.





10-46 Vehicle Care

Mini‐Fuses Usage

11 Not Used


22 Display

23 Sunroof

Mini‐Fuses Usage




Mini‐Fuses Usage


28 Navigation Motor

29 Not Used


31 Horn

33 Not Used





40 Not Used



Vehicle Care 10-47

Mini‐Fuses Usage

43Left DaytimeRunningLamps (HID)



50

Right DaytimeRunning Lamp,WindshieldWasher Pump

51 Airbag SystemIgnition Switch

52


54


Mini‐Fuses Usage

55 Intercooler Pump


57Right Low‐Beam(HID Only)

58Left Low‐Beam(HID Only)

59Right DaytimeRunning Lamp(HID Only)


61


62 Ignition



Mini‐Fuses Usage


70 Emissions 1



73 Emissions 2


75 Not Used

76 Spare

77 Spare

78 Spare

79 Spare

80 Spare

81 Spare


10-48 Vehicle Care

J-CaseFuses

Usage

6 Cooling Fan 2

7 Cooling Fan 1

8 Starter

9 Not Used


13 Not Used


15 Not Used

16 Not Used

17 Blower Motor


37Magnetic Ride/Suspension Control

Relays Usage

1 Cooling Fan 2

2 Cooling Fan 1

3 Starter



12 Horn


21 Cooling Fan(Series/Parallel)



42Right DaytimeRunning Lamp

Relays Usage

44 Left DaytimeRunning Lamp (HID)



49Low‐BeamHeadlamps (HID)

53 Not Used

63 Main Ignition


67 Powertrain


Engine CompartmentFuse Block (CTS Wagon)This fuse block is on the left side ofthe engine compartment.


Vehicle Care 10-49




Mini‐Fuses Usage

11 Not Used


22 Display

23 Not Used

Mini‐Fuses Usage





10-50 Vehicle Care

Mini‐Fuses Usage


28 Navigation Motor

29 All-Wheel Drive


31 Horn

33

Left Low‐BeamHeadlamp(DomesticNon‐HID Only)





Mini‐Fuses Usage

40

Right Low‐BeamHeadlamp(DomesticNon‐HID Only)


43

Low‐Beam DaytimeRunning Lamps(non‐HID), LeftDaytime RunningLamps (HID), LeftTrailer Turn Signal(Export Only)





Mini‐Fuses Usage

52


54


55 Not Used


57 Right Low‐Beam(HID Only)

58

Daytime RunningLamps (non‐HID),Left Low‐Beam(HID Only)

59

Right DaytimeRunning Lamp(HID Only), RightTrailer Turn Signal(Export Only)


Vehicle Care 10-51

Mini‐Fuses Usage


61


62 Ignition




70 Emissions 1



73 Emissions 2

Mini‐Fuses Usage


75

TransmissionOutput SpeedSensor, BrakeVacuum Relay

76 Spare

77 Spare

78 Spare

79 Spare

80 Spare

81 Spare

J-CaseFuses

Usage

6 Cooling Fan 2

7 Cooling Fan 1

8 Starter

9BrakeVacuum Pump

J-CaseFuses

Usage


13 Not Used


15 Not Used

16 Not Used

17 Blower Motor


37 Trailer (Export Only)

Relays Usage

1 Cooling Fan 2

2 Cooling Fan 1

3 Starter



10-52 Vehicle Care

Relays Usage


12 Horn


21Cooling Fan(Series/Parallel)


39 Not Used

42Right DaytimeRunning Lamp,Trailer Turn Signal

44

Low‐Beam(non‐HID), LeftDaytime RunningLamps (HID), LeftTrailer Turn Signal(Export Only)

Relays Usage

45 Front Fog Lamps(HID Only)


49

Daytime RunningLamps (Non‐HID),Low‐BeamHeadlamps (HID)

53 Not Used

63 Main Ignition


67 Powertrain


Engine CompartmentFuse Block(CTS V Wagon)The underhood fuse block is locatedon the passenger side of the enginecompartment.





Vehicle Care 10-53

Mini‐Fuses Usage

11 Not Used


22 Display

23 Sunroof

Mini‐Fuses Usage




Mini‐Fuses Usage


28 Navigation Motor

29 Not Used


31 Horn

33 Not Used





40 Not Used



10-54 Vehicle Care

Mini‐Fuses Usage

43Left DaytimeRunningLamp (HID)





52


54


55 Intercooler Pump


Mini‐Fuses Usage

57 Right Low‐Beam(HID Only)

58Left Low‐Beam(HID Only)

59Right DaytimeRunning Lamp(HID Only)


61


62 Ignition




Mini‐Fuses Usage

70 Emissions 1



73 Emissions 2


75 Not Used

76 Spare

77 Spare

78 Spare

79 Spare

80 Spare

81 Spare

J-CaseFuses

Usage

6 Cooling Fan 2

7 Cooling Fan 1

8 Starter


Vehicle Care 10-55

J-CaseFuses

Usage

9 Not Used


13 Not Used


15 Not Used

16 Not Used

17 Blower Motor


37Magnetic Ride/Suspension Control

Relays Usage

1 Cooling Fan 2

2 Cooling Fan 1

3 Starter

Relays Usage

4 Rear WindowDefogger


12 Horn


21Cooling Fan(Series/Parallel)


39 Not Used


44Left DaytimeRunning Lamp (HID)



Relays Usage

49 Low‐BeamHeadlamps (HID)

53 Not Used

63 Main Ignition


67 Powertrain


Rear Compartment FuseBlock (CTS Coupe andSedan)The rear compartment fuse block islocated on top of the battery, on theright side of the trunk. The batteryaccess door must be removed toaccess the fuse block.

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.


10-56 Vehicle Care

Relays Usage

5Stop Lamps(Export Only)

6 Door Lock

7 Door Unlock

Relays Usage

8Fuel Door Unlock(Export Only)

9Right Position Lamp(Export Only)

10Console/AuxiliaryPower Outlet

Relays Usage

11

Sedan TrunkRelease/CoupeRear Fog(Export Only)

12 Side Marker Lamps

13 Left Position Lamps

Mini‐Fuses Usage

14 Right Position Lamp

15 Left Position Lamp

16 Door Lock


18

Rear Fog/ExportBody ControlModule(Export Only)

19 Trunk Release

20Easy Entry Seats(Coupe Only)

21 Sunroof


Vehicle Care 10-57

Mini‐Fuses Usage

22 Right Position Lamp(Export Only)

23Regulated VoltageControl Sensor

24Audio System(Radio)

25 Airbag System

26

Remote KeylessEntry/PASS‐Key®

Theft DeterrentModule

27 Audio Speakers/Subwoofer

28OnStar® System(If Equipped)


30 Canister Vent

31 Fuel Pump

Mini‐Fuses Usage

33 Stop Lamps(Export Only)

34

Theft DeterrentSystem/UniversalGarage DoorOpener

35Memory SeatModule

36Passenger DoorModule

38 Not Used

39 Amplifier

CircuitBreakers

Usage

1Driver Power SeatSwitch

2Passenger PowerSeat Switch

3 Power Windows

CircuitBreakers

Usage

4Power SteeringColumn

32Left Rear WindowSwitch

37Right Rear WindowSwitch

Rear Compartment FuseBlock (CTS-V Coupe andSedan)The rear compartment fuse block islocated on top of the battery, on theright side of the trunk. The batteryaccess door must be removed toaccess the fuse block.



10-58 Vehicle Care

Relays Usage


6 Door Lock

7 Door Unlock

Relays Usage




Relays Usage

11

Sedan TrunkRelease/CoupeRear Fog(Export Only)



Mini‐Fuses Usage



16 Door Lock


18


19 Trunk Release

20Easy Entry Seats(Coupe Only)

21 Fuel Pump


Vehicle Care 10-59

Mini‐Fuses Usage




25 Airbag System

26






30 Canister Vent

31Rear DifferentialCooling Pump

Mini‐Fuses Usage


34


35Memory SeatModule


38 Not Used

39 Amplifier

CircuitBreakers

Usage



3 Power Windows

CircuitBreakers

Usage




Rear Compartment FuseBlock (CTS Wagon)This fuse block is on the right sideof the vehicle, behind the trim panelin the rear compartment.



10-60 Vehicle Care

Relays Usage


6 Door Lock

7 Door Unlock

Relays Usage




Relays Usage

11 Not Used



Mini‐Fuses Usage



16 Door Lock


18


19Rear WindshieldWiper/Washer


21 Sunroof


Vehicle Care 10-61

Mini‐Fuses Usage




25 Airbag System

26






30 Canister Vent

31 Fuel Pump

Mini‐Fuses Usage


34


35Memory SeatModule


38Rear AuxiliaryPower Outlet

39 Amplifier

CircuitBreakers

Usage



CircuitBreakers

Usage

3 Power Windows




Rear Compartment FuseBlock (CTS-V Wagon)The rear compartment fuse block islocated on the passenger side of thevehicle, behind the trim panel in therear compartment.



10-62 Vehicle Care

Relays Usage


6 Door Lock

7 Door Unlock

Relays Usage




Relays Usage

11 Not Used



Mini‐Fuses Usage



16 Door Lock


18


19Rear WindshieldWiper/Washer


21 Fuel Pump


Vehicle Care 10-63

Mini‐Fuses Usage




25 Airbag System

26




28 OnStar® System


Mini‐Fuses Usage

30 Canister Vent

31Rear DifferentialCooling Pump


34


35Memory SeatModule

36 Passenger DoorModule

38Rear AuxiliaryPower Outlet

39 Amplifier

CircuitBreakers

Usage



3 Power Windows





10-64 Vehicle Care

Wheels and Tires

TiresYour new vehicle comes withhigh-quality tires made by aleading tire manufacturer. Ifyou ever have questions aboutyour tire warranty and where toobtain service, see your vehicleWarranty booklet for details. Foradditional information refer tothe tire manufacturer.

{ WARNING

. Poorly maintained andimproperly used tires aredangerous.

. Overloading the tires cancause overheating as a resultof too much flexing. Therecould be a blowout and aserious crash. See VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑11.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Under inflated tires pose thesame danger as overloadedtires. The resulting crashcould cause serious injury.Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommendedpressure. Tire pressureshould be checked when thetires are cold.

. Over inflated tires are morelikely to be cut, punctured,or broken by a suddenimpact — such as whenhitting a pothole. Keep tires atthe recommended pressure.

. Worn or old tires can causea crash. If the tread is badlyworn, replace them.

. Replace any tires that havebeen damaged by impactswith potholes, curbs, etc.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Improperly repaired tirescan cause a crash. Only thedealer or an authorized tireservice center should repair,replace, dismount, and mountthe tires.

. Do not spin the tires inexcess of 55 km/h (35 mph)on slippery surfaces suchas snow, mud, ice, etc.Excessive spinning maycause the tires to explode.

See Tire Pressure for High-SpeedOperation on page 10‑73 forinflation pressure adjustment forhigh-speed driving.


Vehicle Care 10-65

Winter TiresIf you expect to drive on snow or icecovered roads often, you may wantto get winter tires for your vehicle.All season tires provide good overallperformance on most surfaces butthey may not offer the traction youwould like or the same level ofperformance as winter tires on snowor ice covered roads.

Winter tires, in general, aredesigned for increased traction onsnow and ice covered roads. Withwinter tires, there may be decreaseddry road traction, increased roadnoise, and shorter tread life. Afterswitching to winter tires, be alert forchanges in vehicle handling andbraking.

See your dealer for detailsregarding winter tire availabilityand proper tire selection. Also, seeBuying New Tires on page 10‑81.

If you choose to use winter tires:. Use tires of the same brand and

tread type on all four wheelpositions.

. Use only radial ply tires of thesame size, load range, andspeed rating as the originalequipment tires.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as your original equipmenttires may not be available for H, V,W, and ZR speed rated tires. If youchoose winter tires with a lowerspeed rating, never exceed the tire'smaximum speed capability.

Low-Profile TiresIf your vehicle has P235/50R18,245/45ZR19, P245/45R19,255/40ZR19 or 285/35ZR19 sizetires, they are classified aslow‐profile tires. These tires aredesigned for very responsivedriving on wet or dry pavement.

You may also notice moreroad noise with low‐profileperformance tires and that theytend to wear faster.

Notice: If the vehicle haslow‐profile tires, they are moresusceptible to damage fromroad hazards or curb impactthan standard profile tires.Tire and/or wheel assemblydamage can occur whencoming into contact withroad hazards like, potholes,or sharp edged objects,or when sliding into a curb.The vehicle warranty does notcover this type of damage.Keep tires set to the correctinflation pressure and, whenpossible avoid contact withcurbs, potholes, and otherroad hazards.


10-66 Vehicle Care

Summer Performance Tires

Many General Motors highperformance models comefactory‐equipped with tires thatare optimized for maximum dryand wet road performance whilestill retaining satisfactory treadlife, excellent durability, and lownoise levels. In severe winterclimates where snowfall may besignificant, these tires may befound to provide less traction.

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tireis molded into its sidewall. Theexamples below show a typicalpassenger vehicle tire and acompact spare tire sidewall.

Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire Example

(A) Tire Size: The tire size isa combination of letters andnumbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection for more detail.

(B) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meetor exceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(C) DOT (Department ofTransportation): TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates thatthe tire is in compliancewith the U.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.


Vehicle Care 10-67

(D) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code is theTire Identification Number(TIN). The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(E) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(F) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are requiredto grade tires based onthree performance factors:treadwear, traction, andtemperature resistance. Formore information see UniformTire Quality Grading onpage 10‑83.

(G) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum loadthat can be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.

Compact Spare Tire Example

(A) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(B) Temporary Use Only:The compact spare tire ortemporary use tire has a treadlife of approximately 5 000 km(3,000 miles) and should not be

driven at speeds over 105 km/h(65 mph). The compact sparetire is for emergency use whena regular road tire has lost airand gone flat. If the vehiclehas a compact spare tire,see Compact Spare Tire onpage 10‑106 andIf a Tire GoesFlat on page 10‑87.

(C) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code is theTire Identification Number(TIN). The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.


10-68 Vehicle Care

(D) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum loadthat can be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.

(E) Tire Inflation: Thetemporary use tire or compactspare tire should be inflatedto 420 kPa (60 psi). For moreinformation on tire pressure andinflation see Tire Pressure onpage 10‑72.

(F) Tire Size: A combination ofletters and numbers define atire's width, height, aspect ratio,construction type, and servicedescription. The letter T as thefirst character in the tire sizemeans the tire is for temporaryuse only.

(G) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performance

criteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meetor exceed all federal safetyguidelines.

Tire Designations

Tire Size

The following is an exampleof a typical passenger vehicletire size.

(A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire:The United States version of ametric tire sizing system. Theletter P as the first character inthe tire size means a passenger

vehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.

(B) Tire Width: The three‐digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digitnumber that indicates the tireheight‐to‐width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 60, as shown initem C of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire's sidewall is60 percent as high as it is wide.

(D) Construction Code: Aletter code is used to indicatethe type of ply construction inthe tire. The letter R meansradial ply construction; theletter D means diagonal orbias ply construction; and theletter B means belted‐bias plyconstruction.


Vehicle Care 10-69

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(F) Service Description: Thesecharacters represent the loadindex and speed rating of thetire. The load index representsthe load carrying capacity a tireis certified to carry. The speedrating is the maximum speed atire is certified to carry a load.

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure: The amountof air inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inchof the tire. Air pressure isexpressed in psi (pounds persquare inch) or kPa (kilopascal).

Accessory Weight: Thismeans the combined weightof optional accessories.Some examples of optionalaccessories are, automatictransmission, power steering,power brakes, power windows,power seats, and airconditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationshipof a tire's height to its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer ofcords that is located betweenthe plies and the tread. Cordsmay be made from steel or otherreinforcing materials.

Bead: The tire bead containssteel wires wrapped by steelcords that hold the tire ontothe rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tirein which the plies are laid atalternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: Theamount of air pressure in a tire,measured in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch)before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Tire Pressureon page 10‑72.

Curb Weight: The weight ofa motor vehicle with standardand optional equipmentincluding the maximum capacityof fuel, oil, and coolant, butwithout passengers and cargo.


10-70 Vehicle Care

DOT Markings: A code moldedinto the sidewall of a tiresignifying that the tire is incompliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation(DOT) motor vehicle safetystandards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumericdesignator which can alsoidentify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand, anddate of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑11.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle WeightRating for the front axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑11.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle WeightRating for the rear axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑11.

Intended Outboard Sidewall:The side of an asymmetrical tire,that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metricunit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire: Atire used on light duty trucks andsome multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assignednumber ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure:The maximum air pressure towhich a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure ismolded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: Theload rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight: The sum of curbweight, accessory weight,vehicle capacity weight, andproduction options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: Thenumber of occupants a vehicleis designed to seat multiplied by68 kg (150 lbs). See VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑11.

Occupant Distribution:Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: Theside of an asymmetrical tire thathas a particular side that facesoutward when mounted on avehicle. The side of the tirethat contains a whitewall,bears white lettering, or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that ishigher or deeper than the samemoldings on the other sidewallof the tire.


Vehicle Care 10-71

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: Atire used on passenger carsand some light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended InflationPressure: Vehiclemanufacturer's recommendedtire inflation pressure as shownon the tire placard. See TirePressure on page 10‑72andVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑11.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatictire in which the ply cords thatextend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tireand upon which the tire beadsare seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating: Analphanumeric code assignedto a tire indicating the maximumspeed at which a tire canoperate.

Traction: The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface.The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tirethat comes into contact withthe road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrowbands, sometimes called wearbars, that show across the treadof a tire when only 1.6 mm(1/16 in) of tread remains. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tireson page 10‑80.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards): A tireinformation system that providesconsumers with ratings for atire's traction, temperature,and treadwear. Ratingsare determined by tiremanufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures.The ratings are molded into thesidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading onpage 10‑83.

Vehicle Capacity Weight:The number of designatedseating positions multiplied by68 kg (150 lbs) plus the ratedcargo load. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑11.

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire: Load on an individual tiredue to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, andcargo weight.


10-72 Vehicle Care

Vehicle Placard: A labelpermanently attached to avehicle showing the vehiclecapacity weight and theoriginal equipment tire sizeand recommended inflationpressure. See “Tire and LoadingInformation Label” under VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑11.

Tire PressureTires need the correct amountof air pressure to operateeffectively.

Notice: Neither tireunderinflation or overinflationare good. Underinflated tires,or tires that do not haveenough air, can result in:. Tire overloading andover-heating which couldlead to a blowout.

. Premature orirregular wear.

. Poor handling.

. Reduced fuel economy.

Overinflated tires, or tiresthat have too much air, canresult in:. Unusual wear.. Poor handling.. Rough ride.. Needless damage fromroad hazards.

A vehicle-specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the vehicle. Thislabel shows the vehicle'soriginal equipment tires and thecorrect inflation pressures forthe tires when they are cold.The recommended cold tireinflation pressure, shown on thelabel, is the minimum amount ofair pressure needed to supportthe vehicle's maximum loadcarrying capacity.

For additional informationregarding how much weightthe vehicle can carry, and anexample of the Tire and LoadingInformation label, see VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑11. Howyou load the vehicle affectsvehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load the vehiclewith more weight than it wasdesigned to carry.

When to Check

Check the tires once a month ormore. Do not forget to check thecompact spare tire, if the vehiclehas one. The compact spareshould be at 420 kPa (60 psi).For additional informationregarding the compact sparetire, see Compact Spare Tire onpage 10‑106.


Vehicle Care 10-73

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegauge to check tire pressure.You cannot tell if the tires areproperly inflated simply bylooking at them. Radial tires maylook properly inflated even whenthey are underinflated. Checkthe tire's inflation pressure whenthe tires are cold. Cold meansthe vehicle has been sitting forat least three hours or driven nomore than 1.6 km (1 mile).

Remove the valve cap from thetire valve stem. Press the tiregauge firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement.If the cold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label, nofurther adjustment is necessary.If the inflation pressure is low,add air until you reach therecommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, releaseair by pushing on the metal stemin the center of the tire valve.Re‐check the tire pressure withthe tire gauge.

Be sure to put the valve capsback on the valve stems. Theyhelp prevent leaks by keepingout dirt and moisture.

Tire Pressure forHigh-Speed Operation

{ WARNING

Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h(100mph) or higher, puts anadditional strain on tires.Sustained high-speed drivingcauses excessive heat build upand can cause sudden tire failure.You could have a crash and youor others could be killed. Somehigh-speed rated tires require

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

inflation pressure adjustment forhigh speed operation. Whenspeed limits and road conditionsare such that a vehicle can bedriven at high speeds, make surethe tires are rated for high speedoperation, in excellent condition,and set to the correct cold tireinflation pressure for thevehicle load.

If your vehicle has 255/40ZR19 or285/35ZR19 size tires, they willrequire inflation pressure adjustmentwhen driving your vehicle at speedsof 160 km/h (100 mph) or higher.Set the cold inflation pressureto the maximum inflation pressureshown on the tire sidewall,or 300 kPa (44 psi), whichever islower. See the example following.When you end this high-speeddriving, return the tires to the coldtire inflation pressure shown on theTire and Loading Information label.


10-74 Vehicle Care

See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑11 and Tire Pressure onpage 10‑72.

Example:

You will find the maximum load andinflation pressure molded on thetire's sidewall, in small letters,near the rim flange. It will readsomething like this: Maximum load690 kg (1521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi)Max. Press.

For this example, you would set theinflation pressure for high‐speeddriving at 44 psi (300 kPa).

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in your tires andtransmit tire pressure readings to areceiver located in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare(if provided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer onthe vehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard ortire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with atire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a low tirepressure telltale when one ormore of your tires is significantlyunder‐inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate themto the proper pressure. Driving ona significantly under‐inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and can

lead to tire failure. Under‐inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency and tiretread life, and may affect thevehicle's handling and stoppingability.

Please note that the TPMS isnot a substitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under‐inflationhas not reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also beenequipped with a TPMS malfunctionindicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start‐ups aslong as the malfunction exists.


Vehicle Care 10-75

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allowthe TPMS to continue to functionproperly.

See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10‑75 foradditional information.

Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) andIndustry Canada

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑18 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission(FCC) rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-210/220/310.

Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).The TPMS is designed to warn thedriver when a low tire pressurecondition exists. TPMS sensorsare mounted onto each tire andwheel assembly, excluding thespare tire and wheel assembly,if the vehicle has one. The TPMSsensors monitor the air pressure inthe vehicle's tires and transmits thetire pressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure conditionis detected, the TPMS illuminatesthe low tire pressure warning lightlocated on the instrument panelcluster. If the warning light comeson, stop as soon as possible andinflate the tires to the recommendedpressure shown on the tire loadinginformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑11.

Using the Driver Information Center(DIC), the driver can also check tirepressure levels using the DIC. Foradditional information and detailsabout the DIC operation anddisplays see Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑27 and TireMessages on page 5‑44.


10-76 Vehicle Care

A DIC warning message to checkthe pressure in a specific tire is alsoshown on the DIC display screen.The low tire pressure warning lightand the DIC warning message comeat each ignition cycle until the tiresare inflated to the correct inflationpressure.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as you start to drive. Thiscould be an early indicator that theair pressure in the tire(s) are gettinglow and need to be inflated to theproper pressure.

The Tire and Loading Informationlabel, attached to your vehicle,shows the size of your vehicle'soriginal equipment tires and thecorrect inflation pressure for thetires when they are cold. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 9‑11,for an example of the Tire andLoading Information label and itslocation on your vehicle. Also seeTire Pressure on page 10‑72.

Your vehicle's TPMS can warn youabout a low tire pressure conditionbut it does not replace normal tiremaintenance. See Tire Inspectionon page 10‑78, Tire Rotation onpage 10‑79 and Tires onpage 10‑64.

Notice: Tire sealant materials arenot all the same. A non-approvedtire sealant could damage the TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS)sensors. TPMS sensor damagecaused by using an incorrect tiresealant is not covered by thevehicle warranty. Always useonly the GM-approved tire sealantavailable through your dealer orincluded in the vehicle.

Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kitsuse a GM approved liquid tiresealant. Using non-approved tiresealants could damage the TPMSsensors. See Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit on page 10‑89 forinformation regarding the inflator kitmaterials and instructions.

TPMS Malfunction Light andMessage

The TPMS will not function properlyif one or more of the TPMS sensorsare missing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, thelow tire warning light flashes forabout one minute and then stayson for the remainder of the ignitioncycle. A DIC warning message isalso displayed. The malfunction lightand DIC warning message comeon at each ignition cycle until theproblem is corrected. Some ofthe conditions that can cause themalfunction light and DIC messageto come on are:. One of the road tires has been

replaced with the spare tire,if the vehicle has one. Thespare tire does not have aTPMS sensor. The malfunctionlight and the DIC messageshould go off once you re‐install


Vehicle Care 10-77

the road tire containing theTPMS sensor and the sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See “TPMS SensorMatching Process” later in thissection.

. The TPMS sensor matchingprocess was not done or notcompleted successfully afterrotating the vehicle's tires. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off aftersuccessfully completing thesensor matching process. See“TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess” later in this section.

. One or more TPMS sensorsare missing or damaged. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off when theTPMS sensors are installed andthe sensor matching process isperformed successfully. Seeyour dealer for service.

. Replacement tires or wheels donot match your vehicle's originalequipment tires or wheels. Tiresand wheels other than thoserecommended for your vehiclecould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires on page 10‑81.

. Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioning itcannot detect or signal a low tirecondition. See your dealer forservice if the TPMS malfunctionlight and DIC message comes onand stays on.

TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess

Each TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. The identificationcode needs to be matched to a newtire/wheel position after rotating thevehicle’s tires or replacing one ormore of the TPMS sensors. Also,the TPMS sensor matching processshould be performed after replacinga spare tire with a road tirecontaining the TPMS sensor inorder for the malfunction light andthe DIC message to go off at thenext ignition cycle. The sensors arematched to the tire/wheel positions,using a TPMS relearn tool, in thefollowing order: driver side front tire,passenger side front tire, passengerside rear tire, and driver side rear.See your dealer for service.


10-78 Vehicle Care

There are two minutes to matchthe first tire/wheel position, andfive minutes overall to matchall four tire/wheel positions. If ittakes longer, the matching processstops and must be restarted.

The TPMS matching process isoutlined below:

1. Set the parking brake.


3. Press the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter's lock andunlock buttons at the same timefor approximately five seconds.The horn sounds twice to signalthe receiver is in relearn modeand Tire Learning Activemessage displays on the DICscreen.

4. Start with the driver sidefront tire.

5. Place the relearn tool againstthe tire sidewall, near the valvestem. Then press the button toactivate the TPMS sensor.

A horn chirp confirms that thesensor identification code hasbeen matched to this tire andwheel position.

6. Proceed to the passengerside front tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 5.

7. Proceed to the passengerside rear tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 5.

8. Proceed to the driver side reartire, and repeat the procedurein Step 5. After hearing theconfirming horn chirp, for thedriver side rear tire, the hornsounds two more times to signalthe tire learning mode is nolonger active.


10. Set all four tires to therecommended air pressurelevel as indicated on the tireand loading information label.

Tire InspectionWe recommend that youregularly inspect the vehicle'stires, including the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, for signsof wear or damage at leastonce a month.

Always remove the tires if anyof the following statementsare true:. You can see the indicators at

three or more places aroundthe tire.

. You can see cord or fabricshowing through the tire'srubber.

. The tread or sidewall iscracked, cut, or snaggeddeep enough to show cord orfabric.

. The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.


Vehicle Care 10-79

. The tire has a puncture, cut,or other damage that cannotbe repaired well because ofthe size or location of thedamage.

Tire RotationTire rotation is notrecommended if the vehicle hasP235/50R18, 245/45ZR19 or255/40R19 size tires on thefront wheels and P265/45R18,275/40ZR19 or 285/35R19 sizetires on the rear wheels.

Different tire sizes should notbe rotated front to rear. Eachtire and wheel should only beused in its original front or rearposition.

Tire rotation is recommended ifthe vehicle has the same sizetires on all four wheel positions.These tires should be rotatedevery 12 000 km (7,500 miles).See Scheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2.

The purpose of a regular tirerotation is to achieve a uniformwear for all tires on the vehicle.This will ensure that the vehiclecontinues to perform most like itdid when the tires were new.

Any time you notice unusualwear, rotate the tires as soonas possible and check wheelalignment. Also check fordamaged tires or wheels. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tireson page 10‑80 and WheelReplacement on page 10‑85.

Use the rotation pattern shownhere when rotating tires of thesame size installed on allfour wheel positions.

The compact spare tire, if thevehicle has one, is not includedin the tire rotation.


10-80 Vehicle Care

After the tires have beenrotated, adjust the front and rearinflation pressures as shown onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑72 and Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑11.

Reset the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation onpage 10‑75.

Make certain that all wheel nutsare properly tightened. See“Wheel Nut Torque” underCapacities and Specifications onpage 12‑2.

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, use a cloth or apaper towel to do this; but be sureto use a scraper or wire brushlater, if needed, to get all the rustor dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flaton page 10‑87.

Lightly coat the center of thewheel hub with wheel bearinggrease after a wheel change ortire rotation to prevent corrosionor rust build-up. Do not getgrease on the flat wheelmounting surface or on thewheel nuts or bolts.

When It Is Time for NewTiresVarious factors, such asmaintenance, temperatures,driving speeds, vehicle loading,and road conditions influence whenyou need new tires.

One way to tell when it is time fornew tires is to check the treadwearindicators, which appear when thetires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in) orless of tread remaining. See Tire


Vehicle Care 10-81

Inspection on page 10‑79 andTire Rotation on page 10‑79 foradditional information.

The rubber in tires age overtime. This is also true for thespare tire, if the vehicle has one,even if it is not being used. Multipleconditions affect how fast thisaging takes place, includingtemperatures, loading conditions,and inflation pressure maintenance.Tires will typically need to bereplaced due to wear before theymay need to be replaced due toage. Consult the tire manufacturerfor more information on when tiresshould be replaced.

Vehicle Storage

Tires age when stored normallymounted on a parked vehicle. Parka vehicle that will be stored for atleast a month in a cool, dry, cleanarea away from direct sunlight toslow aging. This area should befree of grease, gasoline, or othersubstances that can deterioraterubber.

Parking for an extended periodcan cause flat spots on the tiresthat may result in vibrations whiledriving. When storing a vehicle forat least a month, remove the tiresor raise the vehicle to reduce theweight from the tires.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matchedspecific tires for your vehicle. Theoriginal equipment tires installedon your vehicle, when it was new,were designed to meet GeneralMotors Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification (TPC Spec) systemrating. If you need replacementtires, GM strongly recommends thatyou get tires with the same TPCSpec rating. This way, your vehiclewill continue to have tires thatare designed to give the sameperformance and vehicle safety,during normal use, as the originaltires.

GM's exclusive TPC Spec systemconsiders over a dozen criticalspecifications that impact theoverall performance of yourvehicle, including brake systemperformance, ride and handling,traction control, and tire pressuremonitoring performance. GM's TPCSpec number is molded onto thetire's sidewall near the tire size.If the tires have an all‐season treaddesign, the TPC Spec number willbe followed by an MS for mudand snow. See Tire SidewallLabeling on page 10‑66, foradditional information.

GM recommends replacing tires insets of four. This is because uniformtread depth on all tires will helpkeep your vehicle performing mostlike it did when the tires were new.


10-82 Vehicle Care

Replacing less than a full set of tirescan affect the braking and handlingperformance of your vehicle. SeeTire Inspection on page 10‑78 andTire Rotation on page 10‑79.

{ WARNING

Tires could explode duringimproper service. Attempting tomount or dismount a tire couldcause injury or death. Only yourdealer or authorized tire servicecenter should mount or dismountthe tires.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as your original equipmenttires may not be available for H, V,W and ZR speed rated tires. If youchoose snow tires with a lowerspeed rating, never exceed the tire'smaximum speed capability.

{ WARNING

Mixing tires could cause you tolose control while driving. If youmix tires of different sizes (otherthan those originally installed onyour vehicle), brands, or types(radial and bias-belted tires), thevehicle may not handle properly,and you could have a crash.Using tires of different sizes(other than those originallyinstalled on your vehicle), brandsor types, may also cause damageto your vehicle. Be sure to usethe correct size, brand, and typetires on all four wheels.

{ WARNING

Using bias-ply tires on thevehicle may cause the wheelrim flanges to develop cracksafter many miles of driving.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

A tire and/or wheel could failsuddenly and cause a crash.Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on the vehicle.

If you must replace your vehicle'stires with those that do not havea TPC Spec number, make surethey are the same size, load range,speed rating, and construction type(radial and bias‐belted tires) as yourvehicle's original tires.

Vehicles that have a tire pressuremonitoring system could give aninaccurate low‐pressure warningif non‐TPC Spec rated tires areinstalled on it. Non‐TPC Specrated tires may give a low‐pressurewarning that is higher or lower thanthe proper warning level you wouldget with TPC Spec rated tires. SeeTire Pressure Monitor Operation onpage 10‑75.


Vehicle Care 10-83

Your vehicle's original equipmenttires are listed on the Tire andLoading Information label. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 9‑11,for more information about the Tireand Loading Information label andits location on your vehicle.

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf you add wheels or tires that area different size than your originalequipment wheels and tires, thiscould affect the way your vehicleperforms, including its braking,ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollover.Additionally, if your vehicle haselectronic systems such as anti‐lockbrakes, traction control, andelectronic stability control, theperformance of these systems canbe affected.

See Buying New Tires onpage 10‑81 and Accessories andModifications on page 10‑3 foradditional information.

Uniform Tire QualityGradingQuality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tiresidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width.For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

The following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA), which grades tiresby treadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. Thisapplies only to vehicles sold inthe United States. The gradesare molded on the sidewallsof most passenger car tires. TheUniform Tire Quality Grading

(UTQG) system does not applyto deep tread, winter-type snowtires, space-saver, or temporaryuse spare tires, tires withnominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),or to some limited-productiontires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passenger carsand light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, theymust also conform to federalsafety requirements andadditional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC)standards.

All Passenger Car Tires MustConform to Federal SafetyRequirements In Addition ToThese Grades.


10-84 Vehicle Care

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions ona specified government testcourse. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one anda half (1½) times as well on thegovernment course as a tiregraded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and maydepart significantly from thenorm due to variations indriving habits, service practicesand differences in roadcharacteristics and climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, fromhighest to lowest, are AA, A, B,and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wetpavement as measured undercontrolled conditions onspecified government testsurfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C mayhave poor traction performance.Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not includeacceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature – A, B, C

The temperature gradesare A (the highest), B, and C,representing the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat andits ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can causethe material of the tire todegenerate and reduce tire life,and excessive temperature canlead to sudden tire failure.


Vehicle Care 10-85

The grade C corresponds to alevel of performance which allpassenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimumrequired by law. Warning: Thetemperature grade for this tireis established for a tire thatis properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and TireBalanceThe tires and wheels on yourvehicle were aligned and balancedcarefully at the factory to give youthe longest tire life and best overallperformance. Adjustments to wheelalignment and tire balancing will notbe necessary on a regular basis.However, if you notice unusualtire wear or your vehicle pulling toone side or the other, the alignmentmight need to be checked. If younotice your vehicle vibrating whendriving on a smooth road, the tiresand wheels might need to berebalanced. See your dealer forproper diagnosis.

CTS-V models should only useadhesive wheel weights to balancethe tires and wheels.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted orcorroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, andwheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replace it,except some aluminum wheels,which can sometimes be repaired.See your dealer if any of theseconditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind ofwheel you need.

Each new wheel should have thesame load-carrying capacity,diameter, width, offset, and bemounted the same way as the one itreplaces.


10-86 Vehicle Care

If you need to replace any of thewheels, wheel bolts, wheel nuts,or Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) sensors, replace them onlywith new GM original equipmentparts. This way, you will be sure tohave the right wheel, wheel bolts,wheel nuts, and TPMS sensors forthe vehicle.

{ WARNING

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheelnuts on the vehicle can bedangerous. It could affect thebraking and handling of thevehicle, make the tires lose airand make you lose control. Youcould have a collision in whichyou or others could be injured.Always use the correct wheel,wheel bolts, and wheel nuts forreplacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel canalso cause problems withbearing life, brake cooling,speedometer or odometercalibration, headlamp aim,bumper height, vehicle groundclearance, and tire or tire chainclearance to the body andchassis.

See If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 10‑87 for more information.

Used Replacement Wheels

{ WARNING

Replacing a wheel with a usedone is dangerous. How it hasbeen used or how far it has beendriven may be unknown. It couldfail suddenly and cause a crash.When replacing wheels, use anew GM original equipmentwheel.

Tire Chains

{ WARNING

Do not use tire chains. There isnot enough clearance. Tire chainsused on a vehicle without theproper amount of clearance cancause damage to the brakes,suspension, or other vehicleparts. The area damaged by thetire chains could cause you tolose control of the vehicle andyou or others may be injuredin a crash. Use another typeof traction device only if itsmanufacturer recommends it foruse on the vehicle and tire sizecombination and road conditions.

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 10-87

WARNING (Continued)

Follow that manufacturer'sinstructions. To help avoiddamage to the vehicle, driveslowly, re‐adjust or remove thedevice if it is contacting thevehicle, and do not spin thewheels. If you do find tractiondevices that will fit, install them onthe rear tires.

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowoutwhile you are driving, especially ifyou maintain your vehicle's tiresproperly. If air goes out of a tire,it is much more likely to leak outslowly. But if you should ever have ablowout, here are a few tips aboutwhat to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tirecreates a drag that pulls the vehicletoward that side. Take your footoff the accelerator pedal and gripthe steering wheel firmly. Steer tomaintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop, well off theroad, if possible.

A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid andmay require the same correctionyou would use in a skid. In any rearblowout remove your foot from the

accelerator pedal. Get the vehicleunder control by steering the wayyou want the vehicle to go. It maybe very bumpy and noisy, but youcan still steer. Gently brake to astop, well off the road, if possible.

{ WARNING

Driving on a flat tire will causepermanent damage to the tire.Re-inflating a tire after it hasbeen driven on while severelyunderinflated or flat may causea blowout and a serious crash.Never attempt to re-inflate a tirethat has been driven on whileseverely underinflated or flat.Have your dealer or an authorizedtire service center repair orreplace the flat tire as soon aspossible.


10-88 Vehicle Care

{ WARNING

Lifting a vehicle and gettingunder it to do maintenance orrepairs is dangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place, well off the road,if possible. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6‑4.

{ WARNING

Changing a tire can bedangerous. The vehicle canslip off the jack and roll overor fall on you or other people.You and they could be badlyinjured or even killed. Find alevel place to change the tire.To help prevent the vehicle frommoving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put an automatictransmission shift lever inP (Park), or shift a manualtransmission to 1 (First) orR (Reverse).

3. Turn off the engine and donot restart while the vehicleis raised.

4. Do not allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

To be certain the vehicle will notmove, put blocks at the front andrear of the tire farthest away fromthe one being changed. Thatwould be the tire on the otherside, at the opposite end of thevehicle.

This vehicle may come with a jackand spare tire or a tire sealant andcompressor kit. To use the jackingequipment to change a sparetire safely, follow the instructionsbelow. Then see Tire Changing onpage 10‑98. To use the tire sealantand compressor kit, see TireSealant and Compressor Kit onpage 10‑89.


Vehicle Care 10-89

When the vehicle has a flat tire (B),use the following example as aguide to assist you in the placementof wheel blocks (A).

A. Wheel Block

B. Flat Tire

The following information explainshow to repair or change a tire.

Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit

{ WARNING

Idling a vehicle in an enclosedarea with poor ventilation isdangerous. Engine exhaust mayenter the vehicle. Engine exhaustcontains Carbon Monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death. Never run theengine in an enclosed area thathas no fresh air ventilation. Formore information, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑25.

{ WARNING

Overinflating a tire could causethe tire to rupture and you orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the tire sealant

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

and compressor kit instructionsand inflate the tire to itsrecommended pressure. Do notexceed the recommendedpressure.

{ WARNING

Storing the tire sealant andcompressor kit or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store the tiresealant and compressor kit in itsoriginal location.

If this vehicle has a tire sealant andcompressor kit, there may not be aspare tire, tire changing equipment,and on some vehicles there may notbe a place to store a tire.


10-90 Vehicle Care

The tire sealant and compressorcan be used to temporarily sealpunctures up to 6 mm (¼ in) in thetread area of the tire. It can also beused to inflate an under inflated tire.

If the tire has been separated fromthe wheel, has damaged sidewalls,or has a large puncture, the tire istoo severely damaged for the tiresealant and compressor kit to beeffective. See Roadside Service(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑7 orRoadside Service (Mexico) onpage 13‑9.

Read and follow all of the tiresealant and compressor kitinstructions.

The kit includes: A. Selector Switch (Sealant/Airor Air Only)

B. On/Off Button

C. Pressure Gauge

D. Pressure Deflation Button

E. Tire Sealant Canister

F. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear)

G. Air Only Hose (Black)

H. Power Plug

Tire Sealant

Read and follow the safe handlinginstructions on the label adhered tothe sealant canister.

Check the tire sealant expirationdate on the sealant canister.The sealant canister should bereplaced before its expiration date.Replacement sealant canisters areavailable at your local dealer. See“Removal and Installation of theSealant Canister” following.


Vehicle Care 10-91

There is only enough sealant to sealone tire. After usage, the sealantcanister and sealant/air hoseassembly must be replaced. See“Removal and Installation of theSealant Canister” following.

Using the Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit toTemporarily Seal andInflate a Punctured Tire

Follow the directions closely forcorrect sealant usage.

When using the tire sealantand compressor kit during coldtemperatures, warm the kit in a

heated environment for five minutes.This will help to inflate the tirefaster.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6‑4.

See If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 10‑87 for other importantsafety warnings.

Do not remove any objects thathave penetrated the tire.

1. Remove the tire sealant andcompressor kit from its storagelocation. See Storing the TireSealant and Compressor Kit(Wagon) on page 10‑96 orStoring the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit (Coupe) onpage 10‑97 or Storing the TireSealant and Compressor Kit(Sedan) on page 10‑97.

2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (F)and the power plug (H).


10-92 Vehicle Care

3. Place the kit on the ground.

Make sure the tire valve stem ispositioned close to the groundso the hose will reach it.

4. Remove the valve stem capfrom the flat tire by turning itcounterclockwise.

5. Attach the sealant/air hose (F)onto the tire valve stem. Turn itclockwise until it is tight.

6. Plug the power plug (H) into theaccessory power outlet in thevehicle. Unplug all items fromother accessory power outlets.See Power Outlets on page 5‑9.

If the vehicle has an accessorypower outlet, do not use thecigarette lighter.

If the vehicle only has a cigarettelighter, use the cigarette lighter.

Do not pinch the power plugcord in the door or window.

7. Start the vehicle. The vehiclemust be running while using theair compressor.

8. Turn the selector switch (A)counterclockwise to theSealant + Air position.

9. Press the on/off (B) buttonto turn the tire sealant andcompressor kit on.

The compressor will injectsealant and air into the tire.

The pressure gauge (C) willinitially show a high pressurewhile the compressor pushes thesealant into the tire. Once thesealant is completely dispersedinto the tire, the pressure willquickly drop and start to riseagain as the tire inflates withair only.

10. Inflate the tire to therecommended inflationpressure using the pressuregauge (C). The recommendedinflation pressure can befound on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See TirePressure on page 10‑72.

The pressure gauge (C) mayread higher than the actual tirepressure while the compressoris on. Turn the compressor offto get an accurate pressurereading. The compressormay be turned on/off until thecorrect pressure is reached.

Notice: If the recommendedpressure cannot be reached afterapproximately 25 minutes, thevehicle should not be drivenfarther. The tire is too severelydamaged and the tire sealant andcompressor kit cannot inflate thetire. Remove the power plug fromthe accessory power outlet andunscrew the inflating hose fromthe tire valve. See RoadsideService (U.S. and Canada) onpage 13‑7 or Roadside Service(Mexico) on page 13‑9.

11. Press the on/off button (B) toturn the tire sealant andcompressor kit off.


Vehicle Care 10-93

The tire is not sealed andwill continue to leak air untilthe vehicle is driven andthe sealant is distributed inthe tire, therefore, Steps 12through 18 must be doneimmediately after Step 11.

Be careful while handling thetire sealant and compressor kitas it could be warm afterusage.

12. Unplug the power plug (H) fromthe accessory power outlet inthe vehicle.

13. Turn the sealant/air hose (F)counterclockwise to remove itfrom the tire valve stem.

14. Replace the tire valvestem cap.

15. Replace the sealant/airhose (F), and the powerplug (H) back in their originallocation.

16. If the flat tire was able toinflate to the recommendedinflation pressure, remove themaximum speed label from thesealant canister (E) and placeit in a highly visible location. Donot exceed the speed on thislabel until the damaged tire isrepaired or replaced.

17. Return the equipment to itsoriginal storage location in thevehicle.

18. Immediately drive the vehicle8 km (5 miles) to distribute thesealant in the tire.

19. Stop at a safe location andcheck the tire pressure. Referto Steps 1 through 11 under“Using the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit withoutSealant to Inflate a Tire (NotPunctured).”

If the tire pressure has fallenmore than 68 kPa (10 psi)below the recommendedinflation pressure, stop drivingthe vehicle. The tire is tooseverely damaged and the tiresealant cannot seal the tire.See Roadside Service (U.S.and Canada) on page 13‑7 orRoadside Service (Mexico) onpage 13‑9.

If the tire pressure has notdropped more than 68 kPa(10 psi) from the recommendedinflation pressure, inflate thetire to the recommendedinflation pressure.

20. Wipe off any sealant from thewheel, tire, and vehicle.


10-94 Vehicle Care

21. Dispose of the used sealantcanister (E) and sealant/airhose (F) assembly at a localdealer or in accordance withlocal state codes and practices.

22. Replace it with a new canisteravailable from your dealer.

23. After temporarily sealing thetire using the tire sealant andcompressor kit, take thevehicle to an authorized dealerwithin 161 km (100 miles) ofdriving to have the tire repairedor replaced.

Using the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit withoutSealant to Inflate a Tire(Not Punctured)

To use the air compressor to inflatea tire with air only and not sealant:

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6‑4.

See If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 10‑87 for other importantsafety warnings.

1. Remove the tire sealant andcompressor kit from its storagelocation. See Storing the TireSealant and Compressor Kit(Wagon) on page 10‑96 orStoring the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit (Coupe) onpage 10‑97 or Storing the TireSealant and Compressor Kit(Sedan) on page 10‑97.

2. Unwrap the air only hose (G)and the power plug (H).

3. Place the kit on the ground.

Make sure the tire valve stem ispositioned close to the groundso the hose will reach it.


Vehicle Care 10-95

4. Remove the tire valve stem capfrom the flat tire by turning itcounterclockwise.

5. Attach the air only hose (G) ontothe tire valve stem by turning itclockwise until it is tight.

6. Plug the power plug (H) into theaccessory power outlet in thevehicle. Unplug all items fromother accessory power outlets.See Power Outlets on page 5‑9.

If the vehicle has an accessorypower outlet, do not use thecigarette lighter.

If the vehicle only has a cigarettelighter, use the cigarette lighter.

Do not pinch the power plugcord in the door or window.

7. Start the vehicle. The vehiclemust be running while using theair compressor.

8. Turn the selector switch (A)clockwise to the Air Onlyposition.

9. Press the on/off (B) button toturn the compressor on.

The compressor will inflate thetire with air only.

10. Inflate the tire to therecommended inflationpressure using the pressuregauge (C). The recommendedinflation pressure can befound on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See TirePressure on page 10‑72.

The pressure gauge (C) mayread higher than the actual tirepressure while the compressoris on. Turn the compressor offto get an accurate reading.The compressor may be turnedon/off until the correct pressureis reached.

If you inflate the tire higherthan the recommendedpressure you can adjust theexcess pressure by pressingthe pressure deflationbutton (D) until the properpressure reading is reached.This option is only functionalwhen using the air onlyhose (G).

11. Press the on/off button (B) toturn the tire sealant andcompressor kit off.

Be careful while handling thetire sealant and compressorkit as it could be warm afterusage.

12. Unplug the power plug (H) fromthe accessory power outlet inthe vehicle.

13. Disconnect the air onlyhose (G) from the tirevalve stem, by turning itcounterclockwise, and replacethe tire valve stem cap.


10-96 Vehicle Care

14. Replace the air only hose (G)and the power plug (H) andcord back in its originallocation.

15. Place the equipment in theoriginal storage location in thevehicle.

The tire sealant and compressor kithas an accessory adapter located ina compartment on the bottom of itshousing that may be used to inflateair mattresses, balls, etc.

Removal and Installation of theSealant Canister

To remove the sealant canister:

1. Unwrap the sealant hose.

2. Press the canister releasebutton.

3. Pull up and remove the canister.

4. Replace with a new canisterwhich is available from yourdealer.

5. Push the new canister intoplace.

Storing the Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit(Wagon)The tire sealant and compressorkit is located in the rear of thevehicle.

A. Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit

B. Foam Container

C. Subwoofer (Optional)

1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate(Wagon) on page 2‑21.

2. Pull up on the tire sealant andcompressor kit (A) to remove itfrom the foam container (B).


Vehicle Care 10-97

It is not necessary to removethe subwoofer (C) to accessthe tire sealant and compressorkit, however, if you want toremove it see Tire Changing onpage 10‑98 for instructions.

To store the tire sealant andcompressor kit, reverse the steps.

Storing the Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit(Coupe)The tire sealant and compressor kitis located in the trunk.

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk(Sedan, Coupe) on page 2‑19.

2. Remove the retainer that holdsthe tire sealant and compressorkit in place.

3. Remove the tire sealant andcompressor kit from the foamcontainer.


Storing the Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit(Sedan)The tire sealant and compressor kitis located in the trunk.

A. Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit

B. Foam Container

C. Wing Nut

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk(Sedan, Coupe) on page 2‑19.

2. Locate the tire sealant andcompressor kit (A) in the centerof the cargo area.

3. Remove the wing nut (C) thatholds the tire sealant andcompressor kit (A) in place.


10-98 Vehicle Care

4. Remove the tire sealant andcompressor kit (A) from the foamcontainer (B).


Tire Changing

Removing the Spare Tire andTools (Sedan)

Sedan

A. Wing Nut

B. Spare Tire

C. Jack

D. Wheel Wrench

E. Extension

F. Strap

To access the spare tire and jackingequipment:

1. Remove the spare tire cover.

2. Remove the stow rod cap bypulling it straight up off ofthe rod.

3. Turn the wing nut (A) on thecompact spare tire (B)counterclockwise to remove.

4. Remove the spare tire and placeit next to the flat tire.

5. The tools you will be using nextinclude the jack (C), wheelwrench (D), and extension (E).

Removing the Spare Tire andTools (Wagon)


Vehicle Care 10-99

A. Wing Nut

B. Spare Tire

C. Jack

D. Subwoofer

E. Wheel Wrench

F. Extension

G. Cable

To access the spare tire and jackingequipment:

1. Remove the spare tire cover.

2. Remove the subwoofer (D),if the vehicle has one.

To remove the subwoofer:

2.1. Turn the nut (A)counterclockwise toremove.

2.2. Disconnect theconnector wire.

2.3. Pull the subwoofer (D) up toremove it from the stow rod.

3. Remove the spare tire (B) andplace it next to the flat tire.

4. Remove the jack (C), wheelwrench (E), and extension (F).

To remove the jack:

1. Remove the retainer nut (A).

2. Remove the jack stowagebracket (B).

3. Slide the jack (C) forward toremove it from the floor storagebracket.

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

1. Do a safety check beforeproceeding. See If a Tire GoesFlat on page 10‑87

2. Use the wrench to loosen allthe wheel nuts. Do not removethem yet.


10-100 Vehicle Care

3. Find the jacking locationusing the diagram above andcorresponding V-shaped locatingnotches located in the plasticmolding.

4. Insert the hooked end of theextension handle through thejack and the flat end through thewheel wrench.

{ WARNING

Getting under a vehicle when itis jacked up is dangerous. If thevehicle slips off the jack, youcould be badly injured or killed.Never get under a vehicle when itis supported only by a jack.

{ WARNING

Lifting a vehicle and gettingunder it to do maintenance orrepairs is dangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

{ WARNING

Raising the vehicle with thejack improperly positioned candamage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To helpavoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jacklift head into the proper locationbefore raising the vehicle.


Vehicle Care 10-101

Notice: If you position the jackunder the rocker molding andattempt to raise the vehicle, youcould break the molding and/orcause other damage to yourvehicle. Always position the jackso that when the jack head israised, it will fit firmly in the notchlocated inboard from the rockermolding.

5. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to lower thejack lift head until the jack fitsunder the vehicle.

6. Raise the jack by turning thewheel wrench clockwise until theslots in the jack head fit into themetal flange located behind theV‐shaped locating notches onthe plastic molding as shown.

7. Put the compact spare tirenear you.

8. Raise the vehicle by turning thewheel wrench clockwise. Raisethe vehicle far enough off theground for the compact sparetire to fit under the vehicle.

9. Remove all the wheel nuts andthe flat tire.


10-102 Vehicle Care

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, use a cloth or apaper towel to do this; but be sureto use a scraper or wire brushlater, if needed, to get all the rustor dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flaton page 10‑87.

{ WARNING

Never use oil or grease on boltsor nuts because the nuts mightcome loose. The vehicle's wheelcould fall off, causing a crash.

10. Remove any rust or dirt fromthe wheel bolts, mountingsurfaces, and spare wheel.

11. Install the spare tire.

12. Put the wheel nuts back onwith the rounded end of thenuts toward the wheel.

13. Tighten each wheel nut byturning it clockwise with yourhand until the wheel is heldagainst the hub.

14. Lower the vehicle byturning the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise. Lower thejack completely.

{ WARNING

Wheel nuts that are improperly orincorrectly tightened can causethe wheels to become loose orcome off. The wheel nuts shouldbe tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specificationafter replacing. Follow the torquespecification supplied by theaftermarket manufacturer whenusing accessory locking wheelnuts. See Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2 fororiginal equipment wheel nuttorque specifications.


Vehicle Care 10-103

Notice: Improperly tightenedwheel nuts can lead to brakepulsation and rotor damage. Toavoid expensive brake repairs,evenly tighten the wheel nuts inthe proper sequence and to theproper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12‑2 for the wheel nuttorque specification.

15. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly ina crisscross sequence asshown.

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{ WARNING

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.

Storing the Flat Tire with a FlatLoad Floor (Sedan)

1. Put back all tools as they werestored in the rear storagecompartment and put thecompartment cover back on.

2. Put the flat tire in the tire storagebag, if there is one.

3. Place the tire, lying flat, in therear storage compartment.

4. Route the loop end of thestrap (C) through one of thecargo tie-downs (A) located inthe rear of the vehicle.

5. Route the hook (B) through theloop (C).

6. Pull the strap to tighten it aroundthe cargo tie-down (A).


10-104 Vehicle Care

7. Route the hook end of the strapthrough the wheel.

8. Attach the hook to the cargotie-down in the rear of thevehicle.

9. Slide the buckle to tighten thecargo tie-down strap.

Use the following diagram as aguide for storing the compact sparetire in the trunk.

Storing the Flat Tire with a FlatLoad Floor (Wagon)

1. Return all tools as they werestored in the rear storagecompartment and put thecompartment cover on.

2. Put the flat tire in the tire storagebag, if there is one.

3. Place the tire, lying flat, in therear storage compartment.

4. Route one of the hooks (A), atthe end of the cable provided,through the liftgate striker (B).

5. Slide both D-rings (E) on eachside of the vehicle as farrearward as they will go.

6. Route one hook (A) under thewheel spoke (C) and place thehook into the slot in the cargorail on the driver side of thevehicle.

7. Slide the D-ring (E) on that sideforward to engage the hook.

8. Route the other hook under thewheel spoke (D) and place thehook into the slot in the cargorail on the passenger side of thevehicle.

9. Slide the D-ring (E) on that sideforward to engage the hook.


Vehicle Care 10-105

Compact Spare Tire and Tools(Sedan)

Use the following diagram as aguide for storing the compact sparetire and tools in the trunk:

A. Wing Nut

B. Compact Spare Tire or Flat Tire

C. Jack

D. Wheel Wrench

E. Extension

F. Strap

Reverse the instructions forremoving the spare tire and tools tostore the compact spare tire.

Compact Spare Tire and Tools(Wagon)

Use the following diagram as aguide for storing the compact sparetire and tools in the rearcompartment area:

A. Wing Nut

B. Spare Tire

C. Jack

D. Subwoofer

E. Wheel Wrench

F. Extension

G. Strap

Reverse the instructions forremoving the spare tire and tools tostore the compact spare tire.


10-106 Vehicle Care

Compact Spare Tire

{ WARNING

Driving with more than onecompact spare tire at a time couldresult in loss of braking andhandling. This could lead to acrash and you or others could beinjured. Use only one compactspare tire at a time.

If your vehicle is equipped with acompact spare tire it was fullyinflated when the vehicle was new, itcan lose air after a time. Check theinflation pressure regularly. It shouldbe 420 kPa (60 psi).

After installing the compact spareon the vehicle, stop as soon aspossible and make sure the sparetire is correctly inflated. Thecompact spare is made to performwell at speeds up to 105 km/h(65 mph) for distances up to5 000 km (3,000 miles), so you canfinish your trip and have the full-size

tire repaired or replaced at yourconvenience. Of course, it is bestto replace the spare with a full-sizetire as soon as possible. The sparetire will last longer and be in goodshape in case it is needed again.

Notice: When the compact spareis installed, do not take thevehicle through an automaticcar wash with guide rails. Thecompact spare can get caught onthe rails which can damage thetire, wheel and other parts of thevehicle.

Do not use the compact spare onother vehicles.

And do not mix the compact sparetire or wheel with other wheels ortires. They will not fit. Keep thespare tire and its wheel together.

Notice: Tire chains will not fit thecompact spare. Using them candamage the vehicle and candamage the chains too. Do notuse tire chains on the compactspare.

Jump StartingFor more information about thevehicle battery, see Battery onpage 10‑30.

If the vehicle battery has run down,you may want to use anothervehicle and some jumper cables tostart your vehicle. Be sure to usethe following steps to do it safely.

{ WARNING

Batteries can hurt you. They canbe dangerous because:

. They contain acid that canburn you.

. They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

. They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of thesethings can hurt you.


Vehicle Care 10-107

Notice: Ignoring these stepscould result in costly damage tothe vehicle that would not becovered by the warranty.

Trying to start the vehicle bypushing or pulling it will notwork, and it could damage thevehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It musthave a 12-volt battery with anegative ground system.

Notice: Only use a vehiclethat has a 12-volt system witha negative ground for jumpstarting. If the other vehicle doesnot have a 12-volt system with anegative ground, both vehiclescan be damaged.

2. Get the vehicles close enoughso the jumper cables can reach,but be sure the vehicles arenot touching each other. If theyare, it could cause a groundconnection you do not want.

You would not be able to startyour vehicle and the badgrounding could damage theelectrical systems.

To avoid the possibility of thevehicles rolling, set the parkingbrake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump startprocedure. Put an automatictransmission in P (Park) or amanual transmission in Neutralbefore setting the parking brake.

Notice: If the radio or otheraccessories are left on during thejump starting procedure, theycould be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by thewarranty. Always turn off theradio and other accessories whenjump starting the vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on bothvehicles. Unplug unnecessaryaccessories plugged into thecigarette lighter or the accessorypower outlets. Turn off theradio and all lamps that are notneeded. This will avoid sparksand help save both batteries.And it could save the radio!

4. Open the hoods and locate thepositive (+) and negative (−)terminal locations or theremote positive (+) and remotenegative (−) terminals of theother vehicle. Then locate theremote positive (+) location onyour vehicle. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for more informationon locations of the terminals.


10-108 Vehicle Care

Your vehicle has a remotenegative (−) ground location, asshown in the illustration. It islocated on the left side of theengine compartment. SeeEngine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6. You shouldalways use this remote groundlocation, instead of the terminalon the battery.

Notice: If you connect a negativecable to the Engine ControlModule (ECM), ECM mountingbracket, or any cables thatattach to the ECM bracket, youmay damage the ECM. Alwaysattach the negative cable to yourvehicle's remote negative groundlocation, instead of the ECM, ECMbracket, or any cables attached tothe ECM bracket.

{ WARNING

An electric fan can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can injure you. Keep hands,clothing and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

{ WARNING

Using an open flame near abattery can cause battery gas toexplode. People have been hurtdoing this, and some have beenblinded. Use a flashlight if youneed more light.

Be sure the battery has enoughwater. You do not need to addwater to the battery installed inyour new vehicle. But if a batteryhas filler caps, be sure the rightamount of fluid is there. If it is low,add water to take care of thatfirst. If you do not, explosive gascould be present.

Battery fluid contains acid thatcan burn you. Do not get it onyou. If you accidentally get it inyour eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with water and getmedical help immediately.


Vehicle Care 10-109

{ WARNING

Fans or other moving engineparts can injure you badly. Keepyour hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.

5. Check that the jumper cablesdo not have loose or missinginsulation. If they do, you couldget a shock. The vehicles couldbe damaged too.

Before you connect the cables,here are some basic things youshould know. Positive (+) will goto positive (+) or to a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehiclehas one. Negative (−) will go to aheavy, unpainted metal enginepart or to a remote negative (−)terminal if the vehicle has one.

Do not connect positive (+) tonegative (−) or you will get ashort that would damage thebattery and maybe other partstoo. And do not connect thenegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal on the deadbattery because this can causesparks.

6. Connect the red positive (+)cable to the positive (+) terminalof the dead battery. Use aremote positive (+) terminal ifthe vehicle has one.

7. Do not let the other endtouch metal. Connect it to thepositive (+) terminal of thegood battery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehiclehas one.

8. Now connect the blacknegative (−) cable to thenegative terminal of thegood battery. Use a remotenegative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.

Do not let the other end touchanything until the next step. Theother end of the negative (−)cable does not go to the deadbattery. It goes to a heavy,unpainted metal engine part orto a remote negative (−) terminalon the vehicle with the deadbattery.


10-110 Vehicle Care

9. Connect the other end of thenegative (−) cable at least 45 cm(18 in) away from the deadbattery, but not near engineparts that move. The electricalconnection is just as good there,and the chance of sparks gettingback to the battery is much less.

Use a remote negative (−)terminal if the vehicle has one.Your vehicle's remotenegative (−) ground locationis for this purpose.

10. Now start the vehicle with thegood battery and run theengine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle thathad the dead battery. If it willnot start after a few tries, itprobably needs service.

Notice: If the jumper cables areconnected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage thevehicle. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Always connect and remove thejumper cables in the correctorder, making sure that thecables do not touch each otheror other metal.

Jumper Cable Removal

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal EnginePart or Remote Negative (−)Terminal

B. Good Battery or RemotePositive (+) and RemoteNegative (−) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or RemotePositive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cablesfrom both vehicles, do the following:

1. Disconnect the blacknegative (−) cable from thevehicle that had the deadbattery.

2. Disconnect the blacknegative (−) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the vehicle with thegood battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the other vehicle.


Vehicle Care 10-111

Towing

Towing the VehicleNotice: To avoid damage, thedisabled vehicle should betowed with all four wheels offthe ground. Care must be takenwith vehicles that have lowground clearance and/or specialequipment. Always flatbed on acar carrier.

Consult your dealer or aprofessional towing service if thedisabled vehicle must be towed.See Roadside Service (U.S. andCanada) on page 13‑7 or RoadsideService (Mexico) on page 13‑9.

To tow the vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes,such as behind a motor home, see“Recreational Vehicle Towing” in thissection.

Recreational VehicleTowingRecreational vehicle towingmeans towing the vehicle behindanother vehicle – such as behind amotorhome. The two most commontypes of recreational vehicle towingare known as dinghy towing anddolly towing. Dingy towing is towingthe vehicle with all four wheels onthe ground. Dolly towing is towingthe vehicle with two wheels on theground and two wheels up on adevice known as a dolly.

Here are some important things toconsider before recreational vehicletowing:. What is the towing capacity

of the towing vehicle? Besure to read the towvehicle manufacturer'srecommendations.

. What is the distance that will betravelled? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and howlong they can tow.

. Is the proper towing equipmentgoing to be used? See yourdealer or trailering professionalfor additional advice andequipment recommendations.

. Is the vehicle ready to betowed? Just as preparing thevehicle for a long trip, make surethe vehicle is prepared to betowed.


10-112 Vehicle Care

Dinghy Towing Notice: If the vehicle istowed with all four wheelson the ground, the drivetraincomponents could be damaged.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Do nottow the vehicle with all fourwheels on the ground.

The vehicle was not designed to betowed with all four wheels on theground. If a rear-wheel-drive vehiclemust be towed, a dolly or a trailershould be used. If an all-wheel-drivevehicle must be towed, a trailershould be used. See “Dolly Towing”following for more information.

Dolly Towing(Rear-Wheel-Drive Vehicles)

Use the following procedure to dollytow a rear-wheel-drive vehicle fromthe rear:

1. Attach the dolly to the towvehicle following the dollymanufacturer's instructions.

2. Put the rear wheels on the dolly.

3. Firmly set the parking brake.See Parking Brake (Manual) onpage 9‑34 or Parking Brake(Electric) on page 9‑35.


Vehicle Care 10-113

4. Put the vehicle in P (Park) foran automatic transmissionor in 1 (First) for a manualtransmission.

5. Securely attach the vehiclebeing towed to the dolly.

6. Clamp the steering wheel in astraight-ahead position with aclamping device designed fortowing.


Dolly Towing (All-Wheel-DriveVehicles)

Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drivevehicle with all four wheels on theground, or even with only two ofits wheels on the ground, willdamage drivetrain components.Do not tow an all-wheel-drivevehicle with any of its wheels onthe ground.

All-wheel-drive vehicles can onlybe towed with all four wheels on atrailer.

Appearance Care

Exterior Care

Cleaning ExteriorLamps/Lenses

Use only lukewarm or cold water, asoft cloth, and a car washing soapto clean exterior lamps and lenses.Follow instructions under “Washingthe Vehicle” later in this section.

Finish Care

Occasional waxing or mild polishingof the vehicle by hand may benecessary to remove residue fromthe paint finish. Approved cleaningproducts can be obtained from yourdealer.


10-114 Vehicle Care

If the vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoatgives more depth and gloss to thecolored basecoat. Always usewaxes and polishes that arenon-abrasive and made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish.

Notice: Machine compoundingor aggressive polishing ona basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish may damage it. Use onlynon-abrasive waxes and polishesthat are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on thevehicle.

Foreign materials such as calciumchloride and other salts, ice meltingagents, road oil and tar, tree sap,bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., candamage the vehicle's finish if theyremain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible.If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreignmatter.

Exterior painted surfaces aresubject to aging, weather, andchemical fallout that can take theirtoll over a period of years. To keepthe paint finish looking new, keepthe vehicle garaged or coveredwhenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright MetalParts

Bright metal parts should becleaned regularly to keep theirluster. Wash with water or usechrome polish on chrome orstainless steel trim, if necessary.

Use special care with aluminumtrim. To avoid damaging protectivetrim, never use auto or chromepolish, steam, or caustic soap toclean aluminum. A coating ofwax, rubbed to high polish, isrecommended for all bright metalparts.

Washing the Vehicle

To preserve the vehicle's finish,keep it clean by washing it often.

Do not wash the vehicle indirect sunlight and use a carwashing soap.

Notice: Do not use cleaningagents that are petroleum basedor that contain acid or abrasives,as they can damage the paint,metal, or plastic on the vehicle.Approved cleaning productscan be obtained from yourdealer. Follow all manufacturerdirections regarding correctproduct usage, necessary safetyprecautions, and appropriatedisposal of any vehicle careproduct. Certain cleaners containchemicals that can damage theemblems or nameplates on thevehicle. Check the cleaningproduct label. If it states that it


Vehicle Care 10-115

should not be used on plasticparts, do not use it on the vehicleor damage may occur and itwould not be covered by thewarranty.

Rinse the vehicle well, beforewashing and after, to remove allcleaning agents completely. If theyare allowed to dry on the surface,they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches and waterspotting.

High pressure car washes couldcause water to enter the vehicle.Avoid using high pressure washescloser than 30 cm (12 in) to thesurface of the vehicle. Use of powerwashers exceeding 8,274 kPa(1,200 psi) can result in damage orremoval of paint and decals.

Notice: Conveyor systems onsome automatic car washes coulddamage the vehicle. There maynot be enough clearance for theundercarriage. Check with the carwash manager before using theautomatic car wash.

Weatherstrips

Silicone grease on weatherstrips willmake them last longer, seal better,and not stick or squeak. Applysilicone grease with a clean cloth.During very cold, damp weatherfrequent application may berequired. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 11‑7.

Wheels and Trim—Aluminumor Chrome

The vehicle may have eitheraluminum or chrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using asoft, clean cloth with mild soap andwater. Rinse with clean water. Afterrinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft,clean towel. A wax may then beapplied.

Notice: Chrome wheels and otherchrome trim may be damaged ifthe vehicle is not washed afterdriving on roads that have beensprayed with magnesium, calciumor sodium chloride. Thesechlorides are used on roads forconditions such as ice and dust.Always wash the chrome withsoap and water after exposure.

Notice: Do not use strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes,cleaners, brushes, or cleanersthat contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels, becausethe surface could be damaged.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Use onlyapproved cleaners on aluminumor chrome-plated wheels.

Notice: Never drive a vehicle thathas aluminum or chrome-platedwheels through an automatic carwash that uses silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes, as thiscould cause damage. The repairswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.


10-116 Vehicle Care

Notice: Driving the vehiclethrough an automatic car washthat has silicone carbide tirecleaning brushes, could damagethe aluminum or chrome-platedwheels. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Never drive a vehicle that hasaluminum or chrome-platedwheels through an automatic carwash that uses silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes.

Windshield and Wiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windshieldwith glass cleaner.

Clean the rubber blades using alint‐free cloth or paper towel soakedwith windshield washer fluid or amild detergent. Wash the windshieldthoroughly when cleaning theblades. Bugs, road grime, sap,and a buildup of vehicle wash/waxtreatments may cause wiperstreaking. Replace the wiper bladesif they are worn or damaged.

Wipers can be damaged by:. Extreme dusty conditions. Sand and salt. Heat and sun. Snow and ice, without proper

removal

Tires

Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner toclean the tires.

Notice: Using petroleum-basedtire dressing products on thevehicle may damage the paintfinish and/or tires. When applyinga tire dressing, always wipe offany overspray from all paintedsurfaces on the vehicle.

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged andrequires sheet metal repair orreplacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosionmaterial to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintaining thevehicle warranty.

Finish Damage

Any stone chips, fractures, or deepscratches in the finish should berepaired right away. Bare metal willcorrode quickly and may developinto major repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can berepaired with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer. Largerareas of finish damage can becorrected in your dealer's body andpaint shop.

Underbody Maintenance

Chemicals used for ice and snowremoval and dust control can collecton the underbody. If these are notremoved, corrosion and rust candevelop on the underbody partssuch as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,and exhaust system even thoughthey have corrosion protection.


Vehicle Care 10-117

At least every spring, flush thesematerials from the underbody withplain water. Clean any areas wheremud and debris can collect. Dirtpacked in close areas of theframe should be loosened beforebeing flushed. Your dealer or anunderbody car washing system cando this.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Some weather and atmosphericconditions can create a chemicalfallout. Airborne pollutants can fallupon and attack painted surfaces onthe vehicle. This damage can taketwo forms: blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paintsurface.

Interior CareThe interior will continue to lookits best if it is cleaned often. Dustand dirt can accumulate on theupholstery and cause damage tothe carpet, fabric, leather, andplastic surfaces. Stains should beremoved quickly as extreme heatcould cause them to set rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors mayrequire more frequent cleaning.Newspapers and garments that cantransfer color to home furnishingscan also transfer color to theinterior.

Remove dust from small buttonsand knobs with a small brush withsoft bristles.

Your dealer has products forcleaning the interior. Whencleaning the interior, only usecleaners specifically designed forthe surfaces that are being cleaned.

Permanent damage can resultfrom using cleaners on surfaces forwhich they were not intended. Applythe cleaner directly to the cleaningcloth to prevent over-spray. Removeany accidental over-spray fromother surfaces immediately.

Notice: Using abrasive cleanerswhen cleaning glass surfaces onthe vehicle, could scratch theglass and/or cause damage tothe rear window defogger. Whencleaning the glass on the vehicle,use only a soft cloth and glasscleaner.

Cleaners can contain solvents thatcan become concentrated in theinterior. Before using cleaners,read and adhere to all safetyinstructions on the label. Whilecleaning the interior, maintainadequate ventilation by opening thedoors and windows.


10-118 Vehicle Care

Do not clean the interior using thefollowing cleaners or techniques:. Never use a knife or any other

sharp object to remove a soilfrom any interior surface.

. Never use a stiff brush. It cancause damage to the interiorsurfaces.

. Never apply heavy pressure orrub aggressively with a cleaningcloth. Use of heavy pressure candamage the interior and doesnot improve the effectiveness ofsoil removal.

. Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps.Avoid laundry detergents ordishwashing soaps withdegreasers. Using too muchsoap will leave a residue thatleaves streaks and attractsdirt. For liquid cleaners, about20 drops per 3.78 L (1 gal) ofwater is a good guide.

. Do not heavily saturate theupholstery while cleaning.

. Do not use organic solventssuch as naptha, alcohol, etc.Damage to the interior mayresult

Fabric/Carpet/Suede

Use a vacuum cleaner with a softbrush attachment to remove dustand loose dirt. A canister vacuumwith a beater bar in the nozzle mayonly be used on floor carpet andcarpeted floor mats. For soils,always try to remove them first withplain water or club soda. Beforecleaning, gently remove as much ofthe soil as possible using one of thefollowing techniques:. For liquids: gently blot the

remaining soil with a papertowel. Allow the soil to absorbinto the paper towel until nomore can be removed.

. For solid dry soils: remove asmuch as possible and thenvacuum.

To clean:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean whitecloth with water or club soda.

2. Remove excess moisture.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Continue cleaning, usinga clean area of the cloth eachtime it becomes soiled.

4. Continue to gently rub thesoiled area.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution and repeat the cleaningprocess with plain water.

If any of the soil remains, acommercial fabric cleaner or spotlifter may be necessary. Test a smallhidden area for colorfastness beforeusing a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. If the locallycleaned area gives any impressionthat a ring formation may result,clean the entire surface.


Vehicle Care 10-119

A paper towel can be used to blotexcess moisture from the fabric orcarpet after the cleaning process.

Leather

Leather, and lighter colored leatherin particular, will need more frequentcleaning to prevent the buildup ofdust, dirt, and colors transferredfrom other items so that these donot become permanent stains.

To remove dust, a soft clothdampened with water can beused. If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a soft cloth dampenedwith a mild soap solution can beused. Your dealer has a GMapproved leather cleaner availablethat provides superior cleaningperformance when used regularlyon finished automotive leathers.Allow the leather to dry naturally. Donot use heat, steam, spot lifters orspot removers, or shoe polish onleather. Many commercial leathercleaners and coatings that are soldto preserve and protect leathermay permanently change the

appearance and feel of the leatherand are not recommended. Do notuse silicone or wax-based products,or those containing organic solventsto clean the interior because theycan alter the appearance byincreasing the gloss in anon-uniform manner.

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, andOther Plastic Surfaces

To remove dust, a soft clothdampened with water can beused. If a more thorough cleaningis necessary, a clean soft clothdampened with a mild soap solutioncan be used to gently remove dustand dirt. Never use spot lifters orremovers on plastic surfaces.Many commercial cleaners andcoatings that are sold to preserveand protect soft plastic surfacesmay permanently change theappearance and feel of the interiorand are not recommended. Do notuse silicone or wax-based products,

or those containing organic solventsto clean the interior because theycan alter the appearance byincreasing the gloss in anon-uniform manner.

Some commercial products mayincrease gloss on the instrumentpanel. The increase in gloss maycause annoying reflections in thewindshield and even make it difficultto see through the windshield undercertain conditions.

Care of Safety Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be ableto provide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.


10-120 Vehicle Care

Floor Mats

{ WARNING

If a floor mat is the wrong size oris not properly installed, it caninterfere with the acceleratorpedal and/or brake pedal.Interference with the pedals cancause unintended accelerationand/or increased stoppingdistance which can cause a crashand injury. Make sure the floormat does not interfere with theaccelerator or brake pedal.

Use the following guidelines forproper floor mat usage.. The original equipment floor

mats were designed for yourvehicle. If the floor mats needreplacing, it is recommendedthat GM certified floor mats bepurchased. Non-GM floor matsmay not fit properly and mayinterfere with the accelerator orbrake pedal. Always check thatthe floor mats do not interferewith the pedals.

. Use the floor mat with thecorrect side up. Do not turnit over.

. Do not place anything on top ofthe driver side floor mat.

. Use only a single floor mat onthe driver's side.

. Do not place one floor mat ontop of another.

Driver side floor mat is held in placeby a button-type retainer.

Removing and Replacing theFloor Mats

1. Pull up on the rear of the floormat to unlock the retainer andremove.

2. Reinstall by lining up the floormat retainer opening over thecarpet retainer and snap intoposition.

3. Make sure the floor mat isproperly secured in place.


Service and Maintenance 11-1

Service andMaintenance

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Scheduled MaintenanceScheduled Maintenance . . . . . 11-2

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and PartsRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7

Maintenance ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Maintenance RecordsMaintenance Records . . . . . . 11-11

General InformationNotice: Maintenanceintervals, checks, inspections,recommended fluids, andlubricants are necessary to keepthis vehicle in good workingcondition. Damage caused byfailure to follow scheduledmaintenance might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

As the vehicle owner, you areresponsible for the scheduledmaintenance in this section. Werecommend having your dealerperform these services. Propervehicle maintenance helps tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition, improves fuel economy,and reduces vehicle emissions forbetter air quality.

Because of all the different wayspeople use vehicles, maintenanceneeds vary. The vehicle might needmore frequent checks and services.Please read the information underScheduled Maintenance. To keepthe vehicle in good condition, seeyour dealer.

The maintenance schedule is forvehicles that:. Carry passengers and cargo

within recommended limits onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑11.

. Are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal drivinglimits.


11-2 Service and Maintenance

. Use the recommended fuel.See Recommended Fuel onpage 9‑48.

{ WARNING

Performing maintenance work canbe dangerous. Some jobs cancause serious injury. Performmaintenance work only if youhave the required know-how andthe proper tools and equipment.If in doubt, see your dealer tohave a qualified technician do thework. See Doing Your OwnService Work on page 10‑4.

At your dealer, you can be certainthat you will receive the highestlevel of service available. Yourdealer has specially trainedservice technicians, uses genuinereplacement parts, as well as,up‐to‐date tools and equipmentto ensure fast and accuratediagnostics.

The proper replacement parts,fluids, and lubricants to use arelisted in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑7 andMaintenance Replacement Parts onpage 11‑9. We recommend the useof genuine parts from your dealer.

Rotation of New Tires

Tire rotation is not recommended ifthe vehicle has different size tireson the front and rear wheels. If tirerotation is recommended for thevehicle, to maintain ride, handling,and performance of the vehicle,it is important that the first rotationservice for new tires be performed.Tires should be rotated every12 000 km/7,500 miles. See TireRotation on page 10‑79.

ScheduledMaintenanceWhen the Change Engine OilSoon Message Displays

Change engine oil and filter.See Engine Oil on page 10‑10.An Emission Control Service.

When the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message displays, serviceis required for the vehicle assoon as possible, within thenext 1 000 km/600 miles. If drivingunder the best conditions, theengine oil life system might notindicate the need for vehicle servicefor more than a year. The engine oiland filter must be changed at leastonce a year and the oil life systemmust be reset. Your dealer hastrained service technicians whowill perform this work and reset thesystem. If the engine oil life systemis reset accidentally, service thevehicle within 5 000 km/3,000 milessince the last service. Reset the oil



life system whenever the oil ischanged. See Engine Oil LifeSystem on page 10‑14.

Every Engine Oil Change. Change engine oil and filter.

Reset oil life system. SeeEngine Oil on page 10‑10 andEngine Oil Life System onpage 10‑14. An EmissionControl Service.

. Engine coolant level check. SeeEngine Coolant on page 10‑19.

. Engine cooling systeminspection. Visual inspectionof hoses, pipes, fittings, andclamps and replacement,if needed.

. Windshield washer fluid levelcheck. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑26.

. Windshield wiper bladeinspection for wear, cracking,or contamination and windshieldand wiper blade cleaning,if contaminated. See ExteriorCare on page 10‑113. Wornor damaged wiper bladereplacement. See Wiper BladeReplacement on page 10‑34.

. Tire inflation pressurescheck. See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑72.

. Tire wear inspection. See TireInspection on page 10‑78.

. If tire rotation is recommendedfor the vehicle, rotate tires ifnecessary. See Tire Rotation onpage 10‑79.

. Fluids visual leak check(or every 12 months, whicheveroccurs first). A leak in anysystem must be repaired andthe fluid level checked.

. Engine air cleaner filterinspection. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 10‑16.

. Brake system inspection(or every 12 months, whicheveroccurs first).

. Steering and suspensioninspection. Visual inspection fordamaged, loose, or missingparts or signs of wear.

. Body hinges and latches,key lock cylinders, foldingseat hardware, and sunroof(if equipped) lubrication. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑7. Morefrequent lubrication may berequired when the vehicleis exposed to a corrosiveenvironment. Applying siliconegrease on weatherstrips with aclean cloth makes them lastlonger, seal better, and not stickor squeak.



. Restraint system componentcheck. See Safety SystemCheck on page 3‑28.

. Fuel system inspection fordamage or leaks.

. Exhaust system and nearby heatshields inspection for loose ordamaged components.

Additional Required Services

Every 12 000 km/7,500Miles. Rotate tires. Tires should be

rotated every 12 000 km/7,500 miles. See Tire Rotationon page 10‑79.

At Each Fuel Stop. Engine oil level check. See

Engine Oil on page 10‑10.. Engine coolant level check. See

Engine Coolant on page 10‑19.. Windshield washer fluid level

check. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑26.

Once a Month. Tire inflation check. See Tire

Pressure on page 10‑72.. Tire wear inspection. See Tire

Inspection on page 10‑78.. Sunroof track and seal

inspection, if equipped. SeeSunroof (Sedan and Wagon) onpage 2‑33 or Sunroof (Coupe)on page 2‑34.

Once a Year. See Starter Switch Check on

page 10‑31.. See Automatic Transmission

Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck on page 10‑32.

. See Ignition Transmission LockCheck on page 10‑33.

. See Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check onpage 10‑33.

. Accelerator pedal check fordamage, high effort, or binding.Replace if needed.

. If the vehicle has a Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit, check thesealant expiration date printedon the instruction label ofthe kit. See Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit on page 10‑89.

. Underbody flushing service.

. Hood/Decklid/Liftgate/LiftglassSupport Gas Strut Service:Visually inspect gas strut,if equipped, for signs of wear,cracks, or other damage. Checkthe hold open ability of the gasstrut. Contact your dealer ifservice is required.

Once Every Two Years. CTS‐V only: Clutch hydraulic

system drain, flush, and refill.



First Engine Oil Change AfterEvery 40 000 km/25,000Miles. Passenger compartment air

filter replacement (or every24 months, whichever occursfirst). More frequent replacementmay be needed if you drivein areas with heavy traffic,areas with poor air quality,or areas with high dust levels.Replacement may also beneeded if you notice reducedair flow, windows fogging up,or odors. Your dealer can helpyou determine when it is theright time to replace the filter.

. CTS‐V only: 6‐speed manualtransmission fluid change(severe service) for vehiclesmainly driven in heavy citytraffic in hot weather, in hilly ormountainous terrain, whenfrequently towing a trailer,or used for taxi, police,or delivery service.

First Engine Oil Change AfterEvery 80 000 km/50,000Miles. Engine air cleaner filter

replacement. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 10‑16.

. Automatic transmission fluidchange (severe service) forvehicles mainly driven inheavy city traffic in hot weather,in hilly or mountainous terrain,when frequently towing atrailer, or used for taxi, police,or delivery service. SeeAutomatic TransmissionFluid on page 10‑14.

. Evaporative control systeminspection. Check all fuel andvapor lines and hoses for properhook‐up, routing, and condition.Check that the purge valve,if the vehicle has one, worksproperly. Replace as needed.

An Emission Control Service.The U.S. EnvironmentalProtection Agency or theCalifornia Air Resources Boardhas determined that the failureto perform this maintenanceitem will not nullify the emissionwarranty or limit recall liabilityprior to the completion of thevehicle's useful life. We,however, urge that allrecommended maintenanceservices be performed at theindicated intervals and themaintenance be recorded.

. CTS‐V only: 6‐speed manualtransmission fluid change(normal service).



. All‐wheel‐drive vehicles only:Transfer case fluid change(severe service) for vehiclesmainly driven in heavy citytraffic in hot weather, in hillyor mountainous terrain, whenfrequently towing a trailer,or used for taxi, police,or delivery service. Duringany maintenance, if a powerwasher is used to clean mudand dirt from the underbody,care should be taken to notdirectly spray the transfer caseoutput seals. High pressurewater can overcome the sealsand contaminate the transfercase fluid. Contaminated fluidwill decrease the life of thetransfer case and should bereplaced.

. CTS‐V only: Rear axle fluidchange (severe service only)for vehicles mainly driven in hillyor mountainous terrain, whenfrequently towing a trailer, usedfor high speed or competitive

driving, or used for taxi, police,or delivery service. See yourdealer.

First Engine Oil Change AfterEvery 160 000 km/100,000Miles. Automatic transmission fluid

change (normal service). SeeAutomatic Transmission Fluid onpage 10‑14.

. All‐wheel‐drive vehicles only:Transfer case fluid change(normal service). During anymaintenance, if a power washeris used to clean mud and dirtfrom the underbody, care shouldbe taken to not directly spraythe transfer case output seals.High pressure water canovercome the seals andcontaminate the transfer casefluid. Contaminated fluid willdecrease the life of the transfercase and should be replaced.

. Spark plug replacement andspark plug wire inspection. AnEmission Control Service.

. CTS‐V only: Superchargerdrive belt inspection for fraying,excessive cracks, or obviousdamage and replacement,if needed.

First Engine Oil Change AfterEvery 240 000 km/150,000Miles. Engine cooling system

drain, flush, and refill (orevery five years, whicheveroccurs first). See CoolingSystem on page 10‑18. AnEmission Control Service.

. 6.2L supercharged V8 engineonly: Intercooler systemdrain, flush, and refill (orevery five years, whicheveroccurs first). See CoolingSystem on page 10‑18. AnEmission Control Service.

. Engine drive belts inspectionfor fraying, excessive cracks,or obvious damage (orevery 10 years, whicheveroccurs first). Replace, ifneeded.



Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

The engine requires engine oil approved to the dexos™ specification. Oilsmeeting this specification can be identified with the dexos™ certificationmark. Look for and use only an engine oil that displays the dexos™certification mark of the proper viscosity grade. See Engine Oil onpage 10‑10.

Engine Coolant50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.See Engine Coolant on page 10‑19.

Hydraulic Brake SystemDOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 88862806, inCanada 88862807).

Windshield Washer Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Hydraulic Power Steering System GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. 89021184, in Canada 89021186).

Hydraulic Clutch SystemDOT 4 Hydraulic Clutch Fluid (GM Part No. 88958860, inCanada 88901244).

Manual Transmission (CTS) SAE 75W-90 GL5 Gear Oil (GM Part No. 88862475, in Canada 88862476).

Manual Transmission (CTS-V) Manual Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. 88861800, in Canada 88861801).

Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.



Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Rear Drive Module and Transfer Case(All‐Wheel Drive)

Transfer Case Fluid (GM Part No. 88861950, in Canada 88861951).

Chassis LubricationChassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) orlubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Key Lock CylindersMulti-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Hood Latch Assembly, SecondaryLatch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and

Release Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 12346293, in Canada 992723)or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood, Door, and Folding Seat HingesMulti-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Power Liftgate Actuator Ball Joint Multi-Purpose Lubricant (GM Part No. 89021668, in Canada 89021674).

Weatherstrip ConditioningWeatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 992887).



Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

3.0L V6 Engine 15875795 A3096C

3.6L V6 Engine 15875795 A3096C

6.2L V8 Engine 25898499 A3105C

Engine Oil Filter

3.0L V6 Engine 25177917 PF2129

3.6L V6 Engine 25177917 PF2129

6.2L V8 Engine 89017524 PF48

Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element 19130403 CF133

Spark Plugs

3.0L V6 Engine 12622561 41-109

3.6L V6 Engine 12622561 41-109

6.2L V8 Engine 12571165 41-104



Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Wiper Blades — Except CTS-V

Driver Side – 56.5 cm (22 in) 15890062 —

Passenger Side – 53.3 cm (21 in) 15890064 —

Wiper Blades — CTS-V

Driver Side – 56.5 cm (22 in) 20791461 —

Passenger Side – 53.3 cm (21 in) 20791462 —



Maintenance RecordsAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

DateOdometerReading

Serviced By Maintenance Stamp Services Performed



Maintenance Record (cont'd)

Date OdometerReading













Technical Data 12-1

Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Vehicle DataCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-4

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This legal identifier is in the frontcorner of the instrument panel, onthe left side of the vehicle. It can beseen through the windshield fromoutside. The VIN also appears onthe Vehicle Certification and ServiceParts labels and certificates of titleand registration.

Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VINis the engine code. This codeidentifies the vehicle engine,specifications, and replacementparts. See “Engine Specifications”under Capacities and Specificationson page 12‑2 for the vehicleengine code.

Service PartsIdentification LabelThis label, on the spare tire cover,has the following information:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN).. Model designation.. Paint information.. Production options and special

equipment.

Do not remove this label from thevehicle.


12-2 Technical Data

Vehicle Data

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑7 for more information.

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134aFor the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant label located under the

hood. See your dealer for more information.

Cooling System — Engine

3.0LV6 Engine 10.3 L 10.9 qt

3.6LV6 Engine 10.3 L 10.9 qt

6.2LV8 Engine 11.8 L 12.5 qt

Cooling System — Intercooler, 6.2LV8 Engine 2.3 L 2.4 qt

Engine Oil with Filter

3.0LV6 Engine 5.7 L 6.0 qt




Technical Data 12-3

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Fuel Tank 68.1 L 18.0 gal

Transfer Case — AWD 1.0 L 1.1 qt

Transmission Fluid (Pan Removal and Filter Replacement)

3.0LV6 Engine, 6-Speed Automatic 6.3 L 6.7 qt



3.0L, 3.6LV6 Engines, 6-Speed Manual 1.8 L 1.9 qt

6.2LV8 Engine, 6-Speed Manual 3.8 L 4.0 qt

Wheel Nut Torque 190Y 140 lb ft

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.


12-4 Technical Data

Engine Specifications

Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

3.0LV6 Engine YAutomaticManual

1.1 mm (0.043 in)

3.6LV6 Engine DAutomaticManual 1.1 mm (0.043 in)

6.2LV8 Engine PAutomaticManual

1.0 mm (0.040 in)

Engine Drive Belt Routing

CTS V6 Engines

CTS-V 6.2L V8 Engine


Customer Information 13-1

CustomerInformation

Customer InformationCustomer SatisfactionProcedure (U.S. andCanada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Customer SatisfactionProcedure (Mexico) . . . . . . . . 13-3

Customer Assistance Offices(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-4

Customer Assistance Offices(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users (U.S.and Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-6GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram (U.S. andCanada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Roadside Service (U.S. andCanada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Roadside Service(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9

Scheduling ServiceAppointments (U.S. andCanada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10

Courtesy TransportationProgram (U.S. andCanada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10

Collision Damage Repair(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . 13-11

Service PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-14

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defects tothe United StatesGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15

Reporting Safety Defects tothe CanadianGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyVehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16

Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-16OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17Navigation System . . . . . . . . . 13-18Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-18

Radio FrequencyStatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18

Customer Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedure (U.S. andCanada)Your satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to the dealer and toCadillac. Normally, any concernswith the sales transaction or theoperation of the vehicle will beresolved by the dealer's sales orservice departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentionsof all concerned, misunderstandingscan occur. If your concern has notbeen resolved to your satisfaction,the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concernwith a member of dealershipmanagement. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at thatlevel. If the matter has already beenreviewed with the sales, service orparts manager, contact the ownerof the dealership or the generalmanager.


13-2 Customer Information

STEP TWO: If after contacting amember of dealership management,it appears your concern cannot beresolved by the dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., call theCadillac Customer AssistanceCenter at 1‐800‐458‐8006. InCanada, call the Canadian CadillacCustomer Communication Centre at1-888-446-2000.

We encourage you to call thetoll-free number in order to give yourinquiry prompt attention. Have thefollowing information available togive the Customer Assistancerepresentative:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). This is availablefrom the vehicle registration ortitle, or the plate at the top left ofthe instrument panel and visiblethrough the windshield.

. Dealership name and location.

. Vehicle delivery date andpresent mileage.

When contacting Cadillac,remember that your concern willlikely be resolved at a dealer'sfacility. That is why we suggestfollowing Step One first.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners:Both General Motors and the dealerare committed to making sure youare completely satisfied with thenew vehicle. However, if youcontinue to remain unsatisfiedafter following the procedureoutlined in Steps One and Two, youcan file with the Better BusinessBureau (BBB) Auto Line® Programto enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout-of-court program administeredby the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotivedisputes regarding vehicle repairsor the interpretation of the NewVehicle Limited Warranty. Althoughyou may be required to resort to thisinformal dispute resolution programprior to filing a court action, use ofthe program is free of charge andyour case will generally be heard

within 40 days. If you do not agreewith the decision given in your case,you may reject it and proceed withany other venue for relief availableto you.

You may contact the BBB AutoLine Program using the toll-freetelephone number or write them atthe following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better BusinessBureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100www.dr.bbb.org/goauto

This program is available in all50 states and the District ofColumbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage and otherfactors. General Motors reservesthe right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.



STEP THREE — CanadianOwners: In the event that you donot feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following theprocedure outlined in Steps Oneand Two, General Motors of CanadaLimited wants you to be awareof its participation in a no-chargemediation/arbitration program.General Motors of Canada Limitedhas committed to binding arbitrationof owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle serviceclaims. The program provides forthe review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, andmay include an informal hearingbefore the arbiter. The program isdesigned so that the entire disputesettlement process, from the timeyou file your complaint to the finaldecision, should be completed inapproximately 70 days. We believeour impartial program offersadvantages over courts in mostjurisdictions because it is informal,quick, and free of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685,or call the General MotorsCustomer Communication Centre,1-800-263-3777 (English),1-800-263-7854 (French),or write to:

Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer CommunicationCentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

The inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

Customer SatisfactionProcedure (Mexico)

Did you get the Warranty ExtensionPlan? This plan is recommended byGeneral Motors to supplement thewarranty included with the newvehicle purchase.

See your dealer for details.

Customer AssistanceProcedure

Owner satisfaction and goodwill arevery important to your dealer andGeneral Motors.

Normally, any problem with thetransaction, sale, or usage of thevehicle must be handled by yourdealer sales or service departments.



However, we recognize thatdespite the good intentions of allparties involved, sometimes amisunderstanding may occur.

If you have a problem that has notbeen satisfactorily handled throughthe normal means, we suggest thefollowing steps:

STEP ONE

Explain your case to the dealerservice agent, service manager,dealer sales agent, or salesmanager, depending on your case.

Make sure that they have allnecessary information. They areinterested in your continualsatisfaction.

STEP TWO

If you are not satisfied, pleasecontact the general manager or thedealership owner to ask for theirhelp. If they are not able to resolveyour case, ask them to contact theright people at General Motors forsupport, if needed.

STEP THREE

If your case is not resolved in areasonable amount of time by yourdealer, please call the GeneralMotors Customer AssistanceCenter (CAC) and provide thefollowing information:. Name. Address. Phone number. Model year. Brand. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). Mileage. Delivery date. Description of the problem. Dealership name. Dealership address

See Customer Assistance Offices(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑4 orCustomer Assistance Offices(Mexico) on page 13‑5 for moreinformation.

Customer AssistanceOffices (U.S. and Canada)Cadillac encourages customersto call the toll-free number forassistance. However, if a customerwishes to write or e-mail Cadillac,the letter should be addressed to:

United States

Cadillac CustomerAssistance CenterCadillac Motor Car DivisionP.O. Box 33169Detroit, MI 48232-5169www.Cadillac.com

1-800-458-80061-800-833-2622 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-882-1112



From Puerto Rico:

1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)

From U.S. Virgin Islands:

1-800-496-9994

Canada

General Motors of Canada LimitedCanadian Cadillac CustomerCommunication Centre, Mail Code:CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7www.gm.ca

1-888-446-20001-800-263-3830 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-882-1112

Overseas

Please contact the local GeneralMotors Business Unit.

Mexico, Central America andCaribbean Islands/Countries(Except Puerto Rico andU.S. Virgin Islands)

General Motors de Mexico, S. deR.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterAv. Ejercito Nacional #843Col. GranadaC.P. 11520, Mexico, D.F.

01-800-466-0805Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0805

Customer AssistanceOffices (Mexico)To contact the Customer AssistanceCenter (CAC), use the phonenumbers listed in this section.Customer assistance is availableMonday through Friday, 08:00 to20:00 hours, and Saturdays from08:00 to 15:00 hours.

All e-mail inquiries to the CustomerAssistance Center (CAC) should besent to: [email protected].

Mexico

From Mexico City

5329-0816

From Other Mexico Locations

01-800-466-0816

United States and Canada

1-866-466-8195

Costa Rica

00-800-052-1005

Guatemala

1-800-999-5252

Panama

00-800-052-0001

Dominican Republic

1-888-751-5301

El Salvador

800-6273

Honduras

800-0122-6101



Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)Users (U.S. and Canada)To assist customers who are deaf,hard of hearing, or speech-impairedand who use Text Telephones(TTYs), Cadillac has TTY equipmentavailable at its Customer AssistanceCenter. Any TTY user cancommunicate with Cadillac bydialing: 1-800-833-2622. TTY usersin Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.

Online Owner Center

Cadillac Owner Center (U.S.)www.cadillacownercenter.com

Information and servicescustomized for your specificvehicle — all in one convenientplace.. Digital owner manual, warranty

information, and more.. Storage for online service and

maintenance records.

. Cadillac dealer locator forservice nationwide.

. Exclusive privileges and offers.

. Recall notices for your specificvehicle.

. OnStar and GM CardmemberServices Earnings summaries.

Other Helpful Links:

Cadillac — www.cadillac.com

Cadillac Merchandise —www.cadillaccollection.com

Help Center — www.cadillac.com/pages/mds/helpcenter/faq.do. FAQ (Frequently Asked

Questions). Contact Us

My GM Canada www.gm.ca

My GM Canada is apassword-protected section ofwww.gm.ca where you can saveinformation on GM vehicles, getpersonalized offers, and use handytools and forms with greater ease.

Here are a few of the valuabletools and services you will haveaccess to:. My Showroom: Find and save

information on vehicles andcurrent offers in your area.

. My Dealers: Save details suchas address and phone numberfor each of your preferred GMdealers.

. My Driveway: Access quicklinks to parts and serviceestimates, check trade-invalues, or schedule a serviceappointment by adding thevehicles you own to yourdriveway profile.

. My Preferences: Manage yourprofile and use tools and formswith greater ease.

To sign up, visit the My GM.casection within www.gm.ca.



GM MobilityReimbursement Program(U.S. and Canada)

This program is available toqualified applicants for costreimbursement of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipmentrequired for the vehicle, such ashand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift for the vehicle.

For more information on the limitedoffer, visit www.gmmobility.com orcall the GM Mobility AssistanceCenter at 1-800-323-9935. TextTelephone (TTY) users, call1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada alsohas a Mobility Program. Call1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)for details. TTY users call1-800-263-3830.

Roadside Service (U.S.and Canada)In the United States or Canada, call1-800-882-1112.

Text Telephone (TTY), U.S. only,call 1-888-889-2438.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

Calling for Service

When calling Roadside Service,have the following informationready:. Your name, home address, and

home telephone number.. Telephone number of your

location.. Location of the vehicle.

. Model, year, color, and licenseplate number of the vehicle.

. Odometer reading, VehicleIdentification Number (VIN), anddelivery date of the vehicle.

. Description of the problem.

Coverage

Services are provided up to5 years/160 000 km (100,000 mi),whichever comes first.

In the U.S., anyone driving thevehicle is covered. In Canada, aperson driving the vehicle withoutpermission from the owner is notcovered.

Roadside Service is not a part ofthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.Cadillac and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tomake any changes or discontinuethe Roadside Service program atany time without notification.



Cadillac and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the rightto limit services or payment to anowner or driver if they decide theclaims are made too often, or thesame type of claim is made manytimes.

Cadillac Owner Privileges™. Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

. Lock‐Out Service: Service tounlock the vehicle if you arelocked out. A remote unlock maybe available if you have OnStar.For security reasons, the drivermust present identificationbefore this service is given.

. Emergency Tow From a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow to thenearest Cadillac dealer forwarranty service, or if the vehiclewas in a crash and cannot bedriven. Assistance is also givenwhen the vehicle is stuck in thesand, mud, or snow.

. Flat Tire Change: Service tochange a flat tire with spare tire.The spare tire, if equipped,must be in good condition andproperly inflated. It is yourresponsibility for the repair orreplacement of the tire if it isnot covered by the warranty.

. Battery Jump Start: Service tojump start a dead battery.

. Trip Routing Service: Detailedmaps of North America areprovided when requested eitherwith the most direct route or themost scenic route. Additionaltravel information is alsoavailable. Allow three weeksfor delivery.

. Trip Interruption Benefitsand Service: If your trip isinterrupted due to a warrantyfailure, incidental expensesmay be reimbursed during the5 years/160 000 km (100,000 mi)Powertrain warranty period.Items considered are hotel,meals, and rental car.

Cadillac Technician RoadsideService (U.S. only)

Cadillac's exceptional RoadsideService is more than an auto clubor towing service. It provides everyCadillac owner in the United Stateswith the advantage of contactinga Cadillac advisor and, whereavailable, a Cadillac trained dealertechnician who can provide on-siteservice.

A dealer technician will travel toyour location within a 30 mileradius of a participating Cadillacdealership. If beyond this radius, wewill arrange to have your car towedto the nearest Cadillac dealership.Each technician travels with aspecially equipped service vehiclecomplete with the necessaryCadillac parts and tools required tohandle most roadside repairs.



Services Not Included inRoadside Service. Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws.. Legal fines.. Mounting, dismounting,

or changing of snow tires,chains, or other traction devices.

. Towing or services for vehiclesdriven on a non-public road orhighway.

Services Specific toCanadian‐Purchased Vehicles. Fuel delivery: Reimbursement

is approximately $5 Canadian.Diesel fuel delivery may berestricted. Propane and otherfuels are not provided throughthis service.

. Lock-Out Service: Vehicleregistration is required.

. Trip Routing Service: Limit ofsix requests per year.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andService: Pre-authorization,original detailed receipts, and acopy of the repair orders arerequired. Once authorization hasbeen received, the RoadsideService advisor will help youmake arrangements and explainhow to receive payment.

. Alternative Service: Ifassistance cannot be providedright away, the RoadsideService advisor may giveyou permission to get localemergency road service. You willreceive payment, up to $100,after sending the originalreceipt to Roadside Service.Mechanical failures may becovered, however any cost forparts and labor for repairs notcovered by the warranty are theowner responsibility.

Roadside Service(Mexico)Roadside Service is available24 hours a day, 365 days ofthe year.

For detailed information aboutRoadside Service, pleasesee the brochure provided withyour new vehicle or visit ourwebsite at: www.cadillac.com.mx.Navigate the site and click on“Asistencia en el Camino.” E-mailcorrespondence should be sentto: [email protected].

To contact Roadside Service byphone, use the following numbers:

Mexico

01-800-466-0805

United States

1-866-466-8906

Canada

1-800-268-6800



Scheduling ServiceAppointments (U.S. andCanada)When the vehicle requires warrantyservice, contact the dealer andrequest an appointment. Byscheduling a service appointmentand advising the service consultantof your transportation needs, thedealer can help minimize yourinconvenience.

If the vehicle cannot be scheduledinto the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it untilit can be scheduled for service,unless, of course, the problem issafety related. If it is, please call thedealership, let them know this, andask for instructions.

If the dealer requests you to bringthe vehicle for service, you areurged to do so as early in the workday as possible to allow for thesame day-repair.

Courtesy TransportationProgram (U.S. andCanada)To enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participatingdealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer supportprogram for vehicles with theBumper-to-Bumper (Base WarrantyCoverage period in Canada),extended powertrain, and/orhybrid‐specific warranties in boththe U.S. and Canada.

Several Courtesy Transportationoptions are available to assist inreducing inconvenience whenwarranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not apart of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. A separate bookletentitled “Warranty and OwnerAssistance Information” furnishedwith each new vehicle providesdetailed warranty coverageinformation.

Transportation Options

Warranty service can generallybe completed while you wait.However, if you are unableto wait, GM helps to minimizeinconvenience by providing severaltransportation options. Dependingon the circumstances, the dealercan offer one of the following:

Shuttle Service

Shuttle service is the preferredmeans of offering CourtesyTransportation. Dealers may provideshuttle service to get you to yourdestination with minimal interruptionof your daily schedule. This includesone‐way or round‐trip shuttle servicewithin reasonable time and distanceparameters of the dealer's area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursement

If the vehicle requires overnightwarranty repairs, and publictransportation is used insteadof the dealer's shuttle service, theexpense must be supported by



original receipts and can onlybe up to the maximum amountallowed by GM for shuttle service.In addition, for U.S. customers,should you arrange transportationthrough a friend or relative, limitedreimbursement for reasonable fuelexpenses may be available. Claimamounts should reflect actualcosts and be supported by originalreceipts. See the dealer forinformation regarding the allowanceamounts for reimbursement of fuelor other transportation costs.

Courtesy Rental Vehicle

The dealer may arrange to provideyou with a courtesy rental vehicle orreimburse you for a rental vehiclethat you obtain if the vehicle is keptfor an overnight warranty repair.Rental reimbursement will be limitedand must be supported by originalreceipts. This requires that you signand complete a rental agreementand meet state/provincial, local,and rental vehicle providerrequirements. Requirements varyand may include minimum age

requirements, insurance coverage,credit card, etc. You are responsiblefor fuel usage charges and mayalso be responsible for taxes,levies, usage fees, excessivemileage, or rental usage beyondthe completion of the repair.

It may not be possible to provide alike vehicle as a courtesy rental.

Additional ProgramInformation

All program options, such asshuttle service, may not be availableat every dealer. Please contactthe dealer for specific informationabout availability. All CourtesyTransportation arrangements will beadministered by appropriate dealerpersonnel.

General Motors reserves theright to unilaterally modify,change, or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and toresolve all questions of claimeligibility pursuant to the terms andconditions described herein at itssole discretion.

Collision Damage Repair(U.S. and Canada)If the vehicle is involved in acollision and it is damaged, havethe damage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the properequipment and quality replacementparts. Poorly performed collisionrepairs diminish the vehicle resalevalue, and safety performance canbe compromised in subsequentcollisions.

Collision Parts

Genuine GM Collision parts are newparts made with the same materialsand construction methods as theparts with which the vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GMCollision parts are the best choice toensure that the vehicle's designedappearance, durability, and safetyare preserved. The use of GenuineGM parts can help maintain the GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.



Recycled original equipment partsmay also be used for repair. Theseparts are typically removed fromvehicles that were total losses inprior crashes. In most cases, theparts being recycled are fromundamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GMpart may be an acceptable choiceto maintain the vehicle's originallydesigned appearance and safetyperformance; however, the history ofthese parts is not known. Such partsare not covered by the GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered bythat warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are alsoavailable. These are made bycompanies other than GM and maynot have been tested for the vehicle.

As a result, these parts may fitpoorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems, and may notperform properly in subsequentcollisions. Aftermarket parts are notcovered by the GM New VehicleLimited Warranty, and any vehiclefailure related to such parts is notcovered by that warranty.

Repair Facility

GM also recommends that youchoose a collision repair facility thatmeets your needs before you everneed collision repairs. The dealermay have a collision repair centerwith GM-trained technicians andstate‐of‐the‐art equipment, or beable to recommend a collisionrepair center that has GM-trainedtechnicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring The Vehicle

Protect your investment in the GMvehicle with comprehensive andcollision insurance coverage.

There are significant differences inthe quality of coverage afforded byvarious insurance policy terms.Many insurance policies providereduced protection to the GMvehicle by limiting compensationfor damage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts. Someinsurance companies will notspecify aftermarket collision parts.When purchasing insurance, werecommend that you ensure that thevehicle will be repaired with GMoriginal equipment collision parts.If such insurance coverage isnot available from your currentinsurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If the vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you to haveinsurance that ensures repairs withGenuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts orGenuine Manufacturer replacementparts. Read the lease carefully, asyou may be charged at the end ofthe lease for poor quality repairs.



If a Crash Occurs

If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help. Do notleave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of.Move the vehicle only if its positionputs you in danger, or you areinstructed to move it by a policeofficer.

Give only the necessary informationto police and other parties involvedin the crash.

For emergency towing seeRoadside Service (U.S. andCanada) on page 13‑7 or RoadsideService (Mexico) on page 13‑9.

Gather the following information:. Driver name, address, and

telephone number.. Driver license number.. Owner name, address, and

telephone number.. Vehicle license plate number.. Vehicle make, model, and

model year.

. Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

. Insurance company and policynumber.

. General description of thedamage to the other vehicle.

Choose a reputable repair facilitythat uses quality replacement parts.See “Collision Parts” earlier in thissection.

If the airbag has inflated, see WhatWill You See After an AirbagInflates? on page 3‑35.

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair Process

In the event that the vehicle requiresdamage repairs, GM recommendsthat you take an active role in itsrepair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take thevehicle there, or have it towedthere. Specify to the facility that anyrequired replacement collision partsbe original equipment parts, eithernew Genuine GM parts or recycled

original GM parts. Remember,recycled parts will not be covered bythe GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair,but you must live with the repair.Depending on your policy limits,your insurance company mayinitially value the repair usingaftermarket parts. Discuss this withthe repair professional, and insiston Genuine GM parts. Remember,if the vehicle is leased, you maybe obligated to have the vehiclerepaired with Genuine GM parts,even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.

If another party's insurancecompany is paying for the repairs,you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on thatinsurance company's collisionpolicy repair limits, as you have nocontractual limits with that company.In such cases, you can have controlof the repair and parts choicesas long as the cost stays withinreasonable limits.



Service PublicationsOrdering Information

Service Manuals

Service Manuals have the diagnosisand repair information on theengines, transmission, axle,suspension, brakes, electrical,steering, body, etc.

Service Bulletins

Service Bulletins give additionaltechnical service informationneeded to knowledgeably serviceGeneral Motors cars and trucks.Each bulletin contains instructionsto assist in the diagnosis andservice of the vehicle.

Owner Information

Owner publications are writtenspecifically for owners and intendedto provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle.The Owner Manual includes theMaintenance Schedule for allmodels.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,Owner Manual, and WarrantyBooklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$35.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Without Portfolio: OwnerManual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Current and Past Models

Technical Service Bulletins andManuals are available for currentand past model GM vehicles.

ORDER TOLL FREE:1-800-551-4123 Monday - Friday8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time

For Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visitHelm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.

Or write to:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Prices are subject to changewithout notice and without incurringobligation. Allow ample time fordelivery.

All listed prices are quoted in U.S.funds. Make checks payable in U.S.funds.



Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could causea crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it findsthat a safety defect exists in agroup of vehicles, it may ordera recall and remedy campaign.

However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individualproblems between you, yourdealer, or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you maycall the Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); goto http://www.safercar.gov; orwrite to:

Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motorvehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that the vehicle has a safetydefect, notify Transport Canadaimmediately, and notify GeneralMotors of Canada Limited. Callthem at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch2780 Sheffield RoadOttawa, Ontario K1B 3V9



Reporting Safety Defectsto General MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA(or Transport Canada) in a situationlike this, notify General Motors.

Call 1-800-458-8006, or write:

Cadillac CustomerAssistance CenterCadillac Motor Car DivisionP.O. Box 33169Detroit, MI 48232-5169

In Canada, call 1‐888‐446‐2000,or write:

Canadian Cadillac CustomerCommunication Centre,Mail Code: CA1-163-005General Motors of Canada Limited1908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Vehicle DataRecording andPrivacyThis GM vehicle has a number ofsophisticated computers that recordinformation about the vehicle’sperformance and how it is driven.For example, the vehicle usescomputer modules to monitor andcontrol engine and transmissionperformance, to monitor theconditions for airbag deploymentand deploy airbags in a crash, and,if so equipped, to provide antilockbraking to help the driver control thevehicle. These modules may storedata to help the dealer technicianservice the vehicle. Some modulesmay also store data about how youoperate the vehicle, such as rate offuel consumption or average speed.These modules may also retain theowner’s personal preferences, suchas radio pre-sets, seat positions,and temperature settings.

Event Data RecordersThis vehicle has an Event DataRecorder (EDR). The main purposeof an EDR is to record, in certaincrash or near crash-like situations,such as an airbag deployment orhitting a road obstacle, data thatwill assist in understanding how avehicle's systems performed. TheEDR is designed to record datarelated to vehicle dynamics andsafety systems for a short period oftime, typically 30 seconds or less.The EDR in this vehicle is designedto record such data as:. How various systems in the

vehicle were operating.. Whether or not the driver and

passenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened.

. How far, if at all, the driver waspressing the accelerator and/orbrake pedal.

. How fast the vehicle wastraveling.



This data can help provide a betterunderstanding of the circumstancesin which crashes and injuries occur.

Important: EDR data is recordedby the vehicle only if a non-trivialcrash situation occurs; no data isrecorded by the EDR under normaldriving conditions and no personaldata (e.g., name, gender, age,and crash location) is recorded.However, other parties, suchas law enforcement, could combinethe EDR data with the type ofpersonally identifying dataroutinely acquired during acrash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, suchas law enforcement, that have thespecial equipment, can read theinformation if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.

GM will not access this data orshare it with others except: with theconsent of the vehicle owner or,if the vehicle is leased, with theconsent of the lessee; in responseto an official request by police orsimilar government office; as part ofGM's defense of litigation throughthe discovery process; or, asrequired by law. Data that GMcollects or receives may also beused for GM research needs ormay be made available to others forresearch purposes, where a need isshown and the data is not tied to aspecific vehicle or vehicle owner.

OnStar®

If the vehicle is equipped with anactive OnStar system, that systemmay also record data in crash ornear crash‐like situations. TheOnStar Terms and Conditionsprovides information on datacollection and use and is availablein the OnStar glove box kit,at www.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada), or bypressing theQ button andspeaking to an advisor.



Navigation SystemIf the vehicle has a navigationsystem, use of the system mayresult in the storage of destinations,addresses, telephone numbers, andother trip information. Refer to thenavigation system operating manualfor information on stored data andfor deletion instructions.

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used in somevehicles for functions such as tirepressure monitoring and ignitionsystem security, as well as inconnection with conveniencessuch as key fobs for remote doorlocking/unlocking and starting, andin-vehicle transmitters for garagedoor openers. RFID technology inGM vehicles does not use or recordpersonal information or link with anyother GM system containingpersonal information.

Radio FrequencyStatementThis vehicle has systems thatoperate on a radio frequency thatcomply with Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and with Industry CanadaStandards RSS‐210/220/310.

Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not causeinterference.

2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.

Changes or modifications to any ofthese systems by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.


INDEX i-1

AAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22Adaptive ForwardLighting (AFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Add-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59

AdjustmentsLumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Thigh Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-16Air Filter, PassengerCompartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Airbag SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-43How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35

Airbag System (cont.)What Will You See Afteran Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . .3-35

When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33

Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-32AirbagsAdding Equipment to theVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-42

Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-18Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17Servicing Airbag-EquippedVehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41

System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30Alarm SystemAnti-Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25

All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . 9-33, 10-31AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9AntennaMulti-Band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17

Anti-TheftAlarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25Alarm System Messages . . . . .5-43

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23

Appearance CareExterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-113Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-117

Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18CD/DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-21MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-25

Audio SystemBackglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . .7-17Hard Drive Device (HDD) . . . . .7-29Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-16Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2

AutomaticDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 9-26Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29Shift Lock ControlFunction Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32

Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35


i-2 INDEX

BBattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Exterior Lighting BatterySaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-106Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31

Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-34Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37Boost Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14Brake System Warning Light . . . 5-22Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34, 9-35System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32

Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-16

Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5, 10-38Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

License PlateLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38, 10-39

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81

CCalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7CaliforniaFuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-48Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3Camera, Rear Vision . . . . . . . . . . 9-44Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . ivCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Carbon MonoxideEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

CargoCover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Management System . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Cargo Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Cautions, Danger, andWarnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-2Central Door Unlock System . . . 2-17Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86ChargingSystem Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19

CheckEngine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19IgnitionTransmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-33


INDEX i-3

Child RestraintsInfants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-47

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-53

Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-44Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-59, 3-61Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-49

Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41CleaningExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-113Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-117

Climate Control SystemsDual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Clutch, Hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 13-11Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . .10-106Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34

Competitive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Competitive Driving Mode . . . . . 9-39Compressor Kit, TireSealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89

Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28CoolantEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19Engine TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16

Engine TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10

CoversCargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34

Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-6Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4, 13-5Text Telephone (TTY)Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-6

Customer InformationService PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-14

Customer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1, 13-3

DDamage Repair, Collision . . . . . 13-11Danger, Warnings, andCautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-16Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Devices, Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35


i-4 INDEX

DoorAjar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34Central Door UnlockingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17

Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14, 2-15Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17

Drive SystemsAll-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . 9-33, 10-31

Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

DrivingCharacteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-53

Competitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7, 9-39Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-8If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 9-11Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24

Dual Automatic ClimateControl System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

DVD/CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21

EEasy Entry Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Electrical Equipment,Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59

Electrical SystemEngineCompartmentFuse Block . . . . . 10-41, 10-45,

10-48, 10-52Fuses and CircuitBreakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41

Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40RearCompartmentFuse Block . . . . . 10-55, 10-57,

10-59, 10-61

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Check and Service EngineSoon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19

Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-6Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19Coolant Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16

Coolant TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Cooling System Messages . . .5-35Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25Oil Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . .5-15Overheated ProtectionOperating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-26Speed Limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4, 9-19


INDEX i-5

Engine OilLife System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35

Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-16Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-28Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 6-2Exterior Lighting BatterySaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

FFeaturesMemory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

FilterEngine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-16

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-4Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-87Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-98

Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-120

FluidAutomatic Transmission . . . . 10-14Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26

Fog LampsBulb Replacement . . . . . .6-5, 10-38

Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29Front Fog LampsLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26

Front SeatsAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10Heated and Ventilated . . . . . . . .3-12

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-49Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-52

Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-50Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . .9-49Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-48Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-48Requirements, California . . . . .9-48System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36

Fuel EconomyDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24

FusesEngineCompartmentFuse Block . . . . . 10-41, 10-45,

10-48, 10-52Fuses and CircuitBreakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41

RearCompartmentFuse Block . . . . . 10-55, 10-57,

10-59, 10-61

GGarage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . 5-54Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-54

GasolineSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-48

GaugesBoost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14Engine CoolantTemperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16

Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-15Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13


i-6 INDEX

Gauges (cont.)Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Warning Lights andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10

General InformationService and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-52Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

HHalogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37Hard Drive Device (HDD) . . . . . . 7-29Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-4Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

HeadlampsAdaptive ForwardLighting (AFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-37Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-26High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . .5-26Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

HeatedSteering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29

HeaterEngine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22

High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . 10-73Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 9-8Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15

IIgnition Positions . . . . . . . . 9-17, 9-18Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26Infants and Young Children,Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47

Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1


INDEX i-7

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Instrument PanelStorage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

JJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-106

KKey and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-37Keyless EntryRemote (RKE) System . . . 2-5, 2-7

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-66Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39LampsDaytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-3Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lamps OffReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Lamps (cont.)Exterior Lighting BatterySaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

License Plate . . . . . . . . 10-38, 10-39Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-19On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24LATCH SystemReplacing Parts After aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-59

Latch, Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-53

LiftgateCarbon Monoxide . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21

Lighter, Cigarette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9LightingAdaptive Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

LightsAirbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23

Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-22Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Engine CoolantTemperature Warning . . . . . . .5-24

Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-25Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-16Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . .5-24

Up-Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . 9-40


i-8 INDEX

LocksAutomatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17Central Door UnlockingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17

Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14, 2-15Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSYSTEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53

Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

MMagnetic Ride Control . . . . . . . . . 9-40MaintenanceRecords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-11

Maintenance ScheduleRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7

Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-2

Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-19Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 9-31Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15

Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9MessagesAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . .5-43Battery Voltage andCharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31

Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-35Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39Object Detection System . . . . .5-40Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-40Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45

Messages (cont.)Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46

MirrorsAutomatic DimmingRearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29

Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28

Monitor System, TirePressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74

MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17

NNavigationVehicle Data Recordingand Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18

NetCargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-16


INDEX i-9

OObject Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40

Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13

Off-RoadRecovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

OilEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-14Engine Oil PressureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15

Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25

Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-44Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-6OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25Operation, InfotainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

OutletsPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Overheated EngineProtectionOperating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

PParade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6ParkShifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24

Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24Assist, Ultrasonic . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34, 9-35Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-33

Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-25Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Passenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-37Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements, California . . . . . 10-3

PersonalizationVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-37

PowerDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-22Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30

Pregnancy, Using SafetyBelts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28


i-10 INDEX

PrivacyRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-18

ProgramCourtesy Transportation . . . . 13-10

Proposition 65 Warning,California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

RRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-18Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18

RadiosAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-21Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-16Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12

Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Rear AxleLimited-Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40

Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 9-44Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . 5-6

Rearview MirrorsAutomatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-29

Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7

Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48RecordsMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-11

Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-111

Reimbursement Program,GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Remote KeylessEntry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4, 2-5, 2-7

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39Replacement PartsAirbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-44Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-44Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts After aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-15General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15

RestraintsWhere to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-51

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22

Ride Control SystemsLimited Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . .9-40Magnetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40

RoadsDriving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Roadside Service . . . . . . . . 13-7, 13-9RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33, 2-34

Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-4Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26


INDEX i-11

SSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16Replacing After a Crash . . . . . .3-29Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-28

Safety Defects ReportingCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-15General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15

Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-28Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . 11-2Scheduling Appointments . . . . . 13-10Sealant Kit, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89SeatsAdjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Easy Entry Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Heated and VentilatedFront . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12

Seats (cont.)Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-7Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-5Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Securing ChildRestraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59, 3-61

SecurityLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25

ServiceAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-4Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-11Maintenance, GeneralInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1Publications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

Scheduling Appointments . . . 13-10Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43

Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41

Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck, AutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32

ShiftingInto Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24

Signals, Turn andLane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Spare TireCompact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-106

Specifications andCapacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Speed Limiter, Engine . . . . . . . . . 5-14Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . 2-12Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-31Starting the Engine . . . . . . . 1-4, 9-19Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Heated Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3


i-12 INDEX

Storage AreasCargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Cargo Management System . . . 4-3Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

Storing the TireSealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . .10-96, 10-97

Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33, 2-34Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .vSystemInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Roof Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

TTachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-6Theft-DeterrentSystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26, 2-27Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26

Thigh Support Adjustment . . . . . . 3-8Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8TiresBuying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-98Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-106Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-87Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-75Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78Low Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65

Tires (cont.)Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-74Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89

Sealant andCompressor Kit,Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-96, 10-97

Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-85

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-85When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80

Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65


INDEX i-13

TowingDriving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-53Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-58General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-52Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . 10-111Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-57, 9-58Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-111

TractionControl System (TCS) . . . . . . . .9-38Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24

Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . .9-40Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57, 9-58TransmissionAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14Fluid, Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45

Transportation Program,Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10

Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

UUltrasonic Parking Assist . . . . . . 9-43Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83

Universal Remote System . . . . . 5-54Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-57Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-54

Up-Shift Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23Using this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

VVehicleCanadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ivControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1

Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25Speed Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-111

Vehicle CareStoring the TireSealant andCompressor Kit . . . . 10-96, 10-97

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72Vehicle IdentificationService Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1

Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32

WWarningBrake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-22

Warning Lights, Gauges,and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivCautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .ivHazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . . . 5-46Washer, Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6


i-14 INDEX

WheelsAlignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-85

Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-85

When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80

Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-51Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30

WindshieldWiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-34WipersRear Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Documents

Cadillac CTS/CTS-V Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate … CTS/CTS-V Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (1,1) ... Traction Control M: Windshield Washer Fluid. Cadillac CTS/CTS-V Owner Manual